Skip to main content

Full text of "The first Hebrew book"

See other formats 


/  liJ 


PROSPECTUS 


OP   THE 


THEOLOGICAL    CRITIC, 

A  QUARTERLY  JOURNAL, 

EDITED   BY    THE   REV. 

THOMAS  KERCHEVER  ARNOLD,  M.A. 

RECTOR   OF    LYNDON, 
AND   LATE   FELLOW    OF    TRINITY    COLLEGE,   CAMBRIDGE. 


The  principal  object  1  have  in  view  in  editing  this  Journal  is 
the  furtherance  of  Biblical  Criticism  : — a  most  important  branch 
of  Theological  Literature,  which  has  been  of  late  years  all  but 
entirely  neglected  in  England. 

The  Journal  will  embrace  Theology  in  the  widest  acceptation 
of  the  term,  as  comprehending  the  Criticism  of  the  Sacred  Text, 
Ecclesij 
Religio; 
History 
Discipli 
senting  ^ 
Moralit  a 
from  its  Ijl 


•^(?<^^>9  3<^^>9S<^^«  »<^^«©^!^«®^?^«  ♦ 


9d 

lie 


<'*'>>iit;; 


will  no  © 
Work  i  % 
that 
primar 
the  coi  ^P 
unity  o--^'^ 
pages 

I 
Theolog; 
for  refu|\ 
criticisn\/ 


!01  ^ 

;es.    ^^ 

[n  u^^ 


PRINCETON.  N.   J. 

Part  of  the 
ADDISON  ALEXANDER  LIBRARY, 

which  was  presented  by 
Messrs.  R.  L.  and  A.  Stuabt. 


of 

id, 
re 
le 

d, 
of 
in 

le 


Case, 

S1uJf\ 

Booh', 


— '-- ^^Tv'  in  m  Its 

Diyiaion..  P^-^         .-|j- 

f  sound 


Christian-  e,^^Q£<s^^e£.<; 


,,,«,^les  of 

^G£<^^^o  e<$^i>w£s^^ja.^onsible 
Editor  of  the  Work,  I  give  a  pledge  that  I  shall  not  willingly  and 
intentionally  allow  any  article  or  statement  to  appear  in  its  pages 
in  violation  of  Christian  charity,  candour,  or  courtesy. 

T.  K.  A. 

In  8vo.     Price  As. 


RIVINGTONS,  ST.   PAUL's   CHURCH    YARD,   AND   WATERLOO    PLACE. 


;. 


w/^/<  i  Lzt^CCi^iyL^  ^-^i^^{X^t<^;U^ 


aA 


^^L-x.  CjL  L/^i^ 


^i^c: 


/ 


^//  //-tX 


THE 


FIRST   HEBREW  BOOK. 


BY    THE   REV. 

THOMAS  KEECHEYEE  AENOLD,  M.A. 

RECTOR   OF   LYNDON, 
AND   LATE    FELLOW   OF   TRINITY    COLLEGE,   CAMBRIDGE. 


LONDON: 

FRANCIS  &  JOHN  RIVINGTON, 

ST.  Paul's  church  yard,  and  Waterloo  place. 

1851. 


LONDON  : 
GILBERT   AND    RIVINGTON,   PRINTERS, 

ST.  John's  square. 


PREFACE. 


The  plan  of  the  following  Work  is  the  same  as  that 
which  I  have  pursued  in  my  other  '^  First  Books/' 
I  have  principally  followed  Gesenius ;  and  the  later 
chapters  of  the  Work,  especially  those  which  treat 
of  the  ^Irregular'  or  'Weak'  conjugations,  are  an 
abridged  translation  of  that  author's  Grammar. 
These  portions  contain  more  information  than  will 
be  at  first  necessary  for  the  pupil;  indeed,  it  will 
not  be  absolutely  necessary  that  he  should  do  more 
than  commit  to  memory  the  *  Short  Paradigm '  pre- 
fixed to  each  chapter,  and  the  accompanying  Table 
of  '  Normal  Forms/  before  he  proceeds  to  translate 
the  Exercise,  with  which  the  chapter  concludes. 
When  he  meets  with  any  variation  from  the  forms 
he  has  committed  to  memory,  he  must  refer  to  the 
fuller  account  of  the  conjugation  that  follows  the 
Paradigm. 

Through  a  considerable  portion  of  the  Work  the 
Hebrew  Exercises  are  printed  both  in  Hebrew  and 
English  characters;    for  I   am   convinced  that  the 

a2 


IV  PREFACE. 

difficulty  of  learning  to  read  with  correctness  and 
fluency  the  first  oriental  language  that  a  person 
attacks,  is  very  far  greater  than  the  editors  of  our 
elementary  Hebrew  works  would  appear  to  suppose. 
Wishing,  therefore,  to  tempt  many  persons  to  teach 
themselves  the  language  in  which  the  Scriptures  of 
the  Old  Testament  were  composed,  I  have  felt  it 
necessary  to  smooth  the  path  to  the  accomplishment 
of  the  first  and  most  irksome  portion  of  the  labour. 

T.  K.  A. 

Lyndon,  May  5,  1851. 


LIST  OF  CONTRACTIONS. 

G.  =  Gesenius. 
E.  =  Ewald. 
L.  =  Lee. 


ERRATA. 


Page    23,  ']6a,for  English  read  Hebrew. 

—  35,  103, /or  affirmatives  read  afforraatives. 

105,  last  line,  for  prefixes  read  suffixes. 

—  107.     In  308, /or  to  be  pure,  for  n2|7  kanah,  read  rr;?:  nakali. 

—  1 84,  6  9,  for  treasures  read  treasuries. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Introduction         .        .    , vii 

CHAP. 

I.  Reading  and  Orthography 2 

§  1.  The  Letters ib. 

2.  Division  of  the  Consonants           ....  3 

3.  Long  Vowels.     Quiescent  Letters.     Syllables     .  5 

4.  Begadchephath  Letters.    Dagesh,    Short  Vowels  8 

13 
14 

16 
17 


5.  Sh'va 

6.  The  Semi-vowels 

7.  On  Syllables 

8.  On  distinguishing  Kamets  Khatuph  from  Karaets 
and  Long  Khirek  fi'om  Short  Khirek 

9.  Further  Remai'ks  on  the  Vowels.     Diphthongs 
10,  On  Verbal  Roots,  and  on  the  Derivation  of  Nouns       20 


11.  On  the  Derivation  of  Nouns 

12.  The  Accents 


II.       §  1.  The  definite  Article 

2.  The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  Kal 

III.  §1.  Gender  of  Substantives.     Adjectives 

2.  Formation  of  the  Plural      .... 

3.  Participles  of  Kal  with  their  feminine  and  plural 

forms       ....... 

4.  The  Dual  Number 

5.  The  Construct  State  (Status  constructus)    . 

IV.  §  1.  Suffixes  denoting  Possession 

2.  Prepositions  denoting  the  Relations  of  Case 

3.  Other  prepositional  Prefixes.    Vav 


24 

27 

33 
34 

38 
41 

46 
48 
60 

53 
60 
65 


Modes  of  expressing  the  Comparative  and  Superlative  .      67 
A3 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


CHAP. 

VI. 


VII. 


PAGE 

§  1.  Numerals.     1.  The  ten  first  Cardinal  Numbers  .       69 
2.  The  Cardinals  continued.     Ordinals    . 


The  Pronouns        

§  1.  Personal  Pronouns     .... 

2.  Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns 

monstrative  Pronouns 

3.  Relative  Pi'onoun        .... 


VIIT.  The  Regular  Verb 


Derivation  of  Verbs.     The  Conjugations 
On  the  ground-form  (or  Conjugation)  Kal 

Niphal 

Piel  and  (its  passive)  Pual 
Hiphil  and  (its  passive)  Hophal 
Hithpael     ...... 


IX.  Verbs  with  Gutturals     . 

§  1.  Verbs  with  Pe  guttural 

2.  Verbs  Ayin  Guttural  . 

3.  Verbs  Lamed  Guttural 

X.  Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops  . 


XL 


§1. 
2. 

3. 
4. 
5. 


quies 


Verbs  Double  Ayin    .... 

Verbs  Pe  Nun 

Verbs  Pe  Aleph.     Feeble  Verbs  (Verba 

centia)     ...... 

Verbs  Pe  Yod.     First  Class,  or  Verbs  originally 

Pe  Vav 

Verbs  Pe  Yod  (continued).     Second  Class,  or 

Verbs  properly  Pe  Yod  . 

6.  Verbs  Ayin  Vav  .... 

7.  Verbs  Ayin  Yod  .... 

8.  Verbs  Lamed  Aleph  .... 

9.  Verbs  Lamed  He        .... 


XII.  Suffixes  of  the  Verb 

Differences  of  Idiom,  &c 

Index  I.  Hebrew  and  English 
II.  English  and  Hebrew 

Appendix  A.  Table  of  Declensions 

„         B.  Table  of  Irregular  Nouns 

„         C.  Shorter  Paradigms  of  the  Regular  Verb 

„         D.  General  Paradigms  of  the  Regular  Verb 

„         E.  Paradigms  of  the  Irregular  Verbs 


De 


INTRODUCTION. 

(A  bridged  from  Gesenius, ) 


§  1.    Of  the  Semitic  Languages  in  general. 

The  Hebrew  tongue  is  one  member  of  a  large  family 
of  languages,  which  was  native  in  Palestine,  Phoenicia, 
Syria,  Mesopotamia,  Babylonia,  and  Arabia.  This 
family  spread  itself  in  early  antiquity  from  Arabia 
over  .'Ethiopia,  and  by  means  of  Phoenician  colonies, 
over  many  islands  and  shores  of  the  Mediterranean, 
but  especially  over  the  whole  Carthaginian  coast. 

For  want  of  a  name,  sanctioned  by  long  usage, 
for  the  nations  and  languages  united  in  this  family, 
the  term  Shemites,  Semitic  languages  (most  of  the 
nations  using  these  tongues  being  descended  from 
Shem)  is  generally  received  at  present. 

The  Semitic  languages  may  be  divided  into  three 
principal  divisions :  a)  The  Arabic,  to  which  the 
jEthiopic  belongs  as  a  branch  of  the  southern  Arabic 
(Himyaritic).  b)  The  Aramcean  in  the  north  and 
north-east.  It  is  called  Syriac,  as  it  appears  in  the 
Christian  Aramaean  literature,  but  Chaldee,  as  it 
exists  in  the  Aramaean  writings  of  Jews.  To  this 
division  belong  some  later  portions  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament, viz.,  Ezra  iv.  8 — vi.  18  and  vii.  12 — 26; 
Dan.  ii.  4 — vii.  28.  To  the  Chaldee  is  closely  allied 
the  Samaritan,  both  exhibiting  a  frequent  admixture 


via  INTRODUCTIOX. 

of  Hebrew  forms.  The  Aramaean  of  the  Natsorceans 
(John's  disciples,  Sabii  *)  is  a  very  degenerate  dialect, 
but  the  vernacular  Syriac  of  the  present  day  is  still 
more  corrupt,  c)  The  Hebrew,  with  which  the  Ca- 
naanitish  and  Phoenician  (Punic)  stands  in  close  con- 
nexion. 

These  languages  are  now  either  wholly  extinct,  as 
the  Phoenician,  or  exist  only  in  a  degenerate  form, 
as  the  Aramaean  among  the  Syrian  Christians  in 
Mesopotamia  and  Kurdistan,  the  ^thiopic  in  the 
newer  Abyssinian  dialects  (Tigre,  Amharic),  and  also 
the  Hebrew  among  a  portion  of  the  Jews  (although 
these  in  their  writings  especially  study  the  repro- 
duction of  the  Old  Testament  language).  The  Arabic 
is  the  only  one  that  has  not  only  kept  to  this  day  its 
original  abode,  Arabia  Proper,  but  also  spread  itself 
on  all  sides  into  the  districts  of  other  tongues. 

The  Semitic  family  of  languages  was  bordered  on 
the  east  and  north  by  another  still  more  widely  ex- 
tended, which  spread  itself  under  most  diverse  forms, 
from  India  to  the  west  of  Europe,  and  which  is 
called  the  Indo- Germanic,  as  embracing  the  Indian 
(Sanskrit),  ancient  and  modern  Persian,  Greek,  Latin, 
Slavic,  and  Gothic,  together  with  the  other  German 
languages.  In  very  early  times,  the  Semitic  came  into 
contact,  in  various  ways,  with  the  ancient  Egyptian, 
from  which  the  Coptic  is  derived.  Both  have  ac- 
cordingly much  in  common,  but  the  relation  between 
them  is  not  yet  accurately  defined.  The  Chinese,  the 
Japanese,  the  Tartar,  and  other  languages  have  a 
fundamentally  different  character. 

The  grammatical  structure  of  the  Semitic  languages 
has  many  peculiarities,  which,  taken  together,  con- 
stitute its  special  character,  although  many  of  them 
are  found  by  themselves  in  other  tongues.  These 
peculiarities  are :  a)  Among  the  consonants  (which 
always  form  the  body  of  these  languages)  are  many 

♦  So  called  from  )^y^  as  being  ^aTrTiaral. 


INTRODUCTION.  IX 

gutturals  of  several  grades  ;  the  vowels,  having  their 
origin  in  the  three  primary  sounds  {a,  i,  u),  subserve 
more  subordinate  distinctions,  b)  Most  of  the  ra- 
dical words  consist  of  t/u^ee  consonants,  c)  The  verb 
has  only  tvjo  tenses,  but  great  regularity  and  analogy 
prevail  in  the  formation  of  verbals,  d)  The  noun 
has  only  two  genders  and  a  more  simple  indication  of 
case,  e)  In  the  pronoun  all  oblique  cases  are  in- 
dicated by  appended  forms  [sufficed),  f)  Scarcely 
any  compounds  appear  in  verbs  or  nouns  (except 
proper  names),  g)  In  the  syntax  is  found  a  simple 
combination  of  sentences,  without  much  artificial 
subordination  of  members. 

As  to  the  words  themselves,  the  Semitic  tongues 
vary  essentially  from  the  Indo- Germanic ;  yet  they 
appear  to  have  more  in  common  here  than  in  the 
grammar.  A  great  number  of  stems  and  roots  re- 
semble in  sound  those  of  the  Indo-Germanic  class. 
But  if  we  exclude  terms  that  were  obviously  borrowed, 
we  shall  reduce  the  actual  similarity,  partly  to  words 
which  imitate  sounds  [onomatopoeticci),  and  partly  to 
those  in  which  the  same  or  similar  sense  follows 
from  the  nature  of  the  same  sound,  according  to  a 
universal  law  of  human  speech.  Neither  of  which  can 
establish  a  historical  affinity,  which  cannot  be  proved 
without  agreement  also  in  grammatical  structure. 

The  Semitic  writing  had  from  the  beginning  this 
striking  imperfection,  that  only  the  consonants  (on 
which  the  meaning  of  the  word  always  depends) 
were  given  in  the  line  as  real  letters.  Of  the  vowels 
only  the  longer  ones,  and  even  these  not  always, 
were  represented  by  certain  consonants  used  as 
vowel-letters.-  It  was  not  till  a  later  period,  that  all 
the  vowels  were  indicated  by  means  of  small  signs 
attached  to  the  letters  (points  or  strokes  above  and 
below  the  line),  but  which  were  wholly  omitted  for 
more  practised  readers.  These  languages  are  written 
always  from  right  to  left.  The  ^thiopic  is  the  only 
exception,  but  its  deviation  from  the  Semitic  usage 


X  INTRODUCTION. 

was  probably  introduced  by  the  first  missionaries 
who  introduced  Christianity  into  that  country.  How- 
ever dissimilar  the  Semitic  written  characters  may 
now  appear,  they  have  undoubtedly  all  come,  by 
various  modifications,  from  one  and  the  same  original 
alphabet  (of  which  the  truest  copy  now  extant  is  the 
Phoenician),  from  which  also  the  ancient  Greek,  and 
through  it  all  other  European,  characters  were  de- 
rived. 

In  regard  to  the  relative  age  of  these  languages, 
the  oldest  written  works  are  found  in  Hebrew ;  the 
Aramman  begins  about  the  time  of  Cyrus  (in  the 
book  of  Ezra) ;  the  Arabic  not  till  the  earliest  cen- 
turies after  Christ  (Himyaritic  inscriptions)  ;  the 
^thiopic  version  of  the  Bible  in  the  fourth  century; 
and  the  northern  Arabic  literature  since  the  sixth 
century.  But  the  Arabic  was  the  longest  to  maintain 
the  natural  fulness  of  its  form,  being  preserved  quiet 
and  undisturbed  among  the  secluded  tribes  of  the 
desert,  till  the  Mahomedan  revolutions,  when  it  suf- 
fered considerable  decay. 


§  2.    History  of  the  Hebrew  as  a  Living  Language. 

This  language  was  the  mother  tongue  of  the  He- 
brew or  Israelitish  people,  during  the  period  of  their 
independence.  The  name,  Hebreiv  language^,  does 
not  occur  in  the  Old  Testament,  and  appears  rather 
to  have  been  the  name  in  use  among  those  who  were 
not  Israelites.  It  is  called  by  Isaiah  language  of 
Canaan  (from  the  country  in  which  it  was  spoken). 
In  2  Kings  xviii.  26  (comp.  Is.  xxxvi.  11,  13),  Neh. 
xiii.  24,  and  elsewhere,  persons  are  said  to  speak 
Jnn^n^  {Judaice),  in  the  Jews^  language,  in  accordance 

with  the  later  usage  which  arose  after  the  removal  of 

*  Jin^ll^  li^'?,  yXwo-cra  rwv  'EjSpat'wj/,  e(3pdi(JTi. 


INTRODUCTION.  XI 

the  ten  tribes,  when  the  name  Jew  was  extended  to 
the  whole  nation. 

In  the  writings  of  the  New  Testament,  the  term 
Hebrew  (tf^pdicrri,  ifdpaig  ^idXeKTog)  was  also  applied 
to  what  was  then  the  vernacular  language  of  Palestine, 
in  distinction  from  the  Greek. 

In  the  oldest  written  monuments  of  this  language, 
contained  in  the  Pentateuch,  we  find  it  in  nearly  the 
same  form  in  which  it  appears  down  to  the  Baby- 
lonish exile,  and  even  later;  and  we  have  no  his- 
torical documents  of  an  earlier  date,  by  which  we 
can  investigate  its  origin  and  formation. 

The  remains  of  this  language,  which  are  extant  in 
the  Old  Testament,  enable  us  to  distinguish  but  two 
periods  in  its  history.  The  first,  which  may  be  called 
its  golden  age,  extends  to  the  close  of  the  Babylonian 
exile,  at  which  epoch  the  second,  or  silver  age,  com- 
mences. 

Although  the  different  writers  and  books  have 
certainly  their  peculiarities,  yet  we  discover  in  them 
no  such  diversities  of  style,  as  will  materially  aid  us 
in  tracing  the  history  of  the  language  during  this 
period.  But  the  language  of  poetry  is  every  where 
distinguished  from  prose,  not  only  by  a  rhythm  con- 
sisting in  measured  parallel  members,  but  also  by 
peculiar  words,  forms,  and  significations  of  words, 
and  constructions  in  syntax  ;  although  this  distinction 
is  not  so  strongly  marked  as  it  is,  for  example,  in 
Greek.  Of  these  poetical  idioms,  however,  the 
greater  part  occur  in  the  kindred  languages,  es- 
pecially the  iVramaean,  as  the  common  forms  of  ex- 
pression, and  are,  probably,  to  be  historically  regarded 
partly  as  archaisms^  which  were  retained  in  poetry, 
and  partly  as  enrichments,  which  the  poets  who 
knew  Aramaean  transferred  into  the  Hebrew.  The 
prophets,  moreover,  in  respect  to  language  and 
rhythm,  are  to  be  regarded  generally  as  poets,  except 
that  in  their  poetical  discourses  the  sentences  run 
on   to   greater   length,   and   the  parallelism  is  less 


XU  INTRODUCTION. 

measured  and  regular,  than  in  the  writings  of  those 
who  are  properly  styled  poets.  The  writings  of  the 
later  prophets  exhibit  less  and  less  of  this  poetic  cha- 
racter, until  their  style  scarcely  differs  from  prose. 

The  second  or  silver  age  of  the  Hebrew  language 
and  literature,  extending  from  the  return  of  the  Jews 
from  the  exile  to  the  time  of  the  Maccabees,  about 
160  years  before  Christ,  is  chiefly  distinguished  by 
an  approximation  to  the  Aramaean  or  Chaldee  dialect. 
To  the  use  of  this  dialect,  so  nearly  related  to  the 
Hebrew,  the  Jews  easily  accustomed  themselves 
while  in  Babylonia ;  and  after  their  return  it  became 
the  popular  language,  exerting  a  constantly  increasing 
influence  on  the  ancient  Hebrew  as  the  language  of 
books,  in  prose  as  well  as  poetry,  and  at  last  banish- 
ing it  from  the  mouth  of  the  people.  Yet  the  Hebrew 
continued  to  be  known  and  written  by  learned  Jews. 

The  writings  of  the  Old  Testament,  which  belong 
to  this  second  period^  and  in  all  of  which  this  Chaldee 
colouring  appears,  though  in  different  degrees,  are 
the  following,  viz.^  1  and  2  Chronicles,  Ezra,  Ne- 
hemiah,  Esther,  Haggai  *,  Zechariah,  Malachi, 
Daniel ;  of  the  poetical  writings,  Ecclesiastes,  and 
the  later  Psalms.  These  books  are  also,  as  literary 
works,  decidedly  inferior  to  those  of  an  earlier  date ; 
though  this  period  is  not  wanting  in  compositions, 
which,  in  purity  of  language  and  poetic  merit, 
scarcely  yield  to  the  productions  of  the  golden  age  : 
e.  g.  several  of  the  later  Psalms  (cxx.  &c.,  cxxxvii., 
cxxxix.). 

*  Gesenius  (who  has  been  sufficiently  answered  by  Hdvernick) 
includes  the  prophet  Jonah. 


FIRST     HEBREW 
BOOK. 


B 


Chap.  T.     Reading  and  Orthography,     §  1.     The  Letters, 

1.   The   Hebrew  Alphabet  consists  of  twenty-four 

consonants. 


Nume- 
rical 
value. 


Original  signification  of 

the  names  (according 

to  Gesenius). 

Ox 

House 

Camel 

Door 

Window 

Hook 

Weapon 

Fence 

Snake 

Hand 

The  hand  bent 

Ox-goad 

Water 

Fish 

Prop 

Eye 

Mouth 

Fish-hook 

Back  of  the  head 

Head 

Tooth 

Cross 


a)  Observe  that  Shin  and  Sin  are  distinguished  by  the  posi- 
tion of  the  distinctive  point  above  them. 

b)  To  distinguish  Samech  from  Sin,  in  Roman  characters,  it 
will  be  represented  by  an  Italic  s  amongst  Roman  letters,  and  by 
a  Roman  s  amongst  Italics :  so  Teth  will  be  t  in  Romans,  t 
in  Italics. 


D«.- 

Sounded 

Repre- 

Hebrew 

toriu. 

as 

sented  by 

name. 

il 
as 

1st 

K 

A'leph 

(mostly 
omitted) 

^k 

of 
-d) 

n 

Beth 

b  (bh) 

m 

:i 

Gl'mel 

gfeli) 

'PDS 

n 

Daleth 

d  (dh) 

•«•     T 

n 

He 

h 

^•7 

1 

Vdv 

V 

11 

T 

T 

Zayin 

z 

l"! 

n 

Kheth 

kh 

m 

D 

Teth 

t 

JT'Z? 

i 

Yod 

y 

TV 

D 

Caph 

c  (ch) 

c]5 

h 

Lamed 

1 

^ii 

D 

Mem 

m 

DD 

3 

Nun 

n 

p'ii 

D 

Samech 

s 

"^?? 

V 

A'yin 

V 

l'^ 

£) 

Pe 

P(ph) 

^3 

V 

Tsdde' 

ts 

'1? 

P 

Koph 

.k 

cjip 

n 

Resh 

r 

^^1. 

tl}] 

Shin  ^ 

sh  1 

V^] 

b] 

Sin    j 

s     1 

]''V\ 

n 

Tdv 

t  (th) 

1r) 

T 

Reading  and  Orthography,  3 

The  Hebrew  characters  were  originally  representations  of  the  2 
objects   which   their  names  denote,  as  set  down  in  the  sixth 
column. 

The  names  and  order  of  the  letters  should  be  learnt  by  heart,  3 
since  these  must  be  perfectly  known,  before  a  Hebrew  Lexicon 
can  be  used  with  facility.     They  may  be  arranged  in  triplets, 
thus : — 


A'leph 

Beth 

Gi'mel 

hi 

n 

:i 

Daleth 

He 

Vav 

?. 

n 

T 

Za'yin 

Kheth 

Teth 

r 

n 

D 

Y6d 

Caph 

Lamed 

1 

2 

b 

Mem 

Nun 

/Sa'mech 

D 

:: 

D 

A'yin 

Pe 

Tsade 

V 

3 

)i 

Koph 

Resh 

Shin;  Sin 

P 

"1 

^      V 

Tav 

n 

Chap.  I.  §  2.  Division  of  the  Consonatits, 

1)  Gutturals,   A'leph,  He,   Kheth,  A'yin.  4 

i^       :■]        n        y 

2)  Palatals,       Gi'mel,  Yod,  Caph,  Koph. 

•  :i  "»        D         p 

3)  Linguals,     Daleth,  Teth,  Tdv. 

4)  Sibilants,     Za'yin,  Sd'mech,  Tsade,   Shin,  Sin. 

T  D  :i      -t      ):; 

5)  Labials,        Beth,  Vdv,  Mem,  Pe. 

n         1         D        9 

The   liquids  may    also  be  considered   a   separate  5 
class.     They  are, — 

La'med,     Mem,     Nun,     Resh. 

^  D  i  1  . 

a)  ^^  is  the  lightest  of  the  gutturals,  a  scarcely  6 

B  2 


4  Reading  and  Orthography,  [ch.  i. 

(6)  audible  breathing  from  the  lungs,  [b)  ^  is  nearly  re- 
lated to  it,  and  is  "  a  sound  peculiar  to  the  organs 
of  the  Semitic  race'^  (G).  It  had  sometimes  a  com- 
paratively hard  sound,  which  the  Greek  interpreters 
expressed  by  y  (in  Gomorrha,  &c.)  :  in  other  words 
it  was  a  gentle  breathing,  not  expressed  in  other 
languages  (Eli,  Amalek^).  It  is  now  usual  to  pass 
it  over  in  reading  the  language,  and  often  in  writing 
it  in  Roman  characters.  The  Portuguese  Jews  pro- 
nounce it  as  gn  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  as  ng 
at  the  end  of  one. 

c)  Resh  (1)  was  pronounced  with  a  hoarse  gut- 
tural sound,  and  partakes  of  the  peculiarities  that, 
as  we  shall  see,  belong  to  the  gutturals. 
7      The  consonants  are  also  divided  into, — 

a)  Servile  letters. 

b)  Radical  letters. 

Servile  letters  are  those  which  are  used  in  the 
grammatical  inflexions,  and  in  the  syllables  that  mark 
derivative  words.  Servile  letters  are,  however,  some- 
times radical ;  though  radical  ones  are  never  servile. 

The  servile  letters  are  contained  in  the  memorial 
words  Mosheh,  Eythan,  Vecalebh  (Moses,  Ethan, 
and  Caleb,  n^^i  ]Jl^^^  Ht^/O)- 

Exercise  1. 

a)  Write  down,  in  English  letters,  the  names  of 
the  following  consonants. 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1. 

V 

*) 

b 

'V 

-1 

K 

2. 

: 

D 

y 

1 

-T 

•» 

3. 

D 

n 

:) 

■7 

> 

1 

4. 

V 

3 

:i 

10 

^ 

V 

5. 

n 

n 

: 

P 

1 

b 

6. 

t 

K 

r 

12 

1 

:i 

*  'HXt,  y^^.      'AnaXU,  p7Q^.    Ewald  indicates  its  presence 

by  the  aspirated  breathing  ('),  but  says  that  its  sound  maybe 
best  represented  by  gh :  and  in  his  Alphabet  he  prints  G^ain. 


§  3.]  Long  Vowels,  5 

b)  Write  down  the  Hebrew  letters  corresponding  (7) 
to, 

12  3  4 

1.  y  kh  h  z 

2.  17*  a  5  k  V 

3.  g  ;i[  n  J  d  ts 

4.  r  -^  c  J)  m  ..  b  „. 

Chap.  I.  §  3.     Long  Voivels.     Quiescent  Letters. 
Syllables, 

As  long  as  the  Hebrew  was  a  spoken  language,  8 
no  vowels  were  written,  except  so  far  as  ")  *>  ^i  were 
vowel  letters.  (See  the  Introduction.)  The  vowels, 
as  now  found  in  Hebrew  Bibles  *,  are  marks  placed 
sometimes  above  the  consonants,  but  more  commonly 
below  them.  In  the  case  of  u  (1)  the  mark  is  inserted 
in  the  middle  of  one  of  them  [Vav). 

Hebrew  words   are   written,  and    must   be   read,  9 
from  right  to  left ;  not,  as  with  us,  from  left  to  right. 

Long  Vowels.']     1)  Long  a  and  e  are  denoted  re-  10 
spectively  by  the  marks  t  and  •• ,  placed  under  the 
consonant  after  which  they  are  to  be  sounded. 


b 

T 

T 

T 

b 

9 

5 

Id 

md 

nd 

le 

me 

ne 

a)  Long  a  is  the  true  guttural  a  sound,  as  in  father. 
h)  Long  e  is  the  sound  oFa  mfate,  or  e  in  there.  . 

2)  Long  i  (that  is,  the  Enghsh  e  in  me)  is  a  dot  11 
written  under  the  consonant  after  which  it  is  to  be 
sounded,  and  followed  generally  by   Yod,   which  is 
then  said  to  be  quiescent,  that  is,  not  sounded. 

U        mi       ni  (the  i  pronounced  like  e  in  me.) 

*  See  the  Introduction. 
B  3 


6  Reading  and  Orthography,  [ch.  i. 

12  3)  Long  0  is  a  dot  usually  placed  over  Vav,  which 
is  then  quiescent  (11). 

IS  mo  no 

13  4)  Long  u  (like  oo  in  tool)  is  a  dot  placed  in  Vav, 
which  is  then  quiescent, 

^b  -ID  J): 

M  mu  nu 

14  Long  i  and  o  are  sometimes  found  without  the 
Yod  and  Vav.  They  are  then  said  to  be  written 
defectively.  When  long  o  is  written  defectively,  it  is 
indicated  by  a  dot  placed  over  the  left  extremity  of 
its  consonant  (or  a  little  in  advance  of  it  to  the  left) ; 

as  y,  S,  h.  1,  i  h,  *'?.— i  =  o,  \=zvo*.—A  defectively 
written  u  is  identical  in  form  with  u  {~)  f.     See  26. 

15  Every  syllable  (with  the  exception  of  1,  u,  —  and) 
begins  with  a  consonant ;  for  the  consonant  Aleph  (an 
unaspirated  guttural  breathing  [6])  was  pronounced 
before  an  initial  a,  e^  i,  o,  or  u:  that  is  to  say, 
every  word  that,  if  written  in  Roman  letters,  would 
begin  with  a  vowel,  begins  in  Hebrew  with  the  con- 
sonant ^ZejoA ;  which,  however,  does  not  affect  the 

16  pronunciation  in  any  way  that  our  organs  can  make 
perceptible. 

J^  K  ''K  iK  *)N 

T  ••  • 

-  -  A  A  A 

a  e  1  o  u 

17  The  distinctive  point  of  Shin  (1,  a)  may  serve  also 
for  the  defectively  ivritten  o  of  the  preceding  conso- 
nant (14)  :  nti^D  mb-sheh, 

18  So  the  distinctive  point  of  Sin  is  allowed  to  note  a 

*  ^  may  1)  =  or,  the  dot  representing  a  preceding  Kholem 
(14,  19).  , 

np  {lo-veh). 

2)  =  vo,  p^  Oia-vbn), 

3)  =  0,  I'l:  {nod). 

•\   \  was  probably  written,  whenever  the  old  language  did  not 
employ  *)  to  express  u.    (E.) 


§  3.]  Long  Vowels,  7 

defectively  written  b,  to  be  pronounced  after  the  Bin :  (is) 
i^^V   so-ne, 

a)  We  have  seen  (11  sqq.)  that  Vav  is  quiescent^ 
after  long  o  and  u :  and  Yod  after  long  i. 

b)  Yod  ( *• )  is  also  quiescent  after  long  e  ( •• ). 

c)  Aleph  (^^ )  is  quiescent  after  any  long  vowel. 

T  ... 

SO  hi  tse  hu 

In  writing  Hebrew  words  in  Roman  characters,  i,  6,  A  will 
be  used  for  long  i,  o,  u,  written  fully :  i,  5,  u  for  the  same 
long  vowels  written  defectively  (14):  e  will  be  written  for  *'— 

(that  is,  for  e  followed  by  *>) ;  a  for  J^—  (that  is,  for  a  followed 

by  jf^).     On  the  defective  writing  of  i,  o,  u,  see  14.  ■/. 

The  names  of  the  long  vowels  [See  note  on  65]  are, —  19 

Long  a,  Kamets  (t).  Long?,  Khi'rek    (  t). 

Long  e,  Tse're      (..).  Long  o,  Kho'lem  0). 

Long  Uy  Shu'rek  (?) ). 

fl)  Observe  that  the  vowel  it  stands  for,  occurs  in  the  first 
syllable  of  each  name. 

h)  The  quiescent  letters  (i.  e.  those  letters  which  are  sometimes 
quiescent)  are  contained  in  the  memorial  word  Ehevi  CIIIK). 

a)  A  simple  (or  open)  syllable  ends  in  a  vowel  or  20 
quiescent  consonant. 

b)  A  compound  (or  closed)  syllable  ends  in  a  con- 
sonant. 

Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 
Open  Monosyllables.'] 


:i  3         12         i^^  1     1     1  15.       2  ra.       3  tsa. 

T  T 

Closed  Monosyllables.'] 


21 


rb  3     ut  2 

/^^^  1 

1  eth.      2  shem. 

3  h6t. 

15  6        DV  5 

^r^V  4 

4  i>6r.     5  yom. 

6  chen. 

m^b  9         p^  8 

V^^ 

7  i^ets.     8  lun. 

9  lu^. 

12     ^b  11 

DiD  10 

10  mo^.     11  sol. 

12  tsin. 

*  It  would  be  more  correct  to  say,  that  the  vowel-sign  (or 
point)  indicates  that  the  following  Yod  or  Vav  is  a  vowel-letter, 
not  a  consonant. 


8  Reading  and  Orthography, 

(21)      Dissyllables.'] 


[CH.  1. 


]V^  2 

TT 

1  sha-nah. 

2  tsa-yon. 

Nnp^4 

Q'^P,  3 

3  ka-mim. 

4  kara. 

T 

XT 

5  Sa-rah. 

6  yo-nah. 

DipQ  8 

TT 

7  va-ra^. 

8  ma-kom. 

TT 

T4!?  9 

9  me-i^ets. 

10  ha-yah. 

PD  12 

"•b^ip  11 

11  ko-li. 

12  ma-gen. 

Exercise  2. 

22      «)  Write  in  English  characters  (with  the  dissyl- 
lables divided  into  syllables) — 

'"b  7        ••)^  6       -lilii  5        ^  4        1^::  3         p  2         y  I 

p  14      •'IS     1  12    it  11     Si:)  10    Dp  9    ro  8 

")V^  20      Sip  19      p^  18      -yi^  \7      p  16       ly  15 

S^^  26     ni^  25     Di^  24     tk  23    -)?):i  22    ^21 
dhS  31      trDn  30      ]i^n  29      DH  28    S^:^i^  27 

D^Sl^  35         Hi^iJ  34         'nVD  33  .      TJ  32 

T  T  T  T  • 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  characters — 

1  ts6.         2  tsi.         3  tsu.         4  tsa.  5  tse.         6  tsa. 
7  5a-nah.               8  sar.              9  i^ets.  10  i)a-ts^m. 

11  tse-dah.  12  tsa-rah.  13  ra-tsuts. 


Chap.  I.   §  4. 


Begadchephath  Letters.     Dagesh, 
Short  Vowels. 


23  The  six  mutes,  Beth,  Gimel,  Daleth,  Caph,  Pe, 
Tav,  were  originally  pronounced  with  a  hard  (or 
slender)  sound  (as  b,  g,  d,  c  hard,  p,  t) ;  but  they 
had  also  a  tendency  to  receive  a  softer  and  slightly 
aspirated  pronunciation  (as  bh  [=:  v],  gh,  dh,  ch, ph 
[  =  /],  th).  To  mark  the  harder  pronunciation,  a  dot, 
called  Dagesh^  is  placed  in  the  letter;  as,  3»  i),  "7, 
3>  D.  /I.  This  mark  is  usually  found  in  these  letters 
at  the  beginning  of  words  and  syllables,  when  there 
is  no  vowel  immediately  preceding. 


§  4.]  Short  Voivels,  9 

The  letters  which  receive  this  Dagesh  are  contained  in  the  (23) 
technical  memorial  word  Begadchephath.  The  aspiration  can  ; 
hardly  be  made  perceptible  by  English  organs  in  d  and  g.  In 
England,  2  {bh)  is  usually  pronounced  v  :  the  Spanish  Jews, 
however  (and  so  Ewald  and  Hurwitz),  pronounce  it  b.  I  shall 
print  g,  d  for  ^,  ^7,  except  when  the  Hebrew  equivalents  of 
Roman  letters  are  to  be  written  by  the  pupil. 

But  when  a  dot  {Dagesh)  stands  in  a  consonant  24 
that  terminates  a  syllable,  it  indicates  that  the  conso- 
nant in  which  it  is  placed  is  to  be  pronounced  double 
(and,  if  a  Begadchephath  letter,  without  aspiration) ; 
as  12l1  dib-ber. 

The  Dagesh  that  hardens  the  pronunciation  of  an  25 
initial  begadchephath  letter  (23)  is  called  light  Dagesh: 
that   which   doubles   a    consonant,   hard    or    strong  i 
Dagesh  [Dagesh  lene,  Dagesh  forte), 

{Short  Vowels.)  26 

The  short  vowels  are, — 
a    -    Pa'thakh. 

e    •••    Segol   (but  •••  is  sometimes  an  obtuse  a  sound,  as  e  in 
mere:  especially  in  an  accented  penult  followed  by  "  ). 

1    •    Khi'rek  Parvum. 

o    T    Ka'mets  Khatuph'. 

n   \    Kibbiits'  (but  \   is   sometimes  a  defectively  written 

Sh6rek'[l4j). 

a)  It  is  a  great  imperfection  in  the  notation  of  these  vowels, 
that  the  sign  for  Kamets  Khatuph  (o)  is  the  same  as  that  for 
Kamets  (a).  The  rules  for  distinguishing  the  two"  cannot  be 
given,  till  the  nature  of  Sh'va  has  been  explained. 


Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 
a) 


2^  3 

b2  2 

pni 

1  khiik. 

2  bal. 

3  gabh. 

DhJ  6 

1^^ 

D'i  4 

4  dam. 

5  ben. 

6  eth. 

n^9 

DR8 

]B  7 

7  pen. 

8  kum. 

9  shuph 

D>  12 

V?  ^^ 

"in*  10 

V 

10  tur. 

11  mits. 

12  yam 

27 


10 

Reading  and  Orthography,            [ch,  i. 

(27)  b) 

^bD  2 

ntn  1 

[25). 
1  ha-zeh.  2  me'-lech  (=:me-lech. 

^??  4 

^1^  ^ 

3  i^e'-rebh.         4  ne -phesh. 

V"?.^  6 

J^"].!  ^ 

5  ze'-rai>.         6  e'-rets. 

D"?.i  S 

-H!/!  7 

7  khay-yath.         8  ^e'-rem. 

niJ  10 

ijr]  9 

9  na-:^ar.         10  ne'-der. 

c) 

~  T 

(Mixed.) 
3      Y>ii  2      bb2  1 

nVa^  5      Y2t^  4 

")Lpj2  7         ^^g  6 

1  tsa-lal.      2  tsits.      3  a-sham. 
4  sha-bhats.      5  shib-bo-leth. 
6  ka^-^al.       7  kaf-^er. 

•inr^?  11 

iJibiy  10 

•8  )>ur.         9  )^tiph. 
10  :i^6-la-th6.      11  cat-to-hii. 

pin  13 

7D^  12 

12  yim-mad.         13  kha-rak. 

Exercise  3. 

a)  Write  in  English  letters — 

28  riK  7       >B  6       C]J^  5       D5  4       ^jr  3       DJ^i  2       Ht  1 

Tj!)3  13    '^st  12    rm  11    'pip  10    riNt  9     jiNt  8 
D'•^^k  19  Dm  is   y"in  i7   ••ni*^  i6   ^isar  15    an?  14 

T  '      VV  .     T  •    -  TT 

Jin3  25   pD  24   'p^n  23    Din  22   n^i^D  21   is^^  20 

-  T  '-   T  .    T  T- 

j)3r  31   DJ^  30  t^niB  29  b\>i2  28   jiDn  27  didd  26 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  letters — 

1  ten      2  pakh      3  pen      4  ben      5  pash      6  par     7  pum 

8  na-ham  9  na-ghakh  10  pe-thi  11  co-pher 

12  na-ghai^  13  5a-phadh  14  i^a-lam  15  sha-kal 

16  tse-bheth  17  giil-lah  18  mats-tsah. 

Chap.  I.  §  5.     Sh^vd. 

29  Besides  the  full  vowels  (19,  26),  the  Hebrew  has 


§  5.]  SWva.  11 

also  a  series  of  very  slight  vowel  sounds,  which  may  (29) 
be  called  half -vowels. 

The  shortest,  slightest,  and  most  indistinct  of 
these  sounds  is  the  simple  Sh^va  ( : ),  resembling  an 
obscure  half  e  (G).  A  consonant  followed  by  this 
Sh'va  is  usually  not  considered  to  constitute  a  syl- 
lable*. It  will  be  indicated  by  {')  when  the 
Hebrew  words  are  written  in  English  characters. 

This  Sh'va  is  called  vocal  (or  initial)  Sh'va,  to  dis-  30 
tinguish  it  from  silent  (or  final)  Sh'va,  which  marks 
the  close  of  a  syllable.    It  is  also  called  simple  Sh'va, 
to  distinguish  it  from  the  Khdtephs,  or  '  composite 
Sh'vas:     See  36. 

a)  The  place  of  vocal  Sh'va  is  under  the  initial  ^l 
consonant  of  a  syllable, 

b)  Sh'va  is  final — 

1 )  At  the  end  of  words,  as  i^K,  at. 

2)  When  preceded  by  a  short  vowel  not  having 
Metheg  (48),  as  Vf^'li^,  ar-mo  n'. 

3)  When  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  having  a  prin- 
cipal accent,  as  HJlW,  sho'bh'-nah. 

(But  there  are  many  exceptions  to  the  two  last  rules.) 
K^QD     m'mal-le.  (!)^P^tpJP  =-)  ^b^p^      kit-flA. 

rh^V    ko-flah.  ^bbr^f   ha-riu. 

i\blD\);^     yik-^'Mt-  b^m    ha-m'shel§. 

bbp    k'tol.  '^^bn       ma-l'che||. 

*  Gesenius  calls  a  consonant  with  Sh'va  a  half  syllable. 

t  For  •17'pn  {hal-Vlu).  X  Here  the  first  is  silent  Sh'va. 

§  The  interrogative  Jl  (which  has  Metheg)  forms  a  syllable  of 

itself. 

II  If  this  word  were  to  be  divided  thus,  mal-che,  the  caph 
would  take  the  Dagesh.  "  In  these  last  examples  the  Sh'va 
sound  is  especially  shght,  on  account  of  the  extreme  shortness  of 
the  preceding  syllable."  (G.) 


12  Reading  and  Orthography.  [ch.  i. 

32  If  a  word  ends  in  two  consonants,  each  of  them 
takes  a  silent  Sh'va,  as  "T'lJj,  nerd, 

33  A  final  "J   or  D    {dageshed)  always  takes  a  silent 
Sh'va,  as  "^"jn"?.  JJIN^- 

With  these  exceptions,  Sh'va  is  not  placed  under 
the  final  consonant  of  a  word. 


Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 


34      rob^;*  2    T-jiim  i 
bn^  4    ij^^pj  3 

nTnn  s  ^nin  r 

Tfspb  10  ni^v  9 

mii;  12  ^p^n  n 

r^Q^hi)  14  mbV  13 

"^rap  16     ^^pjl  15 

D^Db"}  18     nip  17 

n^n^ti;  20     ^n'pi^  19 

riDn  22    -Tj^b;;!  21 


I  v'ho-red.       2  yish-po^ 
3  yim-loch.     4  b'dil. 

5  bhin-^6-thi.  6  Tbha-nah. 
7  har-khebh.  8  hir-khibh. 
9  yo-l'dah.       10  cas-p'cha. 

II  khel-k'cha.  12  i?ebb-rath. 
13  i?a-bhar-ta.  14  pith-ga-ma. 
15  tsad-d'ko.  16  kin-n'nab. 
17  k'neh.       18  r*cha-5im. 

19  shiil-khan.     20  sh'lakh-nah. 
21  tim-sh5ch.      22  turn-math. 


Exercise  4. 

35      a)  Write  in  English  letters  and  divide  into  syl- 
lables the  following  Hebrew  words — 

D?3^Q        '''im         DDD^D         PP^iV        ^V? 


'?! 

ns) 

>-)?p 

]??! 

^19? 

^?^? 

ijnini! 

''^P. 

't>^ 

''DV} 

VP^ 

'^n^Dp 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  letters — 

1  mash-mi m.  2  m'sham-moth.  3  ne))-dar. 

4  niph.ga)>,  5  niph-tal.  6  p'kad-ta. 

7  yus-sad.  8  koshf.  9  hich-tabht. 


§  6.]  Semi-vowels,  13 

Chap.  I.   §  6.    The  Semi-voivels. 

A  semi-voivel,  or  composite  Sh'va,  is  formed  by  pre-  36 
fixing  a  /SA^z^a  to  one  of  the  three  short  vowels,  a, 
^,  6;. 

Hence  we  get, 

-:  •  Khateph'  Pa'thakh. 
••■:    Khateph'  Segol. 
t:    Khateph'  Ka'mets. 
These  semi-vowels  will  be  denoted  by  a,  e,  0  above  the  line 
of  letters,  when  English  characters  are  used.     A  semi-vowel  is 
sometimes  called  concisely  *  a  Khateph.' 
"l^DPf    kh^mor  (ass). 

"ibi^    *mor      {to  say). 

>7n    kh°li       (sickness), 

•    TJ 

The  composite  Sh'vas  stand  principally,  Khateph  37 
Segol  ( v: )  exclusively,  under  the  gutturals. 

Khateph  Pathakh  stands  for  a  simple  vocal  Sh'va  38 
(30),  but  without  any  fixed  law :  especially, 

a)  Under  a  letter  doubled  by  Dagesh  (for  the 
doubling  causes  a  distincter  utterance  of  the  Sh'va. 
See  39,  b), 

b)  After  a  long  vowel.  (G.) 

Khateph  Kamets  is  less  exclusively  connected  with  39 
the  gutturals,  than  the  other  two  semi-vowels. 

a)  It  stands  for  simple  vocal  Sh'va,  when  the  syl- 
lable had  an  original  0  sound,  which  is  to  be  partly 
preserved. 

b)  It  is  also  used  (as  is  also  -:)  when  a  strong 
Dagesh  has  fallen  away.  (G.) 

Examples  and  Reading  Lesson,  40 

'•^'7^  4    nrih  3 
TTn/10     ubn  9 


I  ba-i)^^a-rah.       2  he-^zin. 
3  khMhar.       4  "hah. 
5  "dh5-ni-kam.     6  *ho-den-nu. 
7  ^hi,         8  "^ra-phel. 
9  khMom.         10  kh»zir. 

II  he-^rich.       12  ha-^ri-chi. 

C 


14  Reading  and  Orthography,  [ch.  i. 

Exercise  5. 

41  a)  Write  in  English  characters — 

wrp^^  13      ni3b;  12       n\:hp\  n       ''D'pj^  10 
niij  16        D"'::im  15        nwi^  14 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  characters — 

1  md-dah.  2  niz-har.  3  hiz-i^'^ku.  4  til-mid. 

5  sir-pad.  6  ar-mon.  7  ta-kh*leph.  8  ^sher. 

Chap.  I.  §  7.   On  Syllables, 
Furtive  Pathakh.     Mappik,     Makkeph.     Metheg, 

42  The  general  rule  (20)  is,  that  every  syllable  which 
has  a  long  vowel,  is  an  open  syllable  ;  every  one  that 
has  a  short  vowel  is  a  closed  syllable  *. 

Hence  a  Sh'va  is  usually  vocal  after  a  long  vowel, 
and  final  (i.  e.  stands  as  a  mere  syllable-divider  under 
the  final  consonant  of  a  syllable)  after  a  short  vowel. 

43  But  a  tonic  accent  enables  a  short  vowel  to  stand 
in  an  open  syllable ;  a  long  vowel  in  a  closed  one.  So 
that,  when  the  syllable  is  the  tone-syllable  of  the 
word,  a  following  Sh'va  may  be  vocal  after  a  short 
vowel,  and  final  after  a  long  one. 

44  W^hen  a  final  guttural  is  H,  ^f  or  rT  (with  Mappiky 
46),  this  guttural  has  often  a  Pathakh  under  it,  called 
Furtive  Pathakh,  because  it  steals  in,  as  it  were,  before 
the  consonant  it  stands  under,  as  r^I^Q,  Md-sM-akh 

[Messiali). 

45  A  furtive  Pathakh  may  also  stand  under  one  of  the 
gutturals  just  enumerated,  when  such  guttural  is  fol- 

*  When  a  vowelless  consonant  (which,  as  such,  has  Sh'va) 
closes  a  syllable,  but  runs  on  naturally  with  i\\e  following  con- 
sonant, Ewald  calls  the  Sfi'va,  "  Sh'va  medium^"  and  the  (former) 
syllable  "a  half-closed  syllable."    Thus,  ''1T>  not  quite  3/«/-c?e/ 

not  ya-Vdej  but,  as  it  were,  yaVde. 


§  7.]  Mappik,  Mahkeph,  ^c.  15 

lowed  by  a  dageshed  consonant  with  Sh'va,  as  I[^)l^B,  (45) 

pd-sha-a^t. 

Mappik'  is  a  point  placed  in  the  middle  of  a  final  H,  46 
when  it  is  not  quiescent.  (H  will  be  represented  by  hh.) 

Makkeph  is  a  hyphen,  which  unites  words  so  closely,  47 
that  a  word  followed  by  it  loses  its  accent ;  words 
united  by  this  mark  bemg  considered  as  one  word. 

Tsere  and  Kholem  are  often  changed  by  a  following  Makkeph 
into  Segol  and  Kamets  Khatuph  respectively :  as 

bTr\^  for  b^  nv^      Df  ^^■^^  for  dts*  bb- 

TV  ••  T  T  T  T  T 

Metheg  (or  Byndle)  is  a  small  perpendicular  line  48 
( I )  to  the  left  of  a  vowel ;  it  is  used  to  show  that  the 
vowel  sound  is  to  be  extended.    Metheg  stands  (G.), 

a)  Before  a  vocal  Sh'va,  which,  without  that  mark,  would  be 
taken  iov final  Sh'va:  as  ^■^D^^,  a-m'ru  (not  dm-ru). 

:  IT 

b)  Before  a  Khatepk  (36)  when  immediately  preceded  by  a 

vowel  without  a  following  dagesh  :  as  Jlin**  ye-kh^reh. 

vv:iv 

c)  In  polysyllables,  one  or  two  syllables  before  the  tone- 
syllable.  If  the  last  syllable  has  the  tone,  the  antepenultima, 
whether  long  or  short,  has  Metheg. 

In  speaking  of  the  antepenultima  here,  we  consider  a  (simple 
or  composite)  Sh'va  to  form  a  syllable. 


Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 


T  ;|T  T  T  T 

•1K"]^\  4 

nb:f^p  6 

T  :  'it 
T  :  |T 

nr\r\3  lo 


niDT  3 

T   l  T 

T-:|T  T  •.. :  |- 

mn^  11 

:  |T 

nint^ri^n  12 

T     r 

niDT  14    ni^i:^  13 

■»• :  |T  T  :  |T 

r^Td?   16  ^^f*  15 

T  •  :  :  I- 


I  c61=a-dara.       2  za-ch'ra. 
3  zoch-rah.       4  yi-r'u. 

5  yi-r'ii.         6  ka-flah. 

7  ha-a-dam'.       8  ga-1'thah'. 

9  ha-m'khul-lal.    10  ca-hnhah'. 

II  ya-th'hon. 

12  ha-no-sha-bhoth. 

13  sha-m'rah'.      14  za-ch'rah'. 
15  yi-sh'nu.         16  I'mi-nahh. 

c2 


49 


16  Reading  atid  OrthograpJiy.  [ch.  i. 

Exercise  6. 
50      a)  Write  in  English  letters — 


XV|T                                 ''IIT                                     TT                                     TT                               -"T 
••    :    T|T                                          •     Tl"                                     V     T|": 

b)  Write  in 

Hebrew  letters  * — 

1  hemmah. 
4  harakiai^. 
7  tha^nod". 
10  i^^navim. 

2  ronni. 

5  bathstsiyyon. 

8  tha:i^lim. 

3  I'mi'nehem". 
6  v'imse'n'cha". 
9  i^al^ta*vath. 

Chap.  I.  §  8.  0?z  distinguislimg  Kamets  Khatuphfrom 
Kamets,  and  Long  Khirekfrom  Short  Khirek. 

51  Till  the  pupil  is  acquainted  with  the  derivation  of 
words,  the  following  rules  will  assist  him  in  distin- 
guishing Kamets  Khatuph  from  Kamets ;  both  of 
which  are  indicated  by  the  same  mark  ( ■*").^ 

52  I.)  T  is  0  in  a  closed  (42),  unaccented  syllable. 
Such  syllables  are : — 

a)  An  unaccented  syllable  in  which  the  ^  is  without  Metheg, 
and  followed  by  simple  ShVa. 

b)  An  unaccented  syllable  in  which  the  t  is  followed  by  a 
letter  with  strong  Dagesh. 

An  T  r=  0  may  have  Metheg  with  it,  if  the  syllable  is  the 
second  syllable  before  the  tone  (i.  q.  principal  accent).     See  53. 

c)  When  Makkeph  (47)  follows. 

d)  When  the  unaccented  closed  syllable  \s  final,  (G.) 

53  II.)   T  is  0  in  open  syllables. 

a)  When  followed  by  Khateph  Kamets. 

b)  When  followed  hy  Kamets  Khatuph. 

c)  In  the  two  anomalous  words  XT'^'^D  {ko-dd-shim),  D''ti?"1t^ 

•    t'|T  •     T|T 

{sho-ra-shim.) 

In  these  cases  t  is  followed  by  Metheg,  since  Metheg  always 
stands  in  the  second  syllable  before  the  tone.  (G.) 

*  In  this  Exercise  (')  marks  the  place  of  Metheg:  (")  the 
tone-syllable;  (=)  marks  a  Makkeph. 


§.8.]  Ka?nets  Khatuph.  17 

In  the  same  way  Metheg  is  of  use  in  enabling  54 
us  to  distinguish  a  defectively  ivritten  long  Khirek 
from  short  Khirek  :  for  Khirek  is  long,  when  it  forms 
either  an  open  syllable  (whether  accented  or  not)  or 
a  closed  accented  syllable  (42).  Now  a  Metheg  follow- 
ing Khirek  often  shows  that  the  syllable  is  an  open 
owe,  the  Sh\a  that  follows  it  being  initial,  not  final. 

Examples  and  Reading  Lesson. 


riininQ  i 

tt;  t 

-:)■)  3        HDDH  2 

••    T  T    ;     T 

•■••IT  .   T  :  T  : 

:  '  T  "tit; 

^IDI  9        "ipip  8 
:  |T  .  T 

Jiinn")n  u    '^2^1  10 
a"inn  13    n^n^n  12 

"t: t  t  t   ;  t 


1  mo-kh°-ra-bh6th.  55 

2  khoch-mah.       3  ron-ne. 

4  c'dobh-ram.  5  bot-te-chera. 
6  c'dor-la-i^o-mer,  7  kobh-ro. 
8  kod-kod.  9  ra-ch'bhA. 

10ts6r-ce-cha.  1 1  hor-kho-bhoth. 
1 2  hor-kha-bhah  1 3  h6-kh°-rebh 
14  hog-lath.  15  ribh. 


Exercise  7. 

a)  Write  in  English  letters —  56 
1^^5  5        U12  4        t^ip>  3        n)nj>\  2       ^^^[p>  1 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  letters — 

1  y'komi^am.  2  m'shor-to.  3  nov.  4  nubh. 

5  i^ozbhech.  6  i>*m6dcha. 

Chap.  I.    §  9.    Further  Remarks  on  the  Voivels.  (G.) 

Diphthongs, 

The  primary  vowel  sounds  are  A,  I,  U.  57 

E  is  properly  the  diphthong  AI  contracted. 
O  is  properly  the  diphthong  AU  contracted. 

c3 


18  Reading  and  Orthography.  [ch.  I. 

58  A  more  useful  division  of  the  vowels  than  that 
into  long  and  short  (or  perfect  and  imperfect)  vowels, 
is  this  (G.)  :— 

First  Class,     A  sound. 

59  For  the  A  sound  the  Hebrew  has  three  vowel  marks  ( ^  ), 
( ~  )j  (  " ) ;  2ill  of  which  are  written  below  the  consonant  with 
and  after  which  they  are  to  be  sounded. 

a)  T  a  Kamets. 

b)  -  a  Patkakh. 

c)  •••  e  or  a         Segol. 

"  is  here  an  obtuse  e-  sound,  Hke  e  in  the  French  mere  ;  in 
our  there. 


60 


/) 
9) 


Second  Class, 
>  T  and  T 


I-. 


I 

e,  e 
e 


I  and  E  sounds. 

hong  Khirek, 

Short  Khirek. 

Tsere,  with  and  without  Yod. 

Segol.  Obtuse  e.  When  accented,  =  e. 


i) 


61  Third  Class,     U  and  O  sounds. 

!)  4         Shurek. 

—  UyU      Kibbuts.  (1)  u.  a  simple  shortening  of 

Shurek.  (2)  u. 

k)     *)  and  J.        6,  6      Kholem. 

I)      ~  o  Kamets  Khatuph. 

Also  obtuse  e  (  •  )  may  be  considered  to  belong  to  this  class, 
as  far  as  it  springs  from  u  or  o. 

62  When  vowels  are  lengthened  or  shortened  (for 
reasons  to  be  explained  hereafter),  the  change  is 
usually  confined  to  vowels  of  the  same  class.  Thus 
d  may  be  shortened  into  a  or  a  (or  e;  that  is,  obtuse 
Segol) ;  e  into  e  ovt;  o  into  o  or  u, 

63  The  only  diphthongs  that  occur  in  Hebrew  are, 

ai  (V),  oi  (^i),  ui  (>!)). 

64  In  V7  tt^6  Yod  is  usually  considered  quiescent,  so 
that  this  combination  is  pronounced  dv  or  dw;  not 
aiv. 


§  9.]  The  Vowels. 

Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 


19 


Q  h)         up  2 

-                          't 

"T»  1  a)  A 

T 

a)  1  yad.       2  kam.       b)  bath. 

TJ^P.  1  c) 

c)  1  me-lech  (or  m'dlech). 

T  V  ; 

TT2 

•       VT 

2  ya-de'-cha.         3  g'le-nah. 

iDJ^eJ 

D'P.I^    ^) 

d)  tsaddi-kim.         e)  im-rao. 

Dt^2 

nui/) 

/)  1  beth.         2  shem. 

1^2 

"13D  1  ^) 

g)  1  se'pher.         2  shen. 

n^T2h) 

n]n3 

3  kho-zeh.         h)  muth. 

•'JID  1  i) 

i)  1  mii-thi.         2  gul-lah. 

pn  k)    21 2 

'      T 

b^pij) 

j)  1  kol.       2  robh.       A:)  kh6k=. 

0^2 

-JINt*  1  /) 

0  1  eth-.       2  atstem. 

^    ''l-?^ 

n/is  1  B 

1  Pa'-thakh  f.       2  Tse'-re. 

Db>in4 

PTPT  3 

3  Khi'-rek.        4  Kho'-lem. 

V^^i?  ^ 

p-)iti^5 

5  Shu -rek.            6  Kib'-buts. 

T?i^7 

7  Ka-mets. 

^i:p  9    5i?)tDn  ygp  s 

8  Ka-mets  Kha-^uph.  9  Se'-gol. 

*  From  /liX- 

t  The  names  of  the  vowels  are  almost  all  taken  from  the 
form  and  action  of  the  mouth  in  uttering  the  sounds.  Thus 
nnD    signifies   opening,   ''"l^i   bursting   (of  the  mouth),   p"T'r7 

gnashing,  U/^^\  fulness,  from  its  full  tone,  p"l^ti/  properly  (tv- 

picrfiog,  y^Itp  closing  (of  the  mouth) .   This  last  meaning  belongs 

also  to  I^T^p ;  and  the  reason  why  long  a  and  short  o  (Pj^JOrT  \t2p 

Kamets  correptum)  have  the  same  sign  and  name  is  that  the 
Rabbins  gave  to  Kamets  the  impure  sound  of  o,  like  the  Swedish 
a.     Only  Segal  (^i^D  [/i^D*  E.']   cluster   of  grapes')  appears 

to  be  named  after  its  form. 

The  names  were,  moreover,  so  formed  that  the  sound  of  each 
vowel  was  heard  in  the  first  syllable :  and  in  conformity  to  this, 
some  write  Sdghol,  Komets-chatuph,  Kubbuts.  (G.) 


20 


Reading  and  Orthography. 


[CH.  1. 


(65)     ^ibilS        '»ii)2 

1  ^do-nai. 

2  goi.        3  ga-lui. 

T    T 

V^J<"  4 

X  •• 

4  e-lav. 

5  )^a-lav. 

H'^O  7 

K?;::^  6 

6  so-ne(a). 

7  M5-sheh. 

U^D"})  9 

-)5'^  8 

8  sho-mer. 

9  yir-pos. 

]i:^2 

n^>  1  D 

1  l6-veh. 

2  ))a-von. 

Dp  2 

"pip  1  E 

Ik61. 

2  kum. 

Dp  4 

ri'^ps 

3  ko-loth. 

4  kum. 

•)5  2 

lU  F 

X 

1  vav. 

2  gev. 

''i:i4 

v^ 

3  khai. 

4  goi. 

r-in^  5 

5  d'bha-rhav. 

Exercise  8. 

66      g)  Write   in   English    letters    (dividing   the   syl- 
lables)— 

^ni13  5         ^n  4         i'pii  3         >K^^]|  2  ^       D^3  1 
JliD^DD  10        ^ti^iD  9         tl^l  8         Dn  7        "ijp^^  6 

^)  Write  in  Hebrew  letters — 

1  i^am.       2  tamim.       3  m^akh.      4  i^amok.      5  i^^mukim. 
6  orakh.  7  cathobh.  8  t'mim.  9  I'bhabhim. 

10  i^^mukke.         11  tammah. 


Chap.  I.  §10.  On  Verbal  Roots  and  on  the  derivation 

of  Nouns. 

67  The  7'oots  or  stem-words  of  the  Hebrew  language 
nearly  always  consist  of  three  consonants,  on  which 
the  meaning  essentially  depends. 

68  a)  A  strong  root  is  one  that  contains  three  firm, 
permanent  consonants;  a  iveak  root  is  a  root  that 
contains  at  least  one  weak  letter  [Aleph,  He,  Vav,  or 
Yod). 

b)  Verbs  whose  first  consonant  is  Nun,  or  whose 


§  10.]  Derivation  of  Nouns.  21 

second  and  third  consonants  are  the  same  letter,  are  (68) 
contracted  in  some  forms  by  the  omission  or  assimi- 
lation *  of  one  consonant,  and  are  sometimes  called 
contracted  verbs.  But  these  may,  like  the  former,  be 
called  iveak  roots,  since  they  cannot  maintain  their 
full  form  throughout. 

The  various  modifications  of  the  primary  meaning  69 
of  a  root  are  expressed  by  the  radical  consonants  with 
changed  vowels,  and  sometimes  with  added  conso- 
nants also ;  which  are  sometimes  prefixed,  sometimes 
post-fixed. 

a)  A  stem-word  may  be  either  a  yioun  or  a  verb ;  70 
and  usually  the  language  exhibits  both  together  (see 

1,  a,  d  in  the  following  examples) :  but  it  is  cus- 
tomary and  of  practical  utility  for  the  beginner,  to 
consider  the  third  person  singular  of  the  Peyfect  in  the 
simplest  conjugation  (called  Kal)  as  the  root  or  stem- 
word,  and  the  other  verbal  forms,  nouns,  and  particles, 
as  derived  from  it.    (G.) 

b)  Sometimes  no  corresponding  noun  is  found  in  the  extant 
language :  and  sometimes  a  noun  exists  without  a  corresponding 
verb.  The  spoken  language  probably  had,  at  least  at  some 
period,  the  missing  forms,  which  are  often  found  in  the  kindred 
dialects  (e.g.  in  Arabic).    (G.) 

The  verbal  root,  as  just  defined,  generally  has  for  7i 
its  vowels  Kamets  in  the  first,  and  Pathakh  in  the 
second,  syllable.    The  verb  that  the  old  Grammarians 
used  as  their  example  of  conjugating  was  7^3  (pd)Jal) ; 

and  hence  the  first  consonant  of  a  verb  was  called  its 
Pe ;  the  second  its  Ayin ;  the  third  its  Lamed. 

Verbs  whose  first  radical  (their  Pe)  is  Nun,  Aleph,  72 
or  Yod,  have,  from  the  weahiess  of  those  consonants, 
certain  peculiarities  of  conjugation ;  as  have  (for  the 
same  reason)  verbs  whose  second  radical  (their  Ayin) 
is  either  Yod  or  identical  with  their  third  radical; 

*  A  consonant  is  assimilated  to  a  following  one,  when  the 
same  consonant  that  follows  is  substituted  for  the  preceding 
one  :  e.  g.  when  np  becomes  pp. 


22  Reading  and  Orthography,  [ch.  i. 

(72)  and  verbs  whose  third  radical  (their  Lamed)  is  He 
or  Aleph.  The  presence  of  any  other  guttural  in  the 
root  also  necessitates  some  change  in  several  of  the 
usual  forms. 

73  A  verb  whose  ^rs^  radical  is  Nun  is  called  concisely  *a  verb 
Pe  Nun:'  one  whose  third  radical  is  Alejjh,  '  a  verb  Lamed  Aleph;* 
and  so  on. 

I   shall  designate   (and  indicate)   those  that  have 
and  have  not  such  peculiarities  thus : — 

74  A.  Regidar  (or  strong)  verb (r) 

B.  {Verbs  with  gutturals). 


1.  Verbs  first  guttural    

Verbs  second  guttural  ... 
Verbs  third  guttural 

C.  Weak  {contracted)  Verbs. 

Verbs  Pe  Nun     

Verbs  Double  Ayin     

D.  {Other  weak  Verbs). 

Verbs  Lamed  Aleph 

Verbs  PeYod 

Verbs  Ayin  Vav 

Verbs  Lamed  He 


(usually  indicated 
thus) 


Verbs  Pe  Aleph 


:iD 


If 

rh 

If 


(n) 
(d) 

(a3) 

(y) 

(V) 

(h) 


75 


Examples  and  Reading  Lesson. 

ly^  2    -7:1:1 1 A 


•7:12  4     ii:ii  3 

T 

TT^D  2     "rrb^  a  1 
f>^\  3 


A  1  bagad,  2  boged, 

he  was  deceitful.      deceitfully. 

3  bagod,  4  be'ged, 

to  be  deceitful.      deceit. 

1  malach,  2  molech, 

he  reigned.  he  that  reigns. 

3  yimloch, 
he  will  reign. 


§  10-] 

Classes 

o/  Verbs.                          23 

(a^)  [Pe  Aleph'] 

-    T 

«^)  1  achal  *,  to  eat. 

^D«l 

~    T 

2  abhad,               3  asaph, 
to  perish.              to  collect. 

{g^)  \Pe  gutturaT] 

-■  T 

B  (p^)  i^amad,  /o  stand;  to  stay. 

(g^)  {.Ayin  guttural] 

—    T 

(g^  shakha^,  to  kill  (animals). 

(g^  [Lamed  guttural] 

■"   T 

{g^)  shalakh,  to  send. 

(n)  [Pe  Nun]  tlH^  2 

-  T 

m:  1  c 

—  T 

C  {n)  1  nagas,         2  nagash, 

to  exact.         to  approach 

"in:j4 

n"T^3 

3  nadar,               4  nahar, 

~  T 

~T 

to  vow.                   to  flow. 

(c?)  [Double  Ayin'] 

—  X 

(d)  sabhabh,  to  go  about. 

(a^)  [Lamed  Aleph'] 

X    T 

D  (a)  matsa,  to  find. 

(y)  [Pe  Yod]  1^  2 

—  T 

—  T 

(3/)  1  yashabh,     2  yalad, 

/o  5jY.              to  beget. 

c)p;4 

"TD''3 

~  T 

3  yasad,               4  yasaph, 
to  found.               to  add. 

yrs 

5  yai?ats,  to  counsel. 

(y)  LJj/2n  Vav] 

D^p 

(v)  kum,  to  rise. 

(A)  [Lamerf  He] 

n^.^ 

(h)  galah,  to  reveal. 

(75) 


,.    Y      Exercise  9. 

a)  Write  in  S»gli^  letters,  and  describe  (both  in  75 
words  and  by  the  proper  conventional  letters  [74]) 
the  following  verbal  roots — 


tsud,  to  he  hunted:  to  hunt. 
khalal,  to  be  wounded. 
mug,  to  melt. 
yakash,  to  lay  snares. 


zarah,  to  disperse. 
hagah,  to  meditate. 
nazal,  to  flow. 


b)  Write  in  English  letters,  and  describe  (both  in 


*  I  shall  follow  the  usual  practice  of  giving  the  English  in- 
finitive as  the  radical  form;  though  the  pupil  must  remember 
that  the  Hebrew  word  is  really  the  third  singular  m.  of  the 
Perfect. 


24  Reading  and  Orthography,  [ch.  i. 

(76)  words   and   by  the  proper  conventional  letters)  the 
following  verbal  roots — 


■)D''  to  instruct. 

~  T 

TIJ^  to  curse. 

—  T 

'?T3D  to  cover. 
ni7  to  borrow. 


/^i  to  fall  J  to  wither. 

—  T 

773,  to  mingle. 

~  T 

'y\'^  to  return. 


Chap.  I.  §  11.    On  the  derivation  of  Nouns. 

*J7  Nouns  are  either  primitive  (i.  e.  themselves  roots) 
or  derivative. 

Derivative  nouns  are  mostly  verbals,  that  is,  de- 
rived from  verbs :  some,  however,  are  denominatives  ^, 
that  is,  derived  from  another  noun. 

Many  of  the  old  grammarians  acknowledged  none  but  verbal 
roots,  and  considered  all  nouns  as  verbals. 

78  a)  Of  verbal  nouns  some  are  strong,  being  formed 
from  stro7ig  roots,  and  retaining  all  the  consonants 
of  the  root,  with  (usually)  a  change  of  the  vowel 
points. 

b)  Others  are  iveak,  being  formed  from  weak  roots, 
and  usually  by  throwing  away  one  of  the  radical 
letters. 

c)  Both  strong  and  weak  verbal  nouns  may  be  un- 
augmented  or  augmented.  In  the  unaugmented  nouns 
no  addition  is  made  to  the  verbal  root.  The  aug- 
m,ented  nouns  are  made  by  the  addition  of  one  or 
more  of  the  servile  letters  ^  Ji  ;3  Q  K  n  to  a  verbal  root. 

These  serviles  being  contained  in  the  technical  word  He-e- 
man-ti,  augmented  nouns  are  called  Heemantic  nouns.  Of  these 
additional  letters,  Q  is  always  at  the  beginning;  n  generally  at 
the  end;  "^  and  ^  sometimes  at  the  end;  r\  either  at  the  be- 
ginning or  end  of  the  word  so  augmented. 

79  a)  A  noun  augmented  at  the  beginning  may  be 
denoted  by  a,  at  the  end  by  w  ;  at  both  by  acu. 

*  That  is,  derived  de  nomine  (from  a  noun). 


§"ll-] 


Derivation  of  Nouns, 


25 


b)  A  noun  derived  from  a  verb  Pe  Nun,  Pe  Yod,  Sic,  (79) 
will  be  designated  by  n,  y,  d,  v,  a,  h,  according  to 
the  letters  given  in  7Q,  as  denoting  those  conjuga- 
tions or  forums. 

c)  If  a  noun  is  derived  from  a  strong  root,  or  is  a 
root  itself,  or  consists  only  of  radical  letters,  it  may 
be  designated  by  r. 

d)  I  shall  include  in  nouns  designated  by  r  feminines  in  ah, 
derived  from  verbs  Lamed  He,  though  the  h  is  in  this  case  pro- 
perly servile :  as  n^'^i^,  shanah  (a  year)  from  HJli^- 


Examples  and  Reading  Lesson, 


T  :  T 


|T" 


T   • 


me'lech  (r) 
(a  king) 

mishpa^  [a) 
{judgement) 

khochmah  (w) 
{wisdom) 

dea)>  (y) 
{knowledge) 

moshabh  (ay) 
{seat) 

i^etsah'  (w  y) 
{counsel) 

torn  {d) 
{perfectness) 

magen  {a  d) 
{a  shield) 

zimmah  (w  d) 
{wickedness) 

t'phillah  (awi?) 
{prayer) 


A  verbal  noun,  unaug- 
mented. 


1^^ 


A    verbal     noun,    aug-  J^QJ^ 
mented  at  the  begin- 
ning. 

A    verbal     noun,    aug-    Q^PT 
mented  at  the  end. 


A  verbal  noun,  from  a 
{weak)  verb  Pe  Yod. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  begin- 
ning, from  a  {tveak) 
verb  Pe  Yod. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  end, 
from  a  {weak)  verb  Pe 
Yod. 

A  verbal  noun,  derived 
from  a  contracted  verb 
double  Ayin. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  begin- 
ning, from  a  contracted 
verb  doMe  Ayin. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  end, 
from  a  contracted  verb 
doiMe  Ayin. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  both  begin- 
ning and  end,  from  a 
contracted  verb  double 
Ayin. 


—  T 

2t' 

~  T 
~    T  . 

Dat 

—  T 


malach 
{to  reign) 

shaphaf 
{to  judge) 

khacham 
{to  be  wise) 

yadai^ 
{to  know) 

y  ash  abb 
{to  sit) 

yai^ats 
{to  counsel) 

tamam 
{to  complete) 

ganan 
{to  cover,  prO' 
tect) 

zamam 
{to  devise) 

pillel  {to  judge) ; 
[in  Hithpael, 
to  pray  J 

D 


80 


26 


Reading  and  Orthography, 


(80)        nil  ger  (v) 

{stranger) 

DipD  makom  (av) 
"*"     {place) 

]^^7  la-ts6n  (w  v) 
^     (scorn) 


iiy)^D  t'bhunah(awv) 
■^      •    (understanding) 

nD  p'ri  (h) 
•  •     (fruit) 

]r\t2  mattan  (an) 
"~     (a  gift*) 

rwBt2  mappalaht(awn) 
"^  "^  ~      (a  ruin) 


A  verbal  noun,  from  a 
{weak)  verb  ^?/m  Fav. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  begin- 
ning, from  a  (weak) 
verb  Ai/in  Vuv. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  end, 
from  a  (weak)  verb 
Ai/in  Vav. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  both  begin- 
ning and  end,  from  a 
(weak)  verb  Ayin  Vav. 

A  verbal  noun,  from  a 
(tveak)  verhLained  He. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented at  the  begin- 
ning, from  a  (contract- 
ed) verb  Pe  Nun. 

A  verbal  noun,  aug- 
mented both  at  the  be- 
ginning and  tbe  end, 
from  a  (contracted) 
verb  Pe  Nun. 


Exercise  10. 


[CH.  1. 

gur 
(to  sojourn) 

kum 
(to  rise) 

luts 
{to  scorn) 

Mn 

(to  understand) 


parah 
(to  be  fruitful) 

nathan 
{to  give) 


b^:i  na 


naphal 
(to  fall) 


II  a)  Write  the  following  words  in  English  letters, 
and  describe  their  derivation  according  to  the  Table 
just  given — 


yni  street. 

Hi)  /'D  division  (of  priests). 

"lipn  a  well. 

i^i^p^  possession  (especially 
'•'  •  *        cattle). 
]rT  grace,  favour. 

D^ni^  love. 

^  -J 

*  For  mantan. 


3n")  to  be  broad. 

—     T 

J)7B  to  divide, 

~  T 

1?)p  to  dig  (for  water). 
JlJp  lo  get;  to  bug. 

t't 

IJrr  lo  be  gracious  (to). 

~  T 

3(1^"^  to  love. 

"    T 

i^ZDH  ^0  5/ip,  ^o  go  astray. 

T    T 

t  For  manpalah. 


§  1-2.] 


The  Accents. 


27 


^1  companion,  friend. 
'^^'^  hunter. 

tJDJ^D  food. 
HDIJJ^  slumber. 


tl^l  to  take  delight  in.  (gl) 

T    T 

"TliJ  to  lie  in  wait:  to  hunt. 

^2i^  to  eat. 

—   T 

Q!)J  to  slumber. 


b)  Write  the  following  words  in  Hebrew  letters, 
and  account  for  them  as  before — 


shenah,  sleep. 

caph,  the  hollow  of  the  hand. 

makh^or,  want. 

i^ed,  a  witness. 

torah,  instruction. 

musar,  admonition,  correction. 

kalon,  shame,  disgrace. 


y ashen,  to  sleep. 
caphaph,  to  bend. 
khaser,  to  want,  to  lack. 
))udh,  to  testify. 
yarah,  to  teach  (in  Hiphil  *). 
yasar,  to  admonish. 
kalah,    to   be   lightly   esteemed 
(in  Niphal  *). 


Chap.  I.    §  12.    The  Accents. 

a)  The  tone  (or  accent)  of  Hebrew  words  is  on  one  82 
of  the  two  last  syllables. 

b)  As  the  tone-syllable  is  usually  the  last,  it  is  suf- 
ficient for  the  pupil  to  know  what  classes  of  words 
have  the  accent  on  the  penult  (i.  e.  the  last  syllable 
but  one). 

c)  Words  with  the  accent  on  the  final  syllable  are  called 
Milra'  (y)7Q)  ;    those  with  the  accent  on  the  penult,  Milel' 

(The  following  list  will  be  useful  for  reference,  though  at  83 
present  several  of  the  terms  will  convey  no  meaning  to  the 
pupil.) 

The  tone-syllable  is  the  penult  in, — 

a)  All   dissyllable   nouns    whose   last   vowel   is   a   Segol    or 

Pathakh. 

b)  Words  whose  final  consonant  has  a,  furtive  Pathakh. 


A  conjugation  so  called. 
D  2 


28  Reading  and  Orthography.  [ch.  i. 

(83)      c)  Words  with  the  dual  ending  a-yim  (Q> — ). 

d)  Verbs   of  the   Perfect   tense  with   the   personal    endings 

ti,  td,  nu  (?)J,  D,  ^D). 

T 

e)  Regular  verbs  of  the  Hiphil  conjugation;  and  the  con- 

jugations Kaly  Niphal,  and  Hiphil  of  verbs  Ayin  Vav 
and  Double  Ayin. 

f)  The   demonstrative   pronouns   el'-leh    (these),    hem'-mah, 

hen'-ndh. 

g)  Verbs  that  have  the  Vav  conversive  of  the  Perfect. 

h)  The  accusative  suffixes  -dh,  -kit,  -nu,  -ni,  -kd,  never  have 
the  tone. 

84  Beside  the  accents  that  mark  the  tone-syllable  of  a 
word,  there  are  others  which  serve  the  purpose  of 
punctuatio?i,  by  indicating  that  a  word  is  or  is  not  to 
be  taken  in  close  connexion  with  what  follows. 

Such  accents  t  are  either  separative  or  connective. 
Their  names  and  shapes  are  J  : — 

85  Separative  (or  Distinctive)  Accents 

{Domini) . 

Name.  Figure.  Name.  Figure. 

I.  (Imperatores.)  II.  (Reges  ) 

1  Siimk    N    i   1   t  Segolta   A 

2  Athnakh   K    i   2  Zakeph  Katon ji 

'     I 
.  ,  , ,  ,        ,        <    i    3  Zakeph  Gadol J»} 

3  *MerchawithMahpach  ^^2    ! 

I   4  Tiphkha    ^^ 

t  These  tables  and  remarks  are  placed  here  that  the  pupil 
who  proceeds  immediately  from  this  work  to  any  portion  of  a 
printed  Bible  may  have  some  notion  what  is  meant  by  the 
numerous  marks  with  which  the  text  is  crowded.  In  the  earlier 
part  of  the  present  work  the  tone-syllable,  when  it  is  thought  ne- 
cessary to  mark  it,  will  be  indicated  by  >  ;  as  PO^p  ikd-t'dl'-fd). 

X  Those  marked  with  *  are  peculiar  to  the  poetical  books. 
Those  marked  with  f  are  prepositive. 
Those  marked  with  X  are  postpositive. 


§12.] 

Name.  Figure. 

III.  (Duces.) 

1  R'bhi'a K 

2  X  Zarka J^ 

3  X  Pashta      J^ 

4  T'bhir    K 

5  t  Y'thibh  K 

6  *  Shalsbe'leth    K 

7  t  Tiphkha  initial   J^ 


The  Accents,  29 

Name.  Figure.  (85) 

IV.  (Comixes.) 

v 

1  Pazer      i<i 

IP 

2  Karne  Pharah  J^ 

P 

3  t  Great  T'lisba  . . , K 

t 

4  Geresh K 

// 

5  Double  Geresh K 

6  P'sik  (between  the  words)  J^l 


Connective  Accents  [Servi). 

Name,  Figure. 

6  Mercha .-..- |^ 

7  Double  Mercha    K 

// 

8  Ye'rakh  ben-yom5 ....     J^ 

V 

9  Tiphkha  final    K 


Name.  Figure. 

1  Munakh     K 

2  Mahpach K 


3  Kadma j;} 

4  Darga     >^ 


j5  Little  T'lisha     >^ 


10  *  Mercha  with  Zarka. .   _s^ 

1 1  *  Mahpach  with  Zarka  -J:± 


a)  Silluk  occurs  only  at  the  end  of  a  verse  before  (♦ )  Soph-  86 
pasuk,  which  separates  verses.     Athnakh  (==  respiration)  usually 
stands  only  in  the  middle  of  a  verse. 

b)  Observe  that  Pashta  (i^)  and  Kadma  (J^)  have  the  same 
form  :  they  are  distinguished  by  their  position,  for  Pashta  (as 
a  separative  accent)  always  stands  on  the  last  syllable,  whether 
the  tone-syllable  is  the  last  or  last  but  one.     If  the  accent  is  on 

%  %  > 
the  penult,  then  two  Pashtas  occur  together,  5]D3n.     Kadma 

always  stands  on  the^rs^  consonant  of  a  word. 

c)  Y'thibh  (i^)  and  Mahpach  C^*)  are  also  distinguished  by 

<  < 

position  only :  the  former  standing  always  before  the  first  letter 
of  the  word,  the  latter  under  its  vowel. 

d3 


30  Reading  and  Ortliography.  [ch.  i. 

(86)      d)  Segolta  (j^),  Zarka  (J^),  and  the  connective  T'lisha  K'tannah 
{i^)  always  stand  over  the  last  letter  of  a  word. 

(Remarks  on  the  Accents,   G.) 
1.  As  Signs  of  the  Tone. 

87  Words  that  are  otherwise  identical,  are  often  dis- 
tinguished by  the  accent,  e.  g.  -IJ^  ba-nu  (they  built), 

•1^3  bdnu  (in  us) ;    llDp  kdind    (she  stood  up),  n!2p 

kamd  (standing  up,  fern.).    So  in  English  to  contrast', 
a  contrast :  in  Greek  hjui,  I  am ;  cl/ii,  I  shall  go. 

88  As  a  rule,  the  accents  accompany  the  initial  conso- 
nant of  the  tone-syllable.  Some,  however,  stand  only 
on  the  first  letters  of  a  word  (prepositive)  ;  others 
only  on  the  last  letters  (postpositive).  The  tone- 
syllable  is  therefore  not  discoverable  by  these. 

II.  ^5  sei'ving  the  purpose  of  punctuation. 

89  Every  verse  is  regarded  in  the  figurative  language 
of  the  Hebrew  grammarians  as  a  realm  (diiio),  go- 
verned by  the  great  distinctive,  or  virtual /m//  stop,  at 
the  end  (imperator).  According  as  the  empire  (i.  e. 
verse)  is  large  or  small,  varies  the  number  of  domini 
of  different  grades,  which  form  the  larger  and  smaller 
divisions. 

90  Connectives  (Servi)  unite  only  such  words  as  are 
closely  connected  in  sense,  as  a  noun  with  an  adjec- 
tive, or  with  another  noun  in  the  genitive,  &c.  But 
two  connectives  cannot  be  employed  together.  If 
several  words  should  be  connected,  Makkeph  is  used. 

91  In  very  short  verses  few  connectives  are  used ; 
sometimes  none  :  for  a  small  distinctive,  in  the  vici- 
nity of  a  greater,  has  a  connective  power  (servit 
domino  majori).  In  very  long  verses,  on  the  con- 
trary, connectives  are  used  for  the  smaller  distinc- 
tives  (fiunt  legati  dominorum). 

92  The  choice  of  this  or  that  connective  depends  on 
very   subtle   laws  of   consecution,   with   which   the 


§  12.]  The  Accents,  31 

learner  need  not  trouble  himself  at  present.  It  is  (92) 
sufficient  for  him  to  know  the  greater  distinctives, 
which  answer  to  our  period,  colon,  and  comma; 
though  they  often  stand  where  even  a  half  comma 
would  scarcely  be  admissible.  They  are  most  im- 
portant in  the  poetical  books  for  dividing  a  verse  into 
its  members. 

Reading  Lesson, 

[In  the  following  Reading  Lesson  **  the  names  of  the  different  93 
accents  contained  in  it  will  be  found  by  turning  to  the  Table 
(85),  with  which  the  learner  will  do  well  to  make  himself  familiar: 
otherwise,  he  will  occasionally  confound  them  with  the  \'owels, 
and,  in  many  instances,  be  unable  to  determine  whether  Sh'va 
begins  or  ends  a  syllable,  or  whether  the  mark  (  ^  )  be  Kamets 
or  Kamets  Khatuph  :  and  for  this  purpose  we  shall  subjoin  a 
passage  in  which  the  greater  part  of  them  is  found." — Lee.] 


JTT                      S'  T    "                        :            J- 

<               T  ••  -«■•■:"': 

<''.    '  ~',\  T     :                      a-  T 

]'2^  ]npv  ^rhi^    y\2.\ 

T     i  •  T              V  - :  T     •     - 


I      T  ,  ' 


A.     2  Kings  i.  6. 

Vai-yo-m'ru'  e-lav,  ish  i>a-lah' 
lik-ra-the'-nu,  vay-yo'-mer  e- 
le-nu',  I'chu'  shu-bhu'  el-ham- 
me'-lech  ^sher-sha-lakh'  eth- 
chem',v'dib-bar-tem'  e-lav,coh' 
a-mar'  Y'ho-vah',  h^-mib-b'li' 
en-^lo-him'  b'is-ra-^l'  at-tah' 
sho-le'akh  lid-rosh'  b'bha'-)^al 
!  z'bhubh'  «lo-he'  i^ek-ron'  ?  la- 
chen'  ham-mi^-^ah'  *sher-i^a- 
li'-tha  sham'  lo-the-red'  mim- 
men-nah  ci-moth  ta-muth. 


32 


Reading  and  Orthography,     [ch.  i.  §  12. 


(93) 


B. 


•      v;  T  T  •         ••  ; 


1    T 


T   :  I  T  V  ;  T  T   ;  '    V  I  T  T 

nm 

~    i ; 


l^iDN"") 


•|T- 


B're-shith'  ba-ra  *lo-him'  eth 
hash-sha-ma'-yim  v'eth  ha- 
a'-rets:  v'ha-a'-rets  ha-y'tha" 
tho-huva-bho-hu  v'kh5'-shech 
i>al-p'ne'  th'hom  v'ru'-akh  ^15- 

him'  m'ra-khe'-pheth  i)al-p'ne' 
hara-ma-yim:  vay-yo'-mer  ^15- 
him  y'hi  or,  va-y'hi-6r' :  vay- 
yar"  ^l6-him  eth-ha-6r  ci-^6bh 
vay-yabh-del  *'l6-him  ben  ha-6r 
u-bhen  ha-kho'-shech. 


Exercise  11. 

94      a)  Write  in  English  letters  the  following  extract, 
and  mark  the  tone-syllables — 

vp'tsh  '^^lOBti^Q  ^3  1^^  ""D^P  uvb  nin>-Di<:3  h'^'^n  ]:b 

'  ■.:\"      •  T  :   •     J'    A- :      a-  '         v:        t    :       \;      .        -    ^"t 

•    vjTT         T  VT|"         •    T  :'•  J";       •<; 

b)  Write  in  Hebrew  characters  the  following  ex- 
tract— 

V'hannakhash  hayah'  i^arum  mic-col  khayyath  hassadeh  *sher 
i^asah  Y'hovah  ^lohim :  vayyomer  el-haishshah  aph  ci-amar 
*lohim  15"  thochl'u  mic-c5l  i^ets  haggan  ? 


CH.  2.  §  1.]  The  Definite  Article. 


33 


Chap,  II.    §1.    The  Definite  Article. 

The   definite  article  is  H ;    its  vowel  is  Pathakh  95 
(-^5  a) ;  and  the  following  consonant  receives  Dagesh. 

But  since  the  gutturals  and  Resh  cannot  receive  96 
Dagesh,    a   compensation    is    usually    made    for   its 
omission  by  lengthening  the  vowel  of  the  article  into 
Kamets  (t^  a)  or  Long  Segol  (•••  [e  =]  e  or  a). 

1)  Khd. 

2)  Hd,  ^d,  when  not  tone-syllables, 
i  1)  Hd,  Vd,  when  tone-syllables. 


n  is  used  before 


n  is  used  before 


2)  Any  guttural  or  Resh,  except  in  the  cases 
already  enumerated. 


Exception~\ .    If,  however,  the  vowel  that  follows  is  97 
not  T  or  t:,  words  beginning  with  He  or  Kheth  gene- 
rally take  n  for  their  article :  that  is,  make  no  com- 
pensation for  the  omitted  Dagesh. 

Reading  Lesson  and  Vocabulary. 

I  she'-mesh,  2  abh,              gg 

the  sun.  father, 

3  em,  4  ish, 

mother.  man  (vir). 

5  re'-gel,  6  ^al, 

foot.  dew. 

7  esh-col,  8  ba-nim, 

hunch- of -grapes,     sons, 

9  he-chal,  10  ;Dam, 

temple.  people. 

11  bar,  12  ha-rim, 

mountain.  mountains. 

13  i?a-v6n,  14  khag, 

guilt.  religious  feast. 

nirr  is    ;    ISkbo-akh,  lekho-the'-metb, 

I  thistle.  signet. 

D*n  17    I   17  rum,        18  rophe", 
^  height.  physician. 

(in  pause)  Q^^,  Q^p  19    119  i^e'-lem;  i?a-lem  (in  pause), 
■•■  ■"       ■•■  ■•■  i  lad. 


2ii  2 

T 

^'P!?  1 

li/^N  4 

Diji  3 

^^  6 

bn  ^ 

D^:i2  8 

•   T 

bs:ipi^  7 

D'J  10 

T 

byn  9 

onn  12 

•  T 

"in  11 

T 

:\n  14 

T 

PP  13 

nonh  16 

mn  15  ^ 

j^Bi")  18 


34 


The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  Kal.      [ch.  2. 


Exercise  12. 

99      a)  Write  down   the  following   words,   with    their 
meaning,  in  English  letters — 

jionhn  8         ninrr  7  :inn  6      ti^ptc^n  5 

Q^OT  11         rx^yyn  10      Dnn  9 


b)  Write  down  in  Hebrew  letters — 


1  the  mother. 
4  the  foot. 
7  the  guilt. 


2  the  father. 
5  the  mountain. 
8  the  people. 


3  the  dew. 

6  the  mountains. 

9  the  man. 


Chap.  II.    §  2.    The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  o/Kal. 

100  To  enable  the  pupil  to  form  complete  sentences, 
I  shall  here  give  the  two  principal  tensfes  of  the  re- 
gular verb  in  its  simplest  conjugation;  Kal  (active). 

101  The  third  singular  of  the  Perfect  of  Kal  is  one  of 
the  simplest  forms  of  the  verb,  and  is  usually  con- 
sidered its  root,  or  stem-form. 

Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  the  verb  /^p,  ka-/al,  to  kill. 


102  Veriect  {actio  perfecta). 

(Sing.)    I 

1.  ^Phw      ka-^al'-ti 

•  :  i-'t  i 

j  masc.     phl^^)  \   ka-^al'-ta  "l 
^'    j  fern.       rb^)      ka-/alt'       ( 
masc.         7Z0p    *ka-?ar 

|-'t 

fem.      rhW       ka-^ah' 


Imperfect  {actio  infecta). 


3.  < 


(Sing.) 

bb\)rs 


ek-^ol' 
tik-^ol'  (m.) 
tik-^'ir  (/.) 
yik-Zol'  (m,) 
tik-tb\'  (/.) 


§  2.]         The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  Kal, 


35 


(Plural.) 

'masc.  UpblQ'p 
^*  ^  fern.      ]ri^^ip 


3. 


I  :'|T 


ka-Zal'-nu. 
k'^al-tem' ' 
k'fal-ten' 
ka-riu' 


(Plural.) 


(102) 


nik-Zol' 
tik-flu  (m.) 

tik-^ol'-nah  (/.) 
yik-fW  {m.) 

tik-tol'-nah  (/.) 


Observe  that  in  the  Perfect  the  persons  are  formed  103 
by  adding  certain  suffixes,  or  affirmatives  {ti,  td,  &c.) 
to  the  third  person  or  root. 

a)  These   suffixes  are  fragments  of  the  personal  104 
pronouns ;  ti,  td,  t,  nil  are  added  without  any  change 

in  the  voivels  of  the  root  {kdtal-ti,  -ta,  -t,  nu). 

b)  Before  the  suffixes  tern',  ten'  (both  accented),  the 
first  vowel  of  the  root  [Kamets)  is  changed  into  SWva 
[kHal-iem ,  -ten').  Before  ah,  u,  the  second  vowel 
(Pathakh)  is  changed  into  Sh'va,  the  Kamets  being 
retained. 

The  Imperfect  (or,  as  many  Grammarians  call  it,  io5 
the  Future)  is  formed  hy  prefixing  certain  fragments 
of  the  personal  pronouns  to  the  radical  letters,  which 
are  then  pointed  with   Sh'va,   and  Kholem,   nearly 

always  written  defectively  {Ftol,  bb\)).  The  prefixes 
are  for  the  singular  (1)  e-  [X],  (2)  f-,  (3)  y'-,  masc; 

f-,  fem.  For  the  plural,  (1)  n'-,  (2)  t'-,  (3)  y'-,  masc; 
f-,  fem.  And  the  second  sing,  fem.,  both  second  per- 
sons plural,  and  the  third  plural  fem.  have  also  a 
suffix:  i  (V)  for  thoti,  fem.;  u  (1)  for  ye  and  they, 
masc. ;  ndh  (H^)  for  ye  and  they,  fem.    For  the  forms 

that  have  the  prefixes  i,  it,  ^JOp  is  shortened  into  b^p; 

The  prefixes  of  the  Imperfect  (except  Vi)  properly  io6 

take  Sh'va;  but  as  two  consonants  standing  together 
cannot  both  take  vocal  Sh^va,  the  Sh'va  of  the  prefix 
is  changed  into  Khirek.  Aleph  properly  takes  Khateph 
Segol  (K) ;  this  is  changed  into  Segol, 


36  The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  Kal,      [ch.  2. 

107  Tl^e  meaning  of  the  tenses  will  be  explained  when  we  con- 
sider the  verb  more  regularly.  At  present  the  pupil  is  to  ob- 
serve, that — 

a)  The  Hebrew  Perfect  denotes  a  completed  action,  and  is 
usually  translated  by  our  Vcrfect,  or  Perfect  definite,  or  Plu- 
perfect:  made,  did  make :  have  made;  had  made. 

b)  The  Imperfect  denotes  an  unfinished  action,  and  is  usually 
translated  by  the  Future;  sometimes,  especially  in  general  as- 
sertions, by  the  Present. 

Exercise  13. 

108  a)  Write  down  in  English  letters  the  two  following 
tenses  of  1\jp  pakad,  to  visit  (with  the  English  of 

each  person). 


Perfect  (or  Preterite). 

, ^ > 

(Sing.) 

;     :'~  T 

ip3 

'-T 

t';  t 

(Plural.) 

DmpD 


•nra 


thou  (m.) 
thou  (f.) 

he 
she 

we 

ye  (m.) 

ye  (f.) 

they 


Imperfect  (or  Future  *). 


(Sing.) 

lpH)i^ 
npsji 

ipS)^ 

(Plural.) 
"TpS)J 

npH)!n 
nj-rpsn 


I 

thou  (m.) 
thQU  (f.) 

he 

she 

we 
ye  (m.) 

ye  (f.) 
they  (m.) 

they  (f.) 


b)  Write  down  in  Hebrew  and  English  letters  the 
Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  ")pti^  shamar,  to  keep;   and 

^J13  cathabh,  to  write, 

-  T 

*  Gesenius,  after  the  old  Grammarians,  called  it  the  Future. 
Dr.  Lee  calls  it  the  Present;  Ewald  and  Rodiger,  the  Imperfect. 


§  2.]  The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  Kal, 


37 


Vocabulary, 


To  be  angry,  ^)ip,  ka-tsaph'. 

To  keep,  to  guard,   to  watch, 

*1D^>  sha-mar. 

-   T 

To  lie  down,  2,^"^*  sha-chabh'. 

A  king,  *?T7D,  me'-lech. 
To  reign,  '•\7l2f  ma-lach'. 

—    T 

To  cease,  to  abate,  pDU),  sha- 

thak'. 
To  dwell  with,  ]2^,  sha-chan'. 
To  mix,  to  mingle,  ^Vf2f  nia- 

5ach'. 
To  pour  out,  to  anoint,  TTD^. 

na-sach'. 
To  cut  off  or  down,  /1"13,  ca- 

rath'. 
To  spread,  U^13,  pa-ras'. 

-T 

To  rage  (tumultuously),  ti^jn, 

—  T 

ra-gash'. 
Pharaoh,  ni^"lD,  Par-^oh. 

Discretion,  counsel  (in  a  bad 
sense,  contrivance),   nDTQ, 

m'zim-mah  (awd,    za-mam, 
to  devise). 


Over -thee,  TT**^^,  i>a-le-cha.       109 

Strife,   contention,    ^'nQ(av), 
ma-don  (d^n,  to  plead). 

Wisdom,    nODrrCw),    khSch. 
mah  (kha-cham,  to  be  wise). 

Cunning,  prudence,  HDI^  (^)» 

i^or-mah    (i)a-ram,     to    be 
subtle). 

Wine,  ]*''»,  ya-yin. 
Upon,  ^)J,  TaX. 
Zion,  pJi^J,  Tsiy-yon. 
Twigs,  D^^r^r,  zal-zal-lim. 
A  fool,  ^>p3,  c'^il. 

Folly,  rh^i^,  iv-ve'-leth. 
A  covenant,  /T»12,  b'rith. 
WhyF  nD^?,  lam -mah? 

T  T 

Nations,   Gentiles,   D"*!])*    go- 
yim. 


Jl^'H^l  D12y  ^6  made  a  covenant,   as   refivuv  opKia  (Horn.), 

•  ;  ~T 

from  the  cutting  up  of  the  victims  offered  when  a  covenant  was 
made. 


E 


38 


The  Perfect  and  Imperfect  of  KaL    [ch.  2.  §  2. 


Exercise  14. 
no      Translate  the  following  sentences — 

a)  HDTD  2     :  r^V'^B  ^nip^  1 
T :  -  T  '  V  T  :    • 

''/ijDii^      HD^n      •'^^^  6 

•  a;-  T  T  :  T  •  -; 

a     :  |T  TT  '-T  |T   ;    |T 

"?I^D  ^j;npp^  "':^5  lo    :  d;^:i 


:  nnBH 


1  yik-tsoph  Par-i?oh. 

2  m'zim-mah  tish-mor  i?a-le- 
cha.  3  sha-chabh-ta.  4  yim- 
I'chu.  5  yish-tok  ma-don. 
6  *ni  khoch-mah  sha-chan-ti 
i?or-mah.  7  ma-5ach-<i. 
8  ma-s'chah  ya-yin.  9  1am- 
mah  rag'-shu  go-yim  ? 
10  ^ni  na-5ach-ti  me'-lech  i)al- 
Tsiy-yon.  1 1  c'^il  yiph'ros 
iv-ve'-leth.  12  nich-roth  haz- 
zal-zal-lim.  13  ca-r'thu  haz- 
zal-zal-lim.  14  ech-roth  b'rith. 
15  tish-mor  hab-b'rith. 


5)  1.  I  have  mixed  the  wine.  2.  We  have  made  the  cove- 
nant. 3.  Ye  (m.)  have  anointed  the  king.  4.  I  shall  rage. 
5.  We  raged.  6.  We  shall  rage.  7.  Why  do  ye  (/.)  rage  ? 
8.  I  shall  keep  the  covenant. 


Chap.  III.   §1.    Gender  of  Substantives,  Adjectives, 

111  The  Hebrew,  like  all  other  Semitic  languages,  has 
only  two  genders,  the  masculine  and  the  feminine. 

112  The  masculine  has  no  peculiar  termination.     The 
feminine  terminations  are — 

«)  H-  (the  most  common). 

b)  Jl_  (unaccented) ;  after  a  guttural  /!_. 


CH.  3.  §1.]   Gender  of  Substantives.   Adjectives,       39 

(Rarer  forms;  for  reference.) 

c)  /!>-,  Jl^  n\  113 

d)  Jn_  often  in  proper  names  of  the  Phoenicians  and 

adjoining  tribes. 

e)  Jl_  (almost  exclusively  poetical). 

T 

/)  X_  (Aramaean  for  H-:  chiefly  in  later  writers). 

T  T 

g)  H—  (weakened  from  H-)  '> — very  rare. 

T 

h)  H— *"   (unaccented). 

T 

*)  HD-  (in  poetry). 

T   T 

The  names  of  countries  and  ^oz^^?25  are  also  usually  114 
feminine,  and  the  names  of  those  members  that  are 
in  pairs  (as  the  hands,  eyes,  ears,  &c.) . 

Proper  names  are  not  distinguished  by  any  peculiar  115 
endings  to  mark  the  sex.  Some  feminines  are  formed 
from  the  corresponding  masculines  by  appending  a 
feminine  termination  ;  but  in  the  case  of  animals,  the 
two  sexes  often  have  a  peculiar  name  (as  bull,  cow  in 
English) ;  and  many  names  of  animals  denote  both 
sexes,  as  p'Q^  camel.  &c.     Even  some  names  of  ani- 

^  T  T  ■' 

mals  with  feminine  terminations  denote  the  male  as 
well  as  the  female :  e.  g.  H^V  (yonah),  dove. 

The  adjective,  when  used  attributively,  follows  its  116 
substantive.     If  the  substantive  has  the  article,  so 
has  the  attributive  adjective.     An  adjective  without 
the  article  following  a  substantive  with  one,  is  the 
predicate,  the  copula  {is,  was,  &c.)  being  omitted. 

So  in  Greek — 

ri  yvvi)  r)  Ka\r],  the  beautiful  woman.  117 

^  yvvr/  KoXr],  the  woman  is  beautiful. 

Feminine  nouns,  both   such  substantives  as  have  118 
corresponding   feminine   forms,   and   adjectives,   are 
usually  formed   by  adding  H-,   sometimes  r\--,  to 

the  masculine. 

a)  Masculines  in  H-  form  their  feminine  by  chang-  US 

ing  H-  into  11-.    Jl};i.  nv'l  (ro-yeh,  ro-;^ah). 
E  2    ^ 


40  Gender  of  Substantives,   Adjectives,     [ch.  3. 

(119)       b)  Those  that  end  in  Kheth  or  Ayin  take  the  fern, 
in  D-l  (instead  of  Jl--i). 

120  The  changes  made  in  the  vocalisationhy  appending 
the  terminations  cannot  be  explained  at  present: 
only  observe — 

1)  a  in  the  penult  is  changed  into  Sh'va  when  H—  is  added : 
^n-l,   nSlil  (gadol,  g'dolah). 

2)  The  fern,  from  a  noun  with  the  vowels  e'-e,  takes  a-a, 
"n /D.  713/6  (me'-lech,  mal-cah) :  the  reason  is,  that  the 
original  form  of  (e.  g.)  7tOp  was  7J0p  (with  Pathakh). 

Vocabulary, 


121  King,  ^bi,  me'-lech. 

Small,  \i:ip,  ka4an'.     HiltDp, 

k'^an-nah  (/.)• 
To  rule,  b^!2,  ma-shal. 

—     T  ■    ', 

A  youth,  lad,  "T^J.  na'-i^ar. 
Good,  2iZ0,  tbhh.  ■"''' 

Father,  ^^,  abh. 

T 

Man,  t£^>^^,  ish. 
Brother,  Hhi.  akh. 

T 

Strong,  liBIl,  gib-bor. 
Sharp,    "in,    khad.        TVin, 

khad-dah  (/.). 
Diligent,     '^^^H*,     kha-ruts. 

n:ir)n>  kh^r^-zah  (/.). 

Sincere,  honest,  D/n  ())),  tarn. 

T 

A    (bright)    spot  on  the  skin, 
> 
JTin^l)  ba-he'-reth. 


White,    ]n^,    la-ban.     H^lJ^, 

I'ba-nah  (/.).  • 
Boy,  nbl  ye'-led; 

Girl,  ni?"',   yal-dah   (ya-lad, 

to  beget). 
iJerf,  D'^^^,  D*7^*,  a-dom. 

T  T 

Horse,  D^D>  stis; 
Mare,  ilD^D)  5u-sah. 

T 

']''3li^,  sac-cin. 

^Arm/e-j  j^'pj^Q  (aw),      ma- 

w     "che'-leth. 
To  cut,  "1T2),  ga-zar. 

—  T 

To  grow,  bl^,  ga-dal. 
Scholar,  l^fQ^jn  (a),   tal-mid. 

nTD*?;^,  tkl-mi-dah  (/.). 
T  •  ;  ~ 

To  slaughter,  ^r\1l}»  sha-kha^. 


Properly  sharpened,  fr.  y^n. 


§  2.]  Formation  of  the  Plural, 

(Eng.)    The  boy  is  good. 

Ul)  The  boy  he  ,900c?. 
vneD.;|^2)   The  boy  good. 

He    J^rin,  hu«. 
She  NM,  hi». 


41 


122 


Exercise  15. 

«)-)^|n2:]^jj  Kin  i^'ii  1 
112:1  Kin  n^n  4      :pr 

T    T  ""T 

V  V   ~    ~  T  '     T 

V  V  —  T  't  V  V  T  T  ; 

n^^_^  11  ob^  in  r?"^  10 


1  hay-ye'-led  hti"  ka-tan.  123 

2  han-na'-i>ar  hu"  ^obh. 

3  ha-abh  h^"  zaken.   4  ha-akh 
hu"  gib-bor.         5  ha-ish  tarn. 

6  hab-ba-he'-reth  I'ba-nah. 

7  ye'-led  ka-^an.  8  hay-ye'-led 
hak-ka-ian.  9  hay-ye'-led 
ka-^an.  10  sac-cin  khad 
yig-zor.  11  yal-dah  k'/an-nah  ^ 
tig-dal.  12  tal-mi-dah  kh'ru-ijp 
tsah  til-mad.  13  ma-*che'-leth 
khad-dah  tish-kha^ 


b)  1.  The  little  girl  will  mix  wine.     2.  The  red  wine.     3.  The 
*wine  is  red.     4.  The  knife  is  sharp.     5.  They  grew.     6.  Ye 
^{pl.)  will  grow.     7.  The  diligent  scholar.     8.  The  scholar  is 
diligent. 

Chap.  III.    §  2.   Formation  of  the  Plural. 

A.  Masculine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  D"*-^  124 
[im')  to  the  singular  f- 

a)  Nouns  in  H-  [eh]  throw  away  this  termina- 
tion before  the  D**-  is  appended. 

*  The  Imperfect  of  an  intransitive  verb  has  usually  Pathakh 
for  its  second  vowel,  instead  of  Kholem,  in  its  dissyllabic  forms. 

f  The  plural  termination  is  sometimes  written  defectively,  as 
in  Gen  i.  21 :  DJ^^-TI  {tan-ni-nim). 

E  3 


42  Foymation  of  the  Plural,  [ch.  3. 

125  B.  Feminine  nouns  form  their  plural  by  adding  JIT 

{6th)  to  the  singular. 

a)  If  the  singular  ends  in  ath,  eth,  ah  (/l- 
jn_,  pf-),  these  terminations  are  changed  into 
D")  {6th). 

b)  If  the  singular  ends  in  Uh  {Pi\),  the  plural 
ends  in  iy-yoth  (Jl'lV)* 

c)  If  the  singular  ends  in  Hth  (Jl^),  the  plural 
ends  in  uy-yoth  (Jl*)"-). 

Examples, 

126  Singular.      Plural.      Meaning.      Singular.  Plural. 
A.            D^ID       D^D'ID    1     horse              siis  sus-iva. 

a)   n^ti^D      D''i^D    '    double,        mish-neh       mish-nim 
*  •  '     I    second 

b'er  b'e-roth 

t'hillah  t'hil-loth 

ig.ge'-reth       ig-g'roth 

<ab-ba-rath    /ab-ba-i?6th 
:i^ibh-rith    i)ibh-riy-y6th 

mal-chuth      mal-chuy- 
yoth 

127  The  addition  of  the  plural  terminations  causes  cer- 
tain changes  of  such  vowels  as  are  mutable;  of  which 
the  following  principal  changes  will  be  sufficient  for 
the  pupil  at  present. 

a)  a  or  e  o(  the  penult  (whether  long  or  short  [t,  -, 
",  or  v])  is  usually  changed  into  simple  Sh'va, 
or,  after  a  guttural,  into  Khateph  Pathakh  (-:), 
when  the  word  becomes  a  trisyllable. 

This  arises  from  the  transfer  of  the  accent  to  the  final 
syllable,  which  causes  the  antepenult  to  be  pronounced 
short. 


B.         -INB 

a)  riynr\ 

T    •    ; 

Jinny 


Plural. 

Meaning. 

D>p!1D 

j      horse 

D^^i^p 

!     double, 
second 

rinh^n 

well 

D)br(r\ 

\ 

i      hymn 

(of  praise) 

nnili;^ 

letter 

ni^rn^ 

ring 

nvnao^ 

Hebrewess 

m:ibr2 

\  :  - 

kingdom 

1 

§  2.]  Formation  of  the  Plural,  43 

b)  a  or  e  {-  or  •••)  in  the  final  syllable  of  a  word  is  (l27) 
changed  into  d  (t), 

He„ce(by«,6)wehave{j;|'|,.k;taUm. 

(Nouns  of  these  forms  are  of  very  frequent  occurrence. 
Observe  that  their  plurals  are  alike.) 

c)  So  nouns  ending  in  *•--,  from  verbs  Lamed  He, 

change  Khirek  into  Kamets,  and  end  in  d-yim 
[pHi,pHd-yim). 

d)  Feminines  with  e  short  { ••• )  in  the  penult,  change 
it  into  d  (t)  in  the  plural. 

(In  other  respects  the  feminine  undergoes  little  change 
in  the  formation  of  the  plural,  because  the  necessary  vowel 
changes  have  already  been  made  on  appending  the  femi- 
nine termination.) 

e)  Nouns  in  d'-veth,  d'-yith  (DI-j  •'^y?  contract 
these  syllables  into  (Jl%  IV-)  6th,  efh,  before 
appending  the  plural  termination  im, 

f)  Nouns  defective  from  verbs  with  double  Ayin, 
dagesh  the  final  consonant  before  im  is  added, 
and  shorten  the  preceding  vowel ;  changing  d, 
e,  o  into  a,  e,  u  respectively. 

g)  Vowels  that  have  their  homogeneous  vowel-letter 
quiescent,  are  amongst  those  that  are  immutable,  and 
therefore  remain  in   the   plural :    e.  g.  a,  e,  i,  o,  u 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Examples, 

Masculine. 

Meaning. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

nan 

T    1* 

Dnnn 

•   T    • 

word 

da-bhar 

d'bharim 

DDri 

D^QDn 

wise 

kha-cham 

kh»cha-mim 

VS^ 

d^:d^ 

neighbour 

sha-chen 

sh'che-nim 

••  T 

D^'p;^y 

sluggard 

i>a-tsel 

)>nse-lim 

T  •• 

D^J^: 

a  cluster  of 
grapes 

)>e-nabh 

i^'na-bhim 

128 


44 

(1.28) 


Formation  of  the  Plural, 


Singular. 

Plural. 

i?\ 

"^y^ 

any: 

•  T     • 

jn;^ 

•     T 

Ai 

Q'-O'?. 

^^^^♦(av) 

D^ii'pD 

prjt(ad) 

•  •   T 

It^Ud) 

U]^t 

rycd) 

Dny 

n5  (h) 

•    T  ' 

m^^Q 

D^^I^p 

'tt  ; 

nkpiicoiy) 


T-; 


n^it 


w   I 


(a;)  n'ln^^^ 


Meaning. 
king 

lad 
house 

olive 

inn 

shield 

tooth 

goat 

a  kid 

double, 
second 

Feminine, 
justice 

handmaid 
counsel 
crown 

coat 
remnant 


Singular, 
me'-lech 

na-i)ar 
ba-yith 

za'-yith 
ma-16n 
ma-gen 

shen 

g'di 
mish-neh 

ts'da-khali 

shiph-khah 

i)e-tsah 

X'^'-te-reth 

c'tho'-neth 

sh'e-rith 

she-rith 


[CH.  3. 
Plural, 
m'la-chim 

n'i^a-iim 
ba-tim 

ze-thim 
m'lo-niin 

ma-gin- 

nim** 

shin-na'-yim 

i^iz-zim 

g'da-yim 

mish-nim 


ts'da-koth 

(righteous  acts) 
sh'pha-khoth 

i?e-ts6th 

ys^-t^-voih. 

cut-to-noth 
sh'e-riy-yoth 


129  a)  Some  masculine  substantives  have  a  plural  of 
the  feminine  form,  in  6th;  and  (^),  vice  versa,  some 
feminines  a  plural  of  the  masculine  form^  in  im.  In 
both  cases,  however,  the  gender  of  the  singular  is 
usually  retained  in  the  plural.  Such,  for  instance,  are — 


*  p7,  \im,  to  lodge. 

X  l^ti^j  sha-nan,  to  sharpen. 

~  T 

II  Yy>,  ya-i^ats,  to  counsel. 
**  Obs.  a  in  antepenult. 


t  ]Ji),  ga-nan,  to  cover. 
H  li^Ii^j  sha-ar,  to  remain. 


§  2.]  Formation  of  the  Plural. 


45 


father 

abh 

name 

shem 

voice 

kol 

word 

mil-lah 

dove 

y6-nah 

a-bhoth 
she-moth 
ko-loth 
mil-lim 
yo-nim 


130 


Some  nouns  have  both  a  masculine  and  feminine  131 
termination  in  the  plural,  as — 

n^^  I  u^r}V,  ri\r\v  11  '*^^  11  ^^th  li^it-tim,  i?it-t6th. 

In  adjectives  and  participles  the  plural  endings  im  and  4th  are  132 
confined  to   the   masculine  and  feminine  genders  respectively. 
D^^iJO  <6-bhim  (boni),  good  (masc.) :  JIOIIO  ^6-bh6th  (bonae), 

good  (fern.)' 

So  in  substantives  from  the  same  stem,  when  the  terminations  133 
denote  the  different  sexes :   D''J2  ba-nim^  sons;  JliJ^l  ba-noth, 

daughters. 

Exercise  16. 

Write  down  in  Hebrew  and  English  letters,  the 
plural  (with  and  without  the  definite  article)  of  the 
following  nouns — 


A  way, 

A  child, 
A  lie, 
A  fool, 

A  vineyard, 
A  part, 
A  proverb. 


^'T]  de'-rech. 

"h^  ye'-led. 

^T3  ca-zabh. 

7^1  na-bhaU 


T  T 

> 


D13    cS'-rSm. 
\hn    khe'-lek. 
7*^Q    ma-shal. 


A   cluster  "\ 
of  grapes,} 


22^    i^e-nabh. 

T" 

A  hypocrite,     t]^r7    kha-neph. 


Afool,  ^03    c'-sil.       134 

A  tongue,  ]Wp    la-shon. 

A  garment,     TwD^     sim-lah. 


A  lamb. 

People, 
nation. 


'^l?    ce'-bh6s. 
D^(d)    i^am. 


A     thresh-^ 
old,    step  \    ^^...       V.  t, 
before     a[    ^P^^^     ^^P^' 
door, 

A  bear. 


"J 


A  nest, 
a  cell. 


] 


n^(d)     dobh. 
^[p(d)    ken. 


46 


Participles  of  Kal. 


[CH.  3. 


Chap.  III.    §  3.   Participles  of  Kal  with  their /em- 
nine  2ia&  plural  forms. 

135  The  verb  in  Kal  has  two  participles :  one  active,  in 
o-e ;  another  passive,  in  d-ui  as  ko-tel,  kd-tul. 

136  Their  forms  for  gender  and  number  are  (to  take 
the  participles  of  kd-tdl  as  examples) — 

Active. 

Sing.        ^lOp        rhhh  {orD^^h)     ko-te]        ko-^e'-leth 

Plur.    D^7Z0p       D'bW  ko-riim    ko-t'loth. 


Passive. 

Sing,    bmp     nh)::i\) 


ka-^ul       k7<i-lah 
k'/u-lim    k'/u-16th 


137  The  participle  is  often  used  as  a  predicate  to  ex- 
press (usually)  the  Present  tense. 

138  A  participle,  alone  or  with  the  definite  article,  is 
equivalent  to  he  who —  with  the  verb  (like  6  jSouXo- 
ILLevog  =:  he  who  wishes,  in  Greek) ;  but  it  may  denote 
any  tense :   (73j   no-phel  =  he  that  falls,  or  he  that 

has  fallen,  or  he  that  will  fall),  though  it  has  most 
frequently  the  meaning  of  the  Present. 

Vocabulary. 


139  Counsel,   H^tQ  («'«'),    m'zim- 

T  •  ; 

mah. 
Herd,  oxen,  ^p^,,  ba-kar. 

'tt 

River,  inX  na-har. 
To  rule,  7^0,  ma-shal. 

—    T 

Wives,     U^WI     (/•    with     m. 

•    T 

term.). 


To  judge,  tOBti^,  sha-pha^. 
A  judge,  I03iti^,  sho-phe^ 
Light,  luminary,  'y\i^'0,  ma-6r, 

T 

pl'  rh^'O,  m'o-roth. 
To    surround,     ^^D  (d),     5a- 

~  T 

bhabh. 
Garden,  ]])  (d),  gan. 


7ti^iD  or  7ti^D,  mo-shel,  ruling:  ruler. 


§  3.]  Participles  of  Kal, 

Exercise  16. 

•  T  ;   ~  '      ;  •       '  V  V  ~ 

T  -  ;  •         •  T  - 

nmn  12   :]bi!)  "^^^^l:D^  n 

T  T  —  't  T    — 

Qn^>  13         tiin  niDPr 

U'T'^v  15    :npS;*D^ijnn 
D^'^:  16        :r\\T  Dnri 


47 


1  ham-me'-lech  yim-loch.  140 

2  ham-m'la-chim.  3  ham- 
mal-cah  thim-loch.  4  ham- 
mS-shel  yim-shol.  5  ham-mo- 
she'-leth  tim-shol.  6  hara- 
mo-sh'lim  yim-sh'lu.  7  hash- 
sho-ph'/im  yish-ph'/u.  8  hal- 
la-bhi"  yl^r6ph.  9  ham-ma-6r' 
hag-ga-dol'.  10  ham-m'o-roth' 
hag-g*d6-lim.  11  ham-ma-6r' 
ka-^on'.  1 2  han-na-har'  ha5- 
50-bhebh  hag-gan'.  13  y'la- 
dim  k'^an-nim  yig-d'lu. 
14  tal-mi-dim  h"-riits-tsim 
yil-m'du.  1 5  sac-ci-nim  khad- 
dim  yig-z'ru.  16  na-shim 
tam-moth. 


a)  1.  Write  down  the  plural  of- 


141 


1p3,  ba-kar,  herd;  oxen. 

'tt 

in  J  na-har,  river:  pi.  both 

■^  "^  im  and  6th. 


7p^   she'-kel,  shekel. 
]2|   gan  (d),  a  garden. 


b)  Translate  into  Hebrew  (using  both  Hebrew  and 
English  letters)  — 

1.  The  sharp  knives  will  cut.  2.  The  gardens  are  small. 
3.  The  small  gardens,  4.  The  shields  are  large.  4.  The  knife 
is  sharp.     5.  The  knives  are  sharp.     6.  The  rulers. 

c)  Write  down  the  Perfect,  Imperfect,  and  the  two 
participles  with /em.  s.  and  plur.  m.  and/,  of  shathal, 
to  plant. 

f^  The  th  (Jl)  will  become  t  {rS)  when  a  consonant  imme-  142 
diately  precedes  it. 

d)  \.  The  great  rivers.  2.  The  rivers  are  great  ("ones).  3.  The 
clusters  are  small.    4.  The  great  cluster.     5.  'J'he  dogs.     6.  The 


48  The  Dual  Number.  [ch.  3. 

(142)  little  lambs.    7-  Gardens.     8.  The  gardens  are  large.     9.  The 
rivers  which  surround  the  gardens. 


Chap.  III.   §  4.    The  Dual  number, 

143  The  Dual  number  of  substantives  (to  which  that 
number  is  confined)  denotes  two  of  the  things  in 
question.  It  is  formed  from  the  singular  by  adding 
ayim;  but  the  final  H  of  a  feminine  noun  is  changed 
into  D  before  the  termination  is  added.  The  SI  of 
the  termination  D-  remains. 

144  The  Dual  number  is  nearly  confined  to  natural  or 
artificial  objects  that  exist  in  pairs;  or  either  are,  or 
are  conceived  to  be,  double :  e.  g.  the  two  legs,  hands, 
ears,  eyes  of  the  human  body :  a  pair  of  scales,  shoes, 
&c. ;  (the  space  of)  two  years  {—  biennium).  It  is 
also  found  in  the  numerals  2,  12,  200,  &c. 

145  Substantives   in  _!.    (i.  e.    segolate    substantives) 

now  and  then  take  the  same  vowels  in  the  root  as  the 
plural  does;  that  is,  Sh^va  and  Kamets  (-r)?  but 
usually  contract  the  two  syllables  with  Segol  into 
one  with  Pathakh, 


Vocabulary, 


146  Sing. 

Dual. 

T 

DV 

d;dv 

•  -  :  \  : 

n.^ 

D'^IPl 

D>^Sp  \\ 

br^ 

o:^n 

"^n 

^tiv.i 

Sing, 
yad 
yom 

sa-phah 
n'kho'-sheth 

ke  -ren 


rS'-gel 


Dual. 

ya-da-yim 
yo-ma-yim 

s*pha-tha'-yim 
n'khiishta'-yim 

kar-na-yim "] 
k'ra-na -yim  / 

rag-la-yim 

na.i>»la-yim 


Meaning. 

hand;  two  hands. 

day:    two  succes- 
sive days 
(=biduum). 

lip:  two  lips, 
fetter:  two  fetters. 


horn:  two  horns, 
foot:  two  feet, 
shoe  ;  pair  of  shoes. 


§4.] 

77ie  Dual  Number, 

^n^^ 

6-zen 

6z-na'-yim  (83,  c) "] ! 

1?.^^ 

D^^mb 

mo-zen 

moz-na'-yim     j 

"\v: 

Q'^'-t? 

i^a-yin 

)^e-na'-yim 

"^ll 

D'?1? 

be'-rech 

bir-ca-yim 

^^* 

D]?^ 

aph 

ap-pa'-yim 

D^nj^^pt 

mel-kakh 

mel-ka-kha'-yim 

•  -    T 

sha-ma-yim 

49 

(^the  two)  ears.        (h6) 
pair  of  scales, 
eye;  {the  two)  eyes. 

knee;  {two)  knees, 
nose;  nostrils, 
tongs;  snuffers, 
heavens. 


Weak,  nS)")  (ff'  (131)  ra-pheh. 

V     T  T      T 

Straight,  '-)t''  (fr.  '^]D\  to  be 

T  T  ~  T 

straight),  ya-shar. 
Pan;  spoon,  C]3  /.  (d),  caph. 

Evil;  bad,  yi,  with  distinctive 

accent  p"l    (/.  n^"l),  rai>,  (partcp.  Kal). 

T  T     T 

ra-)^ah. 

Exercise  17. 

.  —  -J.  y.  ,- ..  y 

D^DJDDH  12  :Jli^li) 

.  - 1-  •  .  -  . 


Breeches,  DJDD  («)>  mich-nci5.    147 
Black,  '^fvi)i  sha-khor. 

T 

To  be  in  pain,  ^^^^,  ca-ebh. 

••    T 

Pained;  inpain,  ^J^i3,  c6-ebh 


1  hayyad  raphah.         2  hare'-    148 
gel  y'sharah.  3  hashshen 

coe'bheth,       4  haccaph  k'^an- 
nah.  5  haaph  g'd5lah. 

6  hayyadayim    raphoth. 

7  haragla'yim    y'sharoth. 

8  hashshinna'yim  co'bhoth. 

9  haccappayim   k'^annoth. 

10  hai^enayim     rai^oth. 
H  haappa'yim   g'doloth. 
12  hammichnasa'yim    sh'kho- 
roth.         13  hammelkakha'yim 
g'doloth.       14  hashshamayim 
m'sapp'rim. 


6)  1.  The  knees.     2.  The  evil  eyes.     3.  The  evil  eye.     4.  The 
eyes  are  evil.     5.  Black  breeches.     6.  Weak  hands. 

*  For  P)^St  fr.  C]i^^.  t  From  npb,  to  take  hold  of. 


50  The  Construct  State.  [ch.  3. 


Chap.  III.    §5.    The  Construct  State  {Status 
constructus), 

149  When  one  substantive  modifies  another  without 
being  in  apposition  to  it,  it  is  placed  in  the  relation 
of  a  genitive  case.  In  Hebrew,  the  genitive  case  of  a 
substantive  is  like  the  nominative,  but  the  substantive 
it  modifies  (the  governing  substantive,  as  we  should 
call  it  in  most  other  languages)  undergoes  some 
change  of  its  mutable  vowels. 

150  ^^W  The  governing  substantive  is  said  to  be  in 
construction,  or  in  the  construct  state. 

151  The  general  rules  for  the  change  of  vocalization 
produced  by  the  construct  state  are  these : — 

A.    In  the  singular. 

152  a)  Kamets  (a)   in  the  penultima  is  changed  into 

Sh'va ;  in  the  ultima,  mostly  into  Pathakh. 

b)  Tsere  [e)  in  the  penultima  is  mostly  changed  into 
Sh^va  when  the  ultima  has  Kamets  (a).  In  the 
ultima  it  is  generally  changed  into  Pathakh,  but 
usually  retained  after  -,  and  in  monosyllables. 

c)  The  feminine  termination  Jl-  (ah)  is  chaqged 
into  D-  (ath) :  the  other  feminine  terminations 
T)-,  r)\,  jy\,  -Hi  {eth,  ith,  nth,  6th)  are  immutable. 

B.   In  the  plural  and  dual. 

d)  U\,  U\-  [im,ayim)  are  changed  into  *'-  (e). 

153  There  is  often  a  further  vowel-change  in  the  con- 
struct state  of  the  plural,  and  a  contraction  of  a 
semi-syllable  (with  Sh^va)  with  the  following  syllable. 

154  Two  very  common  forms  of  verbal  derivatives  re- 
quire particular  attention  :  those  in  -.p-^  (da-bhar),  and 
(segolates)  in  __!_  (me'-lech).  Their  changes  are 
given  in  the  following  Table ; — 


§5-] 


The  Construct  State. 


51 


Singular. 


Absolute. 

T    T 

dabhar 
me'lech 


Construct. 
d'bhar 
me'lech 


Plural. 


(154) 


Absolute. 
d'bharim 

•  T  ; 

m'lachim 


Construct. 
dibhre 
malche 


Dissyllable  feminines  in  H-  which  have  a  mutable  155 

Kamets  or  Tsere  in  the  penult,  change  that  vowel  into 
SNva  by  the  general  rule  (153),  and  take  the  termi- 
nation ath  (/!-).      In  trisyllables  of  this  kind  with 

initial  Sh^va,  there  is  a  contraction  of  1 «  into  one 
syllable  in  t ;  as  ts'dd-kah,  construct  tsid-kdth :  pi. 
ts'dd'koth,  construct  tsid-koth^. 

The  complement  ■\  of  an  adjective  or  participle  also  156 
causes  the  governing  ?idi]eci\\Q  or  participle  to  assume 
the  construct  state.     Thus,  in  such  combinations  as 
would  express  in  Hebrew,  ^  the  pure  in  heart,'  '  void 
of  understanding,'  'fearing  the  Lord.' 


T 

TThB  to-rah 

T 

ini  dabhar 

T     T 

^B  pe'-leg 

TTI^  de'rech 

Tj;  i^ed  (V) 


b'^m  1DM2 
T    :        ~ 


m^5ar  hascel 

torath     Y'ho- 
vah 

dibhre       kh"- 
chamim 

palge  ma'yim 

de'rech]  jna'- 
darche    veth 

)^ed  *meth 


the  instruction  of  157 
wisdom. 

the   law   of  Je- 
hovah. 

words    of    wise 
men. 

brooks  of  waters. 

(the)  way  |  ^f 

death. 


ways 

awitness  of  truth. 


*  Compare  this  with  ttitttw,  yi'yvo/ictt,  which  arise  from  tts- 
7re-ra>,  yt-ys-vojuai. 

f  i.  e.  a  substantive  that  is  connected  with  it  objectively,  to 
complete  its  notion. 

X  D^D  only  in  plural  from  obsol.  '•Q.     In  constr.  ''D. 

f2 


52 


The  Construct  State. 


[CH.  3. 


(157)  r]9]i^  ivve'leth  U^bV^  D^i^ 


T    T 


•  T      ' ; 


ivve'leth  c'si-  m  the  folly  of  fools. 
lim  j 

i^"shan  hayir    |  the  smoke  of  the 
city. 

i)*dath  tsaddi- ;  ^Ae  congregation 
kira  1 1    of  the  just. 


A  dependent  genitive  may  have  another  genitive  dependent 
upon  it,  as  niH''  JlH^  tili^,   Cron  b'rith  Y'hovah),  the  ark 

of  the  covenant  of  the  Lord. 

158  As  a  general  rule  the  article  does  not  stand  before 
a  substantive  that  has  a  dependent  genitive^  since 
that  genitive  sufficiently  defines  the  word. 


159  Eden,  pj;,  i^e'den. 

Flute,  organ,  2,^)^,  i^ugabh. 
Jubal,  by\\  Y^bhal. 
Wilderness,    I^IIQ  («),  mid- 

bar. 
Judah,  T}1)T\\  Y'h^dah, 
Hair,  '^^'^,  sei^ar. 

T    •• 

Esau,  Vti;^,  i^esav. 

Palace,  temple,  T'DTIj  hechal. 

Sanctuary,    ti^'^pD  («)*    mik- 

dash. 
Brother,  J^i^,  akh. 

T 

Side,  '?r"T',  yarech  (lit.  thigh). 
Altar,  HHTD  («)»  mizbeakh. 
Shoulder,  P)in3  (constr.  P)r)3) 
catheph. 


Vocabulary. 

Blessing,  JlDIB  (w)>  b'rachah. 
-4  c?w^,  n"ll?p  (w)>  k'i^arah. 
Silver,  P)D3>  ce'seph. 
Cffue,  nn^D*  («wv),  m'i^arah. 
Machpelah,'  phBDD,    Mach- 

pelah. 
Corpse,  rw22f(.(^)>  n'bhelah. 
Fear,  n")')IlD  («w),  m'gorah. 

T         ; 

Wicked,  ^:^"|,  rasha^. 

T      T 

Jeremiah,  ^n''D"lS  Yirm'yahii. 

T  ;     ;• 

0/c?,  ]pT,  zaken.  "j 

The  elders,  D''JpT,  z'kenim.   | 
City,  -)>:i7,  )^ir.    * 
House,  TV^,  bayith(c5/r.JT'3,). 
Court,  l^jrij  khatser. 


t  73  J>  nabhal,  to  fall  of. 


§5.] 


The  Construct  State, 


53 


Exercise  18. 
«)  :mn^  na"7  2    t^-TV  "in:  l       l  n'har  i^eden 


rani  12   -b™  TOpn'ii 

np^ib '19  '  :"i7Ji^  *'"?.l!^^^"^ 
:nVn  >j|pr  20  '  -h^i'^'n 
n>;rr  22  '  -.mrr  '':5t^"2i 


2  d'bhar  160 
Y'bovah.       3  musar  Y'hovah. 
4  i^ugabh  Yubhal.        5  mid- 
bar  Y'hudah.     6  I'bhabh  ish. 
7  s'i^ar    i^esav.  8  hechal 

hammikdasb.  9  esheth 

heakh.  10  ye'rech  hammiz- 
beakh.  11  kbochmatb  adam. 
12  bircath  Y'hovab.  13  ka- 
i?^rath  ce'seph.  14  m'i^arath 
hammachpelah.  15  nibhlath 
ish.         16  tsidkath  adam. 

17  dibhre  Yirm'yahii. 

18  nab*re  i^e'den.  19  mu- 
sare  heabhoth.  20  zikne  hal^ir. 

21  sh'chene  habbayith  *. 

22  kh^tsere  hammikdash. 

23  birce  haish. 


h)  1.  Rivers.  2.  Rivers  of  the  earth.  3.  Words.  4.  The 
words  of  the  king.  5.  The  law  of  Jehovah.  6.  The  knees  of 
a  man.     7.  The  eyes  of  Esau. 

Chap.  IV.    §  1.    Suffixes  deflating  Possession. 

The   Hebrew  language  possesses  a  very  peculiar  I6i 
way  of  denoting  the  possessive  pronoun^  which  is 
this : — 

a)  Short  suffixes  (which  are  abridged  form's  of  the 
personal  pronouns)  are  attached  to  nouns  in  their 
construct  state,  with  which  they  cohere  so  firmly,  that 
the  noun  with  its  suffix  forms  a  single  word. 

h)  From  the  frequent  occurrence  of  these  forms,  and  the 
changes  of  vocalization  which  they  sometimes  occasion,  they 
may  be  considered  as  belonging  to  the  declension  of  Hebrew 
nouns. 


*  a  for  a,  from  the  effect  (to  be  explained  hereafter)  o{ pause. 

f3 


54  Suffixes  denoting  Possession.  [ch.  4. 

162      The  possessive  suffixes  in  their  most  usual  form 
are : — 

I.  For  Singular  Nouns. 


m. 


My 

Thy         TJ_ 
His-her    *) 


m.        f. 

i 

ech 
ahh 


— cha 


m. 


/. 


Our  ?)J 

Your  UD  ID 

Their  D-  ]- 


m.  f. 

Tit 

chem      chen 


am 


an 


II.  For  Plural  Nouns. 


•>_ 


My 

Thy        Tf''-     •^;_ 

His-her   V-     Jl^ 


ai 


e-cha  ayich 
av        e-ha 


Our  !)^'»_ 

Your  uy-  ]y- 

TheirUr}'^-     PV 


e-n^ 

e-chem  e-chea 

e-hem    e-hen 


163  The  suffixes  are  divided  into  grave  (or  accented) 
suffixes  {chem',  chen,  hem',  hen) ;  and  light  (or  un- 
accented) suffixes. 

164  Masculine  Noun. 

Singular. 
D^D    ^^Sy  0,  horse. 
''D^D   su-si,  my  horse. 
"^O^D   su-s'chsi,  thy  horse. 

^O^V   su-sech, 

thy  (f.)  horse. 

iD^D    su-so,  his  horse. 

HD^D   5u-sahh,  her  horse. 

T 
> 

•I^D^D   su.-se'-nu,our horse. 

DDDID   5u-s'chem', 
'•■  •  your  horse. 

pD^D    «u-5'chen', 
"  •  your  (f.)  horse. 

DDJ)0    5u-5am, 
"^  their  horse. 

^  their  (f.)  horse. 


Feminine  Noun.      * 

Singular. 

HD^D  56-sah,  a  mare. 

T 

''ilD^D  6'u-5a~thi,  my  mare. 

•    T 

^JID'ID  5-u-5a'-th'cha, 

•  '"^  thy  mare. 

"^DDID  5u-5a-thech, 

"  ^  ^%  (f.)  mare. 

iilDID  5^-5a-th6,  his  mare. 

T 

n/lDID  su-«a-thahh,        her 

\  "^  ware. 

•IJJID-ID  5^-sa- the'-nu, 

"  ^  owr  mare. 

03/^D.')D  5u-sath-chem', 

"  •  ~  your  mare. 

"prW^D  sn-sath-chen' , 

■*■  •  ~  your  (f.)  mare. 

DJID^D  5u-5a-tham, 

'"  "^  their  mare. 

]J1D1D  5u-sa-than, 

■^  ^  Meir  (f.)  mare. 


§!•] 


Suffixes  denoting  Possession. 


55 


Plural. 

D^DID   5u-5im,  horses. 

>D1D   5u-5ai,  my  horses. 

> 

^''D^D   5u-se-cha, 

thy  horses. 
> 

lyD^D    su-5a-yich, 

thy  (f.)  horses. 

VD^D   «u-5av,  his  horses. 

T 

n''D')D   5u-se-ha, 

"^    ■'  Aer  horses. 

> 

•1^''D1D   5u-5e'-nu, 

owr  horses. 

DD'^D-ID   «u-5e-chem', 
"  ■■  your  horses. 

]D''D^D   *u-5e-chen', 
■•■  **  your  (f.)  horses. 

DIT'D^D   su-5e-hem', 
•   "  their  horses. 

IIT'D^D   5u-se-hen', 
'"  "  their  (f.)  horses. 


Plural. 

JliD^D   5^-50 th,  mares. 

''Jl'lD^D    5U-56-thai, 
my  mares. 
> 
^^JliD^D   5u-s6-the-cha, 
thy  mares. 
> 

'^''JliD^D   5u-56-tha'-yich, 
thy  (f.)  mares. 

VJniD^D    5u.-s6-thav, 
"^  ^is  mares. 

n"'Jl')D^D   5u-56-the-lia, 
"^    "  her  mares. 

^Try\D^D   su-so-ihe'-nu, 
our  mares. 

DD''JliD1D   5u-56-the-chem', 
"    "  your  mares. 

P''JliD^D   5u-56-the-clien', 
"    "  your  (f.)  mares. 

DrC'JliD-ID   su-5o-the-hem', 
"   *"  their  mares. 

]n''/liD1D   5u-56-the-hen', 
•    "  their  (f.)  mares. 


165 


The  changes  in  the  form  of  the  plural  suffixes  arise  from  the  166 
blending  of  >—  (e),  the  termination  of  the  construct  state,  with 

the  proper  suffixes. 

a)  Nouns  in  eh  (PF-)  throw  away  eh,  and  for  6,  167 
his,  have  e-hu  pn-) :  as  j^a-le-hu,  his  leaf  (^Twy). 

b)  Nouns  in  i  with  Yod  quiescent  {^-),  from  verbs 

in  ah  {Lamed  He),  sound  the  Yac?  before  a  suffix 
with   initial   vowel:  ,as  HB,   p'n,  fruit ;    i^'lSj 

pir-yo,  his  fruit.  ^ 

c)  The  plural  termination  6th  (Di)  takes  e  (y  after 
it  to  support  its  suffixes. 


56  Suffixes  denoting  Possession.  [ch.  4. 


[Additional  Remarks  on  the  Suffixes  [G.]  *). 
168      I.  pers.  anu-  (^J_)  is  sometimes  found  (for  e-nw)  in  pause. 

T 

II.  pers.  -chdh  is   found,    rarely,    and    chiefly   with    short 
words,  for  'chd  (HD-  for  ^-)- 

(fern,  sing.)   dch  sometimes,  but   only  in  pause,  for  ech 
C!J_  for  n_). 

e-cheh  for  ech  (Nah.  2,  14),  (HD-  for  "?[_). 

e'-cht  is  found  now   and   then,   but   only  in   later 
writers  (e.  g.  Ps.  cxxxvii.  (j),  CJ for  ^_). 

III.  /?er5.  1)   sinff.  m.    ho    (sometimes),    e-hu   (rarely),   for  d 

(n,  J)n_  for  )). 
I" 

2)  fern.  sing.  Jl-  for  n_  (sometimes) :  i.e.  h  loses  its 

T  T 

guttural  pronunciation  f . 

3)  plur.  ahamX  for  am  (QH for  Q_). 

d'-mOf  only  in  poetry,  for  «m§  (iD_  for  D_). 

T  T 

fem.)  'hen'  but  rarely,  with  a  consonant  preceding, 
and  the  tone  (e.  g.  Gen.  xxi.  28,  Vbhad-d'hen' 

pin"?). 

a-K'ndh  antique  (n^H )  for  an. 

a'-A'wa^,  e-«a^,  both  a  few  times  for  a»  (JUH— ,  ilJ— )• 

T  ;    |-  T|V 


*  These  are  only  placed  here  for  future  reference, 
t  In  later  writers  even  written  J^_. 

X  In  pause  cul-ld'-ham  (DH^S),  2  Sam.  xxiii.  6. 

-|T\ 
§  Occasionally  in  very  small  words  (as  prepositions)  for  0 
(his) :  e.  g.  '\1±>  for  i':^. 


§'•] 


Suffioees  denoting  Possession, 


57 


Examples. 


T 

T     T 

T 

T  T 

rbyo  (f.) 

T  \ ; 


da-m^cha,  thy  (m.)  hlood. 
d'bha-ri,  my  word. 
d'bha-rai,  my  words. 
shu-i>a-16,  his  fox. 
z'ke-nech,  thy  (f.)  old  man. 
z'ke-ne-cha,  thy  (m.)  old  men. 
z'ke-ne-nu,  our  old  men. 

siph-rahh,  her  book. 
mo-th'chem',  your  (m.)  death. 
g'mal-lam,  their  camel. 


n"jH)p 

T  -  ; 

''Jli^-DD     s'gul-16-thai,  my  treasures. 


169 


03n^^  na-)^*re-chem',  your  (m.)  youths. 

•IJ^b  sal-le-nu,  OMr  basket, 

^ybv  5al-le-nu,  our  baskets. 

"•Jl^^D  cal-la-thi,  m^/  bride. 

•    T    - 

VJliJti^  sh'no-thav,  his  years. 

P^/llDti^  sh'mo-the-chen',  your  (f.)  names. 

]n''Jn')"lir>  to-ro-the-hen',  /^eir  (f.)  /aw5. 


The  vowel  changes,  produced  by  the  alteration  of  i7o 
accent  which  the  appended  suffix  occasions,  will  be 
fully  given  in  the  Paradigms  of  the  declensions :  we 
will  at  present  only  consider  two  important  classes : 


g)  dissyllables  with  a 


1 


l^'l,  da-bhar. 


^  l^for  each  vowel "^ 


b)  dissyllables  with  e  [^"^  '^'*^"  vuvvcij  ,_Lj^^  me'-lech  (penacute). 


(It  will  be  sufficient  to  give  one  example  of  a  grave  and  one  171 
of  a  light  suffix.) 


58 


171) 


a)  Sing. 

Plur. 

li)  Sing. 

Plur. 

a)  Sing. 
Plur. 

b)  Sing. 
Plur, 

Suffixes  denoting  Possession. 

'en,  4 

Absolute. 

Construct. 

Light  suffix. 

Grave  suffix. 

T    T 

'^^l 

nil    , 

D5"in^ 

Dnn'7 

ni-i 

~  T    ; 

DDnn"i 

# 

'U 

'^^bt^ 

^^t>^ 

ob/*;: 

^?'t>^ 

da'bhar 

d'bhar 

d'bhari 

d'bharchem' 

d'bharim 

dibhre 

d'bharai 

dibhrechem' 

me'lech  * 

me'lech 

malchi 

malc'chem' 

m'lachira 

malche 

m'lachai 

malcechem' 

Vocabui 

lary. 

172  Way,  1J-}"rf,  de'rech. 

Pleasantness,  D^^»  noi)am. 
Thou,  ^il^^J  attah. 
Glory,  "Ti^D,  cabhod. 

T 

Bach,    2^  (r),  gabh   (<v  Lat. 

gibbus?). 
Palace,  ~\ 
Temple,^"^?^'  ^^'^^^• 

Everyman,-^   ^,^^     .^^     (lit. 
Each  {one),]      ^^^^ 

A    sack,     r\nDt2i^>     amta- 
-  )-  ;  - 
khath. 

Commandment,  HliiD  («)>  mits- 

vah. 

Statute,  npn,  khukkah. 

't  \ 

Law,  min  («)j  torah. 


Upon,  bv*  i^al. 

To  keep,  "^OVJ,  shamar. 

~    T 

A  rite,  'IQ^D  («),  mishmar. 

T    ;     • 

To  open,  HJIB.  pathakh. 

-  T 

To  plough,  ^nn>'  kharash. 
Mountain,  "lHj  bar. 

T 

Silver,  l       > 
Money, p?^'  '^''^'^^- 
Tongue,  pt^'?,  lashon. 
Dog,  2b3,  ce'lebh. 
Weight,  bptD  («),  mishkal. 

't  I    ' 

Song,  *T>^,  shir. 

To  put  on  («  dress)  or  be  clothed 
ivith,    t^37,    labhash  (fut. 

-  T 

yilliash). 
Priest,  iris,  cohen. 

Testimony,  JllV'  i^edah. 


*  The  e'  {-^)  to  be  pronounced  with  the  obtuse  a  sound  of  e 
in  mhe,  or  e  in  there. 


§'■] 


Suffixes  denoting  Possession, 


59 


Exercise  19. 


a)  :''r)-1^'^  i3-)"7  1 

~        ••  :  ~    T  V  T  : 

•inns  5     *:  ?T  Jip  '^D^n  4 


nbiir>  6      :  innjppN^  ^''^^ 

'0''^?* 

^hnai^p 

•1  T 

^zr^j;  7 

T                       • 

^^^^1 

•^T^Jii^  8 
1  .,  -. , 

:*D>t^-|rT 

?f^;ii  npt^,^  9  , 

•Pli 

DH'on-Di'io 

•  '0'"?^ 

•-'niv  nn^^ 

1  darco  shamarti.  2  d'racheha  173 
darche-noi^am.    3  attah  Y'h5- 
vah  c'bhodi.      4  hechal  kod- 
sh'cha.  5  path'khu   ish 

amtakhto.  6  yishmor  mish- 
marti,  mitsvothai,  khukkothai, 
v'thorothai.  7  i^al-gabbi  kha- 
r'shu  khor'shim.  8  coh^necha 
yilb'shu  tse'dek.  9  yTshm'ru 
bhanecha  bh'rithi.  1 0  gam- 
b'nehem  yishm'ru  )>edothi. 

b)  1.  Write  down  in  Roman  characters,  and  give 
the  English  of — 

nOI^  15     n3-T^  14     DOII  13     •'3-)^  12      D3T1  u 

2.  Translate  into  Hebrew — 

1.  The  mountain  of  his  holiness.  2.  Thy  (m.)  ways  have 
we  kept.  3.  We  will  keep  the  ways  of  Jehovah.  4.  Our 
sacks.  5.  Your  (m.)  money.  6.  Its  (m.)  weight.  7.  Our 
money.     8.  The  tongue  of  thy  dogs.     9.  Your  (m.)  songs. 


My  silver. 
His  silver. 
Their  silver. 
Your  (m.)  silver. 
Thy  (/.)  silver. 
Their  (m.)  silver. 
Our  silver. 


Dogs.     The  king's 

dogs. 
My  dog. 
My  dogs. 
Their  dogs. 
Your  (/.)  dogs. 
His  dog.   ^ 
Her  dogs. 


Proverbs.     The    pro- 
verbs of  Solomon  f . 
Her  proverb. 
His  proverb. 
My  proverb. 
My  proverbs. 
Their  proverbs. 
Your  (/.)  proverbs. 


*  tC^lirfj   kho-resh  (partcp.  act.  of  kha-rash=),   one  who 
ploughs,  a  plougher. 


60  ..  Relations  of  Case.  [ch.  4. 

Chap.  IV.    §  2.    Prepositions  denoting  the  Relations 

of  Case, 

174  Dative] 

a)  The  relation  of  the  dative  case  is  expressed  by 
the  preposition  7  prefixed  to  a  noun,  and  co- 
hering with  it. 

b)  Sometimes  the  preposition  7^,  el  (of  which  7 
is  an  abbreviation),  is  used:  D")IlX~7h^5  (el- 
Abhram). 

175  Accusative]     The  accusative  is  either — 

a)  Hke  the  nominative,  and  therefore  to  be  known 
(as  in  EngUsh)  only  by  the  structure  of  the 
sentence ; 

b)  denoted  by  (n^^  or  "ilN^)  eth  or  eth-  (with 
Mahkeph)  :  before  suffixes  also  jlii^,  6th, 

These  prepositions  are  not  used  before  the  ace,  unless 
the  noun  is  defined  either  (1)  by  the  article,  (2)  or  by 
being  in  construct  state,  or  (3;  by  a  suffix,  or  (4)  from 
being  di.  proper  name. 

c)  The  ace.  of  the  place  towards  which  motion  is 
directed,  has  often  its  original  termination  H- 

(which  sometimes   denotes    the   place   where). 
The  preposition  b  is  also   sometimes  prefixed 

to  it. 

d)  The  accusative  alone  sometimes  denotes  in 
Hebrew  both  the  place  ivhither,  and  the  place 
where. 

e)  The  person  to  whom  motion  is  directed  has 
usually  the  preposition  71^  {el)  prefixed,  as  the 

place  whither  sometimes  has. 

f)  Both  the  ti?ne  when  and  the  time  hoiv  long  are 
also  denoted  by  the  accusative;  which  also 
denotes  relations  of  space  (how  wide,  how  deep, 
&c.)  and  other  adverbial  relations :  e.  g.  such 


§  2.]  Relations  of  Case.  «61 

as  are  expressed  in  English  by  as  to;  in  respect  (i75) 
of;  according  to ;  in. 

(See  remarks  on  the  use  of  3  in  the  next  §.) 

Ablative  Relation]  \>jq 

a)  The  ablative  relation  is  generally  denoted  by  ]Q. 

from  [of  1=  some  of;  ex],  which,  however,  is 
usually  abridged,  either  into  D  with  a  compen- 
sating Dagesh  in  the  initial  consonant  of  the 
word ;  or,  if  this  is  incapable  of  receiving  Da- 
gesh (i.  e.  is  a  guttural  or  Resh),  into  Q,  7ne. 
'"    But  f2  may  stand  before  H :  as  JO'inD  (Gen.  xiv.  23). 

b)  The  ]t2  is  seldom  written  at  length  as  a  separate  word, 
except  before  the  article. 

c)  The  relations  denoted  by  in,  at,  with,  are  also 
expressed  by  the  prepositional  prefix  ^. 

Expression  of  genitive  relations  by  ?].  The  relations  177 

of  belonging  to  or  being  possessed  by,  proceeding  from, 
and  the  like,  are  sometimes  expressed  by  the  pre- 
positional prefix  (of  the  dative)  7.  This  occurs  par- 
ticularly 

1)  after  an  indefinite  governing  noun,  when  its  indefiniteness 
is  to  be  marked  ; 

2)  after  a  noun  in  the  construct  state  which  has  already  one 
dependent  genitive ; 

3)  when  the  governing  noun  has  an  adjective  with  it; 

4)  after  specifications  of  number. 

The  7  denoting  possession  is  also  sometimes  pre-  178 

ceded  by  the  relative  pronoun  ^Ii^^5,  ichich.     Thus : 

rT'Ili^?  IV'^  \ik'i7\,    hatstson  »sher  I'abhiah  \_grex  qui  patri 

ejus:  sc.  erat'\y  (lit.  the  flock  which  [was]  to  her  father  =)  her 
father's  flock. 

With  respect  to  the  pointing  of  b',  V, 

a)  Their  regular  Sh^va  is  changed  into  Khirek,  when  179 

the  initial  consonant  of  the  vowel  to  which  they 

are  prefixed  has  Sh'va. 

G 

A 


62  Relations  of  Case,  [ch.  4. 

(179)  b)  Before  an  initial  vowel  with  a  Khateph^  they 
take  the  vowel  with  which  the  Khateph  is  com- 
pounded. 

c)  Before  monosyllables  or  penacute  *  dissyllables 
they  (as  Vav  also  does)  often  take  Kamets. 

d)  Before  the  article,  they  usually  displace  it,  and 
.  take  its  pointing. 

e)  Before    D\'i7i^    they    take    Tsere    (the    J«^    becoming 
quiescent)  \  and  before  ^1^^  Pfl^^fl^^;  because  the  Jews 

T    ; 

did  not  pronounce  this  sacred  name,  but  that  of  "»^*7J^ 

instead ;  to  indicate  which  they  gave  to  its  prefixes  the 
Pathakh  which  the  prefix  of  Adonai  would  have. 

180  Rule  c  does  not  ahvays  hold  good.  These  prefixes  take 
Kamets  (1)  before  infinitives  of  the  above-mentioned  form  (except 
before  the  genitive) ;  (2)  before  many  pronominal  forms,  and 
(3)  when  the  word  is  so  closely  connected  with  what  precedes, 
as  to  be  disconnected  from  what  follows. 


181 


T   V    T 

n"jnn 


Examples. 

I'da-vid,  to  David. 

eth  ha-a-rets,  the  earth. 

ethsha-ra-ki'-a)^,  the  expanse. 

ne-tse"  has-sa-deh,  let  us  go  out  into  the 
field. 

beth  a-bhi-cha,  in  the  house  of  thy  father . 

ba-bhe'-lah,  to  Babylon  {^omQ A 

times  :  in  Babylon).  \T\  localis 

ha-ha-rah,  to  the  mountain,      f  (local He). 

be-thah  y6-5eph,  into  Joseph's  house 
(where  obs.  that  it  follows  a  noun  in 
Stat,  constr.). 

li-sh'6'-lah,  to  Sheol. 

hay-yom,  (the  =)  this  day :  to-day. 

i^e'-rebh,  at  evening. 


*  i.  e.  those  that  are  Mitel;  i.  e.  have  the  accent  on  ihe  penult. 


§2.] 

niwn  nphri] 

VT-      .'-:v  { 


Relations  of  Case,  63 

she'-sheth  ya-mim,  (during)  six  days.        ( 1 8 1 ) 
hac-cis-se",  in  respect  of  the  throne, 
peh  e-khad,  with  one  mouth. 
min  ha-a'-rets,  from  the  earth. 
mits-ts'bha,  out  of  the  host. 
me-kha-zak,  from  the  powerful. 
ben  I'yi-shai,  a  son  of  Jesse's. 

khel-kath  has-sa-deh  l*bho-i?az,  a  portion 
of  the  field  of  Boaz. 

ben  e-khad  la-*khime'-lech,  one  of  the 
sons  of  Ahimelech. 

ba-kh*mish-shah  la-kh5-desh,  on  the  fifth 
of  the  month. 

bam-mish-pa?,  in  the  judgement  (=b'hara- 
mish-pa^. 

lam-me'-lech,  to  the  king. 
V"1K  /    la-a'-rets,  to  the  earth. 

'      V  T  T 

Y1>}21    ba-a-rets,  in  the  earth. 


To  create,  KHS,*  bara  *. 

TT 

Heavens,  U^iyi),  shama'yimt. 

•  -    T 

To  love,  ^ili^j  ahabh. 

-    T 

Dainty  meats,  |  D^ZpD(«)j  nia^ 


Dainties, 


i^am,  a,     (ta- 
5>am,  to  taste.) 


Stone,  pX,  S'bhen. 
Place,  DpD  (av),  makom 


Vocabulary. 

Master,'^ 

Lord.    Jl^^^«("),ad6n:. 

To  collect,  gather,  DJ^j  canas. 

Camel,  '^D-l,   {but  pLW^bt^^i), 
T  T  •  ~  ; 

gamal. 

No,  ]'>iji,  gn. 

Men  {pi),  U^MJ'^'^y  "nashim. 
There,  Q^,  sham. 

T 

> 

Grave,  l^p,  ke'bher. 


182 


*  Verbs  that  end  in  a  {^)  take  t  for  their  second  vowel. 
■\-  A  noun  of  the  dual  form  :  no  singular  in  use. 
X  D^n,  to  govern:  others  say,  aden,  a  base. 

g2 


64 


(182)  Simple,  ^JlH),  pethi,  jaZ.  D''>r)2) 
or  Q"'J>^jnS,  p'thayim  or 
p'tha-im. 

Garland,! 

Crown,    Jn;^^,llvyah. 

Grace,  "j 

Head,  ti^NI,  rosh. 
Mother,  QJ^,  em. 
Eternity,  D/i^j  )?61am*. 

T 

Isaac,  Esau. 

'  T  :  •  T  •• 


Relations  of  Case.  [ch.  4. 

Mercy,  "TDn*  khe'^ed. 


Par^,  ^iece,  "Itil.   ge'zer    (ga- 

zar,  /o  cm/)' 
To  cut,  to  divide,  1ti)>  gazar. 

—  T 

fSea,  Q'',  yam. 
Red  Sea,  PjlO'D**?  yam-siuph: 


1 


=  sea  of  weed. 

Inheritance,  rOH^^   na  kh'lah' 
T-:|- 

(nakhal,  to  acquire,  Sfc). 
Rebecca.  Jacob. 


Exercise  20. 


D'':;nh^,  D,:!i3  7  •.  u^  ir^r\ 

U'^iy^b  ]r\^  8  ":  nap^ 

:   •         ~  TIT 

'  A  •  •  •          '  ••                 —  •  • 


1    ^lohim     bara     eth     hash- 

shama'yim  ( jo).        2  Yitskhak. 

ahabh  eth  i^esav.     3  Ribhkah 

nath'nah        eth-hamma^i^am- 

mim.         4  Ya::)^kobh  lakakh 

meabhne    hammakom. 

5  ^lii^e'zer  lakakh  migg'malle 

^donav.       6  en  ish  mean'she 

habbayith  sham.  7  cones 

"bhanim  I'kibhro.      8  nathan 

liphthaim  i^ormah.       9  torath 

imm'cha    livyath    khen    I'ro- 

shecha(^).   lOhod^layhovah, 

*  L'i>6-lam  =in  sascula  sseculorum  {for  ever). 

•f  'loMm  takes  a  singular  verb. 

X  For  □''l^li^n,  from  its  being  in  pause  (i.  e.  at  the  close  of 

the  sentence),  the  effects  of  which   will  be  explained    in  the 
chapter  on  the  regular  verb.     It  will  be  indicated  by  (/>). 
§  Give  ye  thanks  (an  Imperative). 


§  2.]  Relations  of  Case,  65 


ci-fobh,    ci   Ti^olam   khasdo.    (l83) 
11     hodii     I'gozer    yamsuph 
ITgzarim.      12  nathan  artsara 
I'nach^ah. 


b)  The  heavens  of  Jehovah.  2.  From  the  heavens  of  Je- 
hovah. 3.  For  thy  (m.)  dog.  4.  For  thy  dogs.  5.  I  loved 
Rebecca.  6.  From  the  place.  7.  For  the  place.  8.  For  the 
camels.  9-  Stones.  10.  The  stones.  11.  He  took  stones  of 
the  field.  12.  He  took  stones  of  thy  field.  13.  He  took  of  the 
stones  of  my  field. 


Chap.  IV.    §3.    Other  prepositional  Prefixes.    Vav, 

1.   C  (3)  is  a  prepositional  prefix  meaning   like,  184 
as,  according  to  f. 

(The  rules  for  its  pointing  are  the  same  as  for  2I>  7.  179). 

V^  (1)  is  and;  its  usual  pointing  is  Sh^va.  185 

But  v'  [a)  becomes  u  (-I)  before  labials  {Beth,  Pe,  186 
Vav,  Mem)  and  words  whose  initial  consonant 
has  Sh'va, 

b)  Before   monosyllables^  penacutes,   Elohim,    and 
Y^hovah,  v'  follows  the  same  rule  as  V,  b'  (7*  ^), 

179. 

When  two  events  are  connected^  the  second,  which  187 
denotes  the  further  continuation  and  pi^ogress  of  the 
events  narrated,  is  usually  expressed  by  the  Im~ 
perfect  with  Vav,  then  called  Vav  consecutive.  This 
Imperfect  will  be  construed  by  the  English  Perfect, 
when  the  preceding  Perfect  is  so  construed. 

(See  more  under  the  account  of  the  Tenses.) 

Sometimes,  when  there  is  a  connexion  with  an  18S 
earlier  event,  the  narrative,  or  a  section  of  it,  begins 
with  an  Imperfect  with  Vav  consecutive :  this  is  very 

*  Supply  the  copula,  '  it  is.*  f  From  13. 

g3 


66  Other  Prepositional  Prefixes,  Vav,    [ch.  4. 

(188)  commonly  the  case  with  ^11)1,  va-y'hi  (icai  lyiv^ro), 

and  it  was  (so) ;  and  it  came  to  pass. 

189  Vav  consecutive  takes  Pathakh  with  strong  Dagesh 
in  the  next  consonant.  Before  X  (which  is  incapable 
of  receiving  the  Dagesh)  Kamets  is  used. 

190  A  Perfect  that  follows  an  Imperfect  (in  the  sense 
of  a  Future)  is  also  changed  by  a  Vav  prefixed  into  the 
meaning  of  a  Future,  and  must  be  construed  by  that 
tense  in  English.  This  Vav  conversive  is  pointed  like 
the  simple  copulative  Vav.     (See  185,  186.) 

Vocabulary . 


Under- 
garment, 

Garment, 


191  Brother,  ^^^J  akh  (irreg.  with 

T 

suffixes  Tfh^)- 

•     T 

Choice  things,^  j^;^^'^^^^  ^-^g_ 
Valuables,      J  ^andth*. 
Wife,  nWi^,  ishshah   (Dti^, 

T     •  V     •• 

esheth,  constr.). 
.> 
J1JFI3.-     cutt5'neth 
•••     \ 
(absoL). 

fjl^h^,     c'thoneth 

(nearly  always  con- 
struct). 

Gleaning,  ^p7,  le'ke^. 

Distressed,') 

Needy,        |  •< 

Stranger,  ")i)  (v),  ger  (1!)2|). 

To  give,  ]jni,  nathan. 

To  hide,  "{DZOj  Hainan. 

To  rise  up,  rhy>  ^alah  f. 

T  T 

To  make,  HW'  i^asah  f- 


Dainty  meat,  QJ^tOQ*  maii>ara. 
Also,  D^,  gam. 

Bread;  DH/,  le'khera. 

Slothful,  sluggard,")  7^^,     i?a- 

Lazy,  {   tsel. 

7%e  woow,  nT'j  yareakh. 
-  ..1- 

Star,  :i3i3  (:?),  cochabh. 

T 

ThicTc  cloud,  2,V  (v),  i^abh. 

T 

PaZm   (o/^  <Ae   hand),    5]3  (i?), 
caph. 

Bowl,  k^DZ?'  tsallakhath. 

^  nn3.  cathabh. 

To  engrave,  j  "*  -  t  ' 

Unleavened    bread    (or   ca^e), 
n^D.  matstsah. 

T   — 

To  kill,  ^^p,  ka/al. 

—  't 

Skin,  liy,  )^6r. 


*  Plural  of  mig-da-nah,  not  in  use. 

t  Verbs  ending  in  h  have  Kamets  for  Pathakh  in  3rd  sing, 
perf. 


§  3.]         Other  Prepositional  Prefixes.    Vav. 


67 


Exercise  21. 

:    •   ;  TT  ;  T  T 

T  ••    r  -   T  V  V  - 


1  ^lii^e'zer     nathan    I'akhiah  192 
urtmrnahh     migdanoth. 

2  Y'hovah  i^asah  I'adam 
ul'ishto  chothnoth  )>6r.  3  hal- 
le'ke^  lei)ani  v'lagger. 
4  Ribhkah  nath'nah  eth-ham- 
ma^i^ammim  v'gam  eth-hal- 
le'khem.  5  #aman  i^atsel 
yado  bhatstsallakhath. 
6  Y'hovah  i?asah  eth-hay- 
yareakh  v'chochabhim.  7  hin- 
neh-)>abh  k'^annah  ch'chaph- 
ish  i?5lah  miyyam.  8  vay- 
yichtobh  M5sheh  eth  col- 
dibhre  Y'hovah.  9  ush'mar- 
tem  eth-hammatsoth. 


b)  Translate — 

1.  Like  a  dog.  2.  And  I  killed  [after  a  Perfect].  3.  And  I 
will  kill  [after  an  Imperfect].  4.  Isaac  and  Eliezer.  5.  David 
and  Solomon.  6.  Like  the  mountain  of  ray  holiness.  7-  Like 
a  thick  cloud.  8.  And  the  thick  cloud.  9.  And  they  shall 
keep  my  statutes  [after  an  Imperfect  =  Future]. 


Chap.  V.    Modes  of  expressing  the  Comparative  and 

Supei'lative. 

The  comparative   is   expressed   by   prefixing   the  193 
particle  ]'0  {min),  or  D  [mi)  with  follow^ing  Dagesh 

(D  before  gutturals),  to  the  object  or  objects  with 
*  Active  partcp.  of  Kal  from  Tv)'^ :  it  has  this  form  -—-  in 

TT 

the  construct  state. 

t  Suppose  a  Perfect  to  have  preceded. 

X  Suppose  an  Imperfect  (=  Future)  or  Imperative  to  have  pre- 
ceded. 


68  The  Comparative  and  Superlative.  [ch. 

(193)  which  the  thing  in  question  is  compared.     The  ad- 
jective remains  in  the  positive  : 

Q^pr^2)Q   nhilj   ga-bho-ahh  mic-colsha-i?am,  taller  than  any 

T  T  T    •  ~        T 

of  the  people. 

194  This  V2  {=ex)  denotes  distinction  or  removal  from  (or  se- 
lection out  of)  the  mass  of  objects  with  which  the  comparison  is 
made. — Compare  the  Latin  ablative  with  the  comparative,  and 
the  adjectives  ex-imius,  e-gregius:  also  Homer's  t/c  rcavriov  /ia- 
Xiora.  (G.) 

195  The  superlative  is  usually  denoted  by  the  definite 
article  with  the  positive,  which  thus  marks  out  the 
object  in  question  as  pre-eminently  the  possessor  of 
the  quality.     The  objects  follow  with  ]12  (D,  t2)  or  ^• 

196  The  superlative  of  eminence  (i.  e.  answering  to  our 
very  with  the  positive),  "TKD  (m'od).    It  is  sometimes 

denoted  by  a  repetition  of  the  positive  :  '  Good,  good 
it  is,'  &c. ;  '  very  good  it  is,'  &c. 

197  A  sort  of  superlative  is  sometimes  formed  by  the  construct 
state  of  the  positive  before  a  plural  genitive  : 

D'^ti^lp  ^"Tp>  ko-desh  k^'da-shim  {the  holy  of  holy  things),  the 
holiest  of  all. 

198  A  comparison  of  equality  is  made  by  3  (or  3,  3)  :=: 

as,  like, 

199  If  the  3  is  expressed  before  each  member  of  the  comparison, 

it  indicates  a  reciprocal  similarity :  just  as  in  English,  "  like 
master  like  man "  =  the  man  is  like  the  master ,  and  the  master 
like  the  man. 

Vocabulary. 


200  Sweety  piJlD*  mathok. 
Precious,  ID"',  yakar. 

'tt 

Profty  r\i^^2D{a<^),  t'bh^ah. 

T         ; 

Excellent,     1)13^,     mbhkhar 

T  ;    • 

{partcp.     Niphal    of    bha- 
khar). 

Floor,     threshing  -floor,     ]lil, 

goren. 


Honey,  ]i}yiy  d'bhash. 
Pearls,   D''^^JS,    p'ninim    (al. 

red-corals,  E.  B.  rubies). 
Gold,  V^'^T^,  kharuts. 

Pure  gold,  13,  paz. 
> 
Chamber,  room,  1in>  khe'der. 

Little,  young,  T'^if,  tsai7ir. 


5.1 


The  Comparative  and  Svpey^aiive. 


69 


Handsome,  fair,  beautiful,  n3\ 

VT 

yapheh. 
Always,     I'^'QDy     tamid    (lit. 

•     T 

perpetuity). 
Dry,  ^^'^,  yabbesh. 


Potsherd,  )i^'y^,  khe'res. 


Moon,    n^l^,    rbhanah   (lit.  (200) 
the  white    one,  f.   of  ]2,7, 
white). 

Sun,  nSrij  khammah. 

T    ~ 

Pure,  -):a  (/.  nni),  tar. 

-  TT 

Life,  D'"'n>  khayyim  (pi.) 


Exercise  22. 


•    T         ;  T  •        '        T  ••        •  :  • 

Dyn  8        :  ii;nn3  ty^  7 

T  T  V  V  -  "T 

••rrDns  rn:i  nn^D  ns^  10 


T  T    •    — 


1  mathok  midd'bhash.  2  y'ka-  201 
rah  khochmah  mipp'ninim. 
3  ^obh  piryi  mekharuts  umip- 
paz,  iith'bhuathi  micce'seph 
mbhkhar.  4  lo  fobh  anochi 
me^bhothai.  5  anochi  hats- 
tsai^ir  b'bheth  abhi.  6  chith- 
bh^ath  goren.  7  yabhesh 

cakhe'res.  8  hai^am  caccohen. 
9  cai?am  caccohen.  10  ya- 
phah  chaH'bhanah  barah  ca- 
khammah.  1 1  tobh.  kha^d'cha 
mekhayyim. 


h)  1.  Wisdom  is  very  good.     2.  Wisdom  is  better  than  silver. 
3.  My  rooms  are  better  than  yours.  4.  Your  room  is  very  good. 


Chap.  VI.    §  1.   Numerals.   1.  The  ten  first  Cardinal 

Numbers. 

1.  The  Cardinal  Numbers  from  2  to  10  are  sub-  202 
stantives  with  an  abstract  meaning  (like  triad,  decad, 
TTcvrac) ;  but  they  are  also  used  adverbially.     Only 
"HINI,  one  (ekhrid)^  fem.  nriK^  (akhath),  is  construed 

as  an  adjective.  The  other  numbers  have  each  a 
masculine  and  a  feminine  form,  which  are  identical 
in  point  of  meaning,  but  distinguished  in  use  by  the 


70  Numerals,  [ch.  6. 

(202)  arbitrary  custom  of  employing  the  feminine  form  with 
masculines,  and  the  masculine  withfeminines. 

203  It  is  only  in  the  dual  form  for  two,  D^I^  (sh'na'-yim), 

fern.  D^^ip^  (sh'ta'-yim),  that  the  gender  of  the  nu- 
meral agrees  with  that  of  the  object  numbered. 

204  The  numerals  from  1  to  10: — 


Masculine 
(which  after  2  are  fern,  iwforni). 


1 

K 

2 

n 

3 

J) 

4 

1 

5 

n 

6 

1 

7 

r 

8 

n 

9 

12 

10 

> 

Absol. 

Constr. 

im 

e-khad 

a-khad 

1         ''^P 

sh'na'-yim 

sh"ng 
or 

.     sh'nem 

T          • 

rs'pbt 

sh'lo-shah 

sh'l5'-sheth 

T  T      J  — 

W5")N^ 

ar-ba-i^ah 

ar-ba-i^ath 

T]fm 

ntm 

kh^mish-shah 

kh'^me'-slieth 

nm 

shish-shah " 

she'-sheth 

n^n^ 

wn^ 

shibh-)>ah 

shibh-i^ath 

ilpp 

r\^M2t 

sh'monah 

sh'mo-nath 

r^ypr) 

nv^rs 

tish-i?ah 

tish-i^ath 

TT  — ; 

^^M. 

)^*sa-rah 

:i^''se'-reth 

Feminine. 


Absol. 

T     V 

e-khath 
sh'ta'-yim 


Constr. 

n™ 

a-khath 

sh'te 
or 

.  sh'tem 


^b\^ 

tbp 

sha-losh 

sh'losh 

^?"1^ 

Pn-IK 

ar-bai> 

ar-bb 

••    T 

tgn 

kha-mesh 

kh^mesh 

m 

m 

shesh 

shesh 

^^^t 

V2p 

she'bhai> 

sh'bhai> 

•^^.'^?^ 

n±p 

sh'moneh 

sh'm5-neh 

yPd 

V^r\ 

te'-shS:^ 

t'shai^ 

'^W 

-)ly^ 

i^e'-ser 

i^e'-ser 

§  1.]  Numerals,  71 

The  other  Semitic  languages  exhibit  the  same  pecuharity  in  205 
respect  to  the  genders.  The  explanation  of  this  is,  that  these 
numerals,  being  ox\g\\\?X\y  abstract  substantives  {\\\iQdecas,  trias), 
had  both  the  masculine  and  feminine  form.  The  feminine,  as 
being  the  favorite  form  for  abstract  notions,  was  the  principal 
form,  and  as  such  was  connected  with  words  of  the  masculine 
gender;  so  that  the  other  form,  without  the  feminine  ending, 
was  used  with  words  of  the  feminine  gender.  Usage  made  this 
a  settled  law  in  all  the  Semitic  languages,  the  exceptions  to  it 
being  very  raie.  (G.) 

{Syntactical  Remarks  [G.]). 
a)  The  numerals  from  2  to  10  stand  either  206 

1)  in  the  construct  state  before  the  substantive 
(so  that  the  object  numbered  is  in  the  ge- 
nitive), D"'D"'  H^yp,  three  days,  prop,  triad 

of  days ;  or 

2)  in  the  absolute  state  before  it  (the  thing  num- 
bered being  then  considered  as  in  the  accu- 
sative or  in  apposition),   D**J2  tlU}7py  three 

S071S ;  or 

3)  in  the  absolute  state  after  it,  as  in  apposition 
with  the  object  numbered  (a  usage  of  the 
later  books,  where  the  adverbs  also  are  so 
constructed),  li^wli)    Jlto,    three   daughters, 

1  Chron.  xxv.  5  *. 

The  numerals  from  2  to  10  are  joined,  with  very  207 
few  exceptions,  with  the  plural. 

!1)  sh'losheth  banim. 
2)  sh'loshah  banim. 
3)  banim  sh'loshah  (late  and  rare). 

"When   a  numeral   is   used   absolutely  (i.  e.  without  a  sub-  203 
stantive,  the  masculine  is  regularly  used  (i.  e.  the  feminine  form 
for  the  numerals  after  two.  202). 

.   *  In  like  manner  the  constructions  H^^  ^^^Q.  Gen.  xvii. 

T  T  T    •• 

17,  and  n^^  ilNQ*  XXV.  7,  17,  a  hundred  years,  are  equally 


TT 

common. 


72 


Numerals, 


[CH.  6. 


Vocabulary 
209  Sony    n    (i?^-    D''i:i»    constr. 

•  •  •     T 

■•J^l)?     ben     (banim,     b'ne, 

irreg.). 
Daughter,     Jl^,     {pi.     H)'!'!, 

constr.  /l')i3l),  bath  (banoth, 

b'noth,  irreg.). 

Branchy   y^^'D,    sarig  (sarag ; 

•  T 

in  Pual  to  be  interwoven). 
A  day,  Q'l"',  yom  {pi.  yamim). 
ifO/  n^rr*  blnneh. 


Stalky  ^'yo,  kaneh. 

v't 

Perchance,  haply,  "'7')^i,  ulai. 
Battle,    war,     TlDTwt^    (^.w), 

T  T  ;   • 

milkhamah  (lakh am,  to  con- 
sume). 

Leahy  jli^  A  Leah. 

T  •• 

Week,  ^)2U},  shabhua)^   {pi. 

\    T 

BuUocky  *^3,  par  (/)/.  parim). 


Exercise  23. 


210  a)  no^n^  f)":)  *^"7'?5!1^ 
nti^'?^  u'^^y)]^^  r\u}bp  2 
:-r™  n:3^:i  in'bv  wb^p 

T    •  -;  -  ••  T  T  :   • 

niih  nib^  D^n  mt  6 

T  "  T  :  T  •  T  T     • 

"iSDii   n^^rnt:^   nvn^  7 

TT  -;••         't  •      T 


1  vayyivval'du?  16  f  shibhi^ah 
bhanim   v'shalosh  banoth. 

2  sh'losheth  hassarigim  sh'lo- 
sheth  yamim  hem ".    3  hinneh" 
shebai)      shibb°lim     i?6l6th  X 
b'kaneh  ekhad.      4  ulai  yim- 
mats'un  §    sham    i^^sarah. 

5  arbai^ah  m'lachim  i>asii  || 
milkhamah  eth  hakh*mishshah. 

6  shishshah  banim  yal'dah 
Leah.  7  shibi^ah  shabhuoth 
ti^por.  8  sh'monah  pharim 
hikribhu.  9  ^nochi  tohh  lach 
mei^^sarah  banim. 


b)  1.  The  three  baskets  are^  three  days.      2.    Four  kings. 
3.  Three  men.  4.  Two  sons.  5.  Five  men  went.  6.  Eight  stalks. 


*  '  And  there  were  born.' 
§  '  There  shall  be  found.' 
if  '  They  offered.' 


t  *  To  him.'        X  '  Came  up.' 
II  *  Made  with  {eth).' 


§2-1 


Cardinal  Numbers, 


73 


Chap.  VI.    §  2.    The  Cardinals  continued.    Ordinals. 

To  express  the  numbers  from  11  to  19,  the  units  21 1 
stand,  without  the  copulative  conjunction,  before  ten 
(in  the  form  "IV)^  masc,  TTj^DV  fern.).   In  such  as  are 

masculifie  in  form  (and  therefore  used  with /em.  nouns) 
the  units  stand,  at  least  from  13  upwards,  in  the 
construct  state,  which  here  indicates  merely  a  close 
connexion  between  the  notions,  not  the  relation  of 
the  genitive.  These  numerals  have  no  construct 
state,  and  are  always  used  adverbially. 


11 

K^ 

12 

n^ 

13 

T 

14 

i> 

15 

lIDt 

16 

V 

17 

r 

18 

n"- 

19* 

10*' 

Masc. 

T    T  T   ;    * 


Fem. 

rrsw  nm 


212 


20 


Dn^ 


The  te?is  from  30  to  90  are  expressed  by  the  plural  213 
forms  of  the  corresponding  units  (so  that  the  plural 
denotes  tenfold  the  singular) ;  except  that  tiventy  is 
expressed  by  D**"!^]^,  plur.  of  "iW,  ten. 

^p"  They  are  of  the  common  gender,  and  have  no  214 

construct  state. 

•> 
*  Unusual  forms  are  "^'^j;  D'^DH,  fifteen,  Judges  viii.  10 ; 

"1^'V  /1-3bti^,  eiyhteen,  Judges  xx.  25.  Here  the  masculine  too 

T  T  —       ; 

has  the  units  in  the  construct  state. 

t  Used  because  H''  begins  the  sacred  name. 

H 


74  Cardinal  Numbers.  [ch.  6. 

215  When  units  and  tens  are  written  together,  the 
earlier  writers  commonly  place  the  units  first  (e.  g. 
two  and  twenty^  as  in  Arabic)  ;  but  in  the  later 
writers  the  order  is  almost  invariably  reversed  [twenty 
and  two,  a^  in  Syriac).  The  conjunction  is  always 
used. 

[Common  gender.) 

216  Twenty,       DH'^y,      i?es-rim. 

I . .   ... 

Thirty,        W^tht,      sh'lo-shim. 
Forty,       D'';;:i"lj^,      ar-ba-i^im. 

Fifty  >  W^V:Jtyi^      kh'^mish-shira. 

,.  •  -:       I 

Sixty,  D"'ii^^j      shTsh-shim. 


Seventy,       Q^y^^j      shTbh-i)im. 


Eighty,        U'^yyi),      sh'mo-nim. 


Am  ty        D'^y^-Tlj      tish-i)im. 
|-  :    • 

The  remaining  numerals  are  : — 
217-4  hundred,  Jli^^D*  me-ah. 

constr.  Jlhi^,  m'ath. 

|-  : 

Two  hundred,    DTliSD  (for  □^n^^D),        mi-tha-yim. 
.,-     -r  T  r  : 


A  thousand,  P]7^^,  e'-leph. 

Two  thousand,    CB^i^,  al-pa'-yim. 

Ten  thousand,    1122")^  Plur.  ^\^'2,11,    r'bha-bhah;  Plur.   ri- 

|Tr     :  -;    • 

bh^-bhotb. 

Ni2")  or  inn,  Plur.  J^^^^^2-]  or  jiu"),  nb- 

bo ;  Plur.  rib-bo-oth  or  rib-both. 
a)  Examples  of  the  other  hundreds.^ 

218  :J^i^<D  pn"ii^  (n)  400  ••ji'ikd  ^bt  (w)  800 
:  n^m  tp  nn)  600  :  jiij^p  t^^n  (pji)  500 
:'D  jipp  {nn)  800  :'D  :?2p  (\^n)  too 

:  'D  );pn  ipnn)  900 


§  2.]  Ordinal  Numbers,  75 

b)  Examples  of  the  other  ^^ow5aw^5.]  (21  s) 

:  U'^bi^  ntht  (i)  3000  •u^'tht^  ^VH-l^5  (i)  4000,  and 

•  T  - ;  ■•"      :  ■  T  - :         T  X    ;  - 

so  on.      :  ni^n  '^nt.  or  D^Jlin"),  or  t^^   On'W  20,000 

:  5]^K   Ii\m   m  6*00,000,  and  so  on.  *  " 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers, 

a)  The  ordinals  after  the  ^ first'  (which  is  derived  219 
from  '^'^1   [rosh],  head)  are  formed  from  the  cor- 
responding   cardinals    by    appending   '^-,    and    also 

usually  inserting   another  ''-  in  the  preceding  syl- 
lable. 

b)  The  feminines  have  the  termination  D\  {ith), 
less  commonly  H"  (y-ydh);  and  also  denote  such  a 
part  (or  fraction) :  but  besides  these  there  are  other 
forms  to  .'denote  fractional  parts,  such  as  ^^H  (kho- 

raesh),  the  fifth  part;    ^IT    and  ^51.   (robhaiT  and 
re'bhai^),.  the  fourth  part, 

220 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

The         Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

1st     ]Wi^-) 

D'';r^i^-] 

T                      • 

r\'\2^i^'i 

2nd         •'^j:^ 

°''^?^ 

mt 

r)v:^p 

3rd    •'i:^"'^^^ 

D^t^^i^  ! 

D'p'bp 

4th     ^^"^21 

D^aS 

^T^l 

5th   >:i;>DrT 

i 

D'p'pn 

6th        v^^-^ 

mp 

7th    y>2p 

m'2p 

8  th    ^^''oi; 

m'f^ip 

9th    ^y^I^jjl 

ny'pn 

10th  n''';:^v 

D'^'W 

The  rest  of  the  Ordinal  Numbers  are  made  by  the  terras  ap-  221 

H  2 


7&  Ordinal  Numbers.  [ch.  6. 

(221)  propriated  to  the  Cardinal  ones:    as,  TVS'V)^  DrTb^Il  HTii^n, 

••;•••  —    -    T  T  T     ~ 

the  eleventh  year ;  so,  QV  1't^^  71^2,^,  the  seventeenth  day. 

T  T  T  ;     • 

[Syntactical  Remarks  [G.]). 

222  a)  In  the  cardinal  numbers,  the  tens  (from  20  to 

90),  when  they  precede  the  substantive,  are 
regularly  joined  with  the  singular  (in  the  ac- 
cusative), and  when  they  follow  it,  in  apposition, 
with  the  plural.  The  first  is  the  more  frequent 
construction. 

The  plural  may  be  used  in  the  first  case,  but  the  sin- 
gular never  occurs  in  the  second. 

The  numerals  from  11  to  19  are  joined  to  the  singular 
form  (in  the  accusative)  only  with  certain  substantives, 
of  which  the  numbers  are  very  frequently  stated,  as  day, 
year,  man,  &c.  (comp,  our  '  six  pair  of  stockings,'  *four 
head  of  oxen  j'  e.  g.  Q'|'»  li'l^}^  nj^2L"1h^>  prop. /oMr^ecw 

T    T  T  T       ;- 

day,  Ex.  xii.  6.  With  this  exception,  they  are  joined  to 
the  plural :  and  in  the  later  books  then  stand  after  the 
substantive. 

b)  Numerals  made  up  of  tens  and  units  (like  21, 
62)  take  the  object  numbered  either  1)  after 
them  in  the  singular  (in  the  accusative),  or  before 
them  in  the  plural,  as  in  the  later  books  (Dan. 
ix.  26) :  or  2)  the  object  is  repeated,  with  the 
small  numbers  in  the  plural,  with  the  larger  in 
the  singular  (Gen.  xii.  4;  xxiii.  1). 

c)  Beyond  10  the  ordinals  have  no  peculiar  forms, 
but  are  expressed  by  those  of  the  cardinals, 
which  then  stand  either  before  the  object  num- 
bered, or  after  it  as  genitive.  In  the  latter 
case,  the  word  tl^U)  is  sometimes  repeated.     In 

numbering  days  of  the  month  and  years,  the 
forms  of  the  cardinals  are  used,  even  for  the 
numbers  from  1  to  10. 

223  Rem.  1)  The  numerals  take  the  article  when  they  stand  with- 
out a  substantive,  and  refer  to  subjects  mentioned  before,  as 
D^Jwi^n,  the  two,  Eccles.  iv.  9.  12. 


§  2.]  Ordinal  Numbers.  77 

2)  Some  substantives  denoting  weights^  measures,  or  space  of  (223) 
time,  are  regularly  omitted  after  numerals :  e.  g.  shekels,  ephahs, 
loaves.     Thus  an   Hebrew  spoke  of  '  a  thousand  of  silver,'  'six 

of  barley,'  'ten  of  bread.'     'A  hundred  (&c.)  cubits'  is  often  ex- 
pressed thus  :  '  a  hundred  by  the  cubit '  (^D^<3,    Hi^Q)- 

T    -    T  T    •• 

3)  Numbers  are  expressed  distributively  (nearly  as  in  English) 
by  the  repetition  of  the  cardinals,  but  without  ").     Two  two  = 

two  and  two  {W^^p  D^Jl^)-     Once  is  inj^  D^D,  pai^am  ekhad 

(lit.  a  step);   twice,  U^6'JB;  three  times,  WDVB  ^\bl^'     Also 

by  the  feminine  forms  of  the  cardinals,  JlPTh^  (akhath)  once; 

W^PiU},  twice;  VS^^,  thrice  (poetical).     The  ordinals  are  em- 

ployed  in  the  same  way. 

Vocabulary. 


9 
Evening,  ^"1p,  i^e'rebh. 

Morning,  Ipil,  boker. 
Sabbath,  r\2l^,  shabbath. 
Euphrates,  JT13,  p'rath. 
Wives,    D"'^J.    nashim   (with 

•    T 

masc.  termination :    irr.  pi. 

of  nm). 

T      • 

Cubit,  HQi^j  ammah. 

T     ~ 

Length,  "T^lj^,  orech. 


■^rk,  r]2D,  tebhah. 
Breadth,  ^nhj  rokhabh. 
Height,  HDip  (w),  komah. 
Flood,     b)2D  {a  y),      mabbiil 

(yabhal,  to  flow  *). 
Month,   t:^"rn,  khodesh  (kha- 

dash,  to  make  new). 

To  become  dry ;  to  be  dried  up, 
^2\  yabheshf. 

••T 

Waters,  D^D>  mayim  (irr.). 


224 


*  So  Gesenius.  Others  derive  it  from  nabhel,  to  drop  off  {pi 
leaves,  &c.) ;  and  make  its  primary  meaning,  delapsus  pluvicc. 
Simonis. 

t  Intransitive  verbs  often  take  (••)  for  (-)  in  ult.  of  3rd  sing, 
perfect.     In  the  other  persons  they  are  conjugated  regularly. 


H  3 


78 


225  a)nm  Di'' 


Ordinal  Numbers, 
Exercise  24. 


''p'Dn  nv 
'^wpri  Di^ 

mn"*^  nw  "'rnti^n  Di^  2 
'mi  "imn  3     *  :Trt^i^ 

in-in-Dti^  5   :  ]')]:}^B "inkrr 

TT   -  ..  '  .  T    V    T 

XT-  ••  '  ....    — 

T  T    -  '•.••.••  ...      - 

Dii;  D^t^:  "rii:^   "^ip^   )b 

T  :  -  V        -  T     • 

n^N  jiiKD  ]Dbp  10  :D^:ii 

T    -  •       •    -:  T    ••    -  '     V 

U'W  u'W  11  ■     :n/Tbip 
Dv  D^:;i-)K  n-'H  'piJajDn  1^2 

•     T       ;-  TT  

.   ..     _  V         ~  '      VT    T  - 

'      V  T  T  T     :  1  T 


1  vay'hi- 
i^e'rebh, 
vay'hi- 
h)ho'ker 


[CH.  C.  §  2. 

Cyom  ekhad 
yora  sheni 
yom  sh'lishi 
yom  r'bhii^i 
yom  kh^mishi 


yom  hash- 
.  shish-shi. 
2  yom  hashsh'bhii'^i  shabbath 

layhovah   ^lohecha.        3  han- 

nahar  hayah  Parbai^ah  rashim. 

4  shem  haekhad  Pishon. 

5  shem-hannahar  hashsheni 
Gikhon.  6  shem-hannahar 
hashsh'lishi    Khidde'kel. 

7  hannahar  har'bhii^i  hu" 
P'rath.  8  lakakh  16  Le'mech 
sh'ti  nashim,  shem  haakhatb. 
i^adah  v'shem  hashshenith 
Tsillah.  9  vayyoled  Noakh 
sh'l5shah  bhanim.  10  sh'losh 
meoth  ammah  orech  hatte- 
bhah,  kh^mishsbim  ammah 
rokhbahh,  ush'loshim  ammah 
komathahh.  11    sh'nayim 

sh'nayim  bau  el-Noakh  el- 
hattebhah.  12  hammabbul 
hayah  arbai^im  yom  yal-ha- 
arets.  13  bakhodesh  hash- 
sheni b'shibi?ah  v'i^esrim  yom 
lakhodesh  yabh'shah  haarets. 


'  And  evenintr  was  and  morning  was  =  and  the  evening  and 
morning  were  (E.  T.).     CA.  188.  ^  hayah  (==  was)  followed 

by  b  {to)  ■=.  became.    Here:  '  was  divided  into. ^      *=  '  And  Noah 


begat.' 


^  went. 


e  e\=zto ;  into. 


CH.  7.  §  1.]  The  Pronouns.  79 

b)  1.  And  the  evening  and  the  morning  were  the  seventh  (225) 
day.     2.  Three  and  twenty  sons.     3.  Forty-two  years.     4.  One 
hundred  and  three  days.     5.  vSixteen  sons.     6.  One  thousand 
two  hundred  and  eight  years. 


Chap.  VII.    The  Pronouns.    §  1.  Personal  Pro7iouns, 


1  I 


*ni 

T 

a-no-chi 

2  Thouim.)    nn.^ 

T    — 

at-tah 

3  Thouii.) 


Nominative. 


6  We 


226 


4  He 


5  She 


11  Me 


kt 
Kin 

hu" 

hi" 

^n^^  6-thi 


7  You  (m.) 

8  You  (f.) 

9  T%  (m.) 
10  They  (f.) 


*nakh-nu,  nakh-nii 

DriK 

at-tem 
at-ten 

on,    nan 

hem,  hem'-mah 
hen,   hen'-nah 


Accusative. 
16   Us 


227 


12  T/iee  (m.)  Tjjpj^  o-th'cha 

13  TAee  (f.)  "JJ/IK  o-thach 

14  Him  'IJIJ*^  6-th6 

15  Her  HJIK  o-thahh 


•IJJIK  o-tha'-nA 

T 

17  You  (m.)    DpriK  eth-chem 

18  You  (f.)       pJlK  eth-chen 

19  Them(m.)     Qji^  o-tham  " 

20  T/«m  (f.)        ]jni^-o-than 


Other    relations   expressed   by   prepositions    and  228 
pronominal  affixes : — 


To 

21  Me 

22  Thee(m.) 


1> 


li 

Tcha 


(To,  towards) 
'bif  (^!?K)    SI-  (Me) 
'  >biji'      e-lai 
TJ-'^K        e-le-cha 


80 


(228) 


(To) 

23  Thee  (f.) 

24  Him 

25  Her 

26  Us 

27  You  (m.) 

28  You  (f.) 


7%e  Pronouns. 

•Tf^  lach 

i^  16 

n'?  lahh  i 

T 

^y)  la'-nu        i 

T 

DD7  la-chem 

V  T 

\j)  la-chen 


[CH.  7* 


29  Them{m.)    Urh     la-hem 

V  T 

30  T/«m  (f.)        ^n*?     la-hen 

V  T  I 

From  ]D 

31  Me  >^aD  mim-men'-ni 

32  Thee  (m.)  '^y^D  mTm-m'cha 

33  Thee  (f.)  "TJi^D  mim-mech 

34  Him  ^^DD  mim-men'-nu 

35  Her  H-^DD    mim-men'-nah 

T  V     • 

36  C/s  ^ilDD  '  mim-men'-nii 

37  You  (m.)      D3D    mic-cem 

38  FoM  (f.)  pQ    mic-cen 

39  Them{m.)     DHD    me-hem 

40  TAem  (f.)       ^HQ    me-hen 

With  m  eth 

51  Me  >rl^^  it-ti 

52  TAee(m.)  Tf^lK  it-t'cha 

53  Thee{i.)  Iirij*^  it-tach 

T     • 

54  Hiw  ^rst^    it-to 

55  Her  ^-^^^   it-tahh 


T      |V 

I"" 

In    2, 

41 

42 

43 

44 


45 

46 
47 
48 

49 
50 


e-la-yich 

e-lav 

e-l^-ah 

e-le'-nri. 
4e-chem 
4e-chen  - 
*le-hein 
^le-hen 

bi 

b'cha 
bach 
bo 

bahh 


pi 


ba'-nii 

ba-chem 

ba-chen 


j-    D^  [bam, 

[Dil2  |_ba-hem 

[  inil  [ba-hen, 

[  ]n^  ^[^ba-hen 


With 
56   U5 


•liJlJ^  it-ta'-nA 

T     • 

57  You  (m.)    DD/nhJ  it-t'chem 

58  FoM(f.)       '{i3r)^^  it-t'chen 

59  Them(m.)     Q^l^^  it-tam 

60  ThemiD        ]Di^  it-tan 


§1.] 


As 


The  Pronouns. 
As 


SI 


3    0D3  * :    here    ID  =  HD, 

'what,*  used  as  a  rel.  con- 
junction: '■that,'  'quod.'  E.) 

61  /  ''yQS  ca-mo-ni 

62  Thouim.)  ?|iQ3  ca-mo'-cha 

63  Thou{f.)    •?|iD3  ca-moch 

64  He  !)nb3  ca-mo -h<i 

T 

65  She  nQ3  ca-mo'-ah 

T   >   T 

66  We  ^^iD3  ca-mo'-nu 

T 

Examples  of  Prepositions  with  a  plural  (construct) 
form  before  Suffixes. 


(228) 


67  You{ia.) 

D33 

ca-chem 

68  You{i.) 

1?? 

ca-chen 

69  Theyim.) 

D03 

ca-hem 

70  Theyii.) 

1C5 

ca-hen 

after  (lit.  the 
hinder  jycirts). 


under:  instead  of 
(lit.  the  under 
parts). 

heticeen  {\\i. \ocSi\ , 
interval). 


(usque  ad)  as  far 
as  (b). 

before  suffixes.) 
upon. 


"^^ni^ 


(plur,  only  witb 
/>/2<r.  sv'ffiv). 

TT 

.     ^^ 

'     V  T 
X   T 


a-kh*rai,  after  me.  229 

a-kh*-re-cha,  after  thee  (jr.). 
a-kh'^re-chem,  after  you  (m.). 

takh-te-hem,  under  them. 

takh-tai. 

be-ni,  between  me. 

be-ne-chem,  between  you  (m.). 

i^a-dai,  {up)  to  me. 
X'^a-dav,  (up)  to  him. 
^a-de-chem,  {up)  to  you  (va.). 
i>a-]ai,  upon  me. 
i?a-le-cha,  upon  thee  (m.). 
)>a-lav,  upon  him. 
i?*-le-hem,  uj)on  them  {va.). 


*  iD3    is   always   used  before   the  lighter,   not  before  the 

heavier,  suffixes.     Some  of  the  poets  use  it  with  7,  21  also,  but 

only  before  monosyllabic  (rarely  dissyllabic)  prepositions.  (E.) 
t  But  this  (observes  Ewald)  is  from  a  root  Lamed  He,  and 


82 


The  Pronouns. 


[CH.  7. 


230 


Remarks  [for  future  reference). 
1^^  The  forms  in  parenthesis  are  rare;  those  withp  poetical. 


1  m 

2   Thou,  ID.] 
4,  5,  He,  SAe] 


6  PTe] 

8  You,  f.] 

22  To  ;Aee,  m.] 

28  To  you,  f.] 

29  To  ^^em,  m.] 
31  From  me] 


In  pause,  '»JJ^. 

Also  (J1^^).     In;?azf5e,  H^li^. 

T     -  T     T 

«)  The  J^  was  perhaps  heard  at  the  end  as 
a  sort  of  half-vowel  (G.).  b)  In  the  Pen- 
tateuch J^^n  stands  also  for  she :  it  is 
then   usually  pointed  like   ^^^^    (i.  e. 

J^in);    but  this  is  merely   an   ortho- 
graphical anomaly. 

T 

C^Jn^^,  in  four  passages).     ClPi^,  once). 

T    ..    -  >    ..    - 

(p)  ^iirj,  ip)  >JD. 


231  The  prepositions  and  other  very  short  a^^ri^ec?  particles  take 
the  longest  possible  pronunciation  before  suffixes.  Thus  (I) 
they  constantly  take  the  foretone  d:  (2)  prefer  the  longer  for- 
mations;  e.  g.  0117  (not  D7),  &c.,  though  ^^  is  found,  but 

V   T  T  T 

often  DH^l-     (3)  They  take  a  instead  of  e  as  union-vowel  of  the 

V    T 

suffix  :  so  much  so  that  this  a  expels  even  the  e  of  the  suffix  of 
2nd  fern.  sing.  TTJl,  &c.     (4)  So  also  73  {every,   all)  has  as- 

T 

sumed  some  pronominal  peculiarities  from  its  quasi-pronominal 
notion:  -IjS^),  ciillanu, we aZZ/  ^^3  or  TT^S,  cullech  or  ciillach, 

thou  entirely  (E.). 

232  Sometimes  two  prepositions  precede  the  same  suffix :  as 
Vi^njlD.    mittakhtav    (from-beneath-him=)from   his  place ; 

'^l^j?,  I'neg'di  (ad-coram-me,  to  be/ore  me  =)  over-against  me, 
so  has  the  termination  "»_  (e)  from  its  origin.      So  "7i>^  and 

by. 

*  With  collectives  it  is  used  apparently  only. 


§!•] 


The  Pronouns. 


83 


in  my  presence,  Sfc.  J  "T^^?  in  the  presence  of  ;  '^'~\S)^'2.  (in-adhuc-  (232) 
me  =)  while  I  am  still  alive,  while  I  have  my  being. 

Vocabulary. 


Mouth,  HBj   peh  (irreg.    See 

list). 
Destruction,    HDVID   («)> 

T     •      J 

m'khittah. 
Aiso,  Q^,  gam. 
Calamity,  ■7'^^J,  ed. 
To  laugh,  pH^,  shakhak. 
To  toil,  ^Oy,  i^amal. 

—    T 

To  build,  n^3,.  ban  ah. 

T  T 

In  vain,  ^^1^,  shav. 

To  perish,  l^i^,  abhad. 

To  recompense,  to  reward,  7Di)> 

-  T 

gamal. 
To  say,  HDi^^  fimar. 

~    T 

To  pour  out,  "?TH)Ii^.   shapliach. 
Counsel,    TO^  (y  w),     i^etsah 
(Vy,  to  counsel). 


Sound  wisdom,  tl^]l)^D  (a  oi  y),  233 

T   • 

tushiyyah  (H^''.  to  subsist, 

T  T 

to  be  firm). 
Understanding,    Jl^^^l  (w),    bi- 

T      • 

nah. 
Strength,    Hl^a:)  (w),    g'bhu- 

T       ; 

rah. 
Morsel,  r\B  (i>),  path. 
I^ry,  ^in,  kharebh. 
Quiet  (subst.),  r]')bll},  shalvah. 
Sacrifice,    victim,     H^tj     ze'- 

bhakh  (dec.  6). 
Strife,  contention,  ^''"1,  ribh. 
Blood,  D1,  dam. 

T 

>  > 

Memorial,  ^3f  or  I^T,  ze'cher 

or  ze'cher. 
i/;  DK;  no;,  J^b  (im;  -16). 


Ewercise  25. 

a)    n'?    nnnn    ^''DD    ''B  l    ,  l  pi   chVil   m'khittah   16.         234 
T  •  :         •  :       •         I 

:pnZ^i^    DDTi^a    "'^i^'DH  2  I  2  gam-'^ni       b'ed'chem       es- 

:*"^r^i^  r\]^lP  yD'y^  J^^n  3  khak(jo).  3  hu"  yoshebh  labhe- 

n^2    n^l^"i^7     nin"*'DJ^  4  l  ^akh  Ittakh.  4  im-Y'hovah  16- 

03    tVJ^n    l7lD;^    i^lti^  I  yibhneh   bayith,   shav  i^am'lu 

T  ;     T  I  T  : 

*  In  'pause  for  ^jlji^. 

t  Partcp.  Act.  of  Kal,  nJIJl  (verbs  in  H  take  •••  for  ••),  pi' 
D-ii:!,  with  suffix  V:iB. 


84  The  Pronouns,  [ch.  7. 

(234)  "T2i^  6    :*:T^  21201  T")ti^N  5    I  bonav  bo.     5  ashrecha  v'/6bh 
—  T  T  ;  •* !  ~         1 

*^2l  iniOn''  7     :  n?3n  DIDt    f  lach.     6  abhad  zichram  hera- 


-  T       T    ;  ••  :       *•  : 

''^'^^     •^1'^^^     -T^l^^  '^ 

T  •  :  T    ••         •  T    |T 


mah.  7  yibh^'khu  bh'cha 
yod'i^e  sh'me'cha.  8  Y'hovah 
gamal  i?alai.  9  shaph'chu  da- 
mam  cammayim.  10  amart' 
layhovah  *donai  attah.  1 1  li- 
)?etsah  v'thushiyyah,  'ni  bhi- 
nah,  li  g'bhurah.  12  tbhh. 
path  kh^rebhah  v'shalvah-bah 
mibbayith  male  zibhkhe-ribh. 


h)  1.  Thou  (m.)  shalt  hide  ray  commandments  with  thee.  2.  I 
wisdom  have  dwelt  (°with)  prudence.  3.  My  mouth  is  destruc- 
tion to  me.     4.  Prudence  dwells  with  them. 


Chap.  VII.     §  2.     Demonstrative 
Pronouns.     Demonstrative 


235 


Sing. 

rra.    nr, !)?      1 

[f.    J1KT,  IT        J 

rm.  t-»n,  nt'^n, 

same  1  f.     i<^\"irT 


Plur. 


]nrr 

Sing. 


rm. 

V- 

Cm. 
i  m. 

!/• 


and  Interrogative 
Pronouns, 

Sing.  Plur. 

zeh,  zu       "I 

_  ,       ^       '  el-leh,  el 
zoth,  zo       I 

hal-laz,  hal-lazeh 


With 

As 

To 

From 


m. 


f. 

V  T  : 


ha-le-zu 

ha-h^" 

ha-hi« 

Plur. 

V    ••    T 


ha-hem 
ha-hen 


*  '  Those  who  know.'     Partcp.  Act.  of  Kal,  ^T  {to  know),  in 
Stat,  constr.  "^ 


§  2.]  The  Pronouns,  85 

The  demonstrative  zeh,  nt  (also  ^^,  IT),  is  also  (es-  236 

pecially  in  poetry)  used,  like  our  that,  for  the  relative 
pronoun  :  '  the  place  that  (ilT,  zeh)  you  intend  for  me/ 

Thus :  Uhe  city  that  you  live  iti'  might  be  translated 
literally  in  Hebrew,  except  that  instead  of  m  we  must 
use  in  Hebrew  in-it  (of.  246).  E.  g.  Ps.  civ.  8,  to 
the  place  DH^  DID''  HT  tvhich  thou  hast  destined  for 

■*  V  T        T      :  -  T 

them.  It  is  even  employed  (like  ""shei^)  to  give  a  re- 
lative sense  to  another  word.  (For  an  instance,  see  the 
last  Example  in  the  Exercise  on  the  Relative,  p.  92.) 

nt  is  used  adverbially,  a)  for  there,  HT  H^n,  see  there  !  and  237 
then  merely  as  an  intensive  particle,  especially  in  questions,  as 
nt    IlD^j    «^^*y  then?    (prop,  why  there?),    b)  in  reference  to 

V  T  T 

time,  for  now,  as  DTJ^B  TW>  now  (already)  twice. 

The  inteiTogative  pronoun  is  mi  Cp),  who  ?  for  238 
persons;  mah,  mah-  (HD,  "HID),  ivhat  ?  for  things. 
^^'^^  ^D  signifies  who  is  he  ?  KTl  ^12  who  is  she  ?  But 
J^in  n?D  (z^A«/  he),  J»^''n"nip  (^i^Aa/  5Ae)j  signify  what  is 
IT?  In  the  same  way,  H^Nt  ^D,  zi^Ao  «re  /Ae^e  (joer- 
50W5)  ?  but  nJpK  HD  i<;Aa/  are  these  {things)  ? 

The  interrogative  ''Q  may  be  used  in  reference  to  239 

2i plural,  also  in  reference  to  things;  but  only  when 
the  notion   of  persons  is  implied,  e.  g.  Uyi)  ^D,  mi 

Sh'chem?  who  are  the  Shechemites  ?  ''D  may  also  stand 

in  the  genitive,  as  *'p  D3,  ivhose  daughter?  and  mi 

and  mdh,  without  interrogation,  for  '  any.'     iFor  HQ 

in  this  sense  we  have  also  the  specific  term  PID^J^^D 

(from  ^\t2^  HD,  quidquid).  G. 

HD  is  also  used  in  the  sense  of  how,  as  an  exclamatory  par-  240 

T 

tide. 

The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  i^T\  (^^''^,  11^11,241 
they,  in,  r\y^,  is,  ea,  id;  ii,  ece,  ea)  may  also  be  joined 

I 


86  The  Pronouns.  [ch.  7. 

(241)  to  substantives,   and  then  takes  the  article,  if  the 
substantive  has  it ;    K^HH  D'-'J^n.  is  vir;    K^HH  Di^n, 

eo  die  (G.). 

242      The  article  is  sometimes  omitted,  from  the  natural  definiteness 
<^f  NIH;  especially  when  the  noun  is  only  defined  by  a  suffix 

V  "     '   V  T  ~: 

When   employed  in  this  way,  J<5irT  is  to  be  distinguished 
from  the  demonstrative  JIT;  for  ^]  {=  ovTOQ,hic)y  this,  points 

to  an  object  present  or  near,  but  X^IH  (=  avrSg,  is)  indicates 
(like  the  article)  an  object  already  mentioned  or  known  [the 
former  answering  to  this,  and  the  latter  nearly  to  that'].  G. 


Vocabulary, 
[For  the  Declensions,  when  referred  to,  cf.  App.  I.] 


243  To  be  clean,  *iniO,  ^aher. 

••    T 

To  collect,  C]D^^.  a^aph. 
To  bind,  ^"1^,  tsarar. 

-T 

Sin,  Di^^^iT],  kha^/ath  (KtOH, 

T    -  T    T 

to  stumble;  to  sin). 
Wailing,  >)i^,  6i. 
Poverty,  misery,   *''inN>    *bh6i 

(ttTT.   tip.). 

Strife,  contention,  '{''ID*  mid- 
yan  (deck  2  :  a,  p"?!). 

Complaining,  murmuring,  Tl'^'lV, 
siakh. 

A  wound,  ^"j^B  or  J?iJD,  patsai> 
or  petsai)  (deck  6). 

Without   cause,    Diin>    khin- 

T  • 

nam. 


Wind,  r\T),  ruakh. 

Fists,   D''JH)n   (dual,  of  13n, 

•  -  ;  T 

inus.),   khophnayim    (deck 

8,  c). 

Garment,    Jl^Dli^,    simlah  (w^ 

Pdm.  12,  6). 
Measure,  iVlt2,  middah  (deck 

T  • 

8,  «) ;  mD,  <o  measure. 

—  T 

FFor^,     nii^^D  («),    maJL^-'seh 
...  _.,- 

(deck  9,  a);    TVD^y  i^asah, 

T    T 

^0  make. 
To  dream,  Q^n.  khalam. 

~    T 

A  dream,  Uw'H,  kh"16m. 
Mountain,  in  (d),  har. 
End,  limit,  Vp  (d),  kets  (deck 
8,  b). 


§2.] 


The  Pronouns, 


87 


Exercise  26. 


«)      ^riirr^  *")DS^-"'D  1 

nn"5)pNt  ^p  3      q^^rf'^jr 
■D^'iitDi  iD'/"nQ  n'pDt^i 

T    ;  '  vT  T      T  :        :  • 

:iD^  l2i^^  n^D'  •'DD  h 

.  -    T    :  T  -     T 

•.mh''  TWD  ^'^irnD  12 

T     ;      I     ...  -;-  ;t  - 


1  mi-yomar,  /fiharti  mekha^-  244 
^athi.  2  I'mi  6i  ?  I'mi  ''bhoi  ? 
Trai  midyanim  ?  I'mi-siakh  ? 
I'mi  ph'tsai^ira  khinnam  ?  I'mi 
khachliluth  i^enayim?  lam'a- 
kh^rim  i^al-hayyain  {p.). 
3  mi  asaph-ruakh  b'khoph- 
nav  ?  mi  tsarar-mayim  bassim- 
lah  ?  mah-sh'mo  ?  umah- 
shem-b'no  ?  4  mah  hakh^lom 
hazzeh'sher  {which)  khalamta? 
5  mi-elleh  ?  6  mi-zeh  me'lech 
haccabhod?  7  Y'hovah  ^do- 
nenu,  mah-addir  X  shimcha 
b'chol-haarets !  8  Y'hovah  mi- 
yishchon  b'har  kodshecha  ? 
holech  tamim.  9  Y'hovah 
mi-chamocha  ?  mah-yakar 
khasd'cha  ^lohim  ?  10  hodi- 
i?eni  Y'hovah  kitstsi  umiddath 
yamai  mah-hi".  11  mathai 
yiimuth  v'abhad  sh'mo  ? 
12  mah-gad'lu  mai)*secha 
Y'hovah  ! 


h)  1.  Who  will  bind  the  winds  ?     2.  How  ^reat  is  thy  glory, 
Jehovah  !     3.  I  have  dwelt  on  the  mount  of  holiness.    4.  What 


*  *  Will  say.' 

f  Epg.  Trans,  'redness/  'dimness'  (G.);  'fierceness'  (L.). 
X  (To  those  tarrying  =)  to  those  who  tarry  (or  linger^). 
§  Is-hecome-glorious ;    is  glorious :    from    ■^'^^^,    to    become 
glorious.     Perf.  of  Hiph.  ""^ 

II  Make-me-know ;  cause -me-to-know. 

I  2 


88  The  Relative  Pronoun.  [cH.  7. 

(244)  is  your  (m.  pi.)  name?    5.  This  river.    6.  Those  rivers.    7-  This 
boy.     8.  This  girl.     9.  Whose  daughter  is  this  girl  ? 

Chap.  VII.    §  3.    Relative  Pronoun. 

245  The  relative  pronoun  is  "1^^^  ^sher  [who,  which) 
indeclinable;  for  which  the  prefix  ^  (less  com- 
monly '^)  with  following  Dagesh  is  also  used  (but 
chiefly  in  rabbinical  Hebrew). 

246  Cases  of  the  Relative]  The  indeclinable  relative 
pronoun  "^^^^  virtually  assumes  different  cases  by 

taking  after  it  the  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns — 

m.  f.        m.  f. 

Nom.  "It^J^  "II^J^  ''sher  «sher 

Gen.     (noun     with 
pron.  suffix)  I^J^     {as  masc.)  

Dat.      '')^ •)Ii^^i       r]b Ipi^^  *sher 16       ''sher 

'"    •  "^             "  "•                       lahh  {to  whom) 

Ace.  ]Di^ '')]i}i^  nni^ ")t:;i^  ^sher otho,  ^sher 

"  ~'  ^                 *  "•                       othahh  {whom) 

247  Just  SO  in  the  plural:  DH? 1^^!?,  ""sher-lahem, 

to  whom,  &c.     One  or  two  words  are  generally  inter- 
posed. 

Thus  :  *ID^^)  immo,  his  mother. 

iDi^ "^Ii^^^>  ^shev  immo  =  whose  mother  (i.e.  who 

his  mother), 

248  Just  SO  the  relative  "sher  converts  demonstrative 
adverbs  of  place,  time,  &c.  (1=  here,  there,  then,  &c.) 
into  the  corresponding  relative  adverbs  :  as 


Dti^  sham, 
"*"       there. 

TV^VJ  sham'miih, 
■^  "^       thither. 

Q*^^^  mish-sham, 
^  *      thence. 


Q^ -)^J.^  ^sher sham, 

"^  '■"  "•       where. 

HD^ "1*^i^  "sher sham'mah, 

"^  "^  "    •       whither. 

U'^l^ ")^i<  ""sher mish-sham, 

"^  *  "  '•       whence. 


§  3.]  The  Relative  Pronoun,  89 

In  this  way  a  relative  force  may  be  given  to  the  249 
obhque   cases    of  the  first  and  second  persons :  as, 
thou,  Jacob,  ivhom  I  have  chosen,  '^'^r}ir\3.  '^ti^^^»  ^sher 

b'kharticha,   i.  e.  whom  I -have -chosen -//^ee  (suffix 
of  2nd  person  added  to  the  verb). 

The  ace.  ivhom  may  be  expressed  by  'yp^^  (^sher)  250 
alone ;  as  in  Exod.  ii.  2. 

The  antecedent  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun  251 
is  often  omitted  before  "sher ;  and  nearly  always 
when  a  prepositional  prefix  stands  before  it.  The 
preposition  is  then  to  be  construed  with  the  implied 
pronoun,  the  expressed  relative  taking  the  case  re- 
quired by  the  construction  of  its  own  clause.  Just 
so  in  English,  from  what,  of  what,  &c. :  e.  g.  thou 
shall  drink  from  what  ("^Iil^^^D,  me^sher)  the  young  men 

tvill  draw  (Ruth  ii.  9). 

Sometimes  such  a  general  notion  as  time  or  place  252 
must  be  supplied:  as,  "1^>^^,  harsher  {in  the  place 

where  z=.),  where;    "^^^??J  me'^sher  [from  the  time 

when  ^,from  when. 

As  in  English,  the  relative  is  sometimes  omitted,  253 
the  relation  being  implied  by  the  position   of   the 
relative  clause,  which  stands  as  a  sort  of  apposition 
to  the  word  it  is  to  modify.    This  happens  (especially 
in  poetry) — 

a)  When  the  relative  would  be  in  the  nom.  or  ace.  25i 
(without  aj9rej9.  *).     Thus,  ^  he  has  fallen  into 
the  pit  he  made'  would  be  expressed  exactly  as 
in  English.     Cf.  Ps.  viii.  2.» 

*  In  a  relative  clause  serving  as  a  further  description  of  a 
substantive,  the  relative  may  be  omitted  when  a  pronoun  is  ex- 
pressed, if  it  be  a  closely  subordinated  idea :  e.  g.  the  way  they 

should  walk  in,  ,12  IDT  TTnilljExod.  xviii.  20. 
T       :i" 

i3 


90  The  Relative  Pronoun,  [cH.  7. 

(254)       b)  So  especially  in  general  specifications  of  time: 
at  the  time  the  offering  began,  7vys^T\  7nn  W^- 

c)  When  the  antecedent  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun  is  also  omitted:  ^  Sheol  shall  carry  away 
•IJ^ZDH  (those  who)  sin.^    The  omitted  antecedent 

T    T  ' 

may  also  be  a  general  notion  of  place  or  time^ 
so  that  a  clause  stands  apparently  under  the 
government  of  a  preposition.  Thus,  whereas 
in  English  we  can  say,  Ho  where  I  have  prepared 
for  him^  in  Hebrew  we  may  go  further,  and 
say,  '  to  I  have  prepared  for  himj'  r>  ^JliJ''pn"7Nt 

(el-h^chinothi  16). 

255  When  the  implied  pronoun  would,  if  expressed,  be 
in  the  genitive,  the  preceding  noun  takes  the  stat, 
constr.  Thus,  '  by  the  hand  of  him  thou  wilt  send^ 
TxT'^TS  "PB,  b'yad  [stat.  constr.)  tishlakh. 

256  Such  relative  clauses  as  more  specifically  describe  a 
substantive,  may  also  be  added  to  a  preceding  speci- 
fication by  the  copulative  conjunction:  the  orphan 
{T?  "ijy  ^''1)5  v'lo  ];ozer  16  (and  there  is  no  helper  to 
him  =:),  and  one  who  has  no  helper. 


Vocabulary, 


257  To  forsake,  2tp,  i^azabh. 

~  T 

Way,    n^i^.    orakh,  pi.    *ra- 

khim,  constr.  Jlin"1i^,   or- 

khoth. 
Uprightness,  "lti^\  yosher  (ya- 

shar.  to  be  straight). 

Perverse,  ]^p^,  i?ikkesh   (i>a- 

kash,  to  convict  of  perverse- 
ness). 

Ant,  rO'dl  (w),  n'malah. 

Leader,  prince,  ]''!iip,  katsin. 


Magistrate,      120^.       sho/er 

(partcp.  act.  of   Kal,   from 
[sha^ar]  to  write). 

Ruler,  7^12,  moshel  (partcp. 

act.  of  Kal,  mashal,  to  rule). 

Also,  even,  Q2),  gam. 

Welfare,' 

Peace, 

Against,  7^,  i^al. 
Heel,  ypV,  :i^akebh. 


UV^,  sbalom. 


§  3.]  The  Relative  Pronoun. 

Holy,  I^np,  kadosh. 

't 

Excellent,  1^'^^i,  addir. 
Desire,  yBH,  khephets. 
Blood,    Q^,    dam,  for  adam 


(ish-damim,  man  of  blood  = 
bloody  man,  blood-thirsty 
man). 

Inmost  part,  or  recess,  '^pTlt^ 
(a),  mekhkar  ([npn]»  to  ex- 
plore). 

Wealth;  treasure,  ^]^B^^D  («  w), 

T 

toi^aphoth. 

Wicked  device ;  wickedness, 
HDT.  zimmah  (deck  10). 


91 

Joseph,  PjDV,  Yoseph  (lit.  ad-  (257) 

ding). 
To  sell,  "13^,  machar. 
Egypt,  DHJiD,  Mitsrayim. 


im^,  padah. 
To  redeem,  \  l77^       -^^ 
\P^^y  gaal. 

(1)  Enemy,     ~| 

'•nv    tsar 

(2)  Adversity,  i^    '•?'  ^^  ' 

To  obtain, acquire,  H^p,  kanah. 

His  right  hand,  )y*!2'^,  y'mino, 
for  ^yty  1%  yad  y'mino, 
hand  of  his  right  side  (^"'D^ 
the  right). 


Not,  ]''i^,  en,  is  the  construct  state  of  "j^J.^,  ayin  (nothingness, 
nought),  used  adverbially.  With  7  governing  personal  pronoun, 
it  signifies,  I  (you,  Sfc.)  have  not  a  —  {have  no  — ). 


Exercise  27. 

0)   ^f^  rwr\'^  D^nr^^n  i 


.  I.  ,  V     ••        ;  T  V  ~; 


1  hai^dz'bhim'orkhoth  yosher,  258 
*sher  orkhothehem'  i^ikk'shim. 

2  lech  el-n'malah  i?atsel,  "sher 
en-lahh  katsin  sh5/er  umo- 
shel.  3  gam-ish  s'hlomi  ^sher- 
ba/akhti  bo  ochel  lakhmi  hig« 


*   Go  (thou). 

t  '^Dw'^'^'^i^y    ish-sh'lomi,    *  man-of-my-peace,'    i.  e.    'my 

friend'  (who,  whenever  he  came,  inquired  after  my  health,  &c.). 
X  lit.  eating  =  who  ate.     Partcp.  act.  of  Kal,  from  '^3i^,  to 
eat.  ' '' 


(25S) 


92  The  Relative  Pronoun.         [ch.  7.  §  3. 

'-  ^PV    'hv    *  b'^^^n      dil  i^alai  ^akebh.  4  likdoshim, 
'" T     -  T  •:  • 


'    V  T  T  V  -;  •  •;  • 

:t  t:it:  • 

:  i:\t:"'  njiYp^n?  in  s  :  -):J 

•  ;         T  ;'t       V        —  T 

bm  r\bD)  nin>  "pnii  bi^  9 

T  ;  -  T  V     '      • 


"5^er-baarets  hemmdh,  v'addire 
col-khephtsi-bhara.  5  anshe 
damim  *sher  bidehem'  zim- 
mah.  6  *ni  Yoseph  ^khichem 
"sher-ia^chartem  bthi  Mits- 
ra'y'mah.  7  lo-zach'ru  eth- 
yado,  yom  "^sher  padam  minni- 
tsar.  8  bar  zeh-kan'thah 
y'raino.  9  el  gadol  Y'hovah 
ume'lech  gadol  i^al-col-^lohim 
"^shcr  b'yado  mekbk're  arets, 
v'tho^aphoth  harira  16  ;  *sher- 
16  bay  yam.  10  gaalta  har- 
Tsiyy6n  zeh  schacanta  bko. 


h)  1.  (He)  whose  son  said.  1.  The  man  whose  bread  I  have 
eaten.  3.  The  men  whose  bread  I  have  eaten.  4.  Men  who 
have  no  ruler.  5.  The  man  who  trusted  me.  6.  The  men  who 
trusted  them.     7.  Thy  covenant  which  I  observed. 


Chap.  VIII.    The  Regular  Verb. 
§  1 .    Derivation  of  Verbs.    The  Conjugations. 

259  Verbs,  like  nouns,  may  be  divided,  in  respect  to 
their  origin,  into  three  classes. 

260  a)  Primitives. 

b)    Verbal  derivatives^  derived  from  other  verbs. 

*  Has  lifted  up.     Perf.  of  the  form  called  Hiphil. 

t  As  for  the  saints.  The  prefix  7  with  pi.  of  li^ilp  (kadosh), 
holy..    Decl.  3. 

X  lit.  Egypt-wards  =■  into  Egypt.  The  final  ^^=zwards,  to- 
wards, into,  of  motion  to,  or  into.  "^ 

§  He-redeemed-them.     Suffix  of  3rd  pi.  raasc. 


CH.  8.  §  1.]  The  Regular  Verb.  93 

c)  Denominatives,   or   those   derived    [de   nomine)  (260) 
from  a  noun:  which  appear  to  be  of  later  origin 
than  the  two  preceding  classes  (G.). 

The  noun,  from  which  a  denominative  verb  comes,  261 
is  generally  a  derivative:    e.  g.   p'?  labhan,    to    be 

white,  hence  HJ^?'  I'bhenah,  a  brick  (from  its  colour), 

and    hence   again,    |l7,   to  make  bricks;    from   T]yi> 

dagah,   to   increase   greatly,    yi,  dag,  a  fish ;    and 

hence  again,  Jl'n,  dug,  to  fish  (G.). 

A  peculiar  kind  of  denominatives,  of  rather  late  262 
formation,  are  derived  from  augmented  nouns,  so  that 
one  of  their  radical  letters  w^as  in  the  noun  a  servile : 
e.  g.  r}')},  nuakh,  to  rest,  to  set  oneself  dotvn;  hence, 

the  noun,  JlPf^,  na'khath,  a  setting  down;  and  hence 
again,  S1T]2,  nakhath,  to  descend  (G.).  *«% 


Conjugations  or  Species  of  the  Hebrev)  Verb.']  The  263 
original  signification  of  the  root  receives  various  mo- 
difications of  meaning,  according  to  a  regular  analogy, 
by  a  specific  change  of  form:  e.  g.  ID?,  to  learn; 
"7D7,  to  cause  to  learn,  to  teach;  22"^,  to  lie;  y^^pH, 
to  cause  to  lie,  to  lay. 

In  other  languages  such  words  are  regarded  as  new  derivative  264 
verbs:  e.  g.  to  fall,  to  fell;  jacere,  to  throw;  jacere,  to  lie; 
yivofxaiy  to  be  born;  yewdu),  to  beget,  to  bear.  But  in  Hebrew, 
where  these  formations  are  beyond  comparison  more  regular 
than  in  any  other  language,  they  have  been  called  conjugations  * 
and  parts  of  the  same  verb. 

The  changes  consist  partly  in  varying  the  vowels  265 
of  the  root,  or  doubling  one  or  more  of  its  letters 

(bzSip,  ':'^i^ ;  ^r?ip,  big'^p  -,  bbl!:\),  b:£lbl^\^ ;  k'itte\,  kuttal ; 

ko/el,  ko/al;   ki/lTd,  k'^al/jH ;   com\i.  to  lie,  to  lay ;    to 
fall,  to  fell);  partly  in  prefixing  formative  letters  or 

*  Hebr.  D''J''i3..  buildings,  more  correctly  species,  modifica- 
tions  of  the  ground-form. 


94  The  Regular  Ver^b.  [ch.  8. 

(265)  syllables  (^pipj,  ^'r?i?n,  nik/al,  hik/il ;  comp.  speak, 
bespeak ;  count,  to  recount ;  bid,  forbid) ;  sometimes 
in  a  change  of  each  kind^,  as  /^pJIH,  hithka//el. 

266      The  conjugations  that  are  in  common  use  are — 

Kal  or   light,   because  not  burdened  /ZDp  (3rd  sing.  masc. 


with  any  accessory  meaning,  or 
with  any  formative  addition  or 
doubled  letter. 

Niphal,  properly  reflexive,  sometimes 
passive:  n  prefixed  with  i,  and 
Sk'va  under  the  first  radical.  (The 
full  prefix,  as  we  shall  see,  is  hin.) 

Piel,  mostly  intensive;  to  act  with 
diligence,  earnestness,  or  frequency. 
Second  radical  doubled  by  dagesh  : 
vowels,  I,  e. 

Pual,  passive  of  Piel.  Second  radical 
doubled  by  dagesh :  vowels  u,  a. 

HipMl,  mostly  causatioe :  h  prefixed 
with  i  (with  a  in  other  forms), 
and  z  (with  Yod)  for  the  second 
vowel. 

Hophal,  passive  of  Hiphil. 

Hithpael,  an  intensive  reflexive;  the 
syllable  kith  prefixed,  and  (like 
Piel,  from  which  it  is  formed,)  a 
strong  dagesh  in  the  second  radical. 


of  perfect),  ka- 
ta\,  to  kill. 

/ZOp^»  nik^al,  he  killed 
• '      himself. 


7tDp5  ki^/el,  he  killed 
many  ;  he  mas- 
sacred. 

7J0p.  ku^/al,    he   was 
^'    killed  violently, 
Syc. 

/'^IDp'n,  hiktil,  he  caused 
'  •  '      to  kill. 

b:^pn,  hok^ai. 
b:::ivnn,  hithka^ei. 


267      The   names   of  the    Conjugations   are   the   actual 
tenses  of  the  old  Paradigm  b^B,  payal,  bVB^,  bVB,  &c. 

The  selection  of  this  verb  was  unfortunate,  because 
from  having  for  its  second  radical  a  guttural  which 
is  incapable  of  receiving  dagesh,  the  name  is  not  an 
exact  type  of  the  usual  formation  of  the  tense  for 
strong  verbs.  Kdtdl  is  now  generally  used  for  the 
Paradigm,  and  has  the  advantage  of  clear  distinct 
sound,  but  the  disadvantage  of  stating  forms  that 
have  no  existence ;  for  none  of  the  forms  but  Kal 
occur  in  Hebrew,  and  even  that  is  rare,  and  confined 
to  the  poetical  books. 


§!•] 


Conjugations » 


95 


As  compared  with  Kal  (=  light)^  Piel^  Pual,  and  268 
Hithpael  are  called  heavy  conjugations,  having  their 
middle  radical  loaded  with  dagesh. 

The  persons  of  the  derived  conjugations  are  formed,  269 
as  in  the  perfect  of  Kal,  by  appending  to  the  tense- 
root  (3rd  sing,  masc.)  the  suffixes  ti ;  td,  t ;  ah;  \  nu; 
tem ,  ten  ;  u. 

Since  the  terminations  that  begin  with  a  vowel  2/0 
(ah,  v)  are  added  to  the  root  in  the  same  w^ay,  one  of 
them  may  serve  as  an  example  for  the  other ;  and  so, 
for  the  same  reason,  one  of  the  persons  wdth  a  ter- 
mination beginning  with  a  consonant,  may  serve  for 
the  rest*;  only  the  pupil  must  remember  that,  since 
tem',  ten  are  accented  on  the  penult,  a  Kamets  in  the 
first  syllable  of  the  root  will  be  changed  into  Sh^va 
(or,  if  the  initial  consonant  is  a  guttural.)  into  a 
Khateph. 


Thus: 

Niphal 

Till 

Pual 

HipMl 

Hophal 

Hithpael 


271 


Perfect.     {Tense-root.) 
3  m. 

nik^al 


1  sing. 
mk/alti 
ki/^alti 
kuttahi 
hik/alti 

•      J     ~     .    T 

hok^alti 
hithka^'alti 


knttal' 
hik/il 

bwn 

- ';  T 
hok^al 

hTthka*//eI 


3/. 

nb:^p2 

mkriah 

r^b:::ip 

T     I      ' 

ki^flah 

kuJ'l'ah 

T     •  ';  • 

hik^rlah 

nbtgpn 

hSki'l'ah 

r]b:::ipnn 

hithka^^'lah 


*  These  model  (or  normal)  forms  are  marked  in  the  Paradigms 
with  an  asterisk. 


96 


The  Regular  Verb. 


[CH.  8. 


272  Observe  that  in  Piel,  the  characteristic  e  is  dropt  in  the  other 
persons ;  in  Hipkil,  the  i  is  retained  in  the  3rd  fem.  hiktilah 
(and  therefore  in  3rd  plur.  kikiilu).  The  pu})il  will  find  no 
difficulty  in  filling^  up  the  other  persons  (nik^alti,  nik/alta, 
nikfalt,  nik/al,  nik^'lah,  |  mk^alnu,  nik/altem,  nik^alten,  nikriu). 

Vocabulary, 


273  Word,  -)D^^,  otner  (decl.  6,  b). 
To    divide    into  jioe,     ^DrT> 

khimmesh  (khamash,^ye). 
Plenty,  ^2''^,  sabhai>. 

T    T 

Year,  H^yi),  shanah  {pi.  sha- 

T  T 

nim  and  shanoth. 
To  let  go,  ^c,  ^OD'^,  shamai*. 
To  learn,  1u7,  lamad  f. 

—  T 

To  break:  to  break  in  pieces: 
to  afflict,  13^,  shabhar. 

-     T 

Affliction,  sorrow,  *13ti^»  she'- 
bher. 


Hail,  113,  barad. 

T  T 

Rock,  y^^p,  selaj)  (decl.  6,  b). 
Tree,  fV'  ^^ts  (decl.  7,  a). 
To  flow,  1tOD>  ma^ar|. 

-  T 

To  visit,  1p3,  pakad§. 

-  T 

To  destroy,  [IQti^],  [shamad], 

—    T 

used  in  Hiphil. 
A  city,  T'^i;,  i>ir. 
To  steal,  335.  ganabh. 

-T 

To  bless,  113.  barach  |1. 

-  T 

To  walk,  "rjSl,  halach*U. 


Exercise  28. 


a?1T  3         :  0^^:31  ni3b^  2 


1  nilcadta  bh'imre  phicha. 

2  nilc'dah  raglam.  3  ze'rai? 
tsaddikim  nimla^.  4  limmadti 
ethcem  torah.  5  khimmesh 
eth-e'rets  Mitsra'yim**  b'she'- 
bhai>    sh'ne   hassabhai^. 


*   In  Niphal,  to  be  thrown  down. 

f  In  Piel,  to  teach.  , 

+  In  Hiphil,  to  cause  to  flow:  to  rain  (trans.). 

§  In  Hiphil,  to  cause  to  visit:  to  order  to  inspect:  hence  to 
place  a  person  over:  to  make  him  a  manager,  &c. 

II  In  Hithpael,  to  bless  oneself:  think  oneself  happy,  &c. 
%  In  Hithpael,  to  walk:  to  go  about  (also  of  a  course  of  life). 

**  Egypt. 


§2.] 

.         .  |T  -r  - 

T  T    ~  ••     •  V  T     -  •• 

T     ;  •    ;    •  T 

.         -      .  ,. 

■  nm  Ty  7:1?  '-T>"}^OT  12 


Kal.  97 

6    nishm'/ii   bhide-se'lai^  (274) 

shoph'^ehem.  7  eth-c61-i>ets 
hassadeh  shibber  habbarad. 
S  nishb'rucol-m'ah''bhayich*. 

I  i^al-she'bher  bath-i^ammi 
hosbbarti.  10  )?amasa 
[Amasa]  lo-nisbmar  f  ba- 
khe'rebh    *sber   b'yad-Yoabb. 

II  15  him^ir  Y'hovah  ^lohim 
i^al-baa'rets  (p.).  12  him^arti 
i^al  i>ir  akhatb.  13  hishmid 
etb-bakhori  ;|:  mipp'ne-bem. 
14  Po^ipbar  hipbkid  otho 
b'bhetbo.  15  Noakh  hats- 
tsaddik  hithhallecb  etb-ha- 
^iohim. 


b)  1.  Thou  art  taken,  O  Babel!  2.  I  am  broken-hearted. 
3.  I  was  stolen  from  the  land  of  the  Hebrews.  4.  They 
divided-  the  land  -into-five.  5.  The  kings  have  placed-  him  -over 
the  land.  6.  The  righteous  (pi.)  walked  with  God.  7.  He 
blessed-himself  in  his  heart.  8.  You  (pi.  m.)  have  placed-  us 
-over  your  house. 

Chap.  VIII.    §  2.     On  the  ground-form  [or  Conju- 
gation) Kal  (G.). 

The  forms  of  the  Hebrew  verb  are  the  Perfect  (1);  275 
the  Infinitive  (2);  the  Imperative  (3);   the  Imperfect 
[often  called  the  Future']  (4) ;  the  Participle  (5). 

If  the  forms  are  taken  in  this  order,  and  the  Conjugations  in  276 
the  usual  order  Kal  {I),  Niphal{2),  Piel{3),  Pualij^),  Hiphil  (5), 
Hophal  (6),  Hithpael  (7),  the  combination  of  two  numerals  will 

*  Thy  lovers.  A  Participle  Piel,  nrTN?D  (decl.  7,  b),  with 
pronominal  suffix.  "  ~  • 

t  Niphal.  of  ')12'2}  (=  (pvXdTTeaQai),  to  be  on  one's  guard 
against.  ~  ^ 

X  The  Horims. 

K 


98 


The  Regular  Verb, 


[CH.  8. 


(276)  supply  a  ready  means  of  shortly  denoting  the  mood  or  tense  and 
conjugation  of  any  form.  Thus  2,  5  {=^  second  form  of  the^^if^ 
conjugation),  i.  e.  the  Infinitive  of  HipMl ;  3,  2  {=.  third  form 
of  the  second  conjugation),  i.  e.  Imperative  of  Niphal. 


The  Short  Paradigm  of  Kal. 


277 


iKal 


1  Perf. 
ka^al 


2  Infin. 
constr. 


k'^ol 


3  Imperat. 
kVol 


5  PaHcp. 
act. 


kofel 


Q  Past 

partcp. 

ka^ul 


>78 


4  Impel f. 
y'lktdl 

Perfect. — {a)  The  third  singular  of  this  tense  is 
considered,  as  we  have  seen,  the  ground-form  or  root. 
Besides  the  usual  roots  with  vowels  a — a,  we  also 
find  the  vowels  a — e,  a — 0,  usually  confined  to  in- 
transitive verbs  denoting  states  and  qualities. 

b)  Verhs  whose  vowels  are  a — a,  a — e,  a — 0,  are  called  respect- 
ively. Verbs  Middle  A,  Verbs  Middle  E,  and  Verbs  Middle  O. 

279  Verbs  Middle  E  are  conjugated  exactly  like  Verbs 
Middle  A,  except  in  the  3rd  sing,  of  the  Perfect. 
Thus  from  cdbhed  we  shall  have  cdbhadti,  cdbhddtd, 
cdbhddt,  cabhed,  cdhWddh^  &c. 

280  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are  (1)  Verbs  Lamed  Aleph,  and 
(2)  the  remaining  persons  of  the  regular  verb  when  they  are  in 
pause  [See  282],     Thus,  3rd  sing.  HpHlf  becomes  np31  in 

't  ;    T  't"    t 

pause. 

281  In  Verbs  Middle  0  the  Kholem  is  retained  in 
inflexion,  where  it  has  the  tone;  and  changed  into 
Kamets  Khatuph,  when  the  tone  is  thrown  forwards. 

2&2  On  'Pause'  and  its  ejects^'], — The  tone-syllable  of 
the  last  word  of  a  sentence,  or  principal  member  of  a 
sentence,  is  said  to  be  in  pause.  This  syllable  is 
marked  with  one  of  the  great  distinctive  accents  (es- 
pecially AtJmakh  [a]  and  Silluk  [1]),  as  ^^^'^,  Dprj. 

2S3      a)  When  the  syllable  in  pause  has  a  short  vowel,  it  becomes 
long;    as   bw,    ^rop;    U'12,    D\'D ;   Pbw^  n^^p; 

-      T  At't  •-  -/kT  T    :     -'t  T     ;|t't 

This  rule  respects  principally  Pathakh  and  Segol.    Segol 


*  The  pupil  need  not  study  these  rules,  till  he  is  referred  to 
them. 


§  2.]  Kal.  99 

is,  however,  strong  enough  to  be  retained  in  pause,  when  (283) 

the  syllable  closes  with  Dagesh  forte,  as  ^iD^JOp''' 

{Pathakh  is  sometimes  adopted  in  place  of  Segol,  and 
even  of  Tsere.) 

b)  When  a  final  tone-syllable  begins  with  two  consonants  (as 

PtblDp),  the  vocal  Sh'va  under  the  first  gives  place  to  a 

■»•  :  It 
full  vowel ;  a  more  fitting  position  is  thus  secured  for  the 
tone,  which  is  moved  from  the  last  syllable  to  the  new 

penultima  :  e.  g.  nbl^^p,  h'^LDD  ;  TMUbD,  HHir^  ;  •l7:Dp\ 
T  :  ')T     T  at't        t  :  |t        ta*"t  :  :  • 

•l^bp''*    The  vowel  selected  is  always  that  which  had  been 

dropt  from  the  same  syllable,  in  consequence  of  the 
lengthening  of  the  word.  Vocal  Sh'va  in  pause  becomes 
Segol,  and  a  Khateph  gives  place  to  the  analogous  long 

vowel,  as  ^^'t^,  ^iv^;  ^^U,  "'^H. 
•  ~:       'AT        •  t;        -a 

c)  This  tendency  to  place  the  tone  on  the  penulfhna  in  pause 
shows  itself  moreover  in  several  words  which  then  regu- 
larly retract  the  tone,  as    Oj^,    Oj^};    r\Di^,    Hi^i^ ; 

•         T  -AX  X    -  T    /,T 

7ir\V>    njli^ ;    and  in  some  other  single  cases. 


The  forms  that  end  in  ti,  td,  mi,  are  penacute  2S4 
(Milel) ;  the  others  are  oxytone  (Milra).  [a)  By 
pause  (as  just  described)  the  accent  is,  in  several 
persons,  shifted  back,  and  the  original  vowel  of  the 
second  syllable  restored,  [b)  Vav  cotiversive  of  the 
Perfect  moves  the  accent  forward  one  syllable. 

Infinitive   or   second  ground-form   of  each   Conju-  285 
gation]. — («)  The  shorter  infinitive,  or  infinitive  con- 
struct 6b)P,  k7ol)  is  the  more  usual ;  and  is  the  form 
that  is  necessarily  used  with  prefio?ed  prepositions. 

b)  The  longer  infinitive  [infinitive  absolute)  is  used, 
when  the  action  of  the  verb  is  stated  independently 
by  itself;  it  is  of  common  occurrence  in  a  frequent 
Hebrew  idiom,  by  which  it  is  either — 

1)  placed  before  a  finite  verb,  to  denote  intensity 
(or  strong  asseveration) ; 

2)  placed  after  a  finite  verb,  to  denote  continuity 
(a  lasting  action). 

k2 


100  The  Hegular  Verb,  [ch.  8. 

286  Thus  i^SpD!)  ^DD^,  nich^oph  nich^aphta  (thou  ear- 
nestly longedst) ;  20i3^  ZODti^''],  vayyishpo^  shapho/, 
he  ivill  be  playing  the  judge. 

287  A  sort  of  gerund  is  formed  by  the  infinitive  con- 
struct with  7 :  e.  g.   /iD\)7  for  killing  \interficiendo,  ad 

inierficiendim{\ .  It  may  be  followed  by  a  substantive 
(which,  strictly  speaking,  stands  in  the  genitive  re- 
lation to  the  gerundial  infinitive). 

288  The  7  is  here  so  closelv  connected,  that  it  constitutes  part  of 
the   grammatical   form     /JOp  A    lik-^6l ;    7Di  A    lin-pol   (with 

dagesh  lene) :  just  as  the  preformatives  of  the  Imperfect  (e.  g.  in 
yik-tol).     But  ^  (in),  ^   (from),  are  not  supposed  to  be   so 

closely  connected  ;  hence  a  hegadcephath  letter  (as  2nd  radical) 
would  not  take  dagesh  lene :  7H)J^,  bi-n'phol  (wo?  bin-pol). 

289  Imperative.']  —  (a)  The  chief  form  of  the  Imperative 
7Zi|p  (/^fp)  is  the  same  that  lies  also  at  the  basis  of 

the  Imperfect,  and  which,  when  viewed  as  an  In- 
finitive, is  likewise  allied  to  the  noun.  It  expresses 
only  the  second  person,  but  has  inflexions  for  the 
Feminine  and  the  Plural.  It  has  no  form  for  the 
third  person,  and  even  the  second  must  be  expressed 
by  the  Imperfect,  when  a  negative  precedes,  as 
/ZDpJn  7^J,  do  not  kill;  lit.  thou  shall  not  kill  \ne  oc- 

cidas]  (not  blh\)  b'^). 

b)  The  proper  passive  conjugations  have  no  Im- 
perative, but  the  reflexive  Niphal  and  Hithpael  have. 

290  The  inflexion  is  exactly  similar  to  that  of  the  Im- 
perfect. 

291  Imperfect.'] — The  final  6  (Kholem)  is  ovi\y  tone-long 
(as  in  the  Inf.  and  Imp.).  Hence,  a)  it  is  very  sel- 
dom written  fully,  b)  Before  Makkeph  it  becomes 
Kamets-Khatuph.     c)  Before  the  affbrmatives  ^-  and 

T  it  becomes  vocal  Sk'va.  d)  In  a  very  few  passages 
it  is  changed  into   ^  before  these   afibrmatives,  but 


§  2.]  Kal  101 

only  when  it  stands  close  before  the  pause:    e.  g.  (291) 
•IZOIBIi^),  yishpu/u,  they  will  judge, 

a)  Intransitive  verbs  {middle  E  and  0)  take  a  (Pathakh)  in  292 
the  Imperfect,  as  71]),  to  be  great,  Imperf.  7"^^^;  IJOp,  to 

be  small,  Imperf.  ]tOp"'- 

b)  Sometimes  both  forms  exist  together ;  the  Jw^er/".  with  0 
is  then  transitive,  and  that  with  a  intransitive  :  but  now 
and  then  both  occur  without  any  difference  of  meaning. 
In  the  irregular  verbs,  the  feeble  e  (Tsere)  is  also  found 
in  the  final  syllable,  as  ]ri^  for  ^iU**.     These  three  forms 

of  the  Imperfect  are  called  /mper/ec^  0,  Imperfect  A,  Im- 
perfect E  *. 

c)  In  the  Pentateuch  ]  {no)  occurs  m  place  of  H^,  especially 

T  T 

after  Kfli?  conversive. 

d)  For  !)    (m)    the   fuller  ending  ]!)  (un)   is  not  uncommon 

(mostly  with  an  obvious  stress  on  the  word  at  the  end  of  a 

period),  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable  being  retained,  as 

i^Till^j  yirga'zun,  they  tremble  f. 
AT  :• 

In  like   manner   vtDpn   has   a  longer  form  with   final  ] :  293 

In  pause  [282],  the  vowel  of  the  second  syllable,  if  it  had  be-  294 
come  Sh'va,  is  restored,  and  takes  the  tone,  as  ''7L0pjn,  ^^[DP''. 


*  For  the  3rd  plur.  fern.  il^bbpD  is  substituted  in  three 

instances,   to   distinguish   it  from   the    2nd  pers.,    the    form 

n^^bp''    (etymologically   more   correct),    as   in   Chaldee   and 

Arabic ;  and  in  several  instances  Il^/bpn  seems  to  have  been 

used  improperly  for  the  3rd  pers.  singular. 

t  This  original  ending  ])  is  common  in  Aramaean  and  Arabic. 
Of  the  Imperfect  with  J^,  i«^V^J\  Jer.  x.  5,  is  the  only  example. 

T  • 

X  This  is  also  common  in  Aram,  and  Arabic  (probably  in 
imitation  of  the  plural  ending  V).    G.) 


K  3 


102  The  Regular  Verb.  [ch.  8. 

[Learn  the  Paradigm  of  Kal,  iathe  Regular  Verb,  Appendix  D.] 

Vocabulary. 


295  To  seek,  to  require,  ti/ll,  da- 

~   T 

rash. 
To  be  great,  7I5,  gadal. 
To  anoint,  "^JDJ?  na^ach. 
To  write,  3.n3>  cathabh. 

—  T 

To  take  hold,  of;    take,  seize, 
handle,  i^H)D>  taphas. 

~    T 

To  rage  (tumultuously),  '^y^, 

—    T 

ragash. 
Tofiee,  rflU*  barakh. 

~  T 

To  observe,  "1^^,  natsar. 

~   T 

To  wink  {mulieiously  or  craft- 
ily), y^T),  karats. 

To  devise  {evil),  1^^*111.  kharash 

~   T 

{toplough;  to  fabricate,  ^c). 
To  forsake,  ^t^.  i^azabh. 
To  go  on,  ")Ii,*^^,  ashar. 

—  T 

To  slay    (especially   animals), 
raiD,  ^abhakh. 

—    T 

To  mix,  to  mingle,  'T[D^3.  n^a- 

sach. 
To  arrange,  to  prepare,  TT"!!?, 

i^arach. 
To  inhabit,  ]Dt^,  shachan. 
Very,       Ij^D,       m'od       (lit. 

strength). 
An  accusation,  H^IO'V  (w),  si^- 

nab  (saifan,  to  oppose). 
Baal,  byil,  bOal. 


A  prophet,  i^'^21  nabhi*  (deck 

3,  a),  [riabha%  to  announce'^. 

Holy,  Ten,  khasid  (deck  3,  a). 

•     T 

A  commandment,  riXj^'D  («)» 
mitsvah  (tsavah,  to  set  up). 

A  covenant,  /T'nil*  b'rith. 

Between,  "j''^,,  ben. 

Seed,  ^^T,   ze'ra))   (zara)?,    to 

scatter,  to  sow). 

Time,  season,  J"]]^,  i>eth, (c. deck 
> 

8,  bj  contr,  for  JIT^,  from 

m^r,  to  go  by). 
A  victim,  PTIIlDj  ^e'bhakh  (see 

to  slay,  above). 
When?  ''JID,  mathai. 

—    T 

How    long?     >nQ""7J/,    i?ad- 

mathai. 
Harp,  lyre,  "11^)3,  cinnor. 
Numerous,  133.  cabbed. 
To  be  able,   73"')    yacol   {verb 

T 

middle  0). 

A  prison,  Dn^DH  D''3,  beth 

ha^urim    (lit.    house  of  the 
bound;     contr.    from    jy^l 

I^Di^.  a  prisoner;    partcp. 

T 

of  HDKj  ^sar,  to  bind. 

~    T 

To  go  forth,  ^^"^1,  yatsa. 


§2.] 


Kal 

Exercise  29. 


103 


a)       :^1h^-n^*  '^r^t'n  i 

T  T  ••  :      •  T      ;    T  T  T 

:  nbt:^>  vi^Dn  ^11^  8 

''^'bV  iDpi^  n^TD  9 

T   ••  ;       •   ••   '       'v  T  •  —  •    ; 

••        T   ;  T 

-  X  •■  T  :  X  T  :  • 

•  X     ;  T  X  ;    •.,  ■''IT 

*n^n  ^^?)^  ^*nv  is  :'^l7^? 

^DjrnJ:^  tob*^^  '^i)^  ^p  19 
n^iLD  20      * :  n-rrr  in^n 

'     : •         TT  •      ~ 


1  darashti  eth-Y'hovah.  296 

2  gadalta  m'od.  3  va^ni 
na^achti  malci  i^al-Tsiyyon. 

4  cath'bhu  si/nah  i?al-y6- 
sh*bhe  Y'hiidah.  5  tiphsu  eth- 
n'bhie  haBBa))al.  6  lammah 
ragh'shu  goyim  ?  7  Hagar 
bar'khah   mipp'ne   Sarah. 

8  v'de'rech  kh^sidav  yishmor. 

9  m'zimmah  tishmor  i'^alecha. 

10  n'tsor,  b'ni,  mitsvath  abhi- 
cha.  11  zoHh  b'rithi  ''sher 
tishm'm  beni  ubhenechem' 
ubhen  zar'i^^cha  akli^recha. 

1 2  :>ad-mathai  ;L^atsel  tishcabh'? 

13  adam  B'liyyai^al  Tsli  a'ven, 
korets  b'i'enav,  khoresh  rai? 
b'chol-))eth.  14  i^izbhu 
ph'thaim  v'ishru  bh'de'rech 
bhinah.  15  ^abh'khah  tihh- 
khahh,  mas'chah  yenahh,  aph 
i^ar'chah'  shulkhanahh. 

16  r'shai?im  lo^  yishc'nu 
arets  (p.).  17  v'ach  eth- 
dimchem'  I'naphshothechem' 
edrSsh.  18  Yubhalhu^hayati* 
*bbi  col-tophes  cinnor 
v'i^ugabh.  19miyach6llishpo^ 
eth-)^amm'cha  haccabhed 
hazzeh  ?  20  mibbeth  hasurim 
yatsa  limloch. 


Was. 


104  The  Regular  Verb,  [ch.  8. 

(296)      b)  Translate  into  Hebrew — 

1.  I  will  seek  Jehovah.  2.  My  children,  seek  ye  the  Jehovah. 
3.  Why  did  he  fly  from  the  face  of  Abraham  ?  4.  I  will  keep 
this  thy  covenant,  5.  They  will  write  an  accusation.  6.  How 
long  shall  we  dwell  in  the  land?  7-  Thou  shalt  keep  my 
covenant.     8.  We  will  keep  their  covenants. 

9)  Write  down  the  Perfect,  Imperative,  and  Imperfect  of 
shdmar  through  all  its  persons. 

10)  Write  down  the  Infinitive  {absol.  and  constr.)  of  ddrash. 

11)  Write  down  both  Participles  of  ndtsdr. 

Chap.  VIII.    §3.    Niphal. 

297  The  full  characteristic  of  this  conjugation  is  the 
preformative  syllable  hm  QH).     It  appears  only  in 

the  Inf.  constr.  "^ipprT  (by  assimilation  from  7l^\>)T\). 
With  the  Inf.  are  connected,  in  form,  the  Imper. 
/lOpn  and  the  Imperf.  7lDP\  contracted  from  /ZOpH^ 

In  the  Perf.  the  (less  essential)  h  has  been  suffered 
to  fall  away,  and  only  n  remains  as  the  characteristic, 
hence  /Zpfpi  (niktal).     The  Participle  is  distinguished 

from  the  Perfect  only  by  the  long  (t),  as  bl^\)^,  fem. 
rh'l^y^l  or  rh'i^^y  The  inflexion  of  Niphal  is  per- 
fectly analogous  to  that  of  Kal.  [See  Paradigm  D  in 
Appendix.] 

298  Hence  the  characteristics  of  Niphal  are  (1)  for  the  Perf.  and 
Partcp.  the  Nan  prefixed;  for  the  Imper.,  Inf.,  and  Imperf. 
Dagesh  in  the  first  radical. 

299  The  same  marks  are  found  in  the  irregular  verbs,  except  that 
where  the  first  radical  is  a  guttural,  Dagesh  forte  is  necessarily 
omitted,  and  compensation  made  for  it  by  lengthening  the  pre- 
ceding vowel. 

300  Significations  of  Niphal^  Niphal  resembles  the 
Greek  middle  voice,  and  hence, 

301  a)  It  is  primarily  reflexive  of  Kal;  often  in  verbs 

which  express  passion  or  feeling. 

b)  It  frequently  expresses  reciprocal  action — 

1)  primarily,  when  the  action  is  done  to  one  another  (to 
each  other),  or  by  one  with  another; 


§  3.]  Niphal  105 

2)  secondarily,  when  two  or  more  are  concerned  in  the  (sOl) 
same  action  in  opjoosition  to  each  other  (B.  a,  6). 

c)  It  also,  like  Hithpael  and  the  Greek  Middle, 
denotes  an  action  done  to  or  for  oneself, 

d)  It  is  often  also  passive  of  Kal,  but  also  of  Pi'el 
and  Hiphil,  when  Kal  is  intransitive  or  not  in 
use ;  and  in  this  case  its  meaning  may  again 
coincide  with  Kal  (H'^'n,  Kal  and  Niphal^  io  be 

sick),  and  even  take  an  accusative. 
Examples  of  denominatives  are :  i21/J»  cor  datum  fieri,  from  302 
^22 />  hearts  130,  to  he  born  a  male,  from  Ut,  a  male. 

The  older  Hebrew  Grammarians  consider  Niphal  as  the  proper  303 
Passive  of  Kal.  This  is  decidedly  incorrect ;  for  Niphal  has 
not  the  characteristics  of  the  other  passives.  According  to  the 
usage  of  the  language,  the  passive  signification  is  certainly  the 
predominant  one ;  but  it  was  first  derived  from  the  reflexive. 
The  prefixed  hin  has  (like  the  hith  of  Hithpael)  the  force  of  a 
reflexive  pronoun. 

The  Inf.  absol.  7iopJ  (nik^ol)  connects  itself,  in  form,  with  304 

the  Perfect,  to  which  it  bears  the  same  relation  as  7iZ5p  to 

bl^p'     The  i  in  the  final  syllable  (which  is  essentially  long)  is 

only  found  in  the  Inf.  of  Piel  and  Pual. 

a)  In  pause  [282],  Pathakh  often  takes  the  place  of  Tsere  in  305 
the  final  syllable. 

b)  In  the  2nd  and  3rd  plur.  fern,  the  form  with  Pathakh  is 
more  common  than  that  given  in  the  Paradigm  :  e.  g. 
nJ"llDTn    (tizzacharnah),  they   shall  be  remembered,   Isa. 

Ixv.  17. 

c)  When  the  Imperf.,  or  the  Inf.,  or  the  Imper.  is  imme- 
diately followed  by  a  monosyllable,  the  tone  is  mostly 
drawn  back  upon  the  penult,  and  consequently  the  final 
syllable,  losing  the  tone,  takes  Segol  instead  of  Tsere:  e.g. 

n3,  7^3''  (yiccashel  bahh),  he  stumbled  at  it. 

T  "    T   • 

d)  In  a  few  words,  this  form  with  the  retracted  tone  is  the 
only  one  in  use. 

e)  A  frequent  form  of  the  1st  Pers.  is  7Z0pJ^  (ikkafel). 


106 


The  Regular  Verb. 


[CH.  8. 


The  Short  Paradigm  of  Kal  and  Niphal. 


306 


1  Kal 

2  Niphal 


\Perf. 

ka^al 
nik^al 


2  Injin. 
constr. 

hikka^el 


3  Imjjerat.  \  4  Imperf. 


k7ol 
hikka/el 


yik^ol 
yikka^el 


5  Partcp. 
act. 

ko^el 

nik^al 


6  Past 
partcp. 

ka/ul 


Eooamples  of  Verbs  in  Niphal, 


307              Kal. 

Niphal. 

shamar,  to  keep. 

nishmar 

to  keep  oneself  =  (1)  abstain 
from:  (2)   take  heed,  beware 

[cf.  (pv\daaiaQai], 

sathar,  to  hide. 

("l.npp 
nistar 

to  hide  oneself:  to  lie  hid:  to  be 
hidden. 

shapha^,  to  judge. 

nishpa^ 

to  contend  (in  a  suit);  to  liti- 
gate (recipr.) :  i.  e.  to  place 
oneself  with  another  at  the  bar 
of  a  court  (E.). 

lakham,  to  devour: 
to  consume. 

nilkham 

(to  consume  one  another  =) 
fight  \_naxt(yOai], 

[bahal,  to  tremble']. 

nibhhal 

to  tremble:  to  be  terrified:  to 
flee:  to  make  (eager,  trem- 
bling) haste  [after,  7]. 

[thaJl^abh]. 

nithi^'abh 

to  be  abominable. 

[ma.\3it,to  be  smooth; 

hence      to      slip 

away]. 
[chalam,  to  wound, 

pierce]. 

nimla^ 
nichlam 

to  deliver  oneself:  to  escape:  to 
be  delivered. 

to  be  insulted:  to  be  shamed: 
to  be  ashamed  [aio-xuMfcQai] . 

[shai^an]. 

nishi^an 

to  rest  oneself :  to  lean  upon: 
to  confide  in. 

[tsamad,  to  bind]. 

nitsmad 

to  bind  oneself  {to) ;  to  be  at- 
tacked or  adhere  to. 

[radam*,  to  snore]. 

nirdam 

to  sleep  heavily :  to  fall  down 
astounded. 

*  An  onomatoei 

lie  word. 

Cf.  ^a^-Qdvh),  dor-mio  (G.). 

§3.] 

[shakaph,  prob.  to 
lay  over;  to  cover. ~\ 


[camar,  to  warrn]. 


Niphal. 


107 


nishkaph 


(to  lay  oneself  over  [e.g.  a  win-  (307) 

dow-sill]  for  the  purpose  of 

looking  out-=z)    to   look  out; 

to  behold;  to  havg  over  (of  a 

mountain) ;  and  fig.  to  impend. 

X^J(a^)  to  show  oneself  a  prophet j  to 
naba'"         ^"^^^^^^^- 

1Q3^      to  be  warmed  J    fig.  to  burn,  to 

.  ~  'S  yearn. 

nicmar  ^ 


Vocabulary, 
[The  forms  in  crotchets  do  not  occur  in  Kal.] 

To   destroy,    ["TQI^'],   shamad  I    Before,  in  the  sight  of    i;)^,  308 


(in  Niphal). 
To  cut  off,   [Pi)],  garaz. 
To  cast  out  or  up,  [^1^)],  ga- 

-T 

rash  (Niph.,  to  be  cost  or 
tossed  up  J  to  be  agitated, 
troubled). 

To  separate,  IHD,  parad. 

To  break,  "lH'iiT,  shabhar. 

—  T 

To  bury,  12p,  kabhar. 

To  hold,  hold  iipj  to  acquire, 
TJOJ^,  tamach. 

To   take;    to  catch,  IJ?,   la- 

chad  *. 
To  gather;    to   collect,    Y^p, 

kabhats. 
To  stumble,  7'yi^3'  cashal. 

~    T 

To  burn,  ^^V,  saraph. 
To    be  pure,     [H^p],     kanah 
(Niph.,  to  be  unpunished). 


ne'ged.    From  before,  TfJliiD' 
Therefore,  ]3"7^,  )^al-cen. 

■> 

Suddenly,  ^/13,  pe'tha)^. 

Remedy,       -j  KD"1D   (a,  a^), 


Deliverance,  (  ™^[P^, 
to  heal). 


^NSng   (a,  a-;, 

y  marpe"    (rapha, 
to  heal). 

Grey-hair;  old  age,  r^y^^DM, 

sebhah    (sibh,   to   be  grey- 
headed). 

Cord,    ^2,h,    khe'bhel  ([kha- 

bhal],  to  bind). 
A  treacherous  person,  TillB*  bo- 

ged  (partcp.  Kal  of  [bagad] 

to  cover). 

> 
Garment,    1^^    (decl.  6,   a), 

be'ged. 

Harvest,    ")^^p,    katsir    (decl. 

•   '  T 

3,  a) ;  katsar,  to  reap. 


*  Also  *  to  take  by  lot '  [Xayx^vu  ?] 


108 


The  Regular  Verb, 


[CH.  8. 


[^0^)  FrowardnesSy^'nyBT\r\,      ta 
Deceiti 


\   h^phuchah 
I    (only  in  plur.), 
J    haphach. 

Wickedness,  TV\r\,  havvah. 

T- 

Righteous,  p^"^2k>  tsaddik. 
To  write;    to   number ,    ")S)D. 

~   T 

5aphar. 


Multitude,    ^^.n  (d),    robh  (ra- 
bhab,  to  become  numerous). 


Famine,  3yi,  rai^abh  (rai^ebh, 

T      T 

to  be  hungry). 


The   bowels  (fig.    compassion), 
Uni,  rakham  (decl.  6,/). 


Exercise  30. 


309  a) 


T ;  •         JT-  •    T     : |t; 

T^^  "^yf^  vrk  W^^  ^ 
:np^^^  Dn:33  nr]^  12 

•  T       V        T  -:  I  -        :  :  • 

•  2pv;_  ^J^  •'i:>'ni^n  17 
:iTO''  n'vm  h^n  18 

"T  •       •  T   :        •• 

*  For  ninsacti. 


1  nigrazti  minne'ged  i^enecha. 

2  v'har'sha))im  cayyam  nig- 
rash.  3  J?al-cen  pe'thai? 
yishshabher',  v'en   marpe". 

4  tikkabher  b'sebhah  <6bhah. 

5  b'kbabl^  kha^^atho  yitta- 
mech.  6  nishm'dah  miBBin- 
yamin  ishsbah.  7  b'de'rech 
khochmah   15   thiccashel. 

8  b'gadav    lo    thissarapbnah. 

9  mei''61ara  nissacbti*.  10  nir- 
dam  bakkatsir  ben  mebhish  f . 

1 1  I'shon  tabpuchothticcareth. 

12  b'havvath  bog'dim  yilla- 
chedu  (jO).  13  yad  I'yad  % 
lo-yinnakeh  rai^,  v'zera)^  tsad- 
dikim  nimla^  {p).  14  gain- 
damo  hinneb  nidrash  {p). 

1 5  l6-tbiccareth  haerets  bara- 
i>abh.  16  nicbm'ru  rakh^mav 
el-akbiv.  17  hikkabh'tsu  b'ne 
Yai^-'kobh.  18  beth  r'sbai^im 
yisbsbamed. 

f  *  That  maketh  ashamed/ 


X  *  Hand  in  hand'  =  *  though  hand  be  joined  in  hand.' 


§  4.]  Piel  and  Pual.  109 

h)  1.  His  brother  was  taken-captive.  2.  Thy  seed  shall  not  (309) 
be  numbered  (for  *)  multitude.  3.  The  treacherous  man  shall 
be  taken  in  his  wickedness.  4.  The  wicked  {pi.)  shall  not  be 
unpunished.  5.  And  they  separated  (themselves)  from  each 
other.  6.  My  clothes  are  burned.  7-  And  I  shall  be  destroyed, 
I  and  ray  house.  8.  The  kings  have  been  anointed.  9.  Our 
queen  will  be  anointed.  10.  His  garment  is  burnt.  11.  He 
will  be  buried,  12.  The  land  shall  be  utterly  destroyed. 
13.  Gather  {pi.)  all  Israel:  and  they  were  gathered.  14.  (In 
the-being-gathered-together  of  the  nations  =)  In  the  nations 
being  gathered  together  and  the  kingdoms.  15.  Those  who-are- 
gathered  {pi.  partcp.)  to  thee. 

16.  Write  down  the  short  Faradigm  of  "TQIi^  in  Niphal. 

17.  Write  the  Hebrew  of—  ~  "^ 

1)  To  be  buried.     2)  Ye  {fem.)  shall  be  buried.     3)  Being 
buried  {fem.  sing. ^  fem.  plur.). 

Chap.  VIII.    §  4.     Piel  and  (its  passive)  Pual. 

^p°  The  characteristic  of  this  conjugation  is  the  310 
doubling  of  the  middle  radical. 

In    Piel,    the    Imperf.    (fep^,    y'ka//el)     and    the  311 
Partcp.   p^'p^,  m'ka^^el),  whose  preformatives  take 
Sh'va,  are  formed,  according  to  the  general  analogy, 
from  the  Inf.  and  Imperat.  7i^p_.     The  Passive  (Pual) 

has  more  obscure  vowels,  and  its  Infinitive  is  of  the 
same  form  with  the  3rd  sing,  of  the  Perfect.  In  other 
respects  the  Active  and  Passive  follow  the  same 
analogy.  In  the  Perfect  of  Piel,  Pathakh  takes  the 
place  of  Tsere  in  the  first  and  second  persons,  which, 
properly,  have   for  their  basis  the  form  7Z0p.      See 

(and  learn)   the    full    conjugation   of  Piel  in  Para- 
digm D. 
The  72,  which  in  this  and  the  succeeding  conjugations  is  the  312 

characteristic  of  the  Partcp.,  may  be  derived  from  '•Q,  who?  in 
the  sense  of  some  one. 

The  characteristic  Dagesh  in  the  middle  radical  is  omitted  313 
only  in  the  following  cases — 

a)  When  this  letter  is  a  guttural. 

*  Q.     How  pointed  before  Resh  ? 

L 


110  The  Regular  Verb.  [ch.  8. 

!13)       h)  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  when  it  has  5A'«?a;  the  omission 
is  then  sometimes  indicated  by  a  Khateph  under  the  letter 
that  ought  to  be  dugeshed. 
^^  In  the  Imperf.  and  Partcp.  the  Sh'va  under  the  pre- 
formatives  may  always  serve  as  a  mark  of  these  conjugations. 

Significations  of  Piel.~\ 

314  a)  It  denotes  intensity  and  repetition^,  and  that 

the  action  is  performed  upon  many.  This  sig- 
nification of  Piel  is  found  with  various  shades 
of  difference.  With  the  eager  pursuit  of  an 
object  is  connected  the  influencing  and  urging 
others  to  perform  it.     Hence, 

b)  It  has  a  causative  signification  (like  Hiphil), 
and  may  be  resolved  by  to  make,  cause,  or  let; 
to  declare  (a  person  to  be  what  the  root  denotes); 
to  regard  him  as — ,  to  help. 

c)  Denominatives  are  frequently  found  in  this  con- 
jugation, which  in  general  mean  to  make  a  thing 
(what  the  noun  expresses),  or  to  be  in  any  ivay 
occupied  with  it. — What  kind  of  reference  the 
verb  then  denotes,  depends  on  the  kind  of  ope- 
ration of  which  the  noun  is  susceptible  :  in  the 
case  of  several  possible  operations,  custom  arbi- 
trarily affixes  the  verb  to  one  of  them  ;  and  often 
restricts  the  use  of  it,  in  this  sense,  to  particular 
objects  (e.  g.  to  afield  in  the  case  of /o  stone). 

d)  They  sometimes  express  the  taking  away  or  in- 
juring the  thing  or  part,  of  which  the  noun  is  the 
name.     [Compare  our,  to  brain  a  man ;  to  bone 
a  herring;  to  stone  raisins:  to  dust  a  room,  &c.] 

e)  So  also  in  some  verbs,  whose  origin  cannot  be 
traced  to  a  noun. 

315  a)  When  Piel  approaches  the  causative  force  of  HipMl,  it 

primarily  expresses  this  notion  with  the  accessory  one  of 
care  and  great  activity, 
b)  Sometimes,  however,  it  is   used  together  with  HiphU, 
without  any  great  difference  of  force,  especially  to  ex- 
press transitively  what  Kal  expresses  intransitively  (E.). 

*  So  intensive  and  iterative  nouns  are  also  formed  by  doubling 
the  middle  stem-letter. 


§4.] 


Piel  and  PuaL 


111 


The  Short  Paradigms  of  Kal,  Niphal,  and  Piel. 

6  Past     316 
partcp.  of 
Kal. 

ka/M 


IPerf. 

2  Inf.  c^tr.  3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

1  Kal 

ka^al 

k'/ol          kVol 

yik/ol 

kofel 

2  Mphal 

nik^al 

hikkafel  hikka^el 

yikka^el 

nik^al 

3  Piel 

ki^^el 

ka«el        ka/^el 

y'ka^el 

m'ka/^el 

Normal  Forms. 

Per/.         kiftel,       ki^'lah,  ki^al'ta. 

Imperat.   ka//el,      ka^^'li,  ka^/el'nah. 

Imperf.     y'ka^fel,  t'ka^^li,  t'ka^fel'nah. 


317 


Examples. 


Kajl. 


a)  bi^"^,  shaal 

—    T 

pnji»  tsakhak 


to  ask 
to  laugh 


Piel. 


318 


to  beg. 

(to  laugh  repeatedly),  to 
sport,  to  jest. 

to  bury  (many  persons). 

to  loose. 

to  relate  J  to  tell. 

to  (cause  to  learn  ^)  teach. 

to  make  alive. 


n^p,  kiibhar  to  bury 
r\r\D>  pathakh  to  open 
"13D»  saphar         to  number 

-  T 

b)  "707,  lamad  to  learn 

—  T 

c)  '^VT^,  khayah        to  live 

TT 

{Piel) 
pl^Jiy  tsiddek,  to  declare  innocent  (314,  6)._ 

"T^"*,  yilled,  to  assist  in  child-bearing. 

Pp,  kinnen,  to  make  a  nest  (]p,  ken,  nest). 

"13J7,  i^ipper,  to  throw  dust  (i^aphar,  dust). 

d)  ^1^,  sheresh,  to  root  out  [the /orm  will  be  explained 
hereafter] . 
^3t»  zinnebh  (to  injure  the  tail  =  )  to  rout  the  rear- 
guard of  an  army. 

€)     7pD,  5ikkel,  {\)  to  stone,  {2)  to  remove  stones  from 
afield. 

l2 


112  The  Regular  Verb,  [ch.  8. 

319  Pual  is  the  Passive  of  Piel:  e.g.  3^2,  to  steal; 
Piel,  to  steal;  Pual,  to  be  stolen. 

320  In  Piel  the  proper  and  literal  signification  of  a  word  is  often 
retained,  when  Kal  has  adopted  a  figurative  one,  the  former 
being  the  stronger  and  more  prominent  idea :    e.  g.   KS)"1  i" 

T    T 

Piel  to  stitch  up,  in  Kal  to  heal;  K*12l'  Piel  to  cut,  to  hew  out, 
Kal  to  form,  to  make;  n)^,  Piel  to  uncover y  Kal  to  reveal. 


TT 


321  Piel  is  also  found  intransitively,  but  only  in  poetry,  as  an 
intensive  form,  as  rSPIH,  frangi;  Hi^D?  to  he  open. 

322  The  Perfect  of  Piel  has  frequently  Pathakh  in  the  final  syllable 
instead  of    Tsere:    e.  g.  T^lh^j  to  destroy;    '^'2.'^,  to  break  in 

pieces.  This  occurs  especially  before  Makkeph,  and  in  the 
middle  of  a  period,  when  other  words  immediately  follow ;  but 
at  the  end  of  a  period  Tsere  is  the  more  common  vowel.  Some 
verbs  have  Segol,  as  13,1,  to  speak;  12)2),  to  atone;  D3l3>  to 
wash.  "  ' 

323  ci)  The  Imperf.,  Infin.,  and  Imperat.,  when  followed  by  Mak- 

keph, generally  take  Segol  in  the  final  syllable  *. 

b)  With  Vav  conv.  we  have  also  7tOpi^1  for  7L2p^}^•     Instead 
of  nj7^pn  are  found  such  forms  as  rTj7Z2pil' 

324  c)  The  Infin.  absol.  has  the  marked  form  7J5p  (as  ibS  casti- 

gando) ;  and  in  Pual,  ^^^.    But  more  frequently  the  form 
7tOp  is  used. 

325  In  Pual,  instead  of  Kibbuts,  is  found  less  frequently  iiCAamefs- 
Khatuphf  (e.  g.  DIND.  dyed  red). 

326  The  Partcp.  Pual  sometimes  occurs  without  the  prefix  O;  it 

is  then  distinguished  (like   the  Partcp.  Niphal)   only  by  the 
Kamets  in  the  final  syllable  (e,  g.  Hp  A  taken). 

*  In  the  1st  pers.  sing.  Imperf.,  besides  723pi^»  there  occur 

also  (very  seldom)  the  forms  HITi^j  1VDK« 

f  It  is  merely  an  orthographic  variation,  when  Shurek  takes  the 
place  of  Kibbuts,  as  17?)''. 


§4.] 


Piel  and  Pual, 


113 


Vocabulary, 


To  seek  J  to  try  to  get,  ]i}p3,, 
bikkesh,  Piel  {Kal  not  used). 

To  restore,  repay,  recompense, 

U^'^>  D /Ii^>  shillam,  shTllem 

{Piel) ;    [(shalam),  to  be  at 
peace,  &c.]. 

To  seek  early,  "IHt^.  sbakhar 

-    T 

(denom.  from  shakhar,  the 
dawn). 

To  overthrow;  to  pervert,  Cl^D* 

-  T 

5alaph,  in  Piel. 
To    separate,      "713,      parad. 

~T 

Niphal,  to  separate  oneself; 
to  be  separated. 

To  lie,  no,  cazabh  (both  in 

~  T 

Kal  and  Piel). 

Knowledge,  Jl^l,  dai^ath  (pro- 
perly an  inf.). 

A  scomer;  a  scoffer,  Y?,  lets, 

partcp.  of  Y'l'p  (v),  to  scoff, 
mock. 

Sevenfold,     UTi^^^,    shibh- 

*  ~  T  ;    • 

i^athayim  (prop,  a  Dual). 
Thus,  p,  cen. 
Life,  D^TFi  khayyim. 


Evil,  ^1,  TSii) ;  and  HJ/I,  ra-  327 

~  T     T 

i>ah,/(?m.  (as  abstract). 
Favour,  'j^^{"l  (hw),  ratson. 

Wickedness,  n^^ti^l  (w),   rish- 
i^ah  (rashai?,  to  be  wicked). 

Not  {to  be),  I^J^*  {constr.  ]>i^), 
ay  in  (constr.  en). 

Folly,  r\^'^^,  ivve'Ieth. 

Mischief,  ^^2^,  i^amal. 

T    T 

Lip,      pfBti^,     saphah.     Dual 

D''JlSi^,  s'phatha'yi'm. 
.  —  ^  . 

A  witness,  ip,  i^ed  (strictly  a 

partcp.  from  I'^p) :    decl.  1. 

Truth,     faithfulness,      \^'Oi^y 

emun  (decl.  3,  g) ;  ish  ^mu- 
nim  {a  man  offaithfulness=.) 
a  faithful  (or  true)  man. 

To  wash    [0^3],    cabha5,  in 

-  T 

Piel  and  Pual. 
To  be  or  become  clean,  IH^, 

••    T 

iaher. 


*  This  particle  (properly  a  substantive,  denoting  nothingness^ 
nought)  always  comprehends  the  substantive  verb  {to  be). 


l3 


114 


The  "Regular  Verb. 


[CH.  8. 


Exercise  31  (Piel). 
*DV'^  Ultk  la^Qil  1       1  ha-m'lammed  adam  dajl^ath 


328  a) 

r\v^  ^i'^^'^  U'^rh  r^'6'11 

T   T        '  ••  -  .  .  —  •  'tt  ; 

^i^n^  'rm^rb «  =  C3  23, «)  niD 
^Di?  10* '     o^")"!;  pijpph 

\ '.  ~     "  ~'.    . ' 

'^^y'ib  wm^^  1^^  12 

:^ii:i  n^n'^OT  13 

T  ;  •  ••  •  T 

-.ni^nS  inpD  i''i<  14 

T    ••  T  ••  '  -  J 


{p).  2  bikkesh  lets  khochmah, 
vaayin(j9).  3  y'shallem  shibh- 
i^athayim  {p).  4  cen-ts'dakah 
I'khayyim  um'raddeph  rai^ah 
I'motho.  5  shokher  tobh 

y'bhakkesh  ra-tson.  G  rishi>ah 
t'^alleph  kha^^ath.  7  kha^/aim 
t'raddeph  rai^ab,  v'eth-tsaddi- 
kim  y'shallem-^obb.  8  I'tha*- 
vah  ^^  y'bbakkesh  niphrad. 
9  ivve'leth  adam  t'salleph 
darco.  10  i^amal  siphtehera 
t'dabber'nah.  11    libb'cha 

y'dabber  tabpu'choth.  12  )>ed 
^munim   15"   y'chazzebh. 

13  damo,  hinneh,  nidrasb  (j9). 

14  en  m'kabber  labemmah. 

15  cibbe*  bayyayin  I'bbusho 
ubb'dam-i^^nabbim  ^uthoh. 

16  v'chibba^tem  bigdechem 
bayyom  hashsh'bhii^i  u/'har- 
tem. 


li)  1.  Their  clothes  shall  be  washed  on''  the  third  day. 
2.  Foohshness  perverteth  our  ways.  3.  We  will  seek^^  wisdom 
and  knowledge.  4.  Wisdom  will  not  pervert  the  ways  of  men. 
5.  I  have  washed  my  clothes.  6.  We  will  wash  our  clothes. 
7.  She  has  washed  her  clothes,  and  is  clean,  8.  We  have  washed 
our  clothes,  and  are  clean.  9.  Having  washed  his  clothes. 
10.  They  were  sought-for. 

*  Kamets  in  pause. 

f  '  One  who  is  separated,'  or  *  who  separates  himself  (from  man- 
kind in  general).'    This  is  the  subject  or  nominative  case. 


§4.] 


Piel  and  Pual. 


115 


The  Short  Paradigms  of  Kal,  Niphal,  Piel,  and  Pual. 


1  Per/. 

2  Ivf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

iKal 

ka/al 

kVol 

k'/ol 

yik/ol 

ko/el 

2  :Niphal 

nik/al 

hikka/el 

hikka/el 

yikka/el 

nik/al 

3  Fiel 

ki//el 

ka//el 

ka//el 

y'ka/^el 

m'ka//el 

4  Pual 

ku//al 

ku«al 

(none) 

y'ku//al 

m'ku//al 

6  P«s<    329 
partcp. 
of  Kal. 

ka/ul 


Vocabulary, 


Soul,  person,    t^3^,    ne'phesh 

(decl.  6,  8 ;  naphash,  /o 
respire). 

Bounty,  gift,  HD'IIIj  b'rachah 

(ne'phesh-b'rachah,  person 
of  bounty  =z  a  bountiful  per- 
son) ;  barach,  to  bless. 

Lo  I  ]n,  hen. 

Understanding,  7^^^  or  p^)^, 
... ,... 

se'chel  or  se'chel  (decl.  6, 
a  2) ;  sachal,  to  act  wisely. 

According  to,  ''Q^,  I'phi  (7  and 
^3  the  stat.  constr.  of  the 
irregular  peh,  JIB?  «  mouth). 

To  praise,  7711,  hillel  {Piel  of 
[halal]  /o  be  bright,  clear). 

Hope,  roil^D  (« <^))  tokhe'- 
leth  (7n\  in  Piel,  to  hope). 


To  draw,  '^'ll)!2,  mashach  (Piel,  330 

to  protract). 
Disease,     r]brjD,     makh'^leh ; 

rhnr2  (a),  liiakh^iah  iribn, 

T  -:  -  T  T 

to  be  worn;  to  be  sick). 

Rebuke,  JlTl^^D  («wy),  tocha- 

khath ;    yachakh,  to  prove, 
to  rebuke. 

To  hide  [l/lD],  sathar  (Pual, 

to  be  hidden,  to  be  secret). 

To     cover,    forgive,     expiate, 
"^33,  caphar. 

—   T 

Bone,  D^y>  i^e'tsem  (in  pause, 
i,>atsem). 

Report,  nyiDt^(t^),  sh'mu^^ah; 
T       : 

shamai^,  to  hear. 
Love,  tlZTrnt  ah*bhah(a>). 
Dust,  1H)^,  i^aphar. 


_     Some  segolaie  nouns  with  vowels  e-c  are  not  declined  331 
like  melech  (nialchi,  &c.),  but  like  sepher  (decl.  6,  b),  siphri,  &c. 
Se'chel  (or  sechel)  takes  sichli. 


116 


The  Regular  Verb. 


[CH.  8. 


Exercise  32  (Pual). 


332 «)  ■{p)]^'in  T\2'^:rti^^  i 

T   \ :        T  t:       v|v 

:  (p)  u^t'  viA:!  p^"i:i  in  2 

X  \  ;        T     -\         "  '• 

T  \  ;  -  -  T 

V  T  ••,  :        T  - :  -  •• 

:  y\v  ^B'^i  np^^i.  "TDnn  s 

I   :   • 


:Da3    i:in   13 


T  .    I  V 


1  ne'phesh-b'rachah  th'dush- 
shan(p).  2  hen  tsaddik  baarets 
y'shullam  {p).  3  I'phi  sichlo 
y'hullal-ish,  4  ne'phesh  kha- 
rutsim  t'diishslian  {p).  5  to- 
khe'leth  m'mushshachah  ma- 
kMah  lebh.  6  sh5mer  *d5nav 
y'cbub'bad  {p).  7  ^obhah  to- 
chakhath  m'gullah  meah^bhah 
m'A-iitta  reth  {p).  8  b'khe'sed 
ve^raeth  y'chiippar  i>avon. 
9  sbiiddad  sadeh.  10  sh'rau- 
i^ah  ^obbah  t'dasshen- 
i^atsem  {p).  1 1  shammab 

kiibbar  Abhraham  v'Sarah 
isbto.  12  v'sbuppach  damam 
cei^apbar.  13  habbe'ged 

cubba*. 


h)  1.  Our  fields  are  wasted.  2.  This  (is)  the  place  where  ^"  I 
shall  be  buried.  3.  The  righteous  {pi.)  are  recompensed  in  the 
earth.  4.  Those  who  observe  (partcp.)  their  masters  are  ho- 
noured. 5.  The  iniquity  of  my  people  shall  not  be  purged. 
6.  The  river  in  which '^  the  clothes  are  washed.  7.  Lo!  the  fields 
of  the  city  are  wasted.  8.  Are  thy  (masc.)  iniquities  purged  ? 
9.  Shall  not  your  (/em. /jZ.)  clothes  be  washed  ?  10.  Mercy,  by 
which  iniquity  shall  be  purged.  11.  Mercy  and  truth,  by  which 
iniquity  is  purged.  12  Thy  mercy,  by  which  my  iniquities  are 
purged. 


*  M'gullah  is  fem.  partcp.  Pual  from  galah,  a  verb  Lamed 
He.  In  this  sentence  /obhah  is  the  predicate,  the  copula  (=  is) 
being  omitted. 


§  5.]  HiphU  and  HophaL  117 

Chap.  VIII.     §  5.     HiphU  and  (its  passive)  Hophal. 

a)  The  characteristic  of  Hiphil  is  a  prefixed  hd  or  333 
hi,  and  ''--  inserted  after  the  second  radical. 

h)  From  the  Infin.  T^pn  are  formed  the  Imperf. 
and    the    Partcp.    b^bp^,    ^V?!^^    ^^^    ^''^1?'^' 

c)  In  Hophal  (as  in  Pual),  the  Infin.  is  of  the 
same  form  with  the  3rd  pers.  sing,  of  the  Per- 
fect ;  and  in  its  other  forms  follows  the  general 
analogy. 

In  the  1st  and  2nd  pers.  Perf.  the  ^-  falls  away,  334 

and  Pathakh  takes  its  place.    See  the  Paradigm,  Ap- 
pendix D. 

The   Yod  (which  is  not  found  in  the  Aramaean  or  Arabic)  335 
does  not  appear  to  be  an  essential  characteristic  of  the  form,  but 
it  has  arisen  out  of  a  shorter  vowel. 

The  marks  of  this  conjugation  are,  therefore,  in  the  Perf.,  336 
Imperat.,  and  Infin.,  the  prefix  H;  in  the  Imperf.  and  Partcp., 
the  vowel  under  the  preformatives,  which  in  Hiphil  is  Pathakh, 
in  Hophal,  Kibbuts  or  Kamets-khatuph. 

Meanings  of  Hiphil.'] 

a)  It  is  properly  causative  of  Kal  (and  in  this  sense  337 
is  more  frequently  employed  than  Piel). 

b)  When  Kal  is  transitive,  Hiphil  takes  two  accu- 
satives. 

c)  Frequently  Piel  and  Hiphil  are  both  in  use  in 
the  same  signification  (as  "73N,  abhad,  to  perish; 

Piel  and  Hiphil,  to  destroy) ;  but  generally  only 
one  of  them  is  found,  or  they  have  some  dif- 
ference of  meaning :   thus  "TdS,  cabhed,  to   be 

heavy ;  in  Piel,  to  honour;  in  Hiphil,  to  make 
heavy. 

d)  Intransitive  verbs  merely  become  transitive : 
e.  g.   nZOJ,  to  boiv   (intrans.) ;    Hiphil,  to  bow 

(trans.). 


118  The  Regular  Verb,  [ch.  8. 

338  The  causative  and  transitive  Hiphil  is  employed  in  Hebrew 
for  the  expression  of  notions  which  other  languages  express  by 
intransitive  verbs.  Thus,  any  change  in  a  man's  habit  of  body 
was  conceived  m  Hebrew  as  the  result  of  personal  agency^ 
and  represented  as  produced  by  the  individual  himself:  e.  g. 
]Dti^,  Hiphil,  to  become  fat  {nro^pexXy  to  produce  fat)  \  ntfT  and 

yDj»^,  Hiphil,  to  become  strong  (properly  to  develop  strength) ; 

^^Vi    Hiphil,    to   become  feeble.     The    same    analogy   applies 

to  lli/p,  Hiphil,   to  become  rich  (properly  to  make,  to  acquire, 

riches) ;  also  especially  to  words  which  express  the  taking  of  a 
new  colour,  as  ]^2l7n.  to  become  white,  &c.     Moreover,  states 

or  conditions,  become,  in  the  Hebrew  mode  of  conception,  acts : 
6.  g-    ti^'^nmij    not,  to  be  silent,   but   properly  to  keep  silence 

(silentium  facere,  Plin.) ;  ^^i)"in>  to  lead  a  quiet  life.     In  such 

cases  there  is  often  an  ellipsis,  as  ^''^'♦n»  to  deal  well;  DTfl^n. 

to  do  wickedly,  properly  to  make  good  or  bad  (sc.  ^311,  VD"T7> 

:  -         T  T  ; 

which  are  also  often  expressed). 

339  tt)  These  remarks  apply  also  to  Denominatives,  i.  e.  the  verb 

often  expresses  the  notion  of  producing  or  putting  forth, 
what  the  original  noun  denotes,  e.  g.  ^"'Ili/n,  to  put  forth 

roots;  ]''"lpn,  to  put  forth  horns. 

b)  Hiphil  also  expresses  the  actual  use  of  a  member,  as  ]''T|^n> 

to   listen   (properly  to  make  cars);    'j''^7rTj  to  chatter,  to 

slander  (after  the  same  analogy,  properly  to  make  tongue,  to 
use  the  tongue  freely), 

340  The  signification  of  Hophal,  as  of  Niphal,  may 
sometimes  coincide  with  that  of  Kal :  e.  g.  ^^^  potuit, 
Imperf.  Hoiihal,  potens  fiet,  i.  e.poterit. 

341  It  is  only  the  Perfect  of  Hiphil  that  always  retains  the  ^_  of 

the  final  syllable  (in  3rd  pers.  sing,  and  plnr.);  on  the  contrary, 
the  Infin.,  Imper.,  and  hnperf.  frequently  take  T*ere  instead  of 
it  (in  Chaldee  the  usual  form),  although  usage  generally  makes 
a  distinction  between  forms  with  ^  and  e.  Tsere  is  in  this  case 
only  tone-long,  and  hence  in  the  lengthening  of  the  forms  it 
becomes  vocal  Sh'va,  and,  with  gutturals,  is  changed  into 
Pathakh, 


§  5.]  Hiphil  and  Hophal.  119 

The  Infin.  absol.  has  generally  Tsere,  with  and  without  Yod,  342 

as  ^'^pr\,  iiion,  I'Dii^n*. 

The  Imperat.  but  seldom  takes  the  form  TZOpil;  instead  of  it  343 
are  employed  the  shortened  and  the  lengthened  forms  ^'{^'p'r\ 
and  il/^tOprr.     The  first  takes  Segol  before  Makkeph  f. 

In  the  Perf.  are  sometimes  found  the  forms  I^D /DIl,  we  have  344 
reproached,  and  '^phi^^i^,  I  have  soiled  {with.  J^  as  in  Aramaean). 

In  the   Imperf.  and    Partcp.   the  characteristic  H  regularly  345 
gives  place  to  the  preformatives,  as  T^p\   P'^l^pf2,  but  not  to 
prepositions  in  the   Infin.,  ^'^JOpIlA  because  their  connexion 

with  the  ground-form  is  less  intimate  than  that  of  the  pre- 
formatives.    To  both  rules  there  are  some  few  exceptions. 

1^"  The  tone,  in  Hiphil,  does  not  fall  on  the  affbrmatives  346 
!),  H-j  aii^  ^—     They  take  it,  however,  in  the  Perf.  when  Vav 

T  • 

conversive  is  prefixed. 

In  the  Passive  {Hophal)  Perf.,  Imperf.,  and  Partcp.  m  (\)  is  347 
found  in  the  first  syllable  as  well  as  6  (t),  pj^pH,  but  not  so 

often  in  the  regular  verb  :  e.  g.  ^Sti^H  |. 

The  Infin.  absol.  is  distinguished  by  (••)  in  the  final  syllable.  348 
Of  the  Infin.  constr.,  as  given  in  the  Paradigm,  there  happens 
to  be  no  example  in  the  regular  verb. 

The    Short   Paradigms    of    Kal,   Niphal,   Piel,   Pual, 
Hiphil,  and  Hophal. 

6  Past 
pmicp.  of 


\Perf. 

2  Inf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

I  Kal 

ka^al 

k'^ol 

k'^ol 

yik^ol 

kofel 

2  Niphal 

nik^al 

hikka^el 

hikka/el 

yikkaiel 

nik/al 

3  Piel 

ki/<el 

ka/^el 

ka»el 

y'ka^el 

m'ka^/el 

4  Pual 

ku^^al 

ku«al 

(none) 

y'kii^/al 

m'kiif/a) 

5  Hijyhil 

hik/il 

hak/il 

hak^el 

yak/il 

mak^il 

6  Hophal 

hok/al 

hok/al 

(none) 

yok/al 

mok^al 

Kal. 
ka^l 


349 


*  Unfrequent  exceptions,  in  which  the  form  with  Tsere  stands 
for  the  Infin.  constr.,  are  found  in  Deut.  xxvi.  12;  xxxii.  8. 

t  The  form  of  the  Partcp.  with  (••)  in  the  Sing,  is  doubtful 
(Isa.  liii.  3). 

X  Verbs  ]3  have  m  constantly,  as  l^H. 


130 


The  Regular  Verb, 


[CH.  8. 


Vocabulary. 


350  To  he  holy,  ^Ip,  kadash. 

— '  T 

To   bend  forward,  ?)p^,  sha- 

kaph  (in  Hipb.  to  look). 
To  act  prudently,  732^,  sachal 

—    T 

(in  Hiph.  to  be  wise,  partcp. 
wise). 

To  hide;  to  treasure  up,  ]H)iij 
tsaphan. 

To    hearken    unto,    2lti^p    (in 

Hiph.  with  ]]\^,  ozen,  ear  = 

to  prick  up  the  ear  toj    to 
incline  the  ear  to  =:  attend  to). 

To  hunger,  ^J?1,    rai^ebh  (in 

Hiph,    to   cause  to  hunger; 
to  starve). 

To  devise,  yiiJH*  khashabh. 

-    T 

Heaven,     D"»D^.      shama'yim 

•  ~   T 

{constr.  '^121^). 

Doing ;  deed  (of  man,  in  a  bad 
sense),  n^*'^!;;  (w),  :i^4ilah 
(i^alal). 

Now,  nW>  i^attah. 

T    — 

Profane,        P)jn>        khaneph 

*•  T 

(usually     translated     hypo- 
crite). 


Corn  (separated  from  the  husk), 
13.  (d),  bar  (barar,  to  sepa- 
rate). 

Root,     Uj"^']^,     shoresh     (pi. 

Q'^ti^l^,     shorashim,    with 

Kamets  Khatuph  instead  of 
Khateph  Kamets). 

From  above,  7^DDj  mimma- 

)>al. 
From  below,    Jinj^D)    mitta- 

khath. 
To  shame;  to  hurt,  Q/S,  ca- 

lam  (in  Fiel). 
A  lamb,  1^^113,  ce'bhes. 

Wise;    intelligent,  'J'>3Q.   nie- 

bhin. 
A  prodigal,  py\^,  z6\e\  (partcp . 

Kal). 
Lot,  ^"lii),  goral. 

T 

Powerful,  U)'^V>  i^atsum. 

T 

To  eat,   p3i^,  achal. 

Flesh,  li^li},  sh'er  (decl.  1,  a) 

To  strip  (off)  i  to  fiay,  tO^D, 

-    T 

pashaf. 


§5.] 


HipMl  and  Hophal. 


121 


Exercise  33  (Hiphil). 


0)        -inwrr  ^ji^ni^n  i 

.....  '       .  ~  •    T 

bm  niJD  B  *  :  -)3  -i^n;:^D 


*  •       I  .  i-  .. . 

D^^J  a^  10  --b^'^vD  i2^b 
bmn  11  :i3S^  n*in^ 
o:ij^  12  ^n^^n^™  un'^ 

V1D  TDli^J^I  13     :Dn^^iDD 

.  .  .    .     _  ^  ...••;• 

•  r\nr\D  r^yi)  b)it^r2 

^"pun  Ji''iiii^2  ^Vn?  ^^ 

Di^O^i  r^r  '"^i^t  ^biii  16 
-i^n:  17   :^W3n  nn'bvD 

...  .  ^.   ..  ^  ..  T 

OUi^  W'^y  D'''?'?'IT 


1  hishkithu    hithi^i'bhu    i^^li-  351 
lah.  2  Y'hovah   mishsha- 

mayim  hishkiph  i^al-b'ne- 
adam,  lir^oth  h*yesh  mascil 
doresh  etli-^l5him.  3  b'ni  im 
mitsvothai  titspon  ittach, 
I'hakshibh  lakhochmah  6z- 
nekha.  4  i^attah  bhanim 

haksbibhu  I'lmre  phi.  5  16 
yari^ibh  Y'hovah  ne'phesh 
tsaddik.  6  b'pheh  khaneph 
yashkhith  rei^ehu.  7  b'rachah 
I'rosh  mashbir  bar.  8  <6bh 
yankhil  b'ne-bhanim. 
9  r'tson-me'lech  I'i^e'bhed 
mascil.  10   lebh    adam 

y'khashshebh  darco.  11  hin- 
khil   otham    eth-haarets. 

12  anochi  hishmadti  eth- 
ha^mori    mipp'nehem. 

13  viiasbmid  piryo  mimmai^al 
v'shorashav  mittakhath. 

14  v'hacc'sabhim  hiphrid  Ya- 
i?*k6bh.  15  midyanim  yash- 
bith  haggoral  (/>) ;  ubhen 
i^*tsurnim  yaphrid.  16  ach'lu 
sh'er  )>armri  v'i^oram  mei7*le- 
hem  hiphshi/u.  17  notser 
torah  ben  mebhin  v'ro)?eh 
zol'lim  yachlim  abhiv. 


'  One  who  feeds,*  partcp.  Kal. 


M 


122 


The  Regular  Verb, 


[CH.  8. 


{351)  h)  1.  He  destroyed  the  Midianites  from  before  us.  2.  He 
will  utterly  destroy  the  Amorites.  3.  I  have  separated  the 
dogs.  4.  They  will  flay  his  skin  from  off  him.  5.  The 
judges  cause-  contention  -to-cease.  6.  We  will  separate  the 
righteous.     7.  Wisdom  separates  her  children. 

8.  Write  down  the  short  Paradigms  of  IQti^  in  Niphal  and 
Hiphil. 

9.  Write  down  the  short  Paradigm  of  Cj7p  in  Piel. 


Vocabulary. 


352  To  cast  iy\bt),  ^"hp^,  bish- 
lich. 
To   invade,    lay   waste,    ^1]^}, 

—  T 

shadad. 

To  trouble  (water  by  trampling 
in  it),  '^'BIj  raphas. 

—    T 

To   be  corrupt    [Jnnii*].    sha- 

~    T 

khath  (in  Hiph.  and  Hoph. 
to  be  corrupted). 

To   stand,    1t2y,    i>amad   (in 

~    T 

Hiph.  to  make  to  stand; 
Hoph.  to  be  set  or  placed: 
al.  to  be  held  up). 

To  mourn,  7^^,  abhal. 

-   T 

Grave,    ")^p,    ke'bher    (decl. 

6,  a;  but,  with  suffixes, 
kibhr-t,  &c.). 

Branch,  "l^J,  netser. 

Gift:    a  bloodless  sacrifice;  a 
meat-offering,     Hn^Q    (w), 

T  J     • 

minkhah  (manakh,  inus.  to 
give). 


A  drink-offering,  '^02*  ne'sech 

(decl.  6,  as  kke'ber) ;  [nasach, 
to  pour  out]. 

Rain,  Q^il,  ge'shem  (decl.  6, 

as  ke'bher). 

Corn,  ]y^,  dagan  (decl.  4,  a); 

T  T 

[dagah,  to  increase'}. 

A  fountain,  V)^f2)  mai?yan. 

Chariot,  n33"1D.  mercabhah 

(from  rachabh,  to  ride  on  a 
horse,  ^c,  or  in  a  carriage). 

Anger,    C)^},    aph   (for   eneph 

from  an  aph,  to  breathe:  lite- 
rally, nose)  :  decl.  8. 

To  become  dry ;  to  be  dried  up, 
I^:2\  yabliesh. 

Strength,  H^.  coakh  {decl.  1). 

To     cleave,      p^l,      dabhak 

(partcp.    Hophal,    made   to 
cleave,  to  adhere). 

The  jaws,   DTfip/D*   malco- 

khayim  (dual). 

Ploughman,  DHSK*  iccarim. 


§5.] 


Hiphil  and  Hophal. 


123 


Exercise  34 
•  :  -  :  T      '  V  T 


ji")3n  3 


:iyjij  TiJ3 


T      :  ••    •  V  VT  T   ;    • 

"lit  •'3  HDih?  ^'?n^^  4 

-\       •         T  T-:       T  :  |T 

j^nyo  "ipDi  ii^3"!^  iWe 
^2''  9    :?I^^^  nvi  'T^'^b 

"  T  .  ~        "  ;       '  V  T  : 

an^^^  jid'^dhi  10  i-'nip^D 

•  T  •         :  :  T  :  ^      .  ~ 

"••  T  T  V    V  T  T 

;  T  •  •  T  -;  T 


(Hophal). 

1  i^alecha  hoshlachti.  353 

2  v'attah  hoshlachta  raikkibh- 
r'cha  c'netser  nithi^abh  *. 

3  hochrath  minkhah  vane'sech 
mibbeth  Y'hovah.  4  abh'lah 
Mamah  ci  shiiddad  dagan. 

5  homlach  i^al-malchuth. 

6  mai^yan  nirpas  *  umakor 
moshkbath,  tsaddik  f  ma^  % 
liphne  rashai?.  7  hamme'lech 
hayah  moi^^mad  bammerca- 
bbah.  8  yihyu  §  miicbsbaliin 
I'phanecha  b'i^eth  app'cha. 

9  yabhesh  cakhe'res  cokbi, 
ul'shoni  mudbak  malkokhai. 

10  v'hocbl'mu  iccaritn  ci  16- 
bayab   ge'shem   baarets  {p.). 

11  ha*nashim  ^obhim  lanu 
m'od  v'lo  hochlamnu. 


li)  1.  Upon  thee  were  we  cast.  2.  He  will  be  cast  out  of  his 
grave.  3.  The  wicked  shall  be  cast  out  of  their  graves.-  4.  The 
meat-oflferings  and  the  drink-offerings  shall  be  cut-off.  5.  The 
corn  shall  be  wasted.  6.  Were  they  not  cast  out  from  their 
graves  like  abominable  branches  ?  7-  They  will  be  made  kings 
over  those  kingdoms. 

8.  Write  down  the  short  Paradigm  of  Tj7li^  in  Hiphil  and 
Hophal.  ~  "^ 

*  5,  2  [=  fifth  form  of  2nd  conj. :  i.  e.  partcp.  of  Niphal]. 

■\  Supply  '  so  is '  before  tsaddik. 

X  ZDO  partcp.  Kal  from  tO^D.  to  shake,  to  totter,  to  slip,  8fC. 


§  *  Let  them  be.' 


M  2 


124  The  Regular  Verb.  [ch.  8. 

(353)      9.  Write  down— 

N  1171     •    u     •  J  fwith  him. 

a)  Who  IS  buried  •»     •  ,   ,, 

I  with  them. 

b)  The  graves  in  which  they  are  buried. 

c)  The  graves  of  the  Gentiles. 

c?)  He  destroyed  the  cities  of  the  Gentiles. 

Chap.  VIII.    §  6.     HithpaeL 

354  This  conjugation  prefixes  to  the  Piel  form  ka/^el 
w\2i\))  the  syllable  kith  *,  which,  like  hin  in  Niphal, 

has  undoubtedly  the  force  of  a  reflexive  pronoun, 
perhaps  of  the  same  origin  as  the  particle  DSt,  self. 

355  The  Jl  of  the  prefixed  syllable  ilH  suffers  the  fol- 
lowing changes : 

a)  When  the  first  radical  is  a  sibilant  (D,  Y,  ^D), 
it    changes    places    with  D,  as    (from  shdmar) 

-iDn^i^n,  to  take  heed,  for  "ll^t^Jin,  "^'^-Hpn^  to  be 

burdened,  for  72LpJirT. 

^)  With  if,  moreover,  the  transposed  Jl  is  changed 
into  the  more  nearly  related  ID,  as  p"l^iirT,  to 

justify  oneself  for  p'jT^^rirT. 

c)  Before  the  t-sounds  p,  tO,  Jl),  it  is  assimilated, 
e.  g.  "I^"^?!'  ^0  converse;  ")n^rT,  /o  cleanse  one- 
self; Ulprsn,  to  conduct  oneself  uprightly. 

Sometimes  assimilation  takes  place  before  ^  and  ^ ; 
once  before  "). 

7%e  meanings  of  Hithpael.'] 

356  a)  Most  frequently  it  is  reflexive,  but  chiefly  of 

Pi^/,  as  'd^pjnn,  to  sanctify  oneself;  W^}jy},  to 

avenge  oneself;  ")TS^rin,  to  gird  oneself. 

b)  Then  it  means,  to  make  oneself  what  is  ex- 
pressed  by  the    first   conjugation :    hence,    to 

*  Chald.  Jl^^,  Syr.  pii^. 


§  6.]  Hithpael  125 

conduct  (shoiv,  imagine)  oneself  as  such,  to  affect  (356) 
to  be  such ;   properly  to  make  oneself  so  and  so, 
to  act  so  and  so  :  e.  g.  ^^^riil,  to  make  oneself 

great,  to  act  proudly;  DSn-Hil,  to  show  oneself 

cunning,  crafty. 

c)  Its  signification  sometimes  coincides  with  that 
of  Kal,  and  both  forms  are  in  use  with  the 
same  meaning:  e.  g.  dbhal  (Kal),  to  mourn,  is 
found  only  in  poetry.  Hithabbel  (Hithpael),  in 
the  same  sense,  is  more  common  in  prose,  and 
even  takes  an  accusative. 

d)  It  expresses  reciprocal  action  (like  Niphal),  as 
n>}1JirT,  to  look  upon  one  another. 

e)  More  frequently  it  expresses  what  a  man  does 
indirectly  to  or  for  himself  (comp.  Niph.).  It 
has  then  an  active  signification,  and  governs  an 
accusative :    e.  g.   ^WBIir^,  exuit  sibi  {vest em) ; 

H-nSrill,  solvit  sibi  [vincida).     So,  without  the 

accusative,  li'fj]^'^,   to  walk  about  for  oneself 

[ambulare). 

f)  It  is  but  seldom  that  it  is  passive :  e.  g.  "TjpSJnrTj 
to  be  numbered,  mustered. 

i^  The  Perfect,  as  in  Piel,  has  frequently  Pathakh  in  the  357 
final  syllable,  as  p-TnjlHj  to  be  strengthened.     Final  Pathakh 

occurs   also  in   the    Infin.,    Imperf.,  and  Imperat.    (U^lpn'H, 

sanctify    thyself).      In    pause    these    forms   take   Kamets,   as 


M    3 


126 


The  Regular  Verb. 


[CH.  8. 


358     The  Short  Para.digms  of  the  Regular  Verb  in  all  its 


FORMS. 


1  Kal 

2  Niphal 

3  Piel 

4  Pual 

5  Hip  Ml 

6  Hophal 

7  Hith- 

pael 


\Perf. 

2  Inf.  est): 

3  Impend. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

ka^al 

kafdl 

k'/ol 

yik/ol 

ko/el 

nik^al 

hikkafel 

hikka/el 

yikka/el 

nik/al 

ki«el 

ka«el 

ka«el 

y'kaWel 

ka«el 

kuf/al 

kuttal 

(none) 

y'ku^al 

m'kii/^al 

hik/il 

hak/il 

hak/el 

yakdl 

mak^il 

hok/al 

hok/al 

(none) 

yok^al 

mok/al 

hith- 
ka«el 

hith- 
ka«el 

hith- 
ka^^el 

yith- 
kattel 

mith- 
ka«el 

6  Past 

partcp.  of 

Kal. 

ka/ul 


(The  participles  of  verbs  Lamed  He  end  in  -eh) 
Vocabulary. 


359  To  press;    to  be  urgent  with, 
^n"l>  rahabh. 

To  despise  [H  7p] .  kalah. 

T  't 

To  be  weighty ;  to  be  honoured, 
"TI13>  cabhad  (in  Hithp.  to 

—    T 

show  oneself  honoured;  to 
boast  oneself). 

To  lack,  nOn.  khasar. 

—    T 

To  relax,    HH)"!.    raphilh    {to 

T     T 

hang  down  the  hands,  SfC. 
Hithp.  to  relax  oneself;  to 
be  slothful). 

Service;  work,  HDh^/Q,  m'la- 

T      T  ; 

chah  (laach). 

To    be    known    or   recognised, 
ID^nn,  hithnaccer  (nacar, 

inus.  is  to  be  strange:  the 
notion  of  contemplating,  re- 
cognizing, &CC.  comes   from 


that  of  looking  at  anything 
as  strange). 

To  place   [21^^],    yatsabh  (in 

—  T 

Hithp.  to  stand  firm  or  up- 
right). 

Companion,  friend,  ^"1,  reai>. 

■> 
Servant,  slave,  l^-V*  ye'bhed 

(l^abhad,  to  work). 
Possessor,  lord,  7^21.  bai^al  * . 
JVork,  hby!2>  mai^'^lal  (only  in 

pl.)  a,  from  7^^. 
Pure,  TTT  or  '!T|,  zach  or  zach. 
Mean,    "TTIi^n.    khashiich  {pl. 

D^3ti7n);    khashach,    to   be 

dark. 
Garment,  b^^^f^,  m'^il(raa))al). 


*  Before  an  adjective  or  participle  denoting  quality,  bd))al 
denotes  the  possessor  of  the  quality ;  so  that  it  may  be  translated 
by  '  one  who  is.'     See  Example  3. 


§6.] 


Hithpael. 


]27 


«) 


Exercise  35  (Hithpael). 
'  ^^3;"1   anni   DD"inrT  l    i   l  luthrappe^     ft'r'habh     rei>e-  360 


-n'ritr2  bv^b  Kin  hn 

-:|r  TT 

rinn  6       :  bbT]n\  m  ^^ 


cha.  2  ^obh  nikleh  v'l^e'bhed 
16,  mimraithcabbed  vakh"5ar- 
lakhein.  3  gam  mitbrappeh 
bhimlachto  akh  hu"  I'bhai^al 
mashkhith  *.  4  gam  b'ma))'- 
lalav  yithnaccer-nai'Sir,  im- 
zacb,    v'im    yashar   poi^Mo. 

5  rai>,  rai>  yomar  hakkoneh 
v'ozel  16  az  yithhallal  (jo). 

6  khazitha  ish  raahir  bim- 
lacht6  liphne-m'lachim  yith- 
yatstsabb  (/?),  bal-yitbyatstsebh 
liphnekh^shuccim.  7  camma- 
yim  nishpacbti  v'hitbpar'du 
col-i?atsm6thai.  8  vayyith- 
pashsbe^  Y'h6natban  eth- 
hamm'i?il  'sher  i^alav. 


li)  1.  Has  be  not  boasted  ?  2.  Did  not  tbe  king  strip  himself 
of  the  robe  that  was  upon  him  ?  3.  The  kings  will  strip  them- 
selves of  the  robes  that  are  upon  them.  4.  Strip  thyself  of  thy 
garments.  5.  Their  bones  separated  themselves  {■=.  were  out 
of  joint).  6.  Do  not  boast.  7.  He  who  is  diligent  in  his  work 
is  better  than  he  who  boasts.  8.  The  kings  will  boast.  9.  Those 
who  stand  before  a  king  will  boast.  10.  To  boast-myself  {ivf. 
constr.  with  7). 


Chap.  IX.     Verbs  unth  Gutturals. 
§  1 .    Verbs  with  Pe  guttural. 

The  gutturals  usually  take  a  Khatejth  (36)  instead  36 1 
of  simple  Sh'va;  a  peculiarity  which  causes  several 

♦  5,  3. 


128  Verbs  with  Gutturals.  [ch.  9. 

(361)  changes  in  those  forms  of  the  verb  in  which  one  of 
the  radical  letters  would  regularly  take  Sli'va. 

362  For  verbs  with  a  guttural  for  their  Pe  (or  first 
radical),  the  following  are  the  principal  changes : 

a)  Where  the  first  radical  of  the  res^ular  verb 
would  take  a  Sli'va  (without  any  preformative), 
a  Khateph  is  substituted  :  usually  (-:)  Khateph 
Pathakh.  Thus  in  the  perfect  of  Kal  the  2nd 
persons  plural  become  ^PT)  UPTYOV- 

b)  In  the  forms  that  take  a  preformative,  the  first 
radical  of  the  regular  verb  takes  silent  Sli'va, 
and  closes  the  syllable.  In  a  verb  Pe  guttural 
the  preformative  usually  retains  the  same  vowel 
that  the  preformative  of  the  regular  verb  has, 
and  places  the  Khateph  of  the  same  sound  under 
the  first  radical.     Thus  for  p^  we  should  have 

c)  Since,  however,  i  and  u  have  no  Khateph  of 
their  own  sound,  the  Khateph  of  the  same  class 
(60,  61)  is  used:  i.  e.  the  Khateph  of  the 
e-sound  [Khateph  Segol)  for  i;  that  of  the 
o-sound  [Khateph  Kamets)  for  0:  and  the  vowel 
of  the  preformative  is  changed  into  the  short 
vowel  from  which  the  Khateph  is  derived.  (See 
Paradigm  E.)  Hence  the  changes  will  be  (if 
we  take  H  for  the  first  radical  and  H  for  the 
preformative  of  the  verb  Pe  guttural) : 

363  Regular  Verb. 

hak-      hik-       hok-      huk-       pH     pH     pT}     prT 

Verb  Pe  guttural. 

ha-kh"^  he-kh«    ho-kh°   ho-kh«    fin     Hn     nil     nil 

t:it     t:|t     vjiv     -:|- 

364  Sometimes,  however,  the  first  radical  (especially 
if  rr)  retains  the  silent  Sli'va;  but  then  the  pre- 
formative takes  the  same  short  vowel  that  it  would 
have  taken  if  the  first  radical  had  taken  its  Khateph: 


§  1.]  Pe  Guttural  129 

e.  g.    iDHJ^    (takhmod,  not  tikhmdd),  t:an^  (yekh-  (364) 
bash).     Niph.    "^SHj)    (nohpach),  to    change   oneself; 
Hiph.  Tpnn  (hekhiir),  to  cause  to  fail. 

The  pupil  should  ohserve  that  the  characteristic  ni-,  hi-  of  365 
Niphal  and  Hiphil  passes,  respectively,  into  ne,  he  in  verbs  Pe 
Guttural. 

When  an  accented  afformative  {i,  ah,  ii)  is  added  366 
to  forms   like  "TD^^  1^1*1   the   last  vowel  becomes 

moveable  Sh^va,  and  the  Khateph  of  the  guttural  is 
changed  into  its   homogeneous   short  vowel :    "IpV"** 

T\r2V\  (ya:;amdu) ;    so   H^tyi   ne^Tezbah,   she  is  for- 
saken. 

There  is,  however,  also  a  harder  form  that  changes  367 
the  Khateph  into  Sh^va:  e.  g.   ^^'ITV,  ^PIH^;  but  also 

Of  the  Infinitive,  Imperative,  and  Imperfect  of  Ni-  368 
phal,    where   the    first   radical    woiild    regularly    be 
doubled   {hikkdtel,  yikkdtel),  this  doubling  is  omit- 
ted, but  compensation  made  for  it  by  using  Tsere  for 
the  vowel  of  the  preformative  HDV  (yej^amed). 

a)  In  the  Imperative  the  vowel  of  the  guttural  is  often  changed  369 
into  Segol. 

h)  The  Imperfect  A  begins  regularly  with  the  vowels  e_£  (-Tf^-)' 
or  (with  the  hard  combination)  e  (j-7).  In  verbs  Im- 
perfect 0  the  pointing  e_i  (•••;  •••)  is  rare. 

c)  In  Hiphil  and  Hophal,  Vav  conversive  of  the  Perfect,  by 
throwing  forward  the  tone,  causes  a  change  of  accent,  and 
then  6-1  (tt--)  is  changed  into  a—  (^y^). 

Thus  rnOVn  becomes  r^lQ^m  (hei^^madta,  v'hai?'- 
T  :  -v:|v  T  :--:r: 

madta). 

d)  In  the  Perfect  of  Hiphil  e_f  is  sometimes  changed  into 
e",  and  in  Perfect  of  Hophal  o_2  into  d_^  (tt?  '"^^  -'^'> 
and  t:~t  into  ^) ;  the  short  vowel,  supported  by  Melheg^ 
being  extended  into  the  long  vowel  of  the  same  class. 


130 


Verbs  with  Gutturals. 


CH.  9.     * 


Table  of  the  tense-roots  and  normal  forms  of  IDV?  to     | 

stand. 


KaL 


Niphal. 


HipMl. 


Hophal. 


370  Perf.  3  s.    i^araad 

nei?«mad  (-7:7 

v)hei)'=midr7Tj 

:•)  hoi^^mad 

i^am'dah 

nei^emdah 

hei^^midah 

holDomdah, 

i^^'madtem' 

nei^^madti 

hei?<'madti 

hoi^^madti 

Injin.  const r.  i^^mod 

hei^amed 

hai^'^mid 

hor°mad 

ahsoL  i^amod 

nai^^mod 

hai)*med 

Imperat.      i^^mod 

he))amed 

ha^'^med 

(wanting) 

i.''imdi 

hei^am'di 

ha"^midi 

kh^zak 

khizki 

Imperf.  A)  yai^^mod 

yei?araed 

yai^^mid 

yoP^mad 

ta))*mod 

tei^atned 

tai^'^mid 

t6i?"mad 

tai?amdi(2/; 

)  tei^amdi 

tal^'^midi 

t6i?6mdi 

er^mod  (1) 

ei^amed  (1) 

a^'^mid 

6^°mM 

tai^^modnah 

tai^^mednah 

tai-'^'mednah 

toi^^madnah 

Jor) 

B)  yakhmod 

takhmodi 

yekh^zak 

tekh^zak 

tekhezki 

ekh^zak 

tekh^zaknah 

Partcp.act.  i>omed 

nei^^mad 

mai>*mid 

m6i>®mad 

pass,  i^amud 

Verbs    Pe  Guttural   (not   including   those  with   Pe 

Aleph). 


371     To  walk  "TT^n  halach 

—    T 

To  cast  out  or  C]*!!!  hadaph 
away  ~  "^ 

To   overthrow,  ?[H3rT  haphach 
ruin  ~  "^ 

Tohreakdown,  Din  haras 
destroy  ~  "^ 


To  kill,  to  slay    ^IJl  harag 

To  be  dry,  to   ^IH  kharabh 
he  dried  up y  to        "^ 
be  desolate 


To  devise 


y^r\  khashabh 


To  desire,  to     '^t^'H  khamad 
covet  ~  ^ 


§!•] 

Verbs  wit 

To  train  up 

To  cease,  to 
forbear 

■TJ^n  khanach 
^in  khadal 

■-  T 

To  pass  by  * 

?]7n  khalaph 

To  pity,   to 
spare 

^QH  khamal 

-    T 

To  draw  out 

V^r^  khalatsi 

To   he  strong,     pTPT  khazak 
violent  "^ 

To  gird    t  I^H  khagar 

—  T 

To  be  dark         "^Jti^H  khashach 
To  want  "IDH  khaser 

To  be  ashamed  ["lEin]  khaphar 

~    T 

To  search  [IpH]  khakar 


Gutturals.  131 

To  bind  up        ]i}2'n  khabhash  (s/l) 

To  search  out,  i^SJH  khaphas 
explore  ~  ^ 


To  stand 


1f2V  i^amad 


To  dispose,  to    "?[1^  i^arach 
set  in  order  "^ 

To  be  deep        [pOJ?]:i?amak 

To     pass     (a    -)1^  i^abhar 
river,  &c,)  ~  "^ 

To  help  [Ityji^azar 

To  surround  I     "IJOP  i^a/ar 

~    T 

To  shut  ["liJJ?]ratsar 

—  T 

To  leave  ^TJ^  i^azabh 


Jealousy                 ^^^P  kinah  (deck  12,  b);  kinne"  (Piel),  to  be 

"^  •  ■  jealous. 

Heat,  rage               ilDH  khemah   (deck   11),  for  y'khemah  (w) 

"^  "  fr.  yakham. 

Man  (vir)                 "13^1  ge'bher  (also  husband,  warrior) ;  gabhar, 

to  be  strong. 

Vengeance                 Dp^  nakam  (deck  4,  a) ;   nakam,  to  avenge. 

'tt 

Desire                       TV\T\  havvah  (havah,  ^o  6refl<Ae;  to  be). 

T— 

Trouble,  distress      Pf")^  tsarah  (d  w) ;  tsarar,  to  tie  up. 
Enemy 


'2,'^y^  oyebh  (properly  [5, 1  ]  fr.  ayabh,  to  hate). 

rVttyi}^  mishme'reth  (a) ;  shamar,  to  keep. 

TV2^  amah  (irr.). 

T    T 

■^'it^  shor  {pi.  sh'varim),  deck  1. 

"1"7J  nadar. 

—  T 

V^'2,  be'tsai^  (batsai?,  to  break:  to  gain). 


A  charge 

Maid-servant 

Ox 

To  vow 

Gain,  profit 

As,  according  as  *^ti^^<^    (=lit.  as  what,  secundum  id  quod). 


♦  Piel  =  to  change,  as  a  garment;  Hiph.  to  change. 
t  Niph.  to  be  delivered.  X  Piel,  to  crown. 


132 

(37 1)  River,  the  Nile 

By 

Young  cow 
City 

End,  limit 
Boundary, 


Verbs  with  Gutturals. 

lik]  y'6r. 

^j^^i  etsel.; 

n"lD  par  ah. 

-)^y  i^ir  (pi.  QnV»  i>arim). 

•  T 

n^^p    katseh. 

7^n!l    g'bhul  (gabal,  to  bound). 


[CH.  9. 


Exercise  36. 
[Sentences  with  X  prefixed,  are  not  complete  sentences.] 


372  a)  ikb^  mrjiDn  r]i^:ip  i 
ikb  2 


'     A'  - 


'i:r.-        •  -   :       ": 

:  \bm  r\i'ir2  p'i:i  3 

'|TV:v  TT    •  '  •  - 

'       \  '.  TV  — 


r-r 


-ini  "^I^^^^  t^sd  Tn^i^ 

V   •       v-:i-      'a-t  •       '  v:  I 


A  V  - 


a-t:  •    •• :  :       •  :  -  t  : 


I"  t: 


1  kinah    kh^math-gabher  (p), 
v'lo  yakhmol  b'yom  nakam. 

2  lo  yari^ibh  Y'hovah  nephesh 
tsaddik ;    v'havvath    r'shai^im 
yeh'doph.        3  tsaddik   mits- 
tsarah  nekh*lats(jo).  4  vayyomer 
Shaul  b'ruchim  atte  m  laYho  vah 
ci  kh^maltem  i>alai.     5  |  lah*- 
doph    eth-col-oy'bhecha 
mippanecha     ca^sher     dibber 
Y'havah.  6  l6-i?"zabhtem 
eth-^khechem    zeh    yamim 
rabbim  i^ad  hayyom  hazzeh  ; 
ush'martem     eth-mishme'reth 
mitsvath  Y'hovah  ^lohechem. 
7  16  yuchalf  hanna'i^ar  lal'^*- 
zobh  eth-abhiv.  8  v'shachanti 
b'thoch    b'ne    Yisrael ;     v'lo 
ei^^zobh  eth-i^ammi  Yisrael. 


*  Other  reading :  DO^I^.- 

f  From  yachal,  to  be  able  (5,  4). 


§>•] 


Pe  Guttural, 


133 


Dinn  11     '"  -yn  ui:^^ 
mDjn-N':'    um   Dnnri 

^irbv   '^V^b'^^U  13   :?T^-)S 

-         '    -.  !••  ••; 

LOH)::^in>  n^D^n  D^iirnu 

T  T  ;  •  v:  V  •-  X 

''tir\ry\  D^jniim  D^i^n-]D 
^Di:/;::^    bvi'^w'7  rii^i^n 

-  :  •  :  ••  T  :  • ;  t  i  - 

yi.*i-nQ  16     tin'?'!  m'n^ 

I  •  T :      T    : 

^JD'^^s  "?;;'  rr-n  '2V^r^^  17 

":  T  -  TT  TT|T; 

^DnijD  •n^i3  nyirf  prn-'i 

•|t:  •  vv  :  T  TIT    '-v;!-.- 

nilBH  7^*St  :n™47i11_  18 

"n^}■l  19   :-ihi^n  'jisV  ^^4^ 


9  nahar  yekh^rabh  v'yabhesh.  (372) 

10  vihoshuai^  hekh^rim  eth 
col-yosh'bhe  hai^ai.  1 1  hakh^- 
rem  takh^rim  otliam  lo- 
thichroth  lahem  b'rith.  12  lo- 
thakhmod  esheth  rei^e'cha 
v*i?abhd6  va^matho  v'shoro 
vakh^raoro  v'chol  "sher  I're- 
i^e'cha.  13  kh-'noch  lannai^ar 
i)al-pi  darco.  14  ci  thekhdal 
Imdor  lo-yih'yeh  bh'cha  khe/*. 
15  v'gam  biyrushalaim  hei^'"- 
mid  Y'hoshaphaf  min-hall'- 
viyyim  v'haccoh^nim  urnerashe 
haabhoth  I'Yisrael  I'mishpa? 
Y'hovah  v'laribh.  16  mah- 
betsai>  ci  nah"r6g  eth-akhinu  ? 

17  v'harai^abh  hayah  ))dX  col- 
p'ne  haarets ;  vayyiphtakh 
Yoseph  eth-c61-\sher  ba- 
hem  vayyisbbor  I'Mitsrayim 
vayekh^zak  hara)?abh  b'erets 
Mitsrayim  (/>). 

18  vattai?^m6d'nah  etsel  hap- 
paroth  i?al  s'phath  hayor. 

19  v'eth-hai^am  hei^'^bbir  otho 
lei^arim   miktseh   g'bhul- 
Mitsrayim  v'i^ad-katsehu. 


b)  1 .  He  will  not  have  compassion  upon  me.  2.  This  city 
shall  be  desolate  without  an  inhabitant.  3.  Thou  shall  not 
covet  thy  neighbour's  house.     4.  He  will  not  desert  his  people. 

*  *  There  shall  not  be.* 

f  '  Every  thing  in  which  there  was  corn.' 

X  The  nom.  is  afein.  noun  pi.  {the  cows). 

N 


134  Ve7'bs  with  Gutturals.  [ch.  9. 

(372)  5.  The  queen  will  not  desert  her  people.  6.  They  deserted  their 
people.  7.  Ye  (/.)  deserted.  8.  We  have  not  deserted  our 
God.  9.  I  have  not  deserted  this  city.  10.  The  deserted 
ones  (w).  11.  Ye  (m.)  shall  not  covet  your  neighbours' vine- 
yards. 12.  By  coveting.  13.  From  deserting.  14.  Being 
coveted  (/.).  15.  I  will  not  desert  this  city.  16.  Will  ye  (/.) 
desert  these  great  cities  ?  1 7.  A  man  shall  leave  his  father  and 
mother. 


Chap.  IX.    §  2.     Verbs  Ayin  Guttural  [g"^). 

373  1.  a)  The  middle  radical,  being  a  Guttural,  of 
course,  takes  a  Khateph  where  in  the  regular  verb  it 
has  Sh'va.  This  is  almost  always  ^,  except  after  o, 
when  it  is  naturally  ^. 

b)  This  rule  holds  good  also  of  those  persons  of  the  Im- 
perative of  Kal,  where  the  second  radical  of  the  regular 
verb  has  Sh'va.  The  guttural  then  takes  ^,  and  the 
preceding  vowel  conforms  to  it;  that  is,  is  "=~. 

Regular.  Ayin  Guttural. 

kiriu  i^bm)  sai^-du  i^nvv) 

374  2.  The  Imperfect  Middle  A  prevails  throughout;  the 
Imperative  also  has  d:  but  the  Infin.  constr.  retains 
the  0  (the  retention  of  which  in  Imperf,  and  Imperat, 
is  a  rare  exception). 

375  3.  In  the  heavy  (or  dageshed)  conjugations  [Piel, 
Pual,  Hithpael)  the  general  rule  for  compensation 
would  require  a  lengthening  of  the  vowel,  to  com- 
pensate for  the  Dageshy  which  the  guttural  should 
have,  if  it  could. 

But— 

376  a)  After  — ,  the  characteristic  Dagesh  is  usually  un- 

compensated in  the  case  of  Pf,  H,  and  ^,  and 
sometimes  in  that  of  K.  The  Dagesh  thus 
omitted  is  said  to  be  implied  or  implicit  [Dagesh 
imjjlicitum) . 

b)  After  — ,  the  Dagesh  is  always  merely  implied. 

c)  After  -v-,  we  find  both  (I)  Dagesh  implied,  and 


§2.] 


Ayin  Giitturah 


135 


(2)  a  compensation  of  the  Dagesh  by  a  lengthen-   (376) 
ing  of  the  vowel  in  _?. . 


d)  Middle  1  always  requires  the  compensation:  i.  e. 


a  lengthened  vowel. 


Per/. 

Infin.  constr. 

Imperat. 

Imperf. 

Partcp. 

\Kal 

shakha^ 

sh'kho^ 

sh'khat 

yishkhat 

shokhei 

2  Niph. 

nishkha^ 

hishshakhe^ 

hishshakhe/ 

yislishakhe^  nishkha^ 

3  Fiel 

berech 

bdrech 

bdrech 

y'bhdrech      m'bhdrech 

4  Pual 

borach 

borach 

(none) 

y'bhorach     m'bhorach 

5  Hithp. 

hithbd- 
rech 

(as  perf.) 

(as  perf.) 

yithbdrech 

mithbdrech 

1 

377 


Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  shakhu?. 

1^^  But  besides  Perf.  Piel  berech,  such  forms  occur  as  zi)^am,    373 
berdch,  cikhesh. 


(Normal  Forms.) 


379 


Perf. 

Imperat. 

Imperf. 

Perf 

Imperat. 
Imperf 


Kal. 
shakh^^ah 
sh'kha?,  shakh^^i 
yishkhat,  tishkh"/i 

Piel 
berech  (berach),  ber'cah 
ziyam,  zii)*mah 
cikhesh,  cikh^shah  J 

barech,  bar'chi  "| 

z'i*om,  zai>*mi  [' 

y'bharech  {reg.) 
y'zai^em,  t'zai^^mi,  t'zai^amnah 


Niphal. 
nishkh^^ah 

hishshakhe^  hishshakh*/i 
yishshakhe^,  tishshakh^^i 

Pual. 


\ 


borach  {reg.) 
zui^am,  zui^^mah 

(none) 

y'bhorach  (reg.) 
y'zui>am,  t'zui?*mi 


(In  the  other  conjugations,  the  only  change  to  be  remembered    3S0 
is  the  regular  one  of  using  a  Khateph,  when  the  middle  radical 
would  regularly  have  Sh^va.) 

N  2 


136 


Verbs  with  Gutturals. 


[CH.  9. 


Vocabulary, 


381  To  hunger,  2^;"),  rai^ebh. 
To  mock,  :\yh,  lai^ag. 

—  T 

To  slide,  1^72,  mai^ad. 

—  T 

To  slay,  tOilti^.  shakha^ 

—  T 

To  loathe,  b>^I|,  gai^al. 

—  X 

To  work,  7j/9,  pai?al. 

-  T 

To  taste,  D^ZO,  ^ai>am. 

—  T 

To  oppress,  VTw,  lakhats. 
fpT^"^}  tsakhak. 


To  laugh. 
To  cry, 


\pTVD,  sakhak*. 
rp^l  za^^ak. 
1  py^,  tsai^ak. 
To  choose,  "in^.*  bakhar. 

—   T 

To  traffic,  inO?  sakhar. 

—  T 

To  wax  hot,  *1^2L,  bai^ar. 
To  he  shaken,  ^^1,  rai^ash. 
To  be  large,  ^PTl,  rakhabh  f . 
To  dash,  VnD.  rnakhats. 


To     minister     (as    a    priest), 
[]n3],inPiel,  ^3.  cihen+. 

To  be  clean,  ^HtD.  /aher§. 

To  rebuke,  l^i),  gai^ar. 

Virgin,  TsTlPiH,  b'thulah. 
Daughter,  p\'2,,  bath. 
To  form,  ^''^'^,  yatsar. 

—  T 

Leviathan,  IJT'I/,  livyathan. 
A  ship,  'r\'^yt^,  *niyyah  (decl. 

10). 
A  step,    "fj;^:,    tsa'i^ad    (decl. 

Q,d). 

Ancle,  vOlpi  karsSl. 

Ancles  (dual),   Q''T'D1p.    kar- 

5ulla'yim. 

Head-dress,  turban,  ■^^^^,  p'er 

(decl.  1,  a),  but  pi.  constr. 
pa're. 

Bridegroom,     1/117,     khathan, 

'  T    T 

(decl.  4,  c). 


*  In  Piel,  to  play,  to  sport. 

t  In  Hiphil,  hirkhib,  to  enlarge. 

X  Also  =to  make  splendid;  al.  to  adjust. 

§  In  Piel  =  ^0  cleanse,  to  purify. 


§2-] 


Ayin  Guttural, 


137 


Exercise  37. 

'     V  V  T  -       :     •    -  T    :  ATT 

T  T     I    - .  .-       •  ~ :  • 

T  -  :  viT-  :- 

y^br\  Sl:h'\>r^'v^\  mn^ 

V       '  T  T :  •  T  I  •  T    : 

■"ini  6  %^jj^  r)r^iD  nSi 
_ .  .|^  I  ..  _ .       _. 


•  ;  T  T  —  V  ••  : 

•      |t:  at;-;  •    : 

nniD  nv;^^3  nri\-j  9 


Ar  : 


1  vay'«apper    el-abhiv    v'el-  382 
ekhav    vayyigi?ar-b6  ^^    abhiv 
vayyomer   16,  mah   hakh^om 
hazzeh  "sher  khalamta  (p)  ? 

2  vattiri^abh  col-e'rets  Mits- 
ra  yim  vayyitsi?ak  hai^am  el- 
Pari>6h  lalla  khem  (p). 

3  v'attah  Y'hovah  tiskhak 
lamo ;  tili^ag  I'chol-goyim. 

4  sham  2    livyathan    zeh^^ 
yatsarta  I'sakhek-bo  *. 

5  cen-ish  rimmah  eth-rei^ehu 
v'amar  h^o  m'sakhek  ani  ? 

6  b'khar-lanu  'nashim. 

7  v'im  rai^  b'i^enechem  la- 
r^bhod  eth-Y'hovah  bak'Tu 
lachem  hayyom  eth-mi  tha- 
i?^bhodun,  im  eth-^iohim 
*sher-i)abh'du  abhothechem 
*sher  bei^e'bher  hannahar,  v'im 
eth-*16he  ha^mori  [the  Amo- 
rites]  ^sher  attem  ydsh'bhim 
b'artsam ;  v'anochi  ubhethi 
nai^^'bhod  eth-Y'hovah. 

8  /ai)*mah  ci  fobh  sakhrahh. 

9  hay'thahf  ca^niyyoth  sokber. 

10  tarkhibh  tsai^'^di  thakhtai 
v'lo*  ma)?*du  karsullai.   1 1  ach 


Or  prTii^/j  Tsere  being  changed  into  Segol  on  account  of 


Makkeph:  *)^,  in  it,  i.  e.  in  the  sea. 
f  She  was,  3rd  sing,  form  of  hayah. 

N  3 


138  Verbs  with 

(382)  vn^j^  ^ik')  xnD]  D^i':'^? 


Gutturals.  [ch.  9. 

^lohim  yimkhats  rosh  oy'bhav 
kodkod  sei^ar  mithhallech 
ba^shamav.  12  timkhats 

ragl'cha  b'dam  I'shon  c'la- 
bhe'cha  meoy'bhim  minnehu  *. 
13  hu"  ^sher  cihen  babbayith 
"sher-banah  f  Sh'lomoh 
biy'rushalem.  14  cekhathan 
y'cahen  p'er.  1 5  v'zeh  hadda- 
bar  "sher  tai^^seh  I  lahem 
I'kaddesh  otham  I'chahen  li. 


Parse  the  following  forms,  and  explain  their  for- 
mation. 

•onDQ     =-n"!n$     :nin^  m  in^^    nnzp     nnp^ 

b)  1.  He  will  be  hungry.  2.  The  virgin,  the  daughter  of 
Zion,  mocks  at  thee  (m.).  3.  Playing  (partcp.f.  sing.).  4.  I 
will  choose  their  ways.  5.  Thou  (m.)  art  cleansed.  6.  Thou 
hast  cleansed.  7.  I  will  waste.  8.  We  tasted  of  the  honey. 
9.  They  tasted.  10.  Ye  (/.)  tasted.  11.  Who  has  tasted? 
12.  To  taste.  13.  Being  tasted  (w,).  14.  The  honey  that  I 
tasted.  15.  To  choose  the  ways  of  death.  16.  We  shall  be 
hungry.  17.  We  were  hungry.  18.  Ye  (m.)  were  hungry. 
19.  Who  is  hungry?  20.  Who  has  mocked  the  daughter  of 
Jerusalem?     21.  Rebuke  ^^  the  lad. 


*  From  it  =z  some  of  it :  I'shon  is  worn.,  and  the  verb  'shall 
get'  is  to  be  supplied  {Hengstenberg.). 

t  Built.  X  Thou  shalt  do. 


§  3.]  Lamed  Guttural.  139 

Chap.  IX.    §3.     Verbs  Lamed  Guttural. 

In  these  verbs  either 

a)  the  final  syllable  keeps  its  regular  vowel,  with  383 
furtive  Pathakh  under  the  guttural : 

h)  or  the  final  syllable  exchanges  its  regular  vowel 
for  Pathakh. 

a)  i,  6,  u  (the  strong  immutable  vowels  are  always 
retained). 

b)  o  is  retained  in  the  Infin.  constr. 

o  (being  merely  lengthened  by  the  tone)  is 
changed  into  a  in  the  Imperat.  and  Imperf.  of 
Kal. 

c)  1.  e  (when  it  is  the  regular  vowel  of  the  last 
syllable)  is  sometimes  retained^  sometimes 
changed  into  Pathakh. 

2.  Usage,  however,  makes  a  distinction  in  these 
forms  :  thus 

In  the  Partcp.  Kal  and  Piel  vh}:),  njpti^p  is 
the  exclusive  form,  and  the  full  Pathakh  first 
appears  in  the  constr.  state  nVt^,  H^Ii^p- 

In  the  Imperf.  and  Infin.  Niph.,  and  in  the 
Perf  Infin.  and  Imperf.  Piel,  the  form  with  a 
is  employed  at  the  beginning  and  in  the  middle 
of  a  period ;  that  with  ^r^r,  at  the  end,  and  in 
Pause :    e.  2;.  ^"lil\  it  is  diminished,  and  V^y^ ; 

Vpy^   he  cleaves,  and   VP^i   Vy^'  to  swallow. 

It  may  further  be  observed  that  the  Infin.  absol. 
retains  Tsere,  the  Infin.  constr.  does  not. 

The  guttural  here  has  simple  Sh^va,  whenever  the  384 
third  radical  regularly  takes  it  (because  being  Sh^va 
quiescent   it   can    remain    under   a  guttural) :    e.  g. 
rrh'^-     But  in  the  second  fem.  sing,  of  the  Perf.  a 

helping -Pathakh  takes  its  place :  e.  g.  PTO^- 


140 


Vej'bs  ivith  Gutturals, 


[CH.  9. 


385  [A  compound  Sh'va  (or,  Khateph)  occurs  in  (1)  a  few  examples 
ol plur.  1  of  Perf.  when  the  tone  is  thrown  forward;  (2)  before 
the  suffixes  cha,  cliem,  chea\. 


1  Ferf. 

2  Inf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5      Partcp. 

386  1  Kal 

shalakh 

sh'loakh 

sh'lakh 

yishlakh 

sholeakh 

2  Niphal 

nishlakh 

hishsha- 
lakh 

hishsha- 
lakh 

yishshalakh 

nishlakh 

3  Piel 

shillakh 

shallakh 

shallakh 

y'shallakh 

m'shalleakh 

4  Pual 

shullakh 

shullakh 

(none) 

y'shullakh 

m'shiillakh 

5  HiphU 

hishliakh 

hashliakh 

hashlakh 

yashliakh 

mashliakh 

6  Hoph. 

hoshlakh 

hoshlakh 

(none) 

yoshlakh 

raoshlakh 

7  Hithp. 

hishtal- 
lakh 

hishtal- 
lakh 

hishtal- 
lakh 

yishtallakh 

mishtal- 
leakh 

Partcp.  Pass,  of  Kal,  shaluakh.  Injin.  absol.  [Kal),  sha- 
loakh  ;  (Niph.),  nishloakh  ;  {Piel),  shalleakh  ;  {HiphU),  hash- 
leak  h. 

Kal  Perf.  shalakh,  shalakhat  (2/.) ;  and  so  in  the  other  con- 
jugations, -akhat /or  akht. 
Imperat.  sh'lakh,  shilkhi,  &c. 

Imperf.  nishlakh,  tishlakh'nah ;   and  so  in  the  other  con- 
jugations, -akhnah. 

HiphU  Imperf.  yashliakh,  tashlikhi,  tashlakh'nah. 


Vocabulary, 


387  To  forget,  HD^j  shachakh. 

~     T 

To  hear,  ^D^,  shamai?. 

To  forgive ;    to  pardon,   TwD, 

salakh  (with  7). 
To  be  satisfied,  )^^'^,  siibhai^*. 
To  swear,     ^2^,     shabhaJl^f 

-    T 

(prop,  by  seven  victims). 
To  sacrifice,  H^T,  zabhakh. 


To  expire,  y]^,  gavai.\ 
To  devour,  y?2,  balai^. 

~  T 

To  sow,  plant  seed,  ^1T.  zarai^. 
To  slay,  nilD,  Zabhakh. 

—     T 

To  bud,  rnS.  parakh. 

~T 

To  rend,  ^1p,  kara^. 
To  open,  HJID.  pathakh. 


*  In  Hiphil,  to  make  satisfied;  to  satisfy. 
\  In  Niphal,  to  bind  myself  by  oath;  to  swear,  promise  with 
an  oath. 


§3.] 

Good    (or  ill)    deed;    benefit, 
^^Qi),  g'mM  (decl.  1). 

Iniquity,  piy  or  pp,  i^avon  or 
i^avon. 

Diseases,  U^i^^/TID}  takhluim 
(khalah,  to  be  sick). 

Eagle,     "Iti^J,     ne'sher    (decl. 
6,  a),  pi.  c.  nishre. 

Youth,  DH^i^J.  n'i^urim. 


To  look. 


f^p^j  shakapb 


I  ^22,  nahhsit 


Lamed  Guttural.  141 

Prisoner,  T'DK*  a^ir  (a^ar,  to  (387) 

TAm,  p-l,  dak  (/.  ni5"l,  dak- 

kah). 
Full,  i^br2,  male",  /.   HK^D 

(male",  <o  be  full). 
Rank,  luxuriant,  ^''13,  ipl-f' 

•  T 

Jnj^''13.);  bara,  j9o^m7. 
£ar5  of  corn,    Uw11'^>    shib- 

•  t;  • 

b°lim. 
Fiwe,  ]S)2l,  ge'phen. 
Vine-shoots,  D!l*'*lii^i  sarigim. 


Groaning,       T\'D^'ii^i       "nakab 

'  TT — ; 

{constr.  enkath). 


Pit,  Ii3,j  bor  (bur,  to  cleave), 
pi.  borotb. 

Height,  Di")D>  marom. 


1.  The  word  '^1^  is  twice  construed  'mouth'  in  the  English  388 

Bible.     Gesenius  construes  it    *agej'    the  Septuagint,    '{thy) 
desire*  (eTnQvfiiav). 

2.  njllDrij    t'muthah   (death,  from  maveth),    only   in   ben 
t'muthah,  a  child  of  death  =  one  who  is  condemned  to  die. 


Exercise  38. 


a)  m^^-n^^  ""i^^S):!  on^  i 

T    .       ...      .   .  -      •    :  I T 

X  .  T  ....  -    • 

miT\    ^2y\V'^2b    rhbr\ 


1  bar'chi  naphsbietb-Y'hovah,  389 
v'al-tishc'khi    col-g'mulav  : 
bassoleakh    rcbol-i^^vonechi ; 
harophe"  *  rcb61-takb''lua- 
y'chi :     hammasbiai^    ba//6bh 
i^edyech ;    tithkhaddesh   can- 
ne'sher  n'i^uray'chi.         2  ci- 
hisbkipb   mimm'rom    kodsho 


*  In  Hiphil. 

t   Who  healeth,  rophe",  partcp.  Kal  act.  of  rapha. 


142  Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops. 

(389)  n'r2m  m'n''  wip  Dn^D 


[CH.  10. 


•♦n  rfj^?^  "i^DNt  r\p2i!^ 

T :  -  :    •  -  ix       : 

K'^m  DT"i'i^  r\tbp  ]^n^  5 

*•         ;         T  T~  ~    ~     : 

itt:         V         -». — 


Y'hovah ;    mishshama'yim 
el-e'rets  hibbit ;  lishmoai^  en- 
kath    asir,    I'phatteakh     b'ne 
th'muthah.      3  vattibhlai^'nah 
hashshibb^lim  haddakkoth 
eth   shebhai>   hashshibb°lim 
habb'rioth  v'hamm'Ieoth. - 

4  /'bhoakh  te'bhakh. 

5  ubhagge'phen  sh'loshah  sa- 
rigim  v'hi"  cli'phorakhath. 

6  vayyashabh    R'libhen   el- 
habbor    v'hmneh    en-Y6seph 
babbor;    vayyikrai?    eth- 
b'gadav. 


b)  1.  And  Joseph  took  an  oath  of  the  children  of  Israel. 
2.  The  land  which  Elohim  swore  to  Abraham,  to  Isaac,  and  to 
Jacob.  3.  And  Jacob  expired.  4.  He  will  offer-sacrifices. 
5.  I  have  planted  the  house  of  Israel.  6.  Every  herb  seeding 
seed.  7.  Ye  shall  sow  the  land.  8.  Ye  shall  not  sow  the  land. 
9-  Seed  is  sown.  10.  The  seed  sown.  11.  I  have  sown  my 
seeds.  12.  To  sow  seeds.  13.  Thou  wilt  sow  thy  land. 
14.  The  opened  door.  15.  I  will  open  the  door.  16.  Opened 
(/em.  sing.). 


Chap.  X.    §  1.     Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops  ^, 

(Before  the  pupil  proceeds  to  the  Vf'^eak  Verbs,  he  may  pay 
some  further  attention  to  the  accents,  which  will  henceforth  be 
added.     For  their  names  and  forms,  see  85.) 

390  In  the  Hebrew  Bible  the  verses  are  usually  divided 
into  two  major  divisions.  The  end  of  the  whole 
verse  is  marked  by  Silluk  with  two  dots  (♦)  called 
Soph  Pasuk.  The  middle  of  the  verse,  or,  as  it  is 
properly,  the  end  of  the  first  major  division,  is 
marked  by  Athnakh  or  Merka  Mahpachatum. 


*  From  Dr.  ^1*=  Caul's  Primer. 


§  1 .]  Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops.  143 

Genesis  i.  1. 

D'Tt^i^    K"11    J1^i:fK"i:i    .      bV5sliith'  bara'  Elohim         391 

A'   ":       JTT  ».•       •• :      in  the  beginning   created    God 

:  Y*^J^rT    ^)i^^    DTjli^n    Di^    ^^^^  basb-shama'yim  v'eth  haa'rets 
v|Tx         ;••;       'v-T  -         I"  the      heavens      and  the  earth 

Psalm  ii.  1. 

D^^^l    It^^l    (ID^     lam'mah   rag'shu'  goyim'? 
A*  a:iT       TTv    Avherefore      rage       peoples 

J  Dn"1l!n''    D"'DJ^b-1     "^'"»^«}i°i      yeh'gu-rik? 
I     !•    "^  :iv         •  \  :       ^i^cl  nations  imagine  vanity 

Psalm  iv.  5. 

JiKroni^-^.^i  ion  ,  ''s^t  a    ""?  ^ekherau 

)t:;\"       -|  :       :    •    be  troubled    and  not      sin 

DDIl3li^D"by  DDQ^'^Q  ^"IDN  ^"^^'^  bhilbhabhchem   i>al-niishcabh- 

•••;-;•        -       •••;-;•  :  •  speak  in  your  heart     upon  your  bed 

;  j^^^   ^JS^I  f^liem  v'dommu.      se'lah. 
Tiv            :  and  be  still.     Selah. 

Proverbs  x.  1. 

TV^hlD    "^^^D  mishle         Sh'lomoh 

i      :        "  :    •      the  proverbs  of  Solomon 

2l^"n3X^^    DDn    ]^     ^^^  khacham  y'sammakh     abh 
AT :        TTv     J-     a  son     wise         rejoiceth    a  father 

n,1iri    bv::^    P-l  ^Waen          c'.il             tugath 

•  :  .    "  and  a  son     foolish     the  heaviness 

:iQ^^  immo 

I    •  of  his  mother 

The  lesser  subdivisions  are  marked  by  the  dis-  392 
tinctive  accents  of  less  power,  as  in  Gen.  i.  1.  In 
the  beginning,  God  created.  After  the  word  beginning 
there  is  a  pause.  This  pause  is  expressed  by  a 
Tiphkha.  This  system  of  interpunction  is,  however, 
much  more  accurate  than  ours :  for  it  not  only  de- 
notes a  pause,  but  shows  whether  the  word  is  con- 
nected with,  or  separated  from,  the  following  word 
in  the  construction.   Thus  JT'I^K"]^.  is  separated  from 

the  following  word  K"H,  whereas  this  word  K")^  has 

TT  JT  T 

a  conjunctive  accent,  because  the  verb  is  naturally 
connected  with  its  nominative  D\'i7K.  This  latter 
word  DN'iT'i^  has  again  a  distinctive,  which  separates 
it  from  the  following  word.     It  might  appear  that  a 


144  Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops.         [ch.  lo. 

(392)  pause  after  the  word  God  is  misplaced ;  but  it  is 
the  strictly  logical  division  of  the  sentence.  1.  The 
fact  of  creation.  2.  The  things  created.  It  also  lays 
the  emphasis  upon  God  as  the  Creator.  In  the  be- 
ginning, created  God the  heavens,  and  the  earth. 

In  the  second  example,  the  verb  and  nominative 
U^}^  W^^  are  connected  in  the  same  way  by  a  con- 
junctive accent.  But  in  the  second  member,  the 
similar  connection  between  the  verb  and  accusative 
is  noted  by  a  line  between  the  words,  which  is  called 
Makkeph.     In  this  case  the  first  word  ^^[TJ  has  no 

accent.  The  small  perpendicular  line  to  the  left  of 
the  Segol  is  called  Metheg  (48),  and  shows  that  ^  is 

a  separate  syllable. 

■^^^  In  placing  the  accents,  the  first  step  is  to  place 
the  Silluk  at  the  end  of  the  verse  or  sentence,  just 
as  in  English  the  full  stop  is  the  most  important. 
The  next,  is  to  place  the  Athnakh,  and  then  the 
various  minor  distinctives.  The  whole  verse  is  looked 
upon  as  a  territory  under  the  dominion  of  Silluk, 
though  his  immediate  domination  extends  only  to 
Athnakh.  The  dominion  of  Athnakh  extends  to  the 
beginning  of  the  verse.  The  nearer  any  minor  dis- 
tinctive is  to  Silluk  or  Athnakh,  so  much  the  less  is 
its  distinctive  power.  The  accents  are  not  selected 
arbitrarily,  but  have  a  regular  order  of  consecution. 
Silluk  has  next  to  it  Tiphkha,  then  Zakeph. 
Athnakh  takes  next  to  it  Tiphkha,  then  T'bhir,  then 
Zakeph^  then  Segolta.  Segolta  takes  Zarka  Kbhia. 
Zakeph  takes  Pashta,  R^bhia,  &c. 

394  The  Conjunctives  or  Servants  are  also  subject  to  rule,  ac- 
cording to  which  they  have  their  pecuUar  masters — 


Munakh  serves 


Athnakh 

Segol  ta 

Zakeph  katon       Mierc^a  serves  < 

R'bhia 

Zarka 


Silluk 

Tiphkha 

Pashta 

Zarka 

T'bhir 


Darga  serves  T'bhir.     Kadma  serves  Geresh. 


CH.  10.] 


Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops. 


145 


Esther  vi.  1 — 4. 

n^t  nii2  i^^nn  nb^b^  ^^  ^  T^lf ^'^.^K  }^^^'  ""'i^f^.fflt  (^^*^ 

t:j--  In  the  night  the  same  fled     the  sleep 


VT 


hamme'lech  vayyo'mer  Thabhi'"  eth- 
of  the  king  and  he  said  to  bring  the 

se'pher      hazzichronoth'     dibhre' 
book  of  the         records      the  words  of 

hayyamiin'  vayyihyu'nikraim'  liphne' 
days    and  they  were   read      before 

2  hamme  lech,    vayyimmatse'  catliubh' 
the  king,    and  it  was  found  written 

asher  higgid'  Mord'chai'  i-al-Bigtha'na 
that  had  told  of 

vathe'resh  sh'n6  sa'rise'  hamme'lech 
and  two  chamberlains  of  the  king 

mishshom're'         hassaph'  ^sher 

of  the  keepers  of  the  threshhold    who 

bikshu   lishloakh     yad    hamme'lech 
sought    to  send  a     hand    on  the  king 


'riK  i^''2nb  iDik^')  ib}:^ 

•  T  :       V      -   'vAv  - 
)" :  •        V  t':  •     ; :  |--       •  t- 

"iii;?^  a^^hD  j^jjQ''')  :iT^Dn 

V  -;  T       j-T  •-        'v  |v  - 

-  J..       -IT  ••:  VVT 

W\)3,  ■^^^^  nDH  niDi^fD 
-^bB^,       T       ribtb 

' V  vv  -  T  -  J  ;    • 

^S?^n  ■^^^S>*1     •  T^rS'n^T/}H5^     *1    3  akhashverosh.  vayvomer  hamme'lech 
')(.'fj     ^'l^^J     •'^'/.'.yUf^    -^  Ahasuerus.      and  said       the  king 

T-:|-      - 

|T  T         V.  •  ^T-;|- 

A"T|  V  J'  'VV..-  V         )- 

••  < — ;i~  T  jTT  ; 

iDi^b    nirrnn   ^bi^n' 

J  ••  T  J  •   -  '  V    V    - 

o-i-iD^riJ^  r)')bnb  ^bb"? 

~    ;  :  T         V  ;  •       V  V  - 

'^b  V2rr']tu  yv^bv 


'st; 

r^rbv 


'\''rrpu    "Tilpan 


mah-na3?*sah  y'kar     ug'dulah 

what  hath  been  done  honour  and  dignity 

I'Mord'chai      yal-zeh,      vayyom'ru 
to  for  this      and  they  said 

na'j^^re'    hamme'lech  m'shar'thav 
the  young  men  of  the  king  his  servants 

lo-na'3?3sah'  jiimmo    dabhar'. 

not  have  been  done  with  him  a  thing. 

4  vayyomer  hamme'lech  mi  bhekhatser 
and  he  said   the  king  who  in  the  court 


v'Haman 
and  Haman 


ba 
was  come 


lakhatsar 
to  the  court 


beth-hamme'lech  hakhitsonah  lemor 
of  the  house  of  the  king  the  outer    to  say 

lamme'lech    lithloth     eth-Mord'chai 
to  the  king     to  hang         Mordccai 

jsal-has-ets  "sher-hechin 

upon  the  tree    which  he  had  prepared 

16. 
for  him. 


Note  1.  V.  2,  over  the  Vav  in  t:;*11^TO  there  is  an  asterisk.     395 
If  the  reader  looks  to  the  foot  of  the  page  (in  a  Hebrew  Bible) 


146  Use  of  the  Accents  as  Stops.  [ch.  lo. 

(395)  he  will  find  the  Hebrew  letters  ti^")  '^^^^,  which  signifies  that  in 

another  copy  the  last  syllable  of  Ahasuerus  is  written  without  a 
Vau.     i^'^^  are  the  initials  of  ^^^'^^^^  KHD^J.  another  copy. 

T  tt;  t  t  ;  t 

Note  2.  In  verses  3  and  4,  the  'ij7Dn  has  in  appearance  two 

accents,  but  in  reality  only  one.  Pashta  being  postpositive, 
must  be  placed  over  the  last  letter.  But  as  not  the  last  syl- 
lable, but  the  penultimate  has  the  accent,  it  is  repeated  in. order 
to  show  the  tone-syllable. 

Note  3.  In  verse  3,  the  word  ^IDi^""),  and  in  verse  4,  the 
word  nJijiTin  has  two  different  accents.     In  such  cases,  the 

T  J'  ~ 

last  of  the  two  shows  the  tone-syllable.  The  other  is  only 
Euphonic. 

Note  4.    In  syllables  like   r)y3  in  verse  1,  the  accent  is 

placed  as  if  Sh'va  formed  a  syllable.  This  is  also  the  case  with 
ihe  compound  Sh'vas. 

Ruth  iii.  5. 

"■)t!^i^       bin      tl'^bi^      1t2lk^\^       vattomer         eleah      col      ^sher- 
V -;  J        T  A""  ■•■      V-    and  she  said      to  her      all       that 

|vv:|v   1- ••     t' :       I      Ihou  wilt  say  tome   1  will  do 

396  After  the  fifth  word  in  this  example,  there  are  two  points 
without  consonants  with  a  circle  over  them.  By  looking  to  the 
foot  of  the  page,  you  find  the  consonants  belonging  to  them 
*>bi^,  which,  with  the  points  written  in  the  text,  make  ^7^^, 

V—* 

e-lai,  to  me.  This  is  said  to  be  k'ri  (read),  though  not  k'thibh 
{written).  The  transcriber  had  omitted  the  three  consonants ; 
and  though  the  Jewish  tradition  was,  that  they  ought  to  be  a 
part  of  the  text,  they  did  not  dare  to  put  them  in,  but  noted 
them  at  the  foot  of  the  page.  This  example  shows  what  is 
meant  by  the  words  k'ri  and  k'thibh ;  k'thibh  is  written,  and 
applies  to  the  word  as  it  stands  in  the  text ;  k'ri  signifies  read, 
and  refers  to  the  reading  at  the  foot  of  the  page,  which  the 
Jews  prefer.  Verse  12,  there  is  an  example  of  a  word  written, 
but  not  read. 


\ 


U^      ^3       DJDi^     ''S      T^D^^  v'3?attah         ci  5innam        ci 

r  t':  T        a*  T  -:  and  now       that       it  ts  true      that 

oii^  bi^t  s'^^\      ^"^"5^ 

•AT      \,"  a  redeemer   am  1 


CH.  11.  §  1.]         Verbs  Double  Ay  in. 


147 


Here  the  fifth  word  QJ^  has  no  vowel.  The  masoretic  note  397 
at  the  foot  of  the  page  is  ^p  ^^'p')  y^,  k'thibh  v'lo  k'ri, 
written,  but  not  read.  Here  the  two  letters  were  ])ut  in,  and 
though  the  Jews  consider  them  as  no  part  of  the  text,  they 
suffer  them  to  remain.  These  two  examples  serve  to  show  the 
scrupulosity  with  which  the  Jews  copied  their  manuscripts. 
The  word  7^^2|  also  has  a  reference  to  the  foot  of  the  page, 

which  tells  us,  that  in  other  copies  the  Gimel  has  not  got  a 
Dagesh. 


Chap.  XI.    §  1.     Verbs  Double  Ayin  (O^y). 

Example  n^D>  *abhabh,  to  go  about.    Paradigm  :  Appendix  E, 

[pp.  17,  18. 


Short  Paradigms, 

\Perf. 

2Inf.cslr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf.            5  Partep. 

1  Kal 

*abh 

sobh 

sobh 

yasobh  (yi^sobh)  sobhebh 

2  Niph. 

na^abh 

hissabh 

hissabh 

yissabh 

na^abh 

3  Foel* 

sobhebh 

sobhebh 

sobhebh 

y'sobhebh 

m'sobhebh 

4  Foal 

.sobhabh 

sobhabh 

(none) 

y'sobhabh 

m'sobhabh 

5  Hiph. 

hesebh 

hasebh 

hasebh 

yasebh  (yassebh)  mesebh 

6  Hoph. 

husabh 

husabh 

(none) 

yiisabh  (yiissabh) 

m^sabh 

398 


Past  Partep.  of  Kal,  *abhubh. 
Normal  Forms. — (No  irregularity  in  the  other  conjugations.)     399 


1  Kal 


IPerf. 

3  Imperat. 
5obh 

4  Imperf. 

5abh 

yasobh 

yissobh 

sab'bah 

sob'bi 

tasob'bi 

tiss'bhi 

sabbo'tha 

siibbenah 

t'siibbenah 

tiss5bh'nah 

nasabh 

his^abh 

yissabh 

na5ab*bab 

bissabbi 

tissa'bbi 

n'sabbotha 

hissabbenah 

tissabbenah 

2  Niphal 


*  This  conjugation  and  its  Passive  are  called  here  Poel,  Pool, 
instead  of  Piel,  Pual,  because  they  have  the  vowels  d — e,  6— a, 
instead  of  % — e,  m— a. 

o  2 


148 


Verbs  Double  Ayin. 


[CH.  11 


(399) 


3  HipMl 


6  Hoph. 


1 


1  Perf. 

3  Imperat. 
hasebh 

4  Imperf. 

hesebh 

yasebh 

yas^ebh 

heseb'bah 

haseb'bi 

ta^ebbi 

h»5ibb6tba 

h^^ibbenah 

t'sibbenah 

husabh 

yusabh 

yussabh 

husab'bah 

(none) 

tusab'bi 

hu^abbotha 

tusabbenah 

400 


Imperf.  witb  Vav  conversive  {Kal)  vayyasobh ;  {Hiph.)  vayyasebh. 

a)  The  principal  irregularity  of  these  verbs  is  this, 
that  before  an  afformative  the  two  identical 
letters  of  the  root  are  pronounced  as  one,  doubled 
by  strong  Dagesh,  and  that,  even  when  a  full 
vowel   would   regularly  stand   between  them : 

J)1D  for  !)nnD. 

:  IT 

b)  When  there  is  no  afformative,  the  final  conso- 
nant is  thrown  away:  DD  (since  30  is  im- 
possible). 

c)  Those  forms  are  not  contracted,  which  contain 
unchangeable   vowels,  or   a  Dagesh  forte;   as, 

nino,  nnia  niD. 


401  The  stem,  which  is  thus  rendered  monosyllabic, 
takes,  throughout,  the  vowel  which  the  full  form 
would  have  in  its  second  syllable  ;  as,  indeed,  even 
in  the  regular  verb,  it  is  this  vowel  that  characterizes 
the  form :  e.  g.  I'D  for  23D ;  Infin.  ID  for  31p ; 
Hiph.  2prT  for  2^011  (comp.  note  on  5). 

402  When  the  afformative  begins  with  a  consonant 
(J,  Jl),  a  vowel  is  inserted  before  it,  in  order  to  render 
audible  the  Dagesh  of  the  final  radical.  This  vowel 
in  the  Perf.  is  S,  in  the  Imperat.  and  Imperf.  V  •  g*  g* 

Jliip,  Imperf.  nj^ior)  (sabbo'tha,  t'^ubbenah). 

403  The  preformatives  of  Imperf.  Kal,  Perf  Niphal, 


§  1.]  Verbs  Double  Ayin.  149 

and  of  HiphU  and  Hophal,  which,  in  consequence  of  (403) 
the  contraction,  stand  in  a  simple  syllable  pDl  ■  in- 
stead of  ^2lD\^,  take,  instead  of  the  short  vowel  of 
the  regular  form,  the  corresponding  long  one.  Hence, 
Imperf.  HD^  for  ^2p^  =  3Hp]  ;  Imperf.  Middle  A, 
"ip^for  "inD^;  Hiph.'  2071  for  n^DH,  Infin.  2Vn  for 
lllprr ;  Hoph.  3pin  for  32011.  This  long  vowel  (ex- 
cept -I  in  Hophal)  is  changeable  f. 

There  is  still  another  mode  of  constructing  these  forms  (the  404 
common  one  in  Chuldee),  which  consists  in  a  sharp  pronunciation 
of  the  first  syllable  and  a  consequent  doubling  of  the_^r*^  radical 
by  Dagesh:  e.  g.  Imperf.  Kal  ^^^  for  33.D\  Imperf.  Hiph.  QD> 

for  D^JIV  Hoph.  /13^  for  /1J^3\     These  forms  do  not  usually 

take  Dagesh  in  the  final  letter  on  receiving  an  accession,  as 
Jjlp^,  they  bow  themselves  (from  lip),  as  if  the  doubling  of  the 

first  letter  were  a  suflScient  compensation.     They  therefore  omit 

also  the  vowels  )  and  "»_:    e.  g.    ni7iiin    (from   77^).     The 

T :  -  •  -  T 

Paradigm  exhibits  this  form  by  the  side  of  the  other  in  Imperf. 

Kal. 

a)  The  to7ie  has  this  peculiarity,   that   it   is    not  405 
thrown  forward  upon  the  formative  syllables 
beginning  with  a  vowel  {ah,  il,  i),  but  remains 

before  them  on  the  stem-syllable,  as  -130. 

b)  Before  the  other  afformatives,  it  rests  upon  the 

•f*  Many  of  these  contractions  are  founded  on  more  ancient 
forms  than  those  of  the  regular  verb.     Thus  ^D**  stands  for 

T 

3!ilD\  with  a  under  the  preformative,  as  in  the  regular  Arabic 

form  (Hebrew  7J0p%  from  7libp^ ;  the  a  appears  also  in  verbs  Pe 

guttural,  especially  in  verbs  Pe  Aleph  and  Ayin  Vnv).     Hiph. 
HOrr  for  33Dn  has  in  the  contracted  stem-syllable  the  shorter 

and  more  original  e  (like  the  Aram.   7J0pi^.  see  Ges.) ;  Perf. 

I^iph.  3DJ  for  22,0^ ;    Imperf.  Niph.  2D''  for  22D^ :    comp. 

^lOpV     See  Ges. 

o  3 


150  Verbs  Double  Ay  in,  [ch.  ii. 

(405)  inserted  syllables  0  and   (^7)   e  (except  in  the 

case  of  Drij  ]r\,  which  always  take  the  tone) ; 
and  in  consequence  of  this  the  vowels  of  the 

word  are  shortened,  as  ^2Dr\,  r]T3,VD ;  ll^Dn, 

but  jiSzvn, 

406  Instead  of  Piel,  Pual,  Hithpael,  and  in  the  same 
signification,  is  found,  in  numerous  verbs  of  this  kind, 
the  unfrequent  conjugation  called  (from  its  vowels 
6 — e)  Po'el,  with  its  Passive  and  Reflexive :  e.  g.  W^j 
to  treat  one  ill,  Pass,  '^^i^,  Reflex.  bb^VI^}  (from 
77^) :  in  some  is  found  the  rare  conjugation  (so  called 
from  its  form  and  vowels)  Pilpel,  as  7^7-2,  to  roll; 
b^b^m,  to  roll  oneself  (from  \h^) ;  Pass.  V^V}!^.  to  be 
caressed  (from  VV'^)-  They  are  inflected  regularly 
like  PieL 

Additional  Remarks  (for  reference). 

407  a)  On  Kal.~\     Some  further  peculiarities  are  : 

1)  Perfect  with  Kholem. 

2)  Injin.,  Irnperat.,  and  Imperf.  with  Pathakh. 

j^"  The  Kholem  of  the  Injin.,  Irnperat.,  and  Imperf.,  being  a 
changeable  vowel,  is  written  defectively  (with  a  few  ex- 
ceptions principally  in  the  later  writers),  and  shortened 
into  Kamets  Khateph  or  Kibbuts,  whenever  it  loses  the  tone; 
as  Infin.  ']'),  to  rejoice  (Job),  with  suffix  'ipH^j  when  he 

founded;  Irnperat.  ">ii)n>  P^y  ^^J   Imperf.  with  Vav  con- 

vers.  ^D'^Ij  with  suffix  Q'^Ii^l,  he  lays  them  waste. 
TT-  ••T  ; 

b)  Niphal."]  Besides  the  most  usual  form  with  Pathakh  in 
the  second  syllable,  as  given  in  the  Paradigm,  there  is 
another  with  Tsere,  and  a  third  with  Kholem  (analogous 
to  bZDp.  Nl^j  by*)}  extending  through  the  whole  con- 
jugation :    (1)  e.  g.  Perf.   7p^  (also    7p^),  it  is   a   light 

'  "T  '-T 

thing;   Infin.  DSPT*  '^  melt;   Partcp.  DDJ.  wasted  away. 
(2)  y^}2,  they  are  rolled  together;  Infin.  absol.  tlSH*  ^^ 


§  I.]  Verbs  Double  Ayin,  151 

.> 

plundered:   Imperat.  ^ty^T},  take  yourselves  up;    Imperf.  (407) 

c)  Hiphil  and  Hoplial.']    (I)  Instead  of  Tsere  the  final  syllable 
has  sometimes  Pathakh,  especially  with  gutturals,  as  "IDH; 

Infin.  "IQIlj  to  cleanse;  (2)  but  also  without  a  guttural,  as 

p'Trr ;   Plur.  !)3Dn ;    Partcp.  72iQ,  shadowing. 

-  ..  - ..  ^ 

The  Imperfect  with  retracted  tone  takes  the  form  TTD\ 
he  protects;   py^\  and  he  rolled. 

It  may  be  remarked  in  general,  that  verbs  Double  Ayin  are  408 
very  nearly  related  to  verbs  Ayin  Vav,  as  appears  even  frinn  the 
similarity  in  their  conjugations,  which  are  parallel  throughout. 

In  form  the  verb  ^^  is  generally  shorter  than  the  other  (comp. 
^D**  and  DJlp\  HDH  and   D^pn).     In  some  cases  they  have 

precisely  the  same  form  as  in  the  Imperf.  convers.  of  Kal  and 
Hiphtly  in  Hophal,  and  in  the  unfrequent  conjugations.  On 
account  of  this  relation,  they  have  sometimes  borrowed  forms 
from  each  other :  e.  g.  V\'yi  for  ]"T',  he  rejoices. 

T  T 

Along  with  the  contracted  forms  there  are  found,  especially  409 

in  certain  conjugations  and  tenses,  others  which  are  wholly 

> 
regular :  e.  g.  Perf.  Kal  TT^,  to  plunder,  Plur.  !)n3,>  -I^TTB  (also 

^iTTZL) ;  Infin.  23D  and  '2D »  Imperf.  ppl'',  he  is  gracious, 
elsewhere  ^n"*.  Hiph.  y^yiHt  Imperf.  ]''J'i\  he  will  rejoice 
(which  is  never  contracted) ;  Partcp.  D'^Dt^D*  astonished.  Some- 
times the  full  form  appears  to  be  emphatic. 

Although  the  afformatives  here  do  not  attract  the  tone,  yet  it  410 
is  thrown  on  them  when  suffixes  are  appended,  as  ^3D,  ''J')21D« 

Before  Dagesh,  Kholem  in  the  Imperf.  becomes  Kibbuts,  less 
frequently  Kamets-Khatuph ;    Tsere  in  Hiph.   becomes  Khirik 

(after  the  analogy  of  riJ^HD/l.    JllBDn) ;   the  preformatives 

then,    in   place   of  the  full  vowel,  take  Sh'va:    e.  g.    '•J^D*'* 

•imnD^  Hiph.h^D'. 
\:  •  ••  •  : 


152 


Verbs  Double  Ayin, 


[CH.  11. 


Vocabulary. 


4 1 1  To  curse,  "n^^,  arar. 

To  take  prey  ;  to  "spoil, plunder y 
Tt3>  bazaz. 

To  roll,  ^^2),  galal*. 

—   T 

To  cover,  protect,  ]ii),  ganan. 
To  be  weak,  yy^,  dalal. 
To  be  silent,  DD1>  damam. 

-     T 

To  be  clean,  TT^t*  zachach. 

-T 

To  be  wounded,  f  77n>  khalal. 
To  be  hot,  D^Hj  khamam. 
To  be  gracious,  ]jn>  khanan. 
To  be  broken,  Jl/irT>  khathath. 

—     T 

To   beat   (down) ;  crush ;    to 
rout,   ilJ13,  cathath. 

~    T 

To  be  completed  or  ended :  to 
cease,  QDDj  tamam  |. 

To  measure,  TID,  madad. 

~  T 

To  melt :  to  faint,  DDD,nia5a5§. 

—    T 

To  6e  in  bitterness,  "TIO,  marar. 

-T 

To  feel,  ti^ti^D.  mashash. 

-     T 

To  fee,  "I*7J,  nadad. 

To  <Mr»  oneself;  to  go  round: 
to  surround,  "yHVy  sabhabh. 


To  cover,  conceal:  to  protect, 
"JTJDj  *achach. 

To  cast  up  a  mound,  a  way, 
p?'0,  5alal. 

~    T 

To  tie  up:  to  bind,  T)^i,  tsarar. 

—  T 

To  be  light:  to  be  lessened  or 
abated,  77p,  kalal. 

-'t 

To  shout  (for  joy),  ]y^,  ranan. 
To  err,  :iJ)^,  shagag. 

~  T 

To  carry  off;  to  spoil,  y^^l), 

—  T 

shalal. 

To   be  desolate :    to   desolate, 
Dt2^,  shamam. 

—  T 

Desolation,  ^'ih*  khorebh. 
For    ever,    H^iJ/.    lane'tsakh 

-  VT 

(netsakh,  a  subst.=  strength, 
perpetuity). 

To  destroy,  ]l}]^^,  nathash. 

-  T 

A  door,  rhrj^  de'leth. 
Hinge,  T'iJ,  tsir. 


Bed, 


f    nm  mi«ah(an)||. 
psi^D,  mishcabh  (a). 


*  Also  77^,  not  used  in  Kal :  in  Poel,  to  affect  painfully, 

with  ^. 

f  In  Hipb.  to  begin.     Probably  the  first  meaning  is  to  open. 
X  In  Hiph.  to  complete:  to  finish. 

§  Regular  in  many  forms :  as  are  nddad  and  several  others. 
II  Na/ah,  to  stretch  out;  shachabh,  to  lie  down. 


§  1.]  Ve7'bs  Double  Ay  in,  153 

To  mourn,  "IQD.  «aphad.      "^   (41l) 
Mourning,  ^QDD>  mispedfo).  (' 
First-born,  "lO^,  b'chor  (ba- 

char,  to  be  early). 
A  dog,  H/I),  ce'lebh. 


Supplication,  X)}'nr),  takh*nun 

(pi.  tm  or  6th) ;  khanan,  to 
be  gracious. 


To  pierce,  lp'7,  dakar. 
Only  (son),  -T>n\  yakhid. 


^D  (for  n^yD,  intent,  purpose),  occurs  only  with  7  C]yD7> 
for  the  sake  of) ;  with  suffixes,  '^^Vu?,  for  my  sake,  Sec. 

Exercise  39. 

a)  D")Dr  ■^n^^  r\tr\^  Dn:i;i  to:39  niinn  ?»Dn  i  *nnKn  1412 

JT:*  V.-T        T     :    A-  T  >'  T  l  ~t:-T  TTJ  ;-  ••  |T 

-'^n^D'bv  b^v\  HT^i"^;?  "^y\Brs  rhin  2         :narr 

I    T    •  -  "t;  at-         -  J     •  V    ••— V.  Tl" 

••  T       I ;        J-  J-;  •  T  ••         -         •    :  ~  |t:  |-  t  t 

'  •••jTT        V  •  )  \  \ )         A :  •        V       a~T        V : 

:''in;r  -m  u;q':'1  ^iyo'?  J1^^•T^r  n^y^^'7^^  ^ni-):i  10 

••nr^i^-D:i  ^DTDj^  D'-n'psn 


*  This  difficult  verse  is  best  explained  thus:  (1)  the  nomi- 
native, '  the  enemy'  (which  some  consider  the  vocative),  must  be 
considered  as  a  nominntivus  pendens,  just  stating,  who  are  the 
subject  of  the  discourse.  The  enemy  =  as  to  the  enemy,  &c. 
(2)  In  ndthashta  the  Psalmist  is  addressing  Jehovah.  (3)  hem- 
mah  (they),  which  is  construed  in  our  version  with  them,  must 
be  considered  nom.  to  dbh'du  understood. 

f  Infin.  constr.  of  hayah,  to  be,  with  7  prefixed. 


154  Verbs  Pe  Nun,  [cH.  ii. 

(412)  b)  1.  The  enemy  (pi.)  plundered  the  city.  2.  The  city  will 
be  plundered.  3.  The  great  cities  were  plundered.  3.  Thou 
shalt  not  plunder  this  city.  4.  Those  who  are  shearing  his 
flock.  5.  I  am  very  weak.  6.  My  eyes  are  weak.  7.  We  are 
very  weak.  8.  Our  brethren  have  made-faint  our  hearts. 
9.  They  flee  [regular)  from  me.  10.  Does  not  the  door  turn 
upon  its  hinge  ? 


Chap.  XI.    §  2.     Verbs  Pe  Nun. 

413  The  principal  anomaly  of  this  class  of  verbs  is  that 
the  Nun,  when  it  would  close  a  syllable,  is  assimi- 
lated to  the  following  consonant.  Sometimes  also 
an  initial  Nun  is  dropt. 

414  I.  The  assimilation  of  Nun  takes  place  {a)  in  the 

Imperfect  of  Kal.  The  second  vowel  is  most 
commonly  0,  sometimes  a:  e  occurs  only  in 
yitten  (z:  yinten),  from  nathan,  to  give ;  (b)  in 
the  Perfect  of  Niphal;  (c)  throughout  Hiphil 
and  Hophal  (which  has  always  Kibbuts). 

II.  a)  The  Imperat.  and  Infin.  constr,  often  drop  the 
Nun  (by  aphceresis),  as  gash/o?'  n'gash,  I^^  for 

b)  The  Infin.  then,  however,  usually  appends  the 
feminine  ending  eth  (the  accent  being  on  the 

penult.)',  after  a  guttural,  dth:  as  IV^^^  (ge'sheth), 

>  *  " 

DV^  (ga^ath),  from  nagaj;,  to  touch. 

c)  The  Imperative  has  usually  a,  but  sometimes  e 
(as  in  ten,  give,  from  nathan).  It  frequently 
takes  the  lengthened  form  with  appended  h: 
t'nah,  give  up  (HJliJ^). 

415  The  characteristic  of  these  verbs,  in  all  the  forms  which  have 
a  preformaiive,  is  Dagesh  following  the  preformative  in  the 
second  radical;  but,  as  we  shall  see,  some  forms  of  verbs  Pe 
Yod,  and  even  of  verbs  double  Ayin,  resemble  them  in  this. 

416  The  Nun  is  nearly  always  retained  in  the  forms 
enumerated  in  I.,  II.,  when  the  second  radical  is  a 


§  2.]  Verbs  Pe  Nun.  155 

guttural  (as  yinkhal,  he  will  possess) .     In  other  cases  (416) 
the  retention  of  it  is  comparatively  rare,  never  oc- 
curring in  Niphal,  and  very  seldom  in  Hiphil  and 
Hophal. 

Similar  anomalies  are  in  part  exhibited  by   T\\P  417 

(lakakh),  to  take;  Lamed  being  assimilated  or  dropt 
like  the  Nun. 

Imperf.  yikkakh.  Imperat.  kakh  (seldom  I'kakh).  Jnfin. 
constr.  ka'khath.  Hoph.  Imperf.  yiikkakh. — Niphal,  however, 
is  always  nilkakh. 

Nathan   (^JTIJ),  to  give,  is  peculiar  in  assimilating  418 

the  final  as  well  as  the  initial  Nun.  Thus,  nathatti, 
teth,  for  nathanti,  te'neth  [Tnfin.  constr.). — On  the 
Imperf.  see  above,  I. 

Example  '\I)y^.,  nagash,  to  approach :  see  Appendix  E,  p.  20. 

-T 

Short  Paradigms. 
[The  regular  forms  are  in  italics.] 

Partcp. 
nogesh        419 
niggfish 
maggish 
muggash 
Past  partcp.  of  Kal,  nagush. 
Infin.  ahsol.  1)  nagosh,  2)  hinnagosh,  3)  haggesh. 
Imperat.  (Kal)  gash  g'shi  gashnah 

(Niph.)  hinnagesh     hinnag'shi    hinnagesh'nah 
(Hiph.)  haggesh   "    haggishi       haggesh'nah 

The  other  tenses  are  conjugated  regularly.  See  Paradigm  in 
Appendix  E. 

On  the  Jussive  and  Cohortative  forms  of  Verbs. 

Jussive.j  The  jussive  is  a  form  of  the  Imperfect,  420 
which  occurs  only  in  the  second  and  third  persons. 
In  verbs  Lamed  He  this  form  is  called  the  apocopated 
Imperfect,   because   the  shortening   consists   in   the 


Per/. 

Inf.  cofistr. 

Imperat. 

Imperf. 

1  Kal 

nagash 

ge'sheth 

gash 

yiggash 

2  Niphal 

niggash 

hinnagesh 

hinnagesh 

yinndgesh 

3  Hiphil 

higgish 

haggish 

haggesh 

yaggish 

4  Hophal 

hiiggash 

hiiggash 

(none) 

yuggash 

156 


Verbs  Pe  Nun. 


[cn.  11. 


(420)  cutting  off  (apocope)  of  the  final  He ;  from  these  the 
name  is  extended  to  all  verbs.  The  jussive  is  often 
not  distinguished  orthographically  from  the  indi- 
cative ;  v)here  it  is,  it  will  be  pointed  out.  The  Im- 
perative is  also  apocopated. 

421  Cohortative.']  The  first  person  of  the  Imperfect  and 
the  persons  of  the  Imperative  sometimes  take  apara- 
gogic  He  (ah) ;  this  syllable  has  the  tone  wherever  the 
afformatives  u,  i  would  have  it,  and  therefore  shorten 
the  final  vowel  of  the  root,  just  as  those  terminations 
do :  hence  for  eshmdr  we  have  eshm'rah  Cn")Q^i^). 

As  ah  appended  to  an  ace.  denotes  direction,  so  here 
it  denotes  a  direction,  tendency,  or  effort  of  the  will. 


422  To    guard,     watch,    preserve, 
I^J,  natsar. 

—  T 

To  deliver,  7'^^,  natsal*. 

—  T 

To   come   near,    to    approach, 
^^1  nagash. 


To  bite,  "TTti^^,  nashach. 

To  tellf  [1:1^,  nagad  =  /o  be 

— T 

clear  F']. 
To  look,  toil  nabha^J. 

—  T 

To  touch,  ^^^,  nagai>  (constr. 

with  J2,  &c.). 
To  forsake,  ]i}^},  nagash. 

—  T 

To  give,  IJ^J,  nathan. 

—  T 

To  fade,  ^2.^,  nabhal. 

—  T 

To  kiss,  7)]^^,  nashak. 


Vocabulary. 

To  overtake  [Jj"li^i],  nasag  (in 

Hiph.). 
To  take,  np7>  lakakh. 
To  overthrow,  P)7D>  salaph  (in 

Piel). 
To  tear,  PjIZO,  /araph. 
A  lion,    nhJ   and  HHi^,   ''ri 

and  aryeh. 
To  crush,  DID,  parak. 
A    serpent,     t^H^,     nakhash 

TT 

(decl.  4). 
Extremity;  heel,  y^^,  )?akebh 


(decl.  5,  c:  but  taking 
Khirik  under  the  first  rad. 
in  constr.  pi.  instead  of  Pa- 
thakh). 


*  In  Hiphil :  in  Kal,  to  strip  off;  then,  to  deliver. 
■\  In  Hiphil  =  to  make  clear  (higgid). 
X  In  Hiphil :  once  in  Piel. 


\^2.] 


Ve7'bs  Pe  Nun, 


157 


Those  two  =  them  both,  DrT'J^, 

sh'nehem  (numeral  in  constr. 
state  with  suffix,  204). 

Right  hand,  "f'TJ)'',  yamin  (decl. 

3,  a). 

Left  hand,  bi^D^,  s'mol. 


To  tremble,  1^1,  rai^ad.  (422) 

To  smoke,  '[]l)y,  i^ashan. 
Season,  Jl^,  i>eth  (i)it-t6,  &c.).    . 
Leaf,  r^bv^  ^'"^leh  (decl.  9). 

V   T 

7o  divide;  to  sing  hymns,  "irjt, 
zamar.  ~  ^ 


Exercise  40. 

lm''^  3  :  ^•'ij;^  r^i'^  P^'s  '^3^  ^n^^^  p]Sd''"]D  2 

••'ji^an  nn3  vbi^  nn'T'i  j^d^^  du-^ji;  "it:;?*  t:;^iin-'?i^ 

•|T-  -;v       VT  ••         i  :    -;-       A"  J"       -        vv -;  •  t 

"Upp  ^t:;:in  nn?*"''^:;  'i^^st:^  'rTnV^b:^;  t^^m  *]tm^  4 
"n^  Dn^:)::^-Ji?*  ^dv  np^'i  5      :  y\r]^  in^i  ^b=^i  did 

V    ••  ;  V         '••  'j-—   ^  IT         V   :     I         ;  •- 

VD"'Q  ib?^D';ia  ni^^^^Tii^'i  birsw^  bviiwu  iW^  Dnsjh^ 

v' :   :  •      i-      •     T   :j—        i        tt<  it-      v —     a"  t:  • 

;•  -       TT     i"  -:i-         A"  :         >",-  :        •-  t  -  i* 

|T  !•-;  •    -     T  ;•-         'a-  J"  T         -V  :    -  -    '|'T|T 

§D"'n^n  10        :n3n^-^?*  nn^^si  nn:n  rbik  ironing 
U'^rs  nrn'^  n         :^:t:;a;^i  Dnnn  i;:i^  iv^rs'^  'O^^ 

•TV       'j-:*  iTv:iv:        j-ri-.-      v—      at  :  •  -    'vttv 

'^yi  V'^'^  12  :;^i:^n  "^b^  iiSi;t:;-ini  '^^m  y^'Ts 

•  :v      J- :  |TT      i-         t:    •:        a  :~     j"~: 

i:^t5^-i^^  •'3  13        :?TD?*  Ji^iri  t:;^n"':'?*i  Tn?<  id^d 

J  •      I      ^-  'iv  •         i-  •        - :     '  A-  T      j- 

TO  nSi")  14  :aTr  i^^  iJi'pm'')  i?3a^  rr\rv 

'  ••  :        TT :  i-:i-      j  t-:i-:       a  ~        jt  : 

•in'7j;i   ij^;r2   in^  1  inD    -it:;^    d^d^^j^D"'?:;    b^^v:} 


*  SAaZZ  be.  f  228,  p.  80. 

§  A  partcp.  descriptive  of  Jehovah. 


I  rn'sapper,  5,  3. 

P 


Sing. 
1.    I  will  lake. 
2. /Thou  shalt  kiss  thy  mother. 

I. Thou  (/.)  shalt  approach. 
3. /He  will  take. 

I  She  will  give. 


Plur. 
1.  We  will  kiss. 

2.,/Ye  will  take. 

I  Ye  (/.)  will  pursue. 
3. /They  will  trample. 

I  They  (/.)  will  take. 


158  Verbs  Pe  Nun.  [ch.ii. 

a      T   J    |T  J   V  -;  T    T-:|T       '    •  TAT  jT  |     • 

VT  ••  V         1-  '|VT-  '     V    T         t"     :  V  -'j-T      T       • 

p:i;>  ns):?^  niaD^i  ''•n  v"^^^^  obn^i  :i'ii^^')  "-i^B^  n'iK' 

jT  :      V        t'«:  •      <v  :  V        -  :  -     ~ :  t|v 

|..  _     J..  ...     •-:   •         ^-    v:    !•       ta — :     'jv     --..v 

5)  Look  the  way  of  the  sea;  and  he  looked.  2.  The  kings 
were  smitten  before  the  children  of  Israel.  3.  They  will  trample 
our  honour  in  the  dust.  4.  Dehver  thy  people.  5.  Tell  me  all 
that  thou  hast  heard.  G.  Their  leaves  shall  not  fade.  7.  Ye 
shall  not  forsake  your  people.  8.  I  have  given  this  garden  to 
my  brother.  9.  Who  told  thee  that  thou  (°wast)  naked  ? 
10.  His  leaf  shall  not  fall. 

Write  down  the  Hebrew  of  the  following  forms  §  : 


(Imperative.) 

Sinff.  Plur. 

Take  thou.  Draw  near. 

Draw  near  (/.).  Take  (/.). 


*   With  paragogic  He.  t  In  the  Bible,  5)'^'^^  ' 

X  0  my  strength  1    Another  reading  is  ))uzz6. 

§  The  pronouns  are  to  represent  the  masculine  when/ is  not  j 

added.  \ 


§3.] 


Ve7'bs  Pe  Aleph. 


159 


Chap.  XL     §  3.     Verbs  Pe  Aleph,     Feeble  Verbs 
( Verba  quiescentia) . 

Example.     7^^^,  achal,  to  eat:    see  Appendix  E,  p.  21. 


1  Kal 


1  Per/, 
dchal 


Short  Paradigms. 
2  In/,  cstr.  13  Twperat,  4  Imperf. 


2  NipJi.  'ne^chal 

3  Hiph.  'he^chil 

4  Hoph.  ,h6*'chal 


5  Partcp. 
ochel 

ne^chal  -i 

^    1  A,     (*s  verbs  Pe 
ma^chil  ^  y««„,.„/) 


424 


y6°chal  m6"chal . 


*chol         *chol        yochel 

heachel     heachel    yeachel 

ha'chil      ha*chel    ya'chil 

ho°chal      (none) 

Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  ach^l. 

Injin.  absol.  1)  achol;  2)  heachol. 

Imperf.  Kal,  with  Vav  conversive,  vayyo'chal :  vayyo'mer. 

In  some  verbs  and  forms  J>^  quiesces.     The  verbs  425 
in  which  this  regularly  occurs  are : 

7^i^,  achal,  to  eat.  j     tlBi^y  aphah,  to  bake. 


1f2ii)  amar,  to  say. 
"TI2i^>  abhad,  to  perish. 


^^^^,  abhah,  to  be  willing. 


In  the  Imperf.  Kal  of  these  verbs  (of  which  the  42G 
two  last  are  also  Lamed  He)^  and  usually  in   triK, 

Tikhaz,  to  hold,  the  K  quiesces j  with  a  transposition  of 
the  vowels.     Hence, 

"lDi4^  (yomer)  for  ibM^I  =  "^b^^.^  the  form  it  would 

regularly  take  as  a  verb  first  guttural. 

(We   shall  see   that,  as  verbs  Lamed  He,  dbhdh,  427 
dphdh  have  for  their  Imperfects  ydbheh,  yOpheh.) 

With  conjunctive  accents  in  the  middle  of  a  clause,  42S 
and  with  Vav  conversive  (which  draws  back  the  tone- 
syllable),  Tsere  is  usually  shortened  into  Pathakh. 
This  change,  however,  in  the  case  of  Vav  conversive, 
is  only  found  in  dchdl;  dmdr  taking  the  still  greater 
shortening  into  Segol :  vriyyomer,  vattomer. 

(Of  course,  in  pause  the  Tsere  is  retained). 

p2 


160 


Verbs  Pe  Aleph. 


[CH.   11. 


429  Only  a  few  cases  occur  in  which  i^  quiesces,  ac- 
cording to  the  general  rule,  in  t-,  — ,  or  -rr.  It 
always  quiesces  in  Tsere  in  the  common  form  lemor 
(■^b^^7),  in  saying ;  very  seldom  in  Imperf,  Kal. 

430  In  the  first  person  singular  of  the  Imperfect  the 
quiescent  '^  is  also  rejected,  to  avoid  the  concurrence 
of  two  Alephs,  This  occurs  frequently  in  the  other 
forms  also. 

431  Other  verbs  beginning  with  Aleph  are  conjugated 
like  verbs  Pe  guttural  (Paradigm  E.)  ;  and,  except  in 
Kal,  even  the  verbs  above  given  very  seldom  quiesce. 

In  Piel,  K  sometimes  falls  away  by  contraction. 

Vocabulary. 


432  To  kiss,  pU}},  nashak  (in  both 
Kal  and  Piel). 

To  burn,  1^^,  bai?ar. 

To  prove,  IHIl*  bakhan. 

-    T 

To  draw-near,   ^^p,    karabh, 

-'t 

with  i^al,  upon  =.  for  the  pur- 
pose of  falling  upon;  of  at- 
tacking. 

To  divide,  p^T],  khalak. 

A  Utile,  *  tO^O  or  lO^D,  m'i^af 
or  m'X!a.t  (from  tDPQ>  lo  be 

—  T 

small,  or  few). 

Expectation,  rh'H^D,  tokhS'- 

leth  (a  toy);  yakhal,  to  wait, 
expect. 

Joy,    nntyD,    simkhah     (sa- 
makh,  to  shine  bright). 


Hope,  expectation,  nipJl*  tik- 

vah    fkavah,    to   wait  for, 
hope  in). 

For    ever,     H^^A     lanetsakh 

(netsakh  =  truth, perpetuity). 
A  fig-tree,  ^^^iD,  t'enah. 
Form,  nj4i^,  toar  (taar,  to  be 

drawn,  marked). 
Countenance,    ^^^1D  (")j  nia- 

reh  (deck  9,  a) ;  raah,  to  see. 
Except,  Di^~''D»  ci-im,  (ni-si, 

properly  quod  si). 

An    evil-doer,     ^")D,     merai? 

(partcp.  Hiph.  of  ral^ai?,  to 
be  evil). 

A  wolf,  l>i?,  z'ebh. 

Booty,  1^,  Vad. 

Prey,  7?^,  shalal. 


*  Z0yD3  ^  as  a  little  (a  little)  soon. 


§3.]  Verbs  Pe  Aleph,  ]G1 

Exercise  41. 

1"  a-  T     :  vv.-.-:  'a*     •-  vjv         T      :».       -a-        !• 

Sbv^  W^^  -iira^-''3  *  ^")i  na^/n  c]3^^''■|D  "i2"p'^:»:  2 

A-  J-  :    •  J-:  •      r  w  ;  ;       '-v;!-.-    V  -       '     :    - 

n^'pn)  r\ndv  DV^n:i  rbrr\rs  3      02  fDin-^^  ni:^^ 

^_r.  .  .       AT :  •         'j-  •-       vjv  I  ••    )       X      ••  :  - 

to:*?  ^bi^  li^^KT  ■Tn^^^  D^nmjr  4       n^'^rs  u'v^-) 
••inD^  rjiN  nDi:^i  nnD  ^D^^^  n:j^;n  i:ij  5     n^i'^  ' 

It  \;         -IT     -;         x."       :        at;  ■        j-  x  ••  ;v         a-  I"  -; 

>•  T  ;  •  <-T    I       :       ' "  J-;  V  -;        T         j  -;!-- 

ns^i  ■^^^J^  nB"*  ^bv  \-i^t  ^dik  K^^-l::?^^  on'^n-DN 
ipzn  p]nrD^  :}i^r  r?:^''^^  s   :  ^b^y\  r^bt2  hdh  ^'p  U''^^1 

'vv  -         t:  •      J":        •  t;  -  |TT :     j  :  i r        i  v     a*     j-:  i  : 

HiTi  ini^  d3?:d  ^n'?::;  9     :  bbt  rhr^'  2r\vb^  "li^  b'^^' 
U2m  nnj^T]  Djm^  -i^ra^l  npijn  br^i^ii  DD"'^^i"n^J 

-'7K  Dnh^  nCJi^- "1    =  D^i^  D^'Pil-ID  ^3  rti7-13   ll  ''H  'i^^-U^^ 

3T  '>   v:vT  i'.'-  v;    -;       J-  ;-  j"  •   ; 

:D^D^  ntb^  ')Utll2 


b)  I.  The  ways  of  the  scorners  shall  perish.  2.  And  Jehovah 
said  to  the  woman,  Hast  thou  not  eaten  of  the  tree  ?  And  the 
woman  said.  The  serpent  deceived-me1[,  and  I  did  eat.  3.  Thy- 
way  perished.     4.  Then  shalt  thou  say  unto  Joab,  The  sword 

*  The  way  =  os  <o  your  way. 

f  Trusting.  Partcp.  act.  Kal  in  stat.  constr.  from  a  verb 
Lamed  He :  ilDH- 

T    T 

I  Itto  rrCiimah,  lit.  with-him  any-thing=  any  thing  that  teas 
loith  him. 

§  Supply  bikrobh  again  :  karabh  is  construed  with  /'  (=  to). 

II  An  oath,  life  of  Pharaoh  =  by  the  life  of  Pharaoh. 
11   ''^i^^tn  (from  N^::  Hiph.  i^^WH). 

p3 


162  Verbs  Pe  Yod.  [ch.  ii. 

(433)  devoureth  one  as  well  as  another  *,  5.  I  will  say,  Thou  °art 
my  servant,  whom  I  have  chosen.  6.  The  woman  ate  the  bread 
which  ("belonged)  to  me.  7.  I  will  go  upf,  and  destroy  the 
people.  8.  He  said  to  his  daughters,  Eat  flesh.  9.  AH  fat  of 
ox,  or  of  sheep,  or  of  goat  shall  ye  not  eat. 


Chap.  XI.     §  4.     Verbs  Pe  Yod  C3).     First  Class, 

or  Verbs  originally  13. 
E.  g,  ^^\  yashabh,  to  dwell.  Paradigm  :  see  Appendix  E,  p.  22. 

—  T 

Short  Paradigms. 


1  Per/. 

2  Inf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

1  Kal 

yashabh 

she'bheth 

rshebh 
\  y'rash 

j'yeshebh 

yoshebh 

1  yirash 

2  'Niph. 

noshabh 

hivvashebh 

hivvashebh 

yivvashebh 

noshabh 

5  Hiph. 

hoshibh 

hoshibh 

hoshebh 

yoshibh 

moshibh 

6  Hoph. 

hushabh 

hushabh 

(none) 

yushabh 

mushabh 

6  Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  yashubh. 

Put.  Apoc.  (Jussive),  yoshebh. 

Fut.  Vav  convers.  [Kal),  vayye'shebh. 

in    hi  ^^^^'  y^^^^^^' 

''    '  '  \  Hiph.  hoshibh  or  hoshebh. 

Normal  Forms. 
Kallmp.  shehh,  sh'bhi,  shebh'nah  ;  or,  y'rash,  yirshi,  y'rash'nah. 
[Perf 

[imperf.     toshibh      toshi'bhi        toshebh'nah 

435      Verbs  Pe  Yod  are  divided  into  two,  or  even  three, 
classes:   (1)  those  verbs  which  have  properly  a  Vavf 

*  Say:  *as  this  so  that.'    PIDI  ilD;  the  ^  taking  Kamets 

V  T  ;  T 

as  coming  immediately  before  a  tone-syllable, 
t  rhVi^*  Imperf  of  rhv  Qi). 
X  In  Arabic  they  are  written  with  \ 


hoshibh     hosbi'bhah     hoshabh'ta 
Hiphil  {  Imperat.  hoshebh    hoshi'bhi       hoshebh'nah 


§  4.]  Verbs  Pe  Yod,  163 

for  their  first  radical ;  (2)  those  which  are  properly  (435) 
Pe  Yod;   (3)  a  few  of  these  verbs  Pe  Yod  form,  in 
some  respects,  a  third  class  inflected  like  verbs  Pe 
Nun. 

Yatsar  (1ii'»)  occurs  in  both  classes  :  (1)  •^ji'»  (for  l^i")),  to  be  436 

~T  -T 

in  a  strait  J  (2)  ■^^'»,  to  form. 


(Pe  Yod  =  Pe  Vav.) 

Kal.]    A)  Infin.  consir.,  Lnperat.,  Imperf. — About  437 
half  of  these  verbs  have  the  feeblest  forms :   (1)  she- 
bheth,  (2)  shebh,  (3)  yeshebh. 

1)  Imperf.     In  yeshebh  (2^,^)  the  second  e  is  only 

lengthened  by  the  tone^  and  may  be  shortened 
to  Segol  and  vocal  Sh'va ;  the  e  in  the  first 
syllable  is  somewhat  firmer,  and  in  a  degree 
still  embodie.s  the  first  radical  ^  that  has  fallen 
away. 

2)  Imperat.  y^  is  from  21^^,  by  omission  of  the 
feeble  \ 

3)  Infin.  T^yi)  is  shortened  in  the  same  way,  and 
takes  the  fern,  ending  D-..— ,  which  again  gives 
to  the  form  more  length  and  body. 

B)  The  other  half  of  these  verbs  are  inflected  with  438 
stronger  forms,  having  the  Imperf.  Middle  A,  and 
retaining  the  Yod  at  the  beginning ;  but  in  the  Imperf. 
only  as  quiescent,  or  as-  resolved  into  the  vowel  i. 

Imperat.  ll^T  and  Infin.  ID]  retain  the  ^  as  a  conso- 
nant, but  in  Imperf.  ^T^  it  is  a  quiescent. 

That  the  latter  mode  of  inflexion  belongs  to  verbs  actually  439 
// 

13  is  shown,  partly  by  the  numerous  verbs  which  take  these 
forms  in  Kal,  and  at  the  same  time  have  ")  in  Nijjhal,  Hiphtl, 
and  Hophal,  partly  by  the  analogy  of  the  Arabic. 

Even  in  the  same  verb  are  found  both  forms,  one  with,  the 
other  without  Yod. 


164  Verbs  Pe  Yod.  [ch.  ii. 

440  a)  The  original  Vav   always  appears   in   Niphal, 

HiphU,  and  Hophal.  It  quiesces  in  the  Perf. 
and  Partcp.  of  Niphal,  and  throughout  HipMl, 
in  Kholem;  throughout  Hophal  in  Shurek:  as 

nti^ijj  (for  nt^y),  2'^p)r\  (for  2^t?^in),  nii^^n  (for 

b)  In  the  Infin.,  Imperat.,  and  Imperf.  Niphal, ")  re- 
mains as  a  consonant,  and  the  inflexion  is 
regular. 

c)  It  also  retains  its  power  as  a  consonant  in  the 
Hithpael  of  some  verbs :  e.  g.  ^'^ljn»7  ^'odi  ^T. 

441  The  other  forms,  with  few  exceptions,  are  regular. 

442  In  those  forms  in  which  Yod  does  not  appear,  these  verbs 
may  be  distinguished,  in  the  Imperf.  of  Kal  by  the  Tsere  under 
the  preformatives,  in  Niphal,  Hiphtl,  and  Hophal,  by  the  Vav 

(*)»  i>  ^)  before  the  second  radical.     Forms  Hke  21'\l},  D^^,  they 

have  in  common  with  verbs  Pe  Nun.    Hophal  has  the  same 
form  as  in  verbs  Double  Ayin  and  Ayin  Vav. 

443  a)  The  Injin.  of  Kal  without  the  radical  Yod,  has  very  seldom 

the  masculine  form   like  ^"^,  to  know,  or  the   feminine 

ending  H-  like  XVwt  to  bear, 
b)  With  a  guttural  the  latter  takes  the  form  *  j^  __^  instead 
of  J")  „  f.  :  e.  g.  Jl^l,  ^0  A;wom;.     Examples  of  the  regular 
full  form  occur  with  suffixes,  nD^»  ilD^-     'A'his  full  form 
seldom  takes  the  feminine  ending,  as  D/D'*,  to  be  able. 

444  The  Imperat.  Kal  often  has  the  lengthening  pf-,  as  H^ti^,  sit; 

nil,  descend.     From  ^l!''*  ^o  5'*^^*  the  lengthened  Imperat.  is 

>  >  >       . 

n^n>/<?^.  ''Hn,  pl^f.  ^^n,  with  accented  Kamets,  owing  to  the 

T   T  •     T  T 

influence  of  the  guttural. 

445  a)  The  Imperf.  of  the  form  ^ti^>  takes  Pathakh  in  its  final 

syllable,  when  it  has  a  guttural,  as  yi'',  also  IIJ^. 

*  m7,  in  1  Sam.  iv.  19,  is  contracted  to  r)/. 


§  4.]  Verbs  Pe  Yod,  165 

b)  "When  the  tone  is  drawn  back  on  the  penultima,  the  final  (445) 
syllable  takes  Segol;  namely,  before  a  word  of  one  syllable, 

and  after  Vav  conversive:  e.  g.  Ki"2lt^''>  "I"}*")'  2^^\  but 
in  Pause,  y^)^)  and  ll^"). 

c)  The  form  ti^"^"'^  when  lengthened,  may  also  lose  its  radical  "» 
(as  !)3^\  ^'^y^)-  Yet  the  cases  are  rare  and  doubtful  where 
this  occurs  after  other  preformatives  than  >. 

In  some  stems  the  feebleness  affects  also  the  Per/.  Kal,  so  far 
that  the  a  under  the  second  radical  becomes  e  or  z  in  such  forms 
as  have  no  full  vowel  under  the  first  radical,  as  rm^T'.  Di^t!/"1% 

'I'^Dlb''  from  ]i}-)\  ^y 
I   .   . .  .     ..  _^      —  ^ 

a)  As  an  exception  the  Imperf.  Niph.  sometimes  retains  Yod: 

^-  g-   /Tl^^'),  and  he  waited. 

li)  The   first  Pers.   sing,  has  always  the  form  ^t^^i^,  not 

••  T  V 

In  Piel  the  radical   Yod  sometimes  falls  away  after  *»  pre-  446 

>      : 

formative,   which   takes   its   punctuation :    e.  g.    ^ini^B.'^l    for 
i  ..  • 

•inii^B.''''')*  one?  he  dried  it  up. 

Imperf.  Hiphil,  like  Imperf.  Kal,  takes  Segol  when  the  tone  is  447 
drawn  back. 

The  verb  '^pT^,  to  go,  is  connected  with  verbs  Pe  Yod  of  the  448 

first  class,  for  it  forms  (as  if  from  "Tj7"»)  Imperf.  'rp'f  with  Vav, 
^p-'],  m pause  "TTTIj  Injin.  constr.  J137,  Imperat.  ^,  lengthened 
Ptihy  and  also  TT*?,  and  so  Hiphil,  Tf'pin-  Rarely  (and  almost 
exclusively  in  the  later  books  and  in  poetry)  we  find  also  the  regular 
inflexions  from  '!j7n>  as  Imperf.  T[bn\  Infin.  TJ^H,  Imperat.  pi. 
•IDSiI;  on  the  contrary,  Perf.  Kal  is  always  ^7(1,  Partcp.  "^btl, 
Injin.  absol.  'Thr\ ;  Piel  "TT^n ;  Hithpael  rhr^Jin ',  so  that  a  > 
nowhere  distinctly  appears  as  first  radical  *. 

*  An  obsolete  stem,  'TJ7'',  may  however  be  assumed,  although 
in  a  word  so  much  used  as  "TT^il,  the  feeble  letter  H  n^ay  itself 

-  T 

be  treated  like  ^  and  so  the  inflexion  resemble  Pe  Yod.     Comp. 


166 


Verbs  Pe  Yod. 


[en.  11. 


Vocabulary, 


449  To  know,  ^T,  yadai>. 

To  hear:  to  beget,  "^T,  yalad. 

To  add,  t]D'',  yasaph. 

To  come  down,  descendy  "n^, 

—  T 

yarad. 
To  profit,  b^\  ya^^al. 

~T 

To  dwell,  2lti^^  yashabh. 

-  T 

To  save,  ^\l}'^,  yashai^. 

-  T 

To    set    up,    erect,     establish, 
[.'2,'^i]>  natsabh,  in  Hiph. 

—  T 

Treasure,    "^^ilNj     otsar     (pi. 

T 

To  conceal,  HD^y  casah. 

T  T 

To  withhold,  '7\)Dn>  khasach. 


Want,  poverty,  "liDHD*  makh- 

sor. 

Only,  1|^^,  ach. 

Proud,  Hhi^,  geeh  {pi.  D^K5). 

Widow,  ^JD7^^.  almanah. 

Instruction,      Tip?,       le'kakh 

{prop,  taking  speech ;  lakakh, 
to  take). 

Adversity,    n"l!ij    tsarah  (a»), 

TT 

decl.  10;  tsarar,  to  bind. 
Corner,    nJ]5.     pinnah   (dw), 

T   • 

decl.  10. 

Roof,  :i:i,  gag  (decl.  8,  a). 

Fellowship,  "l^irT.  khe'bher. 

Generation,  age,  "11*^  or  1"Jy, 
dor  or  dor  (decl.  1). 


Exercise  42. 

[Note. — The  student  must  not  suppose  that  every  sentence 
will  necessarily  contain  an  example  of  the  conjugation  (or  form) 
that  is  the  subject  of  the  exercise.] 

450       :tJ^^^^:a  ^iD^  wb^'i  *tpv^)  yu}^  m2D  "^fbin  i 
:  J11DD  b^^iD  nbi)i)  :;t^  nniiij^  ^b'^^S'^'i^b  2 


VlT   • 


'TT : 


J : 


also  the  feeble  Pe  Aleph :  e.  g.  '^b^D  from  ^tj^,  and  '^^bD  ^I'oni 
^bn,  Imperf.  HiphU,  ^"m^^  from  ln^^,  and  HD^^^J^  from, 

'-   T  T     •  -    X  T      • 

*  Nei>*'kash  (5,2),  from  i^akash,  to  walk  perversely,  Sfc.,  to 
be  perverse;  usually  construed,  who  is  perverse  in  his  ways:  al. 
(taking  the  dual  strictly)  he  who  walks  unsteadily  in  two  ways. 

f  In  one  (of  them) :  i.  e.  of  the  two  ways. 


§4.]  Verbs  PeYocl  ]67 

:  rTDir  yiv  5i''bi''  ^b^  'v^vp^  j*\-t  mn*'  n^nn  3  (450) 
"1-T3D  t:^''  5     :  ur)V  \^br>  hddt  iD;;3  ar-rv  Di'':a  ^^^*  4 

^n^D  '?^3ii^"'  DDrr  n"?  7  •.  ^:D^^*  '^-n-i  nkn  Tr\rv 

iV           J"   :   ~         TTV  J  ••                                         |TT  :  -  J   ;  ••-;  AT    : 

>~:      ~A"T              a"               ••».        T  :                                      T|V  '  J-  T  T  ;          -  ; 

•T  :  •                •.-;••••  AT        -•  -           v;VT  1"T-            tt: 

T       -          •   :    -         :        A" — :  a-  t        •-;-  v  jt          J" 

"iTto  vhi^i^  ^v^n^'  ^'^D-r^^'^^r  d^d**  n   :?Tjn'?n;n 

t         :       T      :       'a*  'vav     •• :     -        j*t  i"'''  •   : 

:1lD:?n-'?^^  '^bi^  im^  12        o'ni 

I  -:i-      -     «•- •  tr  :  IT 

6)  1 .  A  fire  is  kindled  in  (3,)  my  anger,  and  shall  burn  unto 

hell.  2.  God  caused  the  sea  to  go  down,  and  the  dry  land  ap- 
peared §.     3.  Cursed  {°  be)  the  day  on  (2)  which  I  was  born. 

4.  My  days  have  declined  |1  as  a  shadow,  and  as  grass  am  I 
dried  up.  5.  Abraham  was  eighty-six  years  old  IT  when  Hagar 
bare  Ishmael  to  him.  6,  He  says  to  the  temple,  Thou  shalt  be 
founded.  7-  The  Lord  fainteth  not,  neither  is  weary.  8.  The 
youths  shall  faint,  and  be  weary. 

9.  Write  down  the  short  Paradigms  of  yalad,  to  bear  (in- 
cluding Piel  and  Pual). 

■  T  ;  ■ 

f  '  A  house  of  fellowship'  =  a  house  in  common. 

X  Imperat.  with  n  paragogic, 

§  ^^^"lm.  Imperf  Niph.  of  n?^"i. 

y    T  ••  :  T    T 

II  ''•ItOi.  Parlcp.  Pass,  of  na/ah. 

T 

^  Say :  *  at  Q)  the  bearing  (Infin.  constr.)  of  Hagar :'  the 
two  words  to  be  joined  by  Makkeph. 


168 


Ve7'bs  Pe  Yod. 


[CH.   11. 


Chap.  XI.     §  5.     Feeble  Verbs  Pe  Yod  (continued). 
A.    Second  Class,  or  Verbs  properly  Pe  Yod. 

See  ^tO\  ya^abh,  to  be  good.     Paradigm:    Appendix  E,  p.  23. 
Paradigms  of  Verbs  properly  Pe  Yod. 


1  Per/. 

2  Itif.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imjterf. 

5  Paiicp 

451    1  Kal 

ya/abh 

y'^obh 

y7abh 

yi^abh 

yo/ebh 

5  Hiph. 

hedbh 

he/ibh 

he/ebh 

ye^ibh 

me^ibh 

Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  ya^ubh. 

452  The  most  essential  points  of  difference  between 
verbs  properly  Pe  Yod  and  verbs  properly  Pe  Vav 
are  the  following : 

453  Kal.'\  In  the  Imperf.,  Imperat.,  and  Infin.  the 
radical  *^  is  retained  [Infin.  HZO)),  being  in  the  Imperf, 
Middle  A  quiescent  as  i:  e.  g.  yitcibh  (2'^'^'i),  the 
Pathakh  of  which  becomes  Segol,  when  the  tone  moves 

back,  as  VPA'^^j  ^^^  ^^  awoke. 

454  Hiphil.']  Here  the  ''  is  retained,  forming  with 
Tsere  a  diphthongal  e,  ^^Zp''!!    (for   H^^^Il),   Imperf. 

n'^D'') ;  seldom  with  the  diphthong  ai,  ay,  as  in  ^"1^^)1» 

they  make  straight. 

455  Of  the  Imperf.  Hiph.  there  is  an  anomalous  form  with  pre- 
formatives  put  before   the  3rd  pers.  7v\  as  7v''\  '^e  wails; 

7v^)^.    1  wail;   ^'h'^Pi,  ye  wail:    once  even  in  Imperf.  Kal, 

j;T\  from  3;"T>.     So  ^^D'''' ;  this  anomaly  is  explained  by  sup- 
— ...  —1-  .  «•• 

posing,  that  the  ■»  of  the  simple  form  was  superficially  taken  to 
belong  to  the  stem. 

B.    Third  Class,  or  Contracted  Verbs  Pe  Yod. 

456  a)  The   Yod  of  these  verbs   does  not  quiesce  in 

long  z  or  e,  but  is  assimilated  like  n.     Some 
verbs  are  exclusively  of  this  class. 


§  5.]  Verbs  Pe  Yod.  169 

h)  Others  have  two  forms ;  in  one  the  Yod  is  as-  (456) 
similated,  in  the  other  it  quiesces,  as  p2i%  to 

pour,  Imperf.  piJ)  and  \>*;j^^ ;  ")^'^  to  form,  Imperf. 

")2^;i  and  'y^\ ;  ")^;,  to  be  straight,  Imperf.  ')t^\ 

and  y^\ 

Verbs  of  this  class  (which  seldom  occur)  are  inflected  like  45/ 
verbs  Pe  Nun,  for  which  they  may  easily  be  mistaken  by  the       \ 
learner.     When,  therefore,  a  form  has  not  a  root  Pe  Nun  in  the 
Lexicon,  he  should  look  for  one  of  this  class. 


To  howl,  bh\  yalal.  458 

—  T 

To  sleep,  1^^,  yashan. 


Vocabulary, 

To  be  good,  ^J0\  ya/abh  *. 

-  T 

To  awake,  Vp^,  yakats. 
To  suck,  T)y^,  yanak  f. 

a)  Verbs  exclusively  of  the  contracted  form  : 

To  spread  beneath,  p^'',  yatsa^  {Hiph.  hits-tsiai? ;   Hoph,  hiits- 

tsaJ)). 

To  bum  up,  D*^'^,  yatsath  {Imperf.  yitstsath ;  Hiph.  hits- 

tsith). 

b)  Verbs  with  two  forms  : 

To  pour,  p^>,  yatsak    (Imperf.   yitstsok ;     and   with 

"^        Vav.  conv.  vayye'tsek). 

To  form,  ")i{"»,  ydtsar  (Imperf.  vayyi'tser  [c.  Fay  conu.] 

"■^       and  yitstsor). 

To  be  straight,         '1^'',  yashar  {Imperf.  yishar  and  yishshar). 


To  bubble-out,  J^H  nabhai^  \. 

—    T 

Joyful,  TV2iV,  sameakh  (from 

-    ••   T 

samakh,  to  shine  bright  j  be 
glad). 

A  cure,  nHi).  gehah. 


Afflicted,    i<iDJ,    nache"  {fern. 

Horned,  l^pOt  makrin  §. 

Sea-monster,  ]^r),  tannin  {pi. 
only). 


*  In  Hiph.  to  seem  good;  to  please;  also,  to  make  good;  do  good. 
f  In  Hiph.  to  give  suck;  suckle. 
X  In  Hiph.  trans,  to  pour  forth. 
§  Prop.  Hiph.  partcp.  for  makrin  j  kSrSn,  a  horn. 

Q 


170  Verbs  PeYod.  [ch.  ii. 

(458)  The  breast,  '^^l),  shad.  I   Ostrich,  7)?\  ya)?en. 

-  ..X 

A  whelp,  1^;|,  gur  (decl.  1). 
Cruel,  ITDhJ,  achzar. 


T ; 


To  plant,  ^l^y  na/ai^. 


^^  Since  these  verbs  differ  from  the  usual  mode  of  in- 
flection only  in  the  Imperfect  Kal  and  in  Hiphil,  these  parts 
only  are  given  in  the  examples. 


Exercise  43. 

459  a)   -rb^^^  *;r^n''  uh'^vi  ^s')  iv^  n>ro''ri  D"'aDn  wb  i 

v|v       -  ;•-       •    •  :      r         "AT       J'   "         •  T-:v  '  a  : 

:iio^^T  3    :  Dirti^:i'»r^  ^^iDi  nm  nn5  n'^io^^  nD\/:^  2b  2 

>-  —  v|T      V- :        T  •• :    -     ;:      at**      4*  ••   -"tv    j  •• 

nVn^"?  nro^rii  4     :vii^'?3  ^^^^^n')  ria^-is)  ^tv^-  innn 

t:  - :        J-  -        -       'av  ••  I        '   «■•••  ~           :  JT      '  •  -      - 

..    .  _  _          ^  T           T  -      T :  J-       ~  I T  :  •  -       V  ••     :  - 

A    •  :  - :       vv  : —        /  :           t-  -  jv       ••<       t  r  -        'j  -; 

J-;   '•-     )"i       •      AT :  •       a":    'vx.  ^-a~:               i   :~     »\— 

iD^bn  num  n;?"iD  vp^'''^  i^      -^^^^ 


b)  1.  We  will  sleep  and  dream  in  the  night.  2.  Iiif  the 
morning  shalt  thou  awake  and  tell  thy  dream.  3.  Sarah  gave 
suck  to  children  which  she  bare  unto  Abraham.  4.  It  will  be 
good  for  us  that  God  will  come  down  to  the  earth  |.  5.  If  ye 
forsake  the  Lord,  and  serve  a  strange  god  §,  he  will  consume  |) 

*  3,  4,  n.  t  ^. 

X  To  the  earth,  Hii'^hi :  respecting  the  H-*  see  175,  c. 
T  :iT  T 

§  A  strange  pod,  1J^  ^"T7K,  a  god  of  the  stranger. 
T"     ••    v: 

II  He  will  consume,  HTDV 


§5.] 


Verbs  Pe  Yod. 


171 


you  according  as  *  he  hath  done  you  good.  6.  The  menf  shall  (459) 
lament,  and  all  the  inhabitants  X  of  the  land  shall  howl. 
7.  Noah  will  awake  from  wine,  and  know  what  §  Ham  has 
done.  8.  The  potter  ||  formeth  the  vessel.  9.  My  people  shall 
be  taken  1[,  and  their  rulers**  shall  howl.  10.  I  will  howl  for 
Moab,  and  I  will  cry  out  for  all  Moab :  joy  and  gladness  is 
withdrawn  from  the  land  of  Moab.  11.  Ye  will  not  form  man 
out  of  the  earth  as  the  Lord  hath  done  this  ff. 


Chap.  XI.    §  6.    Feeble  Verbs  Ayin  Vav, 
E.  g.  Dip  kum,  to  rise  up.   Paradigm  :  see  Appendix  E,  p.  24. 


Short  Paradigms. 

1  Per/. 

Ilnfin.  constr. 

BImperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp.    460 

1  Kal 

kam 

k^m 

kum 

yakum 

kam 

2  Niphal 

nakom 

hikkom 

hikkom 

yikkom 

nakora 

3  Pilel 

komem 

komem 

komem 

y'komem 

m'komem 

4  Pulal 

komam 

komam 

(none) 

y'komam 

m'komam 

5  Hiphil 

hekim 

hakim 

hakem 

yakim 

mekim 

6  Hophal 

hukam 

hukam 

(none) 

yiikam 

mukara 

Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  kum. 

Imperf.  Apoc.  (Kal)  yakom ;  (Hiph.)  yakem. 

Imperf.  c.  Vav  conv.  {Kal)  vayya'kom;  Hiph.  vayyakem. 

Infin.  ahsol.  {Kal)  kom  ;  -{Hiph.)  hakem  or  hakem.     In  Niph, 
as  Infin.  constr. 


*  According  as,  "lt£^J^  ''1^^^»  cfier  that  which. 
t  D*Ti^»  used  collectively  for  the  plural. 

TT 

I  Partcp.  Kal  of  ^ti^>,  to  dwell,  inhabit. 

~  T 

§  "Itr^J^TIJ^.  II  Partcp.  Kal  of  ■)2i^  IT  Pual. 

V  ~:      V  — T 

**  Partcp.  Kal  of  "p^D,  to  rule.  ff  As— this,  "It^^NS 

q2 


172 


Verbs  Ayin  Vav, 


[CH.  11. 


Normal  Forms. 

kam 

kamah 

kam'ta 

kum 

ku'mi 

kom'nah 

yakAm 

taku'mi 

t'kumenah 

nakom 

nako'mah 

n'kiimo'tha 

hikkom 

hikko'mi 

yikkom 

tikko'mi 

tikkom'nah 

hekim 

hekimah 

h*kira6'tha 

hakem 

haki'mi 

yakim 

taki'mi 

takem'nah 

hukam 

huk'mah 

hukam'tah 

461  fPerf, 

1  Kal     \  Imperat. 

L  Imperf. 
r  Per/. 

2  Niph.  <  Imperat. 

,  Imperf. 
r  Per/. 

3  Htph.  <  Imperat. 

I  Imperf. 

4  Hoph.      Per/. 

462  In  these  verbs  the  Vav  always  gives  up  its  con- 
sonantal power,  and  is  absorbed  by  the  principal 
vowel  of  the  form,  even  when  it  would^  if  regularly 
formed,  stand  between  two  full  vowels.  Thus,  in  Kal 
Past  Par  top.  {kdvumzz)  Mm;  Infin.  absol.  (kdvdmzz) 
kom.  Hence  the  root  always  appears  as  a  mono- 
syllable. 

463  The  principal  vowel  of  the  form  is  the  second  vowel. 
This  second  vowel  receives,  by  its  union  with  Vav, 
greater  extension  and  firmness  than  it  naturally  pos- 
sesses. Thus,  in  Infin,  and  Imper.  k'^vom  becomes 
kum  (D^p) ;  Perf.  kdvdm  becomes  kdm  (the  Vav  dis- 
appearing). This  firmer  vowel  cannot  be  ejected;  it 
may,  however,  be  shortened:  as  kdm  from  kamtdh. 
The  Imperf.  Uiphil  ysikim.  {from  yakvim)  is  shortened 
in  the  Jussive  to  kem. 

a)  The  verb  intrans.  middle  E  takes  in  Per/.  Kal  the  form  of 
/ID  (from  JTID)^  h^  *«  dead. 

b)  The  verb  middle  0  takes  the  form  of  ^^^  (from  "^iK), 

T 

luwit;  ^*|3,  (from  ^i^l),  he  was  ashamed. 

T 

464  The  preformatives  in  the  Imperf.  Kal,  Perf  Niph., 
and  throughout  Hiph.  and  Hoph.,  which  before  the 
monosyllabic  stem  form  a  simple  syllable,  take,  in- 
stead of  the  short  vowel  of  the  regular  form,  the 


§  6.]  Verbs  Ayin  Vav.  173 

corresponding  long  one  (59 — 61) :    e.  g.  ycikum  for  (464) 
yakom ;  hekim  for  hikvim ;  hukam  for  hukvam. 

This  vowel  is  changeable,  and  becomes  ^A'ua  when  the  tone  465 

is  thrown  forward  *  :  e.  g.  with  the  full  plural  form  (with  n 

> 
epenthetic)  of  the  Imperf.  I^J^^ty^,  they  will  die. 

The  u  in  Hophal  is  the  only  exception.     But  this  conjugation  466 
is  formed  (in  appearance)    by  transposing  the   letters  of  the 
original  stem.    Thus  hukvam  becomes  by  transposition  hiivkdm, 
hence  hukam. 

a)  Some  of  the  forms  in  these  verbs  arise  from  primitive  467 
forms  which   afterwards   became  obsolete  in  the  regular 
verb :  e.  g.  Imperf.  Kal,  ydkum  for  yakom;  Partcp.  kdm 
for  kdvdm  (aft.  an  original  form  kdidl). 

h)  Those  which  conform  to  the  regular  Hebrew  verb  are,  in 
general,  the  least  common  :  as  yebhosh  (aft.  the  regular 
Imperf.  yibvosh). 

c)  The  0  in  Niphal  comes  from  va  (=  na) :  ndkdm  from 
ndkvam;  Imperf.  yikkdm  from  yikkdvam. 

In  the  Pei'f.  Niph.  and  Hiph.  the  harshness  of  pro-  468 
nunciation   in   such  forms   as   ndkomtd,  hekamtd,  is 
avoided  by  the  insertion  of  6  before  the  afFormatives 
of  the  first  and  second  person.     For  the  same  pur- 
pose (y  e  is  inserted  in  the  Imperf.  Kal  before  the 

termination  ndh.  These  inserted  syllables  take  the 
tone  and  shorten  the  preceding  vowels,  as  ndkom^ 
n^kumothd ;  hekim,  N'kimothdh ;  also  h^kemothd, 
fkumendh. 

(Yet  in  some  cases  the  harder  forms,  without  the  inserted 
syllable,  are  also  in  use.) 

The  tone,  as  in  verbs  Double  Ayin,  is  not  thrown 
forward  upon  the  afFormatives  dh,  u,  i,  except  with 

the  full  plural  form  (with  epenthetic  n)  \^iy\\>\     In 

those  persons  which  take  afFormatives  without  epen- 
thesis    (see   477),    the    accentuation    is    regular,   as 

r\t2\) ;  so  in  Hophal,  npj^in.     For  the  tone  on  i  and 

>1 'see  468. 

> 
*  Hence  before  Suflf.  J)iir)''Q\  he  will  kill  him, 

q3  "' 


174  Verbs  Ayin  Vav,  [ch.  ii. 

470  The  conjugations  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael^  are 
very  seldom  found  in  verbs  properly  Ayin  Vav.  The 
only  instance  in  which  the  Vav  remains  as  consonant 
is  li^V,  to  surround,  the  Piel  of  "T^J?  (but  see  476).    In 

some  others  "•  has  taken  the  place  of  %  as  in   Dp 

from  D^p,  TV]  from  ^IH ;  forms  which  belong  ta  the 

later  Hebrew  *.     On  the  contrary,  the  unfrequent 
conjugation   Pilel,   with   its    Passive   and   Reflexive 
{kitlel  or  kiilal;    Pass,  kutlal,  Reflex,  hithkdtlel),  is 
the  common  form  employed  in  the  signification  of 
Piel,  and  as  a  substitute  for  it:  e.  g.  D^'p?  to  raise 

up,  from  Dip ;  DQi"),  to  elevate,  Pass.  DD)"),  from  U)1 ; 

l^liyjin,  to  rouse  oneself,  from  "l^y.     Less  frequent  is 

the   conjugation  Pilpel:    e.  g.    /B/I),  to   sustain,   to 

nourish,  from  /ID. 

471  Of  these  unusual  conjugations  the  Paradigm  exhibits  only 
Pilel  and  Pulal,  from  which  the  reflexive  {Hithpael)  is  readily 
formed. 

Remarks. 

472  I.  Kal."]  Of  verbs  middle  E  and  0,  which  in  the  regular  verb 
also  have  their  Perf.  and  Partcp.  the  same  f,  the  following  are 
examples  :  1)  muth  {to  die);  Perf.  meth  {for  maveth),  me'thah, 
mat'ti,  math'nu  ;  Partcp.  meth.  2)  bush  {to  blush) ;  Perf.  bosh 
{for  bavosh),  bo'shah,  bosh'ti,  bosh'nu;  Partcp.  {pi.)  boshim. 

473  a)  In  the  Infin.  and  Imperat.  of  some  verbs,  1  always  quiesces 

in  Kholem  (as  i^^^,  21^,  "IIJ^)- 

b)  In  most  verbs,  however,  it  quiesces  only  in  Shurek ;  but 
even  in  these  the  Infin.  absoL  has  *)  in  the  final  syllable 
(after  the  form  /'iDp)*  as  -"^Q^p^  U^X>,  surgendo  surgent. 

c)  Those  verbs  which  have  i  in  the  Infin.  retain  it  in  the 
Imperf.,  as  i^i^^. 

T 

d)  In  one  verb  alone  the  preformatives  of  the  Imperf.  have 
Tsere,  viz.  ]£)):!,  Imperf  ^^y^  (for  ^^y). 

*  Having  been  borrowed  from  the  Aramaean. 

f  Of  the  Perf.  and  Partcp.  the  usual  form  Dp  is  very  seldom 

't 

written  with  2^  (after  the  Arab,  mode) :  e.  g.  Di^p- 


§  6.]  Ve7'bs  Ayin  Vav.  175 

In  the  Imperat.  with  afformatives  ('»Q^p,  !)Q1p)  the  tone  is  on  474 

the  penultima,  with  a  few  excei)tions.     The  lengthened  form 
[with  H— ]  ^^^>  on  the  contrary,  the  tone  usually  on  the  last 

T 

syllable  (HD^pj  H^^I^^),  with  a  few  exceptions  where  the  word 
is  Milel 

a)  The  shortened  Imperf.  as  Jussive  has  the  form  Dp''  (very  475 
seldom  Dip\  Dj^^). 

b)  So  in  poetic  language  as  Indicative,  as  Q"l'»,  DHJ^,  fi^,  it, 
shall  be  high.  "^  "^ 

c)  After  Vav  conversive,  and  before  words  of  one  syllable,  the 
tone  is  also  drawn  back  upon  the  penultima,  and  the  last 

syllable  takes  Kamets-Khatuph,  as  Dp-1,  "Tf^  Dp''. 

'tt-       't         'tt 

d)  In  Pause,  however,  the  tone  remains  on  the  last  syllable, 
as  Jib- V 

e)  With  a  guttural    or   Resh,   the   final   syllable   may   take 
Pathakh :  e.  g.  ID'I.  and  he  turned  aside  (from  ^JlD)- 

-  T- 

The  full  plural  ending  un  (V\)  has  the  tone  (cf.  472  of  this  §). 

II.  Niphal.l    Anomalous  form<?  are  :  Per/.  DDIiiSJ*  ye  have  475 
been  scattered ;  Infin.  constr,  tt^^'^n.  "        • 

TIL  Hiphil.']      Examples  of  Perf.  without  the  epenthetic  *) :  477 
i^S)Jn,   thou  lift  est ;    TMl^tl;  thou  killest  j    and   even  Di^DH 
(Num.  xvii.  6,  &c.). 

In  the  Imperat.  the  shartened  and  lengthened  forms  DpH>  478 
nDVrr,  hoth  occur. 

T     '•  T 

a)  The  shortened  Imperf.  has  the  form  Dp**,  as  ID"''),  that  he  479 
may  take  away.  '"^  "'^' 

b)  After  Vav  conversive  the  tone  is  drawn  back  upon  the  pen- 

•>  > 

ultima,   as  D"1'1;  VH)")'  and  he  scattered. 

VT-  '    VT- 

c)  The  final  syllable,  when  it  has  a  guttural  or  Rcsh,  takes 
Pathakh,  as  in  Kal :  e.  g.  "JD  ■),  anc?  Ae  removed. 


176  Verbs  Ay  in  Vav.  [ch.  ii. 

(Additional  Remarks.) 

480  IV.  On  account  of  the  intimate  relation  between  verbs  Ayin 
Vav  and  verbs  Double  Ayin,  it  is  necessary,  in  analyzing  forms, 
to  note  particularly  the  points  in   which  these  classes  differ. 

Several  forms  are  exactly  the  same  in  both :  e.  g.  Imperf.  Kal 

If  {f 

with  Va'G  covversive;  Pilel  of  "IJ?  and  Poel  of  j;j?.  Hence  it  is, 
that  they  often  borrow  forms  from  one  another,  as  in  Kal,  |^, 

he  despised  (Per/,  of  ]^^,  as  if  from  TTH);   HZOj  ^^  besmeared 

(for  nzo). 

T 

481  In  common  with  verbs  yy,  those  of  this  class  have  in  Niphal 
and  Hiphil  the  Chaldee  and  Rabbinic  punctuation,  which  sub- 
stitutes for  the  long  vowel  under  the  preformatives,  a  short  one 
followed  by  Dagesh  forte.  This  form  and  the  common  one  are 
often  both  in  use :    e.  g.  JT'DH.  to  incite,  Imperf.  /T*D''  (also 

iT'Dn*  JT'D'') ;  "IPI*")?  flwc?  he  shows  the  way  (also  ^jy^) ;  some- 

•      ••  •    T  ••  --  i  ••  T 

times  with  a  different  meaning,  as  rT'^ilj  to  cause  to  rest,  to  give 
>  >  -  . .. 

rest,  rfiiri}  Imperf.  H'^il''.  to  set  down,  to  lay  down;  ]v'*.  to 
spend  the  night,  to  abide;  y^"^,  ypt2,  to  be  headstrong,  rebellious. 
Other  examples:  Niph.  7*)^^  (from  7?)Q,  not  7D3)>  to  be  cir- 
cumcised; with  a  guttural,  1^^^;  Hiph.  T-TIl,  to  despise,  •IPj'"**- 

482  Verbs  whose  middle  stem-letter  is  Vav  moveable  (i.  e.  sounded 
as  a  consonant)  are,  in  respect  to  this  letter,  perfectly  regular : 
e*  g«  IDTl,  to  be  white,  Imperf.  IIH^;   Vlil.  to  expire,  Imperf. 

y)T  i    particularly  all  verbs  that  are  also  H/,   as  Hlii  >  Piel, 

n'lik,  to  command;  TViO,  to  wait,  &c. 

T-  t'* 

*  Here  belong  some  forms  of  verbs  Pe  guttural  with  Dagesh 
forte  implicilum,  which  have  generally  been  derived  from  a  false 
root,  or  been  uncritically  altered :  viz.  ^Hi^*)  for  ti^njm,  and 

she  hastens  (from  ]1}^W  i  Z0V^1»  ^W*)  (from  ZOI^,  l^'^^,  to  rush 

upon.   G.). 


§6.] 


Verbs  Ayin  Vav. 


177 


Vocabulary, 


To  be  ashamed,  ]l}^^,  bush  *. 

To  despise,  t^2>  hiiz. 

To  understand,  y\21,  bAn  {also 
bin  t). 

To  arise.  Dip,  kum. 

To  fix,  establish,  ^?j3,  cun. 

To  scorn,  make  a  mock  of,  y-v, 
luts. 

To  get,  obtain,   p?)3,   puk,  in 
Hiph. 

To  place;  to  set  on,  DVlt^,  sum. 

To  return,  intr.,  31t^>  shubh  |. 

Wall,  fence,  mi!),  g'derah(w); 
T  •• : 

gadar,  to  fence  \. 
To  break  down,  Y")3,  parats. 


Fortress,  "l^i^Q  («),  mibhtsar  483 

(batsar,  <o  cm<  q^). 

Understanding,    ni^^i^  ("w)* 

t'bhunah  (bhun  or  bhin,  <o 
discern) . 

To  found,  "TO'',  yasad. 

~  T 

Rottenness,  ^p"1,  rakabh. 

't  t 

Snare,    t^piQ,    mokesh    (ya- 

kash,  to  set  a  snare). 
Guilt,  Dt^^^>  ashana. 

T    T 

Deceit,   nD"lQ.    mirmah  (ra- 

Therefore,  yifb)^,  i>al-cen. 
Congregation,     TV^))>     i^edah 
()?adah,  he  appointed). 


Exercise  4i4i, 

a)  mn>  2     '.TMTi'o  v-i^iiQ  rs'dv  rrrnrb:^  r\T\^  1 484 

T     :  I"""  '    ;         ••"•■T  ;    •       T  ;  V-        AT     I**;       t       t  :  j-T 

u't^rs^  !)jun  3    :TOinni  U'nt  pis  -p^  "t^''  ^ddh^ 

J*    T  :        a*  T  |T      :  •        --T    ';••      '  VAT      -AT     T :  T :\. 

rm'D  m'^  p^3>  liD  4        -.  ^b  ^:^nn  d^^d Ji  hdi); 

AT  :i"    '      TV  '    a-T  .  \"        >■  T         •    •  :         AT  :t 

V  i  :       -  Av :       jT t    '  J  •      I  -  I*  : ~        •»  •  :         ^' : 

3p"iDi  n'?:;:!  mroy  "p^n  nt^  e       :DiD''-'?:i  D^ni 

'vtt:  at;   -  vjv -;       —\.  V  J."  I  •        ~  i.     •  - 

t;  •  ;••  •  A         vjT"        T  t;v     jt  |t    ■    ;  jt        ;  -  : 

*  In  Hiph.  to  make  ashamed. 

t  Same  in  Hiph,,  but  also  to  make  to  understand ;  to  teach. 

X  In  Hiph.  to  return,  restore;  in  Piel,  to  lead  back,  restore. 

§  In  pi.  gidroth  or  g'deroth. 

II  He  who  fears  (partcp). 


178  Vcj^bs  Ayin  Vav.  [ch.  ii. 

(484)  ''tryi:^^  "lib*?  D^'^n  nipD  ddh  rviMrs  s       :  D^t^^  j^^n 

'"':>•  T       A"-         'j:        ttv       a-  |T\:         ji 

:nDiD  D^b^D3  /I'pii^i  131"^  vnn  Dn:i?  n^Dn  9     :jt)d 

J  ;"T-  I      T  J"T    :        \"  ATT  'j»T  •    •VJV 

j49  ^3  D^n"?  i'r)i<  D^^Dj^n  U'^'mb^  d'^i'?  dh'pi  iin!? 

T  -  :  •        <• ;  I  T  * :  •  -  :      at-  :      a-.-  t  :       v- : 

V       ;t"    I     !•       V  V  •:  'IT       "      <"\\"        •:  •-  :   I 

'  iv      :  :  -  •:     '  av— .|-      jt  :      •••       j  mt:  •  : 

TTiwb  p"n-)m  n^n  no^s  TS^i  n1tr^*  nit:^  iDi^h  13 

JTT   :  \ ;  T-  J"T  >     V    ••  <    T  J  V  — 

'V'l'm^  N-im  brvixn  nr\B  wrj\:^  nTi:^i  ^nt:^^^ 
^3:11  ni^iDH  p)D^^rn^^^  ddti  -inp  n:)i:^D  noDi  14 

(•  t      V  I  'v :       a't     vv  •  -: 

h)  \.  \  will  restore  this  silver.  2.  We  will  place  thy  strong- 
holds for  destruction.  3.  Who  founded  the  earth  ?  who  esta- 
blished the  heavens?  4.  Shall  men  be  established  by  wickedness? 
5.  They  will  assuredly  return.  6.  Return,  my  son  :  return,  my 
daughter.  7.  Do  not  set  on  bread  for  my  brethren  by  them- 
selves. 8.  Restore  the  money  that-was-returned  in  your  sacks. 
9.  Dust  thou  art,  and  unto  dust  shalt  thou  return.  10.  And 
God  shall  be  with  you,  and  bring  you  back  {Hiph.)  to  the  land 
of  your  fathers. 


Chap.  XI.    §7.     Verbs  Ayin  Yod. 

E.  g.  1''^,  to  discern.     Paradigm  :  see  Appendix  E,  p.  25. 

Short  Paradigms. 


485 


iKal 

2  Niphal 


1  Per/. 

2  Inf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Tmperf. 

fban 

bin 

bin 

yabhin 

(bin 

nabhon 

hibbon 

hibbon 

yibbon 

5  Partcp. 
ban 

nabhon 


Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  bun. 


§  7.]  Verbs  Ay  in  Yod.  179 

Imperf.  apoc.  yabhen  ;   Imperf.  c.  Vav  conv.  vayyabhen,  (485) 

Injin.  absol.  Kal,  bon ;  Niph.  hibbon. 

Normal  Forms. 
f  Per/.         ban  ba'nah  ba'nta  486 

Kal  I  Imperat.    bin  bi'ni 

\jmperf.     yabhin       tabhi'ni         t'bhinenah. 

a)  These  verbs  have  the  same  structure  as  verbs  487 
Ayin  Vav,  and  their  ^  is  treated  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  1  of  that  class :  e.  g.  Perf,  Kal 
shath  (for  shavath),  he  has  set;  Injin.  shith; 
Infin.  absol.  shoth  [for  shay 6th) ;  Imperat, 
shith ;  Imperf.  ya-shith  ;  Jussive,  yasheth,  with 
Vav  conv,  vayya'sheth. 

b)  But  the  Perf.  Kal  has,  in  several  verbs,  still  a 
second  set  of  forms,  which  resemble  a  HipMl 

with  the  characteristic  H  elided :    e.  g.  ^niJ^^ 

(similar  to  ''JliTIin) ;  also  ilJ^j  -^^^'^^j  thou  con- 
tendest ;  also  i^Il"]. 

c)  Often  also  complete  Hiphil  forms  occur:  e.  g. 
Perf   Vnn,    DJl'irarT;    Infin.   Tan    (also   r?) 
Imperat,  ]Iin  (also  ^3) ;  Partcp.  ]^I1D  (also  ]2) 
so  likewise  nn?  (also  TS)  ;    D^l^D  (also  XiV) 
Y^!^lp,  glittering;  also  in  Perf,  Y^. 

d)  Moreover,  as  Passive  w^e  find  a  few  times  Hoph, 
Imperf.  Iti^^^,  from  "^p,    to   sing-,    ^p^'^,  from 

IVf,  to  set. 

These  Hiphil  forms  may  easily  be  traced  to  verbs  "j^,  and  488 
possibly,  in  part,  belong  to  that  class.     The  same  may  be  said 
of  Niphal,  \)22 ;  PHel,  pi^l;  and  Hithpael,  ]^'):ir)ri  (as  if  from 

V)^)'     These  verbs  are  in  every  respect  closely  related  to  verbs 

')^.     Hence  it  is  that  we  find  several  verbs  used  promiscuously. 
It  If  , 

as  'S^  and  '»^,  and  with  the  same  meaning  in  both  forms,  as  ]v 


180  Verbs  Ay  in  Yod.  [ch.  ii. 

(488)  {denom.  from  ^v),  to  spend  the  night :  Infin.  also  ]^7;  Q>"ti^,  to 

place  J  Infin.  also  QV^  ;  Imperf.  U"^'^*^ ;   once  U^t^*^.     In  other 

verbs  one  of  the  two  is  the  predominant  form,  as  ^''ji,  to  exult 

L  *        ''' 

(/•IJ)  only  once,  Prov.  xxiii.  24).     But  few  are  exclusively  '*^,  as 

i*'"!,  /o  contend;  rS^^,  to  set;  '^^'{^,  /o  rejoice. 

ff 

489  The  old  Grammarians  referred  all  these  forms  to  verbs  *)^, 

which  it  may,  indeed,  in  some  cases  be  right  to  do. 

tf 

490  The  Pdm.  App.  E,  p.  25,  is  placed  by  that  of  verbs  *)J?,  to 
exhibit  the  parallelism  of  the  two  classes.  The  omitted  con- 
jugations have  the  same  form  as  in  Pdm.  App.  E,  p.  24. 

491  The  Imperf.  apoc.  is  ]^'»;  with  retracted  tone  it  takes  the 
form  ^7  21")^«      So  with  Vav  convers.  "CiV^X   and  he  placed; 

^  VT  V   T- 

]  D'^1.  «wc?  he  perceived. 

492  As   Partcp.  act.   Kal  we   find   once  ]7,   spending  the  night 

(Neh.  xiii.  21) ;  Fart.  pass.  D'''ti/  or  U^t  according  to  a  various 

reading  (2  Sam.  xiii.  32). 
// 

493  Verbs  t^'^  scarcely  ever  suffer  their  ^  to  quiesce,  and  hence 
are  irregular  only  as  verbs  with  Ayin,  guttural.  Yet  in  the  Perf. 
of  the  very  common  verb  7^^!^,  to  ask,  the  feebleness  of  the  J^ 

reduces  the  a  under  it  to  (-),  and  in  a  closed  syllable  to  (-) 

and  (— ),  when  the  syllable  is  toneless,  and  no  full  vowel  pre- 

cedes  the  ^^  (just  as  in  some  verbs  '♦B) ;  so  with  suff.  ?[7^^t^, 

Jin^r^'pr^^,  ^y\^i^t,  2  pi  nrhi^ti  also  in  mph.  (i  sam.  i.  28). 


Vocabulary  (exclusively  ^y). 
Of  this  kind  are  : 


494  To  understand,  \^3,. 
To  exult,  '^^i). 
To  pass  the  night,  ]>7. 
To  contend,  plead,  ^'»")- 


To  smell,  nH. 

To  put,  set,  place,  D''ti^« 

To  set,  put,  JV]^- 


§?•] 


Ve7^bs  Ay  in  Yod, 


181 


Exercise  45. 

r  :  -       i-  T         •    •  :         at  t         j«-:  i  -v 

•.  ^T'?^^^D  -T'L^pn  ^-^:)^^  nan'?  y^p^  r^J^  n'^D^in  2 

|TT-:i-  -'t-  ;t:1t  at;-        '  ''j —         a*  T  tt;- 

isnn  nti'n^  Dl^^  n*?  4       :  D-in  Dni<"Dir  nnn  '?^^  3 

.A       :    -  a"  ~  :  TTV  J"  IT   •  JTT  •  J'  T  ~ 

5)  1 .  Plead  with  *  your  mother,  plead  :  for  she  (is)  not  my 
wife,  nor  (am)  I  her  husband.  2.  Joseph  washed  his  face  and 
went  out  t  and  said,  set  on  bread.  3.  I  will  make  %  your  cities 
a  wilderness,  and  bring  your  sanctuaries  to  desolation,  and  will 
not  smell  §  your  sweet  odours  ||. 


Chap.  XI.    §  8.    Verbs  Lamed  Aleph. 
E.  g.  J^iJD>  to  find.     Paradigm  :  see  Appendix  E,  p.  26. 

T    T 

Short  Paradigms, 


\Perf. 

2  Inf.  cstr. 

3  Imperat. 

4  Imperf. 

5  Partcp. 

iKal 

matsa 

m'tso 

m'tsa 

yimtsa 

motse"          49S 

2  Niph. 

nimtsa 

himmatse" 

himmatse" 

yimmatse" 

nimtsa 

3  Piel 

mitstse" 

matstse" 

matstse" 

y'matstse" 

m'matstse" 

4  Pual 

miitstsa 

mutstsa 

(none) 

y'mutstsa 

m'mutstsa 

5  Hiph. 

himtsi" 

hamtsi" 

hamtse" 

y'amtsi" 

mamtsi" 

6  Hoph. 

humtsa 

humtsa 

(none) 

yumtsa 

mumtsa 

7  Hithp. 

hith- 
matstse" 

hith- 
matstse" 

hith- 
matstse" 

yith- 
matstse 

mith- 
matstse" 

Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  matsu". 

Jussive  {Hiph.)  yamtse";   Imperf,  c.  suff.  {Piel)  y'matstseni, 
(Hiph.)  yamtsieni. 


\  To  be  rendered  by  ]J1^. 

II  i.  e.,  the  odour,  your  pleasant. 


t  K^'^V  flwc?  went  out. 

§  Hiphil. 


R 


182  Verbs  Lamed  Aleph.  [ch.  ii. 


Normal  Forms. 
(Per/.  matsa  ma'tseah  matsathi 

]lmperat.       m'tsa  m'tse'^nah  * 

Per/.  nimtsa  nimtse'^thah 

Imperat.      himmatse      himmatse'''nah 

(The  conjugation  in  the  other  forms  is  analogous  to  these.) 


497      1  Kal 

2  Niphal 


498  The  ^^  is  here,  as  in  verbs  i^^,  treated  partly  as  a 
soft  guttural  consonant  [scoA'cely  audible  at  the  end  of 
a  word),  partly  as  a  quite  inaudible  (quiescent)  letter. 

499  In  the  forms  that  end  with  the  third  radical,  the 
final  syllable  has  the  same  vowel  as  the  regular  verb 
(e.  g.  Kp,  ^^if?p,  KI^D,  i^'^^pn) ;  but  Pathakh  before 

K  is  lengthened  into  Kamets,  viz.  in  the  Perf., 
Lnperf.,  Imperat.  Kal,  in  the  Perf.  Niphal,  Pual,  and 
Hophal.  The  (  t  )  however  is  mutable,  hence  in  the 
plural,  ^i^^?;. 

5C0  The  Imperf.  and  Imperat.  Kal  have  A  after  the  analogy  of 
verbs  Lamed  guttural. 

501  Also  before  afFormatives  beginning  with  a  conso- 
nant {D,  ^)  ^^  is  not  heard  {quiesces  in  the  Perf.  Kal, 

in  Kamets,  /^^i^D ;  in  the  Perf.  of  all  the  other  con- 

■^       T  T   T  ^ 

jugations,  in  Tsere,  Di^^t22;  in  the  Imperat.  and 
Imperf.  of  all   the   conjugations,   in    Segol,   H^K^Q, 

502  The  use  of  Tsere  and  Segol  in  these  forms  arose,  doubtless, 

from  the  great  resemblance  between  verbs  ^^7  and  H^  (comp. 
next  section),  and  an  approximation  of  the  former  to  the  latter. 

503  Before  aiformatives  beginning  with  a  vowel,  i^  is  a 

consonant,  and  the  form  regular,  as  ^NliJD. 

;  IT 

*  a  in  Italics  is  quiescent. 

f  Before   the    suffixes   chd,   chem,   chen,  the   i«i   retains   its 
character  as  a  guttural,  and  takes  (-:). 


§  8.]  Verbs  Lamed  Aleph.  183 

Remarks. 
Verbs  middle  E,  like  i^hf^  (male),  to  be  full,  retain  Tsere  in  504 

the  other  persons  of  the  Per/.,  as  '*J^^^70.     Instead  of  PTKiiQ 

•     ••  T  t:|t 

is  sometimes  found  the  (Aramaean)  form  JlX*1p  for  J^^i"^p, 
she  names. 

The  Partcp.fem.  is  commonly,  by  contraction,  nj«^2ib»  seld.  505 
J^^^2ib,  and  defectively  written  J^Tt"^  (from  i^)^'^). 

The  i^  sometimes  falls  away,  as  in  >n^Q,  Tl'pD-     Niph.  506 

•     T  T  •    ••    T 

DDQZD:,  ye  are  defied j  Hiph.  "•lOnH. 


Vocabulary. 
To  call,  Kip.  kara. 

T  X 

To  hate,  l^^lV,  sane". 
To  be  full,  K^D,  male". 


To  drink   (to   excess),    i^^D. 

T    T 

5aba. 
Fear,   ^^^'^^  y'reah;    constr. 


Treasure-house,    ")iii>^,    otsar  507 
(pi.  -6th). 

To  violate,  injure,  DDHj  kba- 


Rag,  J^np,  ke'rar    (karajl^,    to 

tear). 
Therefore,  ]3"^V»  i^al-cen. 
To  defile,  J^QtO,  tame". 


ni^y  (<^)>  yare",  to  fear.         !    rj,^  assemble  (in  troops),  ^^2:i. 

~     1  *  T  T 

A  path,     ni^jni     n'thibhah  tsaba. 

(nathabh).        '  .  [   To  sin,  iiDPT,  kha/a. 

Exercise  46. 

0)       :nnn  ^^'?  mn>  jisti  nv^  iK:ii:^"''3  nn;n  1 508 

*  |TT         J         T     :         i~   '.".         "AT  :jt     |-  V 

at':  •        ^T :  T       I -:  -itt:   •       a"-:       t;-       t 

'bik  ^^'ipT  K-)p^^  D^i:^^^^  DD^'^i^  4      :  n'pp  ir^ri  nj^iDJii 
j-iin''ri:  ^im  "^^^^^  npii:  nii^n  5         :  Dl^?  ^^:j3 

r2 


184  Verbs  Lamed  Aleph.  [ch.ii. 

(508)  ^^^^ib  6    :  K^Di^  Dn''n^^i^')  t:^^  '•nni^  b'nyrh  :  zob^d 
-^3  'w'^^^  vdn  ''Xiom    :mn^D  r<:n  p3-i  D'''^n  ^^i^D 

T  A     ;-  i"  *     :      I    >  |T      :i"  T        '    V;t-  a--  jtT 

^b^yiBt  r"''S'nb2  ^^n"':'^^*  z      :mo  ^lanj^  "^'i^i-m 

v:  I  :  -rtT  ••  :  I  :      r   :       -  vit         -:jt      -:  -  : 

|T  ^* :  ~  •  t':        a"t'      ••  :v      a"       i*  it      jt  t 

:''jiK3l:;  nptr  nni<-'73  ^mw  by^  n^p3-^3  1  ir'^ir  s 

•         |"T  'VjV  -V  T  •    :  AT    •  J  ..    Ij.  X  '<••         - 

'av  :'t     a-  ••        V  :  -v     'vT-:!-;  •  <;t  •     •.•: 

T—-\.     '    VT-:       -  :•        V        :i  T  !••  :     -j-r     i:       •••        vt 

I  DDT  ^h^t    '  Y^vr'Mvrh  ^^tdii  n^n  DVji^^n  ni;?'? 

a  •  -       ••<       —  I"  '      '  J":      -T  T     i:         ^   •  i;       

:  |T      jv-;  :  J-  ;-  :         •••  a  ;      a-        ».••:       •••     : 

I"  V  I  -v.- 

6)  1.  I  have  hated  knowledge  •[[.  2.  Who  hates  knowledge. 
3.  Thou  shalt  not  hate  thy  brother.  4.  The  sacks  are  filled 
with  silver.  5.  Thieves,  being  found,  shall  return  seven-fold. 
6.  Understanding  cries-aloud,  and  Wisdom  gives-forth  her 
voice,  7.  To  them  will  we  cry,  8.  Shall  I  not  cry-aloud,  and 
give  forth  my  voice?  Q.  Who  will  fill  my  treasures  ?  10.  They 
who  find  me  will  find  life,  II.  They  shall  assuredly  find  life. 
12.  Thou  shalt  not  hate  those- who-hate  thee. 

*  Be  not  thou  (ne  sis)  :  from  hayah. 

f  *  Those  who  squander  their  own  body,'  i,  e.,  voluptuous 
profligates  (Gesenius,  Maurer).  Others  (as  Rosenmiiller)  trans- 
late it  in  the  same  sense  as  the  English  Bible :  riotous  eaters  of 
Jlesh. 

X  (Of)  every  kind  (Maurer). 

§  Have  come;  J>^i3>  ^^  come, 

II  (Of  the  women)  assembling. 

IT  -)D^D  '^nii^'V  (Prov.  V.  12). 


§9.] 


Verbs  Lamed  He. 


18i 


Chap.  XI.    §  9.     Verbs  Lamed  He, 

E.  g.  n'^ili  galah,  to  reveal.     Paradigm  :  see  Appendix  E, 
^^  [pp.  28,  29. 

Short  Paradigms. 

5  Partcp. 

g61eh 
nigleh 
m'galleh 
m^gulleh 
mag]  eh 
mogleh 
mithgalleh 
Past  Partcp.  of  Kal,  galui. 

Infin.  absol.  (Kal)  galoh ;  (Niph.)  nigloh;  (Piel)  galloh; 
(Pual)  guim  ;  ( Hiph.)  hagleh;  {Hop h. )  hogleh  ;  {Hit hp. )  hith- 
gall5h. 

Imperf.  apoc.  (Kal)  yigel ;  {Niph.)  yiggal ;  (Piel)  y'gal  ; 
{Hip h.)  ye' gel;  {Hithp. )  yiihga]. 


I  Per/. 

2  Inf.  cslr. 

3  Tmperat. 

4  Imperf. 

1  Kal 

galah 

g'loth 

g'le-h       • 

yigleh 

2  Niph. 

niglah 

higgaloth 

higgaleh 

yiggaleh 

3  Piel 

gillah 

galloth 

gall  eh 

y'galleh 

4  Pual 

giillah 

giilloth 

(none) 

y'giilleh 

5  Hiph. 

higlah 

hagloth 

hagleh 

yagleh 

6  Hoph. 

hoglah 

hogloth 

(none) 

yogleh 

7  Hithp. 

hithgallah 

hithgalloth 

hithgalleh 

yithgalleh 

509 


Normal  Forms. 


C      Perf     galah         gaPthah         galithi 
Kal  <  Imperat.     g'leh  g'li  g'lenah 

[imperf.      yigleh       tigli  tiglenah 


galA 


510 


rr 

These  verbs,  like  verbs  Pe  Yod  (^3),   embrace  two  511 

classes,  originally  distinct,  viz.  v  and  T? ;  but  in 
Hebrew  the  original  ^  and  1  have  passed  over  into  a 
feeble  H,  in  all  the  forms  which  end  with  the  third 
radical.      All,    however,   except   a    few    forms,    are 

originally  v ;   so  that  the  two  classes  are  less  promi- 

nently  distinguished  than  verbs  IS  and  ^3. 

Wholly  different  are  those  verbs  whose  third  radical  is  a  512 

R  3 


186  Verbs  Lamed  He.  [ch.  ii. 

(512)  consonantal  "t^]  (with  Mappik:  e.  g.  rTIlil)*  which  are  inflected 
throughout  like  verbs  Lamed  guttural  *. 

513  The  grammatical  structure  of  these  verbs  (see 
Pdm.  App.  E,  p.  28)  is  as  follows : 

For  the  forms  that  end  with  the  third  radical, 

All  the  Perfects  end  in  ah. 
All  the  Imperfects  and  Participles  Active,  in  eh. 
All  Imperatives,  in  eh. 

The  Infin.  absol.  (except  in  Hiph.  and  Hoph.), 
in  oh, 

514  At  the  end  of  the  Partcp.  Pass,  of  Kal  the  original 
^  appears,  "^r?^,  galui,  as  also  in  some  derivatives. 

515  The  Infin.  constr.  has  always  i\ie  feminine  form  in 
D :  hence  in  Kal,  Hw^,  g'loth ;  in  Piel,  rxb^,  gal- 
loth,  &c. 

516  Before  the  afformatives  beginning  with  a  conso- 
nant (i1,  y),  the  original  ^  remains,  but  not  as  a 
consonant :  it  would  properly  form  with  the  a  the 
diphthong  ai ;  but  this  diphthong  in  the  Perf.  is  first 
contracted  into  e  {^-^),  and  then  further  attenuated 

into  I,  but  in  the  Imperf.  and  Imperat.  it  is  changed 
into  the  obtuse  ^__  (e).     Thus  in  Perf.  Piel,  from 

rv^'^   (after  W^iP)    we  get  first  -H^^pll,  and  then,  by 

attenuating  the  e  into  i,  Jlvil ;  in  the  Imperf,  Piel, 

"nyh^r).     in  the  Passives  the  e  is  always  retained; 

in  the  Actives  of  the  derived  conjugations,  and  in  the 
Reflexives,  both  e  and  ^  are  used  alike  (see  527,  531) ; 
on  the  contrary,  in  Kal  (the  most  common  species) 
we  find  only  i.     Accordingly  we  have  in  the 

Perfect  Kal  i,  as  ivb^ ; 

//, 
*  It  is  certain,  however,  that  some  verbs  H?  originated  in 
verbs  with  final  Hj  this  letter  having  lost  its  original  strong  and 
guttural  sound,  and  become  softened  to  a  feeble  ,"f- 


§9.]  Verbs  Lamed  He.  187 

Perfects  of  the   other  active  conjugations   (in-  (516) 
eluding  the  reflexive  Hithp.)  e  and  i  promis- 
cuously, as  /I  v2l  and  JH  v^  j 

Perfects  of  the  Passives  only  e,  as  r\h^ ; 

Imperfects   and   Imperatives   always  ^__   (e),   as 

Before  the  afformatives  beginning  with  a  vowel  517 
[li,  I,  ah),  the  Yocl  with  the  foregoing  vowel  usually 
falls  away    p7D  =z  V/il,  &c.]  ;    but  it  is  retained  in 

ancient  full  forms,  particularly  in  pause,  as  IvJ))  (see 
524,  530).  Before  svffixes  also  it  falls  away,  as  ^/-^ 
(see  539). 

The   Yod  disappears   also  in  3  Perf.  sing,  fern.,  518 
where  J1_  is  appended  as  feminine  ending,  as  Jl7i). 

But  this  ancient  form  is  become  rare  (see  520),  and, 
as  if  this  mark  of  the  gender  were  not  sufficiently 
distinct,  a  second  feminine  ending  n_  is  appended 

so  as  to  form  r\rO^.     So  in  all  conjugations :  e.  g. 

Hiph.  rO^T],  common  form  ilJl/^n,  in  pause  T\royn- 

The    formation    of  the   shortened  Imperf,  which  519 
occurs  in  this  class  of  verbs  in  all  the  conjugations, 
is  strongly  marked,  consisting  in  the  casting  away 
{apocope)  of  the  n_,  by  which  still  other  changes 

are  occasioned  in  the  form  (see  522,  526,  528,  533). 
The  shortened  Imperative  is  also  formed  by  apocope 

of  the  n^  (see  529,  534). 

Remarks. 

I.  Kdl.']     For  the  3rd  Perf.  fern,  the  older  and  simpler  form  520 

Jl/D.  from  Jlvi).  is  almost  entirely  banished  from  common  use. 

TT  "-i^. 

But  with  sirffixes  it  is  always  used,  see  539. 

a)  The  Infin.  absol.  has  also  the  form  iX'^,  videndo.  521 


188  Verbs  Lamed  He.  [ch.  ii. 

(521)      i)  As  the  Injin.  constr.  occurs  also,  though  seldom,   Hli^JiJ' 
nj^"1,  as  well  as  the  feminine  form  ^1^i")>  io  see. 

:  T-;|- 

522  1^^  The  apocope  of  the  Imperf.  occasions  in  Kal  the  fol- 
lowing changes : 

a)  The  first  stem-letter  most  commonly  receives  the  helping- 
vowel  Segol,  or,  when  the  middle  radical  is  a  guttural, 

Pathakh:  e.  g.   by^  for  b^'^i  ]2H  and  he  built  j  y^D^  let 

him  lookf  for  ^t^*. 

b)  The  Khirik  of  the  preformative  is  also  sometimes  lengthened 
into  Tsere  (because  it  is  now  in  an  open  syllable),  as  i^n\ 
let  him  see  (fr.  n^^^)' 

T      T 

c)  The  helping-vowel  is  sometimes  omitted :  e.  g.  3,]^^) , 
D^^X  "^yy  The  verb  Hi^"!  has  the  two  forms'  i^y 
and  J^'T^T,  the  latter  with  Pathakh  on  account  of  the  Resh. 

d)  Examples  of  verbs  which  are  Pe  guttural  as  well  as  Lamed 
He:  ]i!V%  and  he  made,  from  TtDV>  ]V^')'  and  he  answered, 

■ T  T  —  —  — 

from  njy-  Sometimes  the  punctuation  of  the  first  syl- 
lable  is  not  affected  by  the  guttural,  as  in  in^l,  ^IT'I,  IH'' 
(with  Dagesh  lens  in  second  radical),  let  him  rejoice. 

e)  The  verbs  H^n,  to  be,  and  HTf.   io  live,  which  would 
I        properly  form  in  the  Imperf.  apoc.  TT''*  TT',  change  these 

forms  to  \1>,  TT''  (y'hi,  y'khi),  because  the  Foe?  prefers  a 
vowel  before  it  in  which  it  may  quiesce. 

523  The  full  forms  without  the  apocope  of  Jl—   sometimes  occur 

even  after  Vav  conv.,  especially  in  the  1st  person  and  in  the 
later  books  :  e.  g.  ^N"^^^^.  and  I  saw,  twenty  times,  but  not  in 

the  Pentateuch,  Jl^l?''')?  and  he  made,  four  times. 

524  The  original  >  is  sometimes  retained  before  the  afformatives 
beginning  with  a  vowel  (cf.  522,  above),  especially  in  and  before 
the  Pause,  and  before  the  full  plural  ending  (un)  ]!)— ,  or  where 
for  any  reason  an  emphasis  rests  upon  the  word.     Per/.  VVTlf 

>  ATT 

they  took  refuge;  Imperat.  -VJ^^,  ask  ye;  Imperf.  ]V2n\  they 
increase,  more  frequently  like  ^V-TI^'',  ^^^^  drink  (cf.  530). 


§9.]  Verbs  Lamed  He.  189 

The  Partcp.  act.  has  also  a/em.  of  the  form  rT'Si^i*  spying;  525 

T  • 

rr^liD,  fruitful;  in  the  Plur.  hke  /^Vjli^^.     The  Partcp. pass. 
is  sometimes  without  *»,  as  -Yi^J^  for  ''•Vli^^,  m«c?e,  !)22i- 

T  X  T 

It  is  but  very  seldom  that  the  second  syllable  is  defectively 
written. 

II.  Niphal.']     The  apocope  of  the  Imperf.  occasions  here  no  526 
further  changes  (7^)''  from  11721"');  yet  in  one  verb  j)  guttural 

T  •  V  T  • 

we  find  a  form  with   ( — )   shortened  to  (-^),  viz.  PID''  (for 
nD**).     Similar  in  Piel,  H^Jl  (from  Tll^D),  and  in  Hithpael, 

III.  Piel,  Pual,  and  Hithpael.']    In  the  Per/".  Pie?,  the  second  52/ 
syllable  has  Khirik  instead  of  the  diphthongal  e  in  the  greater 
number  of  examples,  which  is  therefore  adopted  in  the  Paradigm. 
Before  suffixes  Khirik  is  always  employed,  except  in  Pual,  which 
always  has  Tsere  C-^). 

The  Imperf.  loses,  after  the  apocope,  the  strong  Dagesh  of  528 
the  second  radical ;  hence  Piel,  *\''^'^^ ;    Hithpael,    721/T^I.     Less 

frequently  is  the  Pathakh  then  lengthened  into  Kamets,  as  ^JV), 
IK/lMcf.  526).  ^'- 

In  Piel  and  Hithpael  are  found  also  apocopated  forms  of  the  529 
Imperat.,  as  DJ  for  JlD^i  P^ove  !  ^njlllj  feign  thyself  sick. 

Examples  of  Yod  retained  in  cases  where  more  commonly  it  530 
is  omitted :  Imperf.  ''i^''D'7J^.  wi//  ye  liken  me;  •1D-VDD''.  they 

cover  them. 

IV.  Hiphil  and   Hophal.']      In   the   Perf.   Hiph.   the   forms  531 

/T»7j|n  and  Jlv^H  are  about  equally  common ;  before  suffixes 
T  •• :  •  ■•■•:• 

the   latter   is   used,    as    somewhat    the    shorter.      In   Hophal 
always  ^-^ . 

a)  The  Tsere  of  the  Infin.  absol.  Hiph.  is  the  regular  vowel  532 
(as  in  blDpn) ;  to  this  the  Infn.  absol.  Hoph.  conforms,  as 

in  n^srr. 

b)  The  verb  nil"1>  to  be  much,  has  three  forms  of  the  /nfin.  : 

T     T 

n^^ilj  much  (used  adverbially) ;  n3,"in>  used  when  the 
Infill,  is  pleonastic  ;  jn*)3,"in.  the  Injin.  constr. 


190  Verbs  Lamed  He,  [ch.  ii. 

533  The  Imperf.  apoc.  has  either  the  form  '^*)^  J^H)\  pti^'^l.  or 
(with  a  helping-vowel)  7JJ"»,  for  which,  however,  is  invariably 
substituted  the  form  ^^i,  as  7^"],  "IS)'").  Examples  with  gut- 
turals :  7"^^),  7j^i^1,  &c.,  which  can  be  distinguished  from  the 
Imperf.  Kal  only  by  the  signification. 

534  The  Imperat.  apoc.  has  invariably  the  helping- vowel  Segol  or 
Pathakh,3is  y]h  for  ^TiJ],  H^IH;   C]nn  for  t]-in,  il^irji 

b^h  for  nb^n. 

535  The  Imperf.  with  Foe?  retained  occurs  only  in  ]V)lJr).  from 

TT 

(Additional  Remarks.) 

536  V.  In  the  Aramaean,  where,  as  before  remarked,  the  verbs 

i^7  and  Hv  flow  into  one  another,  both  classes  terminate,  in 
the  Imperf  and  Partcp.  of  all  the  conjugations,  without  dis- 
tinction, in  ^^_  or  >_. .  As  imitations  of  this  mode  of  forma- 
tion we  are  to  regard  those  forms  of  the  Infin  ,  Imperat.,  and 
Imperf  in  Tl-^>  more  seldom  J^.^  and  >— -,  which  are  found  in 

Hebrew  also,  especially  in  the  later  writers  and  the  poets. 
Infn.  HTl.  to  be;  iliiy,  opprimendo;  n^H)!!-     Imperat.  J^in, 

be  thou.  Imperf  n]'nr\'b^  ;  KIJ^  b^,  follow  not;  tl'^^'bi^^ 
do  not  *. 

537  The  Yod  is  found  even  at  the  end  of  the  word  (which  is  also 

a  Syriasm)  in  *^bTin,  ""JT/ni,  and  hence  in  the  Plur.  VODH. 
•  v:iv       :  •  -  •  :  • 

538  In  three  verbs  is  found  the  unfrequent  conjugation  Pilel,  or 
its  reflexive,  where  the  third  radical,  which  the  conjugatioA 
requires  to  be  doubled,  appears  under  the  form  n*) ;  viz.  ^')^^J, 

contracted   HlJ^i.    fo   be  beautiful,  from  TM^2 ',    D'^inZOD,    the 
T    T  T  T  — :  -  : 

archers:  but  especially  nni^j  to  bow,  Pilel  "nMlll),  hence  the 


*  The  Jussive  signification  in  these  examples  is  the  reason 
that  they  have  Tsere  like  the  Imperat.  But  this  will  not  apply 
to  all  other  cases ;  and,  besides,  the  reading  in  many  instances 
is  doubtful  between  {-^)  and   (^.     See  Gen.  xxvi.  29;  Lev. 

xviii.  7.   Jos.  vii.  9;  ix.  24.    Dan.  i.  13.    Ez.  v.  12. 


§  9.]  Ve7^bs  Lamed  He,  191 

reflexive  nini^ti^n*  to  ^ow  oneself,  to  prostrate  oneself,  2  pers.  (538) 
/!"»_  and  /iV ,  Imperf  mnrit^),  apoc.  ^nP>p^'),  for  in^ll^JI 
(aDalogous  with  >n^  for  \"1''). 

Before  suffixes  the  H  final,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  falls  539 

away,  as    ''iJt;,    he  answered  me,  ?TJ^,    DJ^;    Imperf.   ^i^^ 
•T-:  ':iT       TT  ':-- 

^n^y ;  Hip/i.  ?T7^rT-  Very  seldom  >_  takes  the  place  of  the 
final  n  _  or  H-j  as  in  ^D*DD^  ^^  will  cover  them;  **y^3il,  smite 
me.  The  3  Perf.fem.  always  takes  before  siiff.  the  older  form 
rh-i  (see  518),  yet  with  a  short  a,  as  in  the  regular  verb  :  e,  g. 

T  T 

•lil^D  for  in/l^S ;  in  poMse  ^^Pit;)^- 

...  .      .    |TT 


To  trust  (in),  (1)  nDPT,   kha- 

sah  (b'). 
To  build,  7]23.,  banah. 

T  T 

To  stretch  out,  niO^>  nafah. 

T  T 

To  multiply,  nil1»  rabhah. 

T      T 

To  feed,  r\^'^,  raVah. 

T      T 

To  babble,  nZOIl>  ba/ah  (com p. 

T   T 

jSarroXoyav  and  blaterare). 
To  befall,  HJi^  (in  Pual)  anah. 


To  see,  HKI.  raah.  540 

T     T 

Piercings,      /li")[p"TD,      mad- 

k'roth  (dakar). 
Sword,  ^ir\>  khe'rebh. 
The  world,  73^5  tebhel,  jjoe^ic 

(=  r)  oiKovjjLkvr},  yabhal). 
Embryo  ;  unformed  substance, 

D/i)>  golem  (galam,  glome- 

ravit). 


Exercise  47. 

mt  "^^  iB^DVi  TQ"*  inn^  >2"^3  3  :  n^i:^pQ  ]^^^'l  n^ 

ay-iDn^  D^'p^NT  D-iii  -i:;"!^  pn::  '•ns)!:;  4      :  d^- n 

A'-r~'.        \  :          "AT          j';  :  - :         •.•    v  j-                          it 


192  Verhs  Lamed  He.  [ch.  u.  §  9. 

(541)  :;^"i  ^k'pd  u^v^'y\  p^*"'?^  p^'^ii':'  n:)hi^"^^  6     :i^3-iQ 

V  /  IT  ;  JT  •   T     :         VAT      T     '     J av\  :         I  I"   ;- 

T     |-  IT    :        ••  ••     r      •     'at      -  J        I        -  :vv 

T  J-  ••  I  •      ;v  :-       •        A-  ;  -;       a:       i       '  "v.      •    •  t 

•iKT  I  ^D^D  10     :  ubtry^  niDin  n^inr^  ]i'':i-n^^  n:)i^"ii 

|VT  JT  V  V;  A  T  ••,  ;'T  I"  T  •  \T\  .:     •  "   :  '     V    " 

:KD3  y\y  mi^i  ^3  vt'\  rtivv  do'pd  nayir)  n 

I"  •      '    ;•         'tt;-       /•         -  AV  J-;  ■  r '.<■.         j--;     i 

6)  1.  What  God  shall  command,  that  thou  shalt  do.  2.  As 
they  have  done,  so  do  ye.  3.  The  waters  increased  greatly 
over  the  earth,  and  all  the  hills  were  covered  which  were  under 
heaven.  4.  Cow  and  bear  shall  feed  together;  lion  and  ox 
shall  lie  down  together.  5.  Great  are  the  things  which  my  eyes 
have  seen.  6.  Ye  shall  not  build  houses.  7-  Did  not  my  father 
build  this  house  ?  8.  Did  I  not  build  the  house  ?  9.  In  the 
building-of  the  city. 

542      Write  down  the  forms : 


I  was. 

I  will  be. 

Be  thou. 

To  be. 

Thou  wast. 

Thou  (m.)  wilt  be. 

Be  thou  (/.). 

In-being 

Thou  (/.)  wast. 

Thou  (/.)  wilt  be. 

Be  you. 

He  will  be. 

He  will  be. 

Be  you  (/.). 

She  was. 

She  will  be. 

*  Most  recent  interpreters  translate  the  latter  clause  thus  : 
the  days  [sc.  of  my  life]  all  of  them  were  predetermined,  and 
(=when)  not  one  of  them  [yet  was].  So  Maurer,  De  Wette, 
Hengstenberg.     CuUam  refers,  by  anticipation,  to  *  days.^ 


CH.  12.] 


Suffixes  of  the  Verb, 


193 


Chap.  XII.     Suffixes  of  the  Verb, 

The  suffixes  appended  to  the  verb  express  the  ac-  54  3 
cusative  oi  the  personal  pronoun.     They  are: 


2  thee  (f.) 

3  him 
3  her 


Singular. 


Forms  proper  for 
the  Perfect  Tense. 


Person. 

1  me  (c.) 

2  thee  (m.)       ?[,  in  pause  "TJ —  or  ^ — 


•  I-     • 


V 


v-% 


j)n —  . .  1 — 
n —  . .  n —  n- 


Forms  proper  for       544 
^Ae  Imperfect. 

•I" 

?[_  or  nj- 


■^.7-  °^  ''^- 


^n —    V 

I" 

n- 

T    IV 


Plural. 


1  us  (c.)  ?):_  U 

IT 

2  yoM  (m.)     DD— 


|V 


2  yoM  (f.)        p_ 

3  them  (m.)      D —  D_,  poeticb  ^Q — 

|T  -  IT 

3  them  (f.)         1_    1_ 


1J- 

I" 
DD- 

|V 

D—  D— ji>oc'»ce  ID— 


Affixes  of  the  Imperfect,  when  preceded  by  an 
Epenthetic  Nun, 

Singular. 


1  me  (c.)         12—    >i]_  for  '•^JJ— 


12- 

•  \- 


545 


2  thee  (m.)      ■!_  HD ^J— 

t'  |v        t IV  ':  IV 

3  him 
3  her 


.•):_  for  ^^T^ 

I"  : 


Hi} —  n:i_ 

TjV  t:|V 


194 


Suffixes  of  the  Verb. 


[CH.  12. 


546 


547 


Perfect  with  Suffixes. 

As  a  general  rule, 

a)  the  forms  that  end  in  a  consonant,  take  the  suf- 
fixes that  begin  with  a  vowel  (called  a  vowel- of- 
union) ; 

b)  the  forms  that  end  in  a  vowel,  take  the  suffixes 
that  begin  with  a  consonant. 

c)  The  vowel-of-union  for  the  Perfect  is  a  (or  ^) . 

^)  >}  }} 

Whatever  changes  the  afformatives  undergo,  are 
made  for  the  purpose  of  suiting  them  to  receive  the 
pronominal  suffixes. 

takes        I         for 


I'nperfectl 
Imperative  J  ' 


a)  The  3rd  sing.  fern. 

b)  2nd  sing,  f em. 
2nd  plur.  masc. 


ath  or  ath 
ti 
tu 


ah 

t 

tern' 


548  Here  observe,  (1)  the  2nd  sing.  fern,  (which  is  derived  from 
an  old  form  atii)  becomes  identical  in  form  with  the  \st  pers. 
sing.,  and  is  only  to  be  distinguished  from  it  by  the  context ; 
(2)  of  the  2nd  plur.  fern,  no  instance  is  found  with  suffixes. 

549  [The  3rd  sing.  fern,  of  the  Perfect  (1)  draws  the  tone  to  itself, 
except  with  chem,  chen,  and  then  takes  the  forms  that  make  a 
syllable  without  a  union-vowel ;  (2)  with  the  other  suffixes,  it 
takes  a  union-vowel,  but  draws  back  the  tone  to  the  penult,  so 
that  they  appear  with  shortened  vowels.] 


View  of  the  Suffixes  to  the  Verb  {E.). 
I.    To  THE  Perfect. 
transit.  Kal 


Verb : 

nrii)  i 

SufF. :  sing.  3  m. 

1 T  T  : 

him 

or 

—  f . 

her 

3  f.  sing, 
or 


CH.  12.] 


Suffixes  of  the  Verb, 


2   m. 

—  f . 
\. 

pi.  3  m 

—  f . 
2    m. 

—  f . 
1. 


thee 

thee 

me 

them 

them 

you 

you 

ns 


l^i^l? 


|T 


r  T  : 


e  from  intrans.  Kal  in  the  same  way. 

1)  innj^,  2)  TT:l^^^,  s)  D:)2ni^ ; 

e  from  the  other  forms,  as  Piel : 
1)  Uri3,  2,  3)  TT2n3,  ^D-12. 


Suflf. :  sing.1 
3  m.  / 


—  f . 
2    m. 

—  f . 
1. 

pL  3  m. 

—  f. 
2    m. 

—  f . 
1. 


him 

her 

thee 

thee 

me 

them 

them 

you 

you 

us 


2  m.  sing, 
or 

T  ;    ~  ; 

(none) 
(none) 

(none) 
(none) 


2  f .  &  1  sing, 
or 


Just  so  the  sufF.  to  the  Persons 
of  all  Verbal-stems : 

T  :  -  •  I-  :  -  • 

&c. 


]95 

"ITT  : 

-  iT  T : 

:  I-  T  : 
So 

:  I-  :  • 


3  pi. 

^2ri3 


(none) 

DDinrii) 

In  the  same  way 
1st  and  2nd 
pers.  plur. 


s2 


196 


Suffixes  of  the  Verb. 
II.    To  THE  Imperfect. 


[CH.  12. 


551        transit.  Kal,  3  sing.  m. 

3  pi.  m. 

Kal  Imperat.  sg.  m. 

Verb: 

2r\y 

^:ip\y 

n'np 

vry^ 

Suflf. :  sing.l 
3  m.  / 

1"  :  :  • 

•imir^D^  If 

iv  :  T 

^ry:f!}yhx 

—  f . 

r^:ir\y 

nj)a;^3^ 

naji3 

r\v^t 

T  1 V  :  :  • 

T    1   :  :  • 

T|V   :    T 

T  ivT  : 

T  1  V    •      •    • 

r^2rsy 

T      •      *    • 

T     •  T 

2    m. 

?fnr^i>2 

^^0?: 

—  f . 

"^5^??! 

•^•lajji?; 

1. 

'P?.^?' 

•    ■    •  •  • 

pi.  3  m. 

Dnrib) 

D-ianb; 

•  1  ••  •  -J- 

—  f. 

]nra) 

••           T 

••    T     • 

2    m. 

D3njH5>3 

V  :  T  :  • 

uy\2r\y 

ph3 

ly?^ 

~  f . 

pnrip; 

1"      :  :  • 

1. 

1"  :  :  • 

•IMJJ^P^ 

1  ••    •     T 

1  "T     • 

The  suffixes 

to  the  other  verbal 

pers.  in 

the  same  w 

'ay. 

a  in  the  last  syllable,  T\T  ■    1.  ^H^n^;    2.  '^f^im^ 

3.  D5;l^;l^  ypti^."':  2:?y5;Di^>;  *3.  DpyiDtf^w 

in  the  last  syllable,  2r)3> :   i.  iin^riD^  '2.'?Tiir)D\ 
.. -.  I"  :  -:  i' ;  I"-: 

*  So  also  to  all  persons  ending  in  the  3rd  radical :  3^)  Ji^, 

t  So  also  to  -l^in^ri  2  plur.  m.  and  3  a.  2  plur.  f.,  and  to 
••^/^Dri  2  sing.  f. ;  instead  of  which  V^J^D/l  ^  is  also  possible. 
\  To  the  f.  sing,  and  to  the  plur.  like  to  the  Imperf. 


CH.  12.]  Suffixes  of  the  Verb,  197 

^2^';,  "^nnj^  3.  DonriDi,  DDnra^  rh^]-  (551) 

'i-'^rfi^'^'^l    3.  DDn'^lt^V— *  or  u  in  the  last  sy\- 

\^h\Q,' y^rsy,  Hiph.':   I.  i\nyr\y;  2.  '?Tn''nD''; 

r  :-  I"   •  ;-  1'  :    1-  :  - 

3.  DDQ^riD'':  withgutt.  rry>r2t\  DDV^DIi^^ 


Exercise  48. 

•>j;^S)-'.3  3        r'-j-in^  ''jiK^L^nDi  W?2  '':)D:n3  nhnn  2 

r]f2i^'P  6      :  ''D^^  ''Jjian"'  ^^tD^a")  'rhb'n  ]W3r]'n  5 
>:l^*ro^;^  7      :^:riin  hddh  Dhcn-i  n^nron  rc^^sn 

•J" :  -  :  ■  1"  '    I        'T  ;  T         \  T  :  a  ■•.  ~      t  :  j-t 

]Vir^  •'jv^Qti^ri  8   :]>2bi^  :h'^'D^  "'Jdidji  "intoj^i  n'.r.^n 
•'j^LonQ  ?T^:3D  -inon  9     trT-s-i  niD:^;^  m'^i^  nnot^i 

AT  T  -:i"       '    VTV        J"  ;    -  T    |-    •  ;  T  -;         T :  ••  T         AT  ;    '  : 

nm  ynbi^  ^y^^"^:l  iin:D  n"?  10       -.ririD  'nh^v'bD') 

-    }'.        A-    v:     j-t:  TV     J"  I":      j-   |-:     t: 

»  .    .'t  -    ;:     'avt  :  •      -t"  •  :   -       -  r   .  •  :        j*—         t 

nnn:  nni  "^^r^^  iii:;ii;  ^-j  n2''2}n  12    :>-3aD  npn'^N 

jT    • :    -     >■:     'a-:  •      j    :       -v.        t  j-  t  -iv  •       o-* 

•^ybi^  D'XLsm  TD"Ti  yv^ii  ma^^<  13       :''JDddji 
p-in  ^ji;?^i:^n  \"i'7i^  D^'i^^i^l  dotd  '':i':'''iin  h    :!)aii:^^ 

aTT         v:      VAT    ••-;:  -      ':•):■       — :  'iv't:«      •      : 

in3D  ]i)"i:T  iii:2  nV^:^''  n^DDnn  t'i^  16       ••mnsD'' 

; •  :  -        T  ;  •  ;  at        j ;  \   I   ~^  J •  t |  v  ;  - : 

-s'?  "^Tii^  '\yb'\r\\  ^r^v'^)  nr^S)'-  D::2n  ^>k  17      :  p]^^^^ 

'vjv:  •     I  :        A""      av-:       tt\.         j-  i  - 

njp^HT  ")bii  iD^i:;  i:i^rab2  nnit^p  nbM^  is     :  nizo 

t';v     ;-       t  V;"         -A-      V   :         jr       ';         V  vv  I 

s  3 


198  Suffixes  of  the  Verb,  [ch.  12. 

(552)  niDHD^  '^^^  "T'i^v'?  ini  ''^^  rti'^rb  b'^  \)^v  19  -.Ji-iaD 
^W^^  /I'^J^  ^2^1  D^o^n  nn'^  :i;Qti:^')  ^^ti^  ion  20 

'|vt:         -  t;-  j-        'av:  •    ;  s" '.    '.    '        \'  -tv    |» 

' -:  I"      :  ~|TT       ■»  •■  I  :        a*  •  t     ':v     •  :  j- t       <-; 

:Tny^^  niiii  DHDJ^  n^^^^n'?  hd'a  hdn  ioi:^p 

'  |v ;   I    :  vv;  >•  T-:  i«  t;  avv;      a":  •        :   :  A 


^)  Translate  into  Hebrew- 


Thou  hast  put  him  (1,  1,  v). 

Thou  (/.)  hast  deceived  me. 

She  instructed  him. 

She  inchned  (1,  5,  n,  h)  him. 

Thou  hast  despised  me. 

Thou  (/.)  hast  given  him. 

They  have  forsaken  me. 

I  have  cursed  her. 

Give  him. 

Take  him. 

He  will  pursue  him. 

They  shall  find  her. 

They  shall  call-upon  me. 

To  despise  them. 


When  he  fled  (Say :  in  Ms- 
flying). 

When  thou  buildest  (Say:  in 
thy  building). 

When  he  prepared  (Say:  in 
his  preparing). 

To  deceive  me. 

When  he  was  circumcised 
(Say :  in  his  being  circum- 
cised). 

They  that  do  {p.)  this. 

His  slain. 

They  that  call-upon  him. 


DIFFERENCES  OF  IDIOM,  &c. 


(Literally,  in  Hebrew) 

1.  a)  This  boy.  The  boy  the  this.  "I  ,  ,^ 
b)  The  good  boy.  The  boy  the  good./ '  ^^• 

2.  a)  The  boy  is  small. 

The  boys  are  small. 

In  other  instances  also  the  copula  ('is,'  *are')  is  omitted. 
There  the  sun  =  there  is  the  sun. 


The  boy  he  small.      ^  ^-la 
The  boys  they  small.  J 


3.  o)  He  that  falls.  1  All  these  English  forms  may  be 

He  that  has  fallen.    ,-  translated  by  one  participle. 

He  that  will  fall.       J  nophel,  138. 

b)  He  who  teaches.  The  teaching  [person]  ;    as  6 

^dd(jKU)v  in  Greek. 

c)  Tlie  partcp.   is   often  used   as   a  predicate  *    to    denote 
(usually)  the  Present  Tense. 

4.  a)  Sweeter  than  honey.  Sweet   above   {from,  in   com- 

parison of  \=  prae])  honey 
(P). 

b)  The  tallest  of  the  people.     The-tall  [*>one]  from  the  people 

(]p.  D,  Q;    sometimes  ^), 

196. 

c)  Very  good.  /obh  m'od  (l^^p  ^IJO). 

5.  Dative  Relations.]     Usually  7,  sometimes  7^^,  prefixed 

to,  and  cohering  with,  the  noun. 

*  Usually  \\\e  present  tense  of  a  verb.  Jehovah  (°is)  knowing 
=^  Jehovah  kriows. 


200  Differences  of  Idiom,  ^c, 

6.  Ace.  usually  JIJ^  or  "JIN^,  175  a. 

The  Ace.  may  denote — 

a)  The  place  to  which,  ace. 
without  preposition ;  some- 
times 7^^  prefixed. 

b)  The  place  at  which  may  be 
in  ace.  without  a  prepo- 
sition, 175,  c. 

c)  The  person  to  whom  motion 
is  directed,  is  usually  ex- 
pressed   by    7^^    prefixed, 

175,  e. 

7.  (Ace.  continued).    The  Ace.  may  also  denote — 

a)  The  time  when. 

b)  The  time  how  long. 

c)  ^e\dX\oxi^oi  space  {how  wide y 
deep,  &e.). 

d)  The  relations  denoted  in 
English  by  as  to,  in  respect 
of,  according  to;  in. 

8.  Ablative  Relations,] 

«)  ]12,  from  (176) ;  also  =.some  of. 

b)  Often  3.  =  *^>  «^  with. 

9.  Genitive  Relations.] 

a)  Usually  expressed  by  placing  the  preceding  (i.  e.  the 
governing)  noun  in  the  construct  state. 

b)  Sometimes  by  7,  ef.  177. 

c)  Gen.  of  possession  : 

Her  father's  flock.  The  flock  which   to-her-father 

[i.  e.  was  or  is'].     {'To*  to 
be  expressed  by  7),  178. 

10.  Numerals.] 
Seven  sons,  cf.  207. 

11.  Relative.] 

a)  Whose.  Who— to  him  V. 2^5 

Who — to  her  I 

b)  All  that  I  have.  All  which  to  me. 

I^T  nT»  like  our  '  that,^  is  sometimes  used  as  a  relative. 

12.  Where.  Which — there.  \oaq 
Whence.  Which — thence.] 


Differences  of  Idiom,  ^c.  201 

13.  a)  From  when,  from  where,  as  in  English. 

b)  He  has  fallen  into  the  pit  he  made  (=  which  he  made) :  as 

in  English. 

c)  At  the  time  he  did  it :  as  in  English. 

14.  The  orphan  and  one  who     The   orphan   and   there  is  no 
has  no  helper.  helper  to  him,  256. 

15-  "I^N  (257,  end^  =,  virtually,  the  copula  (in  any  tense)  with  a 

negative. 
Joseph  was  not  in  the  pit.       en-Y6seph  babbor. 

16.  ti^^=,  virtually,  the  copula,  in  any  tense. 
It  is  in  my  power.  yesh-Ve\  yadi, 

17.  Many  verbs  are  in  Hebrew  followed  by  an  accusative,  where 

we  must  use  a  preposition. 

18.  Many  verbs  are  in  Hebrew  followed  {always  or  sometimes)  by 

a  preposition,  where  we  should  use  the  ace.  only  in  English. 

To  seek  wisdom.  bikkesh  l'  .  .  .  [as  we  may  say 

*  to  seek  after '  a  thing]. 

To  rebuke  a  man.  gai^ar  b'  .  .  .  [to  find  fault  with 

a  man]. 

1 9.  The  infin.  absolute  is  used — 

1)  as  an  intensive, 

Thou  shalt  surely  die.  To  die  thou  shalt  die. 

2)  Sometimes  after  a  finite  verb  it  carries  on  the  discourse 

just  as  if  it  were  a  verb  of  the  same  tense. 

Thou   shalt    weep    and         Thou  shalt  weep  and  to-mourn. 
mourn. 

20.  Meanings  of  the  Perfect : 

The  Perfect  denotes,  A  (used  absolutely) 

a)  Past  time,  (1)  as  perfect,  (2)  as 
pluperfect. 

b)  The  present,  (1)  as  a  condition  or 
attribute  already  long  continued 
and  still  existing  (just  like  odi, 
novi,  memini,  in  Lat.) :  e.  g.  yadaJ^ti, 
I  know  J  saneti,  /  hate.  (2)  A  per- 
manent or  habitual  action :  Happy 
the  man  who  walks,  &c.  (halach). 

c)  The  future,  m  protestations  and  as- 
surances ;  the  event  being  contem- 
plated as  done  (e.  g.  I  give  thee  the 
field,  &c.). 


202  Diffey^ences  of  Idiom,  ^c. 

B  (used  relatively) 

d)  ■=.  imperfect  suhj.  (e.  g.  we  should 
iiave  been  or  should  be  [essemus]  as 
Sodom). 

e)  =:pluperf.  subj.  (e.  g.  if  he  had  not 
left,  &c.). 

/)  =futurum  exactum,  just  as  with  us 
'when  he  has  washed  away;*'  for 
'when  he  shall  have  washed  away.' 

C  (with  Vav  conv.) 

g)  =z  future  (aft.  future,  i.  e.  imperf.). 

h)  ^pres.  subj.  (aft.  imperf.  in  this 
sense),  lest  he  should  put  forth  his 
hand,  and  take,  &c. 

«")  :=  imperat.  (aft.  imperf.). 

Jc)  =  for  past  or  present  time,  as  pre- 
ceding perf,  or  imperf.  requires. 

21.  Meanings  of  the  Imperfect : 
The  Imperfect  denotes,  A  (used  absolutely) 

a)  The  future. 

b)  The  present  {espec'mWy  of  permanent 
states  and  general  truths). 

B  (used  relatively) 

c)  as  subjunct.  after  particles  meaning 
that,  that  not,  lest. 

d)  as  optative. 

e)  as  imperative,  the  place  of  which  it 
always  supplies  in  prohibitions. 

f)  as  potential :  =  may,  might ;  can, 
could. 

g)  after  az,  then;  te'rem,  not  yet ; 
b'te'rem,  before. 

h)  it  may  denote  customary  and  con- 
tinued action,  and  (like  Lat.  and 
French  imperf.)  of  extended  repre- 
sentation. 

i)  it  sometimes  denotes  single  actions, 
done  and  past,  where  the  perfect 
might  be  expected.  This  applies  to 
poetry ;  the  use  resembles  that  of 
our  present  tense  as  employed  in 
lively  descriptions. 


HEBREW    AND    ENGLISH 
INDEX. 


;iJ<^  \xreg.  father.    [App.  B.] 

T 

T^K  to  stray,  wander,  he  lost. — 

~    T 

to  perish  (b  and  p  of  the  per- 
son).    Piel,  to  cause  to  stray,  to 
disperse. — to  cause  to  perish,  to 
destroy. 
nUi^  to  be  willing,  inclined,   de- 

T  T 

sirous  (followed  by  infin.  with 
or  without )). 
"•i^hi  poverty,  misery. 

^^^  to  mourn  (b»  over).    Hiph.  to 

—    T 

cause  to  mourn.    Hithp.  =  Kal. 
]!2i^  c.  (mostly  f.),  «  stone. 

vhi^,  D^^^  adj.  pi.  D'QTN  (8,c) 

T  T 

red. 
ySlt^  (3,  a)  master,  lord.    PI.  n'six 

lords;  yi^n  '2T«  lord  of  the  land. 
T1J«^  Niph.  to  become  glorious. 

~  T 

"yi^  adj.  (l,b)  great,  mighty.— 

noble,  excellent, 
rni'^  f.  with  suflf.  inniN  (13,  a) 

cloak,  mantle. 
3ni^  to  love.  Piel,  partcp.,  a  lover. 


T^ll'nt^  f.  infin.  of  the  verb  3n« : 

6-  g.    ^T  D^Ti^  !^?n*i>^    to   love 

the  name  of  the  Lord. — subst. 

love,  beloved. — adv.  delightfully. 

T»^    (1,  a)    straitness,   calamity, 

destruction. 
nihi   Root  not  used.     Arab,   to 

TT 

hoivl. 
••ij^  wailing,  inter] .  wo/  alas!   ho! 
(of  threatening). 

/''1^^  (1*  a)  a  fool  ^=.  a  wicked  per- 
son. 
r\%^    f.     sing.     (13,  a)   folly  J 

sin,  from  obsol.  'na. 
7*)^  (6,  h)  nothingness,  falsehood, 

V  T 

vanity. — wickedness,  iniquity. — 
adversity,  calamity. 

1!iil^  (2,b)  pi.  nmi«,  treasure. 

T 

ni<5  irreg.  brother.    [App.  B. ] 

r 

"ini^  to  stay,  tarry. 

~    T 

"^^^^   prep,    behind,    after    (with 

•  3ufF.  nn«,  C3nri«,  &c.).   prep,  of 
place,    after,   behind. — of  time, 
after,  after  that. 
"lini^  (3j  a)  the  hinder  part;  as 

T 

adv.  backwards. 


204  Hebrew  and  English  Index, 

y^^    to   hate,   io   be   an   enemy; 
partcp.  aiiw  as  subst.  (7,  b)  ad- 


fidelity.- — truth,   as   opposed  to 
falsehood. 


versary,  enemy :  f.  nrix. 
TK  (6,  J)  nothingness. — as  an  adv. 

not,  including  the  idea  of  the 
subst.  verb  to  he  (cf.  '^) ;  ttJ''N  ]'« 
there  is  no  man,  "inie  ]^«  there 
was  none  interpreting.  If  a  per- 
sonal pronoun  is  the  subject  of 
the  proposition,  the  particle 
takes  the  verbal  suffixes,  '»2r« 
I  am,  or  was  not,  shall  not  be, 
¥jy»,  ^23'N,  nsrw,  &c.  When  fol- 
foUowed  by  the  dative,  'b  ]''« 
there  is  not  to  me,  i  e.  /  have 
not,  Dnb  ]^«  they  have  not. 

^>^  {I,  a)  man,  Lat.  vir. — hus- 
band.— man,  opp.  God,  animals 
(homo).  Before  other  nouns 
denotes  the  qualities  of  men; 
now  "ttJ'^J  a  faithful  man. — any 
one. — each, 

nii^K  f-  (13,  b)  woman;  female. 
— wife. 

't^i^  only. — only,  but. — just  now. — 

surely,  certainly. 
7^i^  to  eat. 

—   T 

n^rjb>J^  f-  (11,  b)  a  widow. 
D^^  f.  (8,  b)  mother. 

HDK  (S- 10)  /Ae/ore-flrm,  cubitus, 

prop,  the  mother  df  the  arm, — a 
cubit ;  rrasin  rsnw/oMr  by  the  cu- 
bit, i.  e.  four  cubits. 
HDi^    f-    irreg.    a    maid-servant. 

[App.  B.] 

J^D^^  f-  (foi*  "li'?^)  with  suff.  inps! 
firmness,  stability. —faithfuhess, 


*1D>i   imperf.  "in«',  nox^i    to  say, 

-    T 

declare,  mostly  followed  by  the 
words  spoken,  constr.  with  "?«• ) 
before  the  person  to  or  of  whom 
any  thing  is  said ;  rarely  with 
an  ace. 
1t2ii  (6,  b)  word,  discourse. 

D'tlPi'Oi^  f.  (13,  a)  a  sack  or  bag. 

^]3^^  Kal  not  used  (Arab,  to  meet; 

T   T 

to   be  in  good  time).     Piel,  to 
cause  to  come,  or  happen.  Pual, 
to  befall. 
n'^iX  f-  (10)  a  ship. 

r|^^  to  breathe  through  the  nose, 

snort;  to  be  angry  (with  3). 
\)2i^   lo  groan.     Niph.    to  moan, 

'     -T 

lament. 
Xy^y^  f-  cnstr.  np2S(  a  groaning, 

'tt-;  "'" 

lamentation. 
'^Syt^  (see  'a5'i^)  man. — the  common 

people.     PI.    D'ttJDX,  cnstr.   'rpsf, 

with  suff.  'r3«,  men;  commonly 

used  for  d^t^'-n  the  plural  of  tj'w. 

TW^  f.  irr.  pi.  D^uj:   woman,  fe- 

T     • 

male. — wife.     [App.  B.] 
C]Di^  to  collect,  to  gather. 

"IDi^   to  bind. — to  put  in  bonds; 

—  T 

partcp.  "rc^  prisoner. 
^"•Di^  (3,  a)  captive,  prisoner. 

•     T 

S]J^  (for  F]3«=f]3><t)  with   suff.  'Esi 

(8,  d)  no.se. — anger.  Dual  d^e«. 
the  nostrils. — meton.  face,  coun- 
tenance. 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 
n3i»i  to  hake. 

T  T 

nii^  to  go,  to  be  on  the  way. 

—  T 

mi^  c.  (G,c)pl.  ninT«.  cnstr.  and 

with  suff.  nin")st  ivay,road,path. 
— manner,  mode. 
"^li^    (6,  c)  length,  of  time  and 

space, 
yij^  f.  rarely  m.  (6,  a)  with  the 

art.  yi.>jn,  earth,  land. 
"Tli^  to  curse,  execrate.     Piel,  to 


205 


curse. 
D^J^  to  he  or  hecome  guilty,  to 

—  T 

transgress.     Hiph.  to  bring  the 
consequences   of  sin   upon  any 
one. 
D^^<  {4.,  c)  guilt. 

T  r 

"Ivi^K  to  go  straight  on. 

—  T 

l^i^  happiness,  blessedness ;  only 

in  pi.  cnstr.  in  the  character  of 
an  interj.  Mi^srt  nic^  0  the  hap- 
piness of  the  man!  =:  blessed  is 
the  man.  With  suff.  Tjn-i-N  happy 
art  thou  !  in\rs,  inTc:^^  for  Tinrw, 
&c. 

1^1  with  suff.  nD2  (6,  a),  hut  in 

pause  '\yi    a   covering. — cloak, 
garment. 
'^n^  Niph.  to  he  troubled,  terri- 

—  T 

fed.     Piel,  to  terrify,  confound. 
— to  cause  to  hurry.    Hiph.  i.  q. 
Piel. 
/^■^n^  f.  0.  shining,  whitish  scurf, 

sinking  in  the  skin  and  having 
white  hair. 


J^*)^  to  enter,  come  or  go  in  (with 

3,  b«,  ),  also  ace), 
t'ljl  to  despise,  contemn. 
"li})^  to  be  ashamed. 
n3,  to   take  as  a  prey,  to  spoil, 

—  T 

plunder. 
V13,  to  try,  prove,  test. 

~    T 

in^,  to  prove. — to  choose   (with 

~    T 

acc.  3,  )). 
niOH  to  babble  J  part.  TtT3.  an  idle 

T    T 

talker. 
nZO^I  prop,    to  cling    to,    to   rely 

~    T 

upon,  trust,  confide  in  (bsi,  "??). 
ntOjl  trust,  confidence,  security. 

I**^?  PH  to  distinguish,  discern. — 

to  understand, 
y^jl  (6,h)  interval. — prep,  between. 

"C"!,  ]Ui — fi,  I'^ib — y^'  between — 
and;  sometimes  also  whither — 
or. 
1"'^  prep.  prop,  cnstr.  of  ;;3  (6,  h). 

nJ''3,  f-    (10)  understanding,  dis- 

cernment. 
103.  (1>  a)  the  first-horn. 

721  adv.  not. — nothing. 

••^^  want;  only  as  adv.  not,  mth- 

out. 
^3,  a  son.  See  irr.  nouns,  App.  B. 

nJH  to  build. 

T  T 

bV^  ^ord,  possessor,  owner. — hus- 
band. 
"IPH  to  consume,   burn  up.  —  in- 

—  T 

trans,  to  burn. 
^^2.  to  break. — to  plunder. 

-  T 

T 


206 


Hebreio  and  E7iglisli  Index. 


-^'T\plunder,  unjust  gain. — gain, 
V^^ll     profit. 

IpH  (4,  a)  coll.  oxen^  herd. 
"1p3.  pi*  ^^IP^  ^^^  dawn,  morning. 
li^pS.  Piel,  to  seek;  with  ace,  to 

seek  after,  with  b;   n;n>-nx  tDipa 
to  seek  the  Lord. 
■^^    corn    (separated    from    the 

T 

chaflf) ;  ins  to  separate, 
i^^^  to  create,  form,  make. 

TT 

")2.  with  suff.  ^3  a  son. 
"THIL  hail. 

TT 

niB  to  flee;  absol.  or  with"?,  hvt 

~T 

{whither),   ;n,   nsin,   ^25t?  (from 
whom),  nn«  {after  whom). 
/T>12  f.  sing.  (l,a)  a  covenant. 

11^'  to  bend  the  knee,   to  kneel. 

Niph.    to   be    blessed.    Piel,  to 
praise,  bless  God.    Hithp.  to  be 
blessed  {i  in,  through). 
^^^2,  f.  (6,  a),  dual  D'3n3,  knee. 

HD")^  once  naii.  f.  (1  l,c)  a  bless- 
T  t: 

")2  (n^l  f.)  chosen,beloved.-^ure, 

clear;  also  ^wre  morally. 
illi^B  (13,  c)   terrour,   confusion; 

mostly  followed  by  panim  (of 
face). 

:i. 

^^^  to  redeem,  ransom,  recover. 

"  T 

23  (8,  d)  pi.  D^s^,  ni,  a  back. 
'7II3  ^0  6oMwc?,  Zimi^. 


7^^^  bound,   limit,   border.  —  ter- 
ritory. 
"lllil  to  be  or  become  strong. 

—  T 

"lUil  (6j  a)  ^^^  =  vir. — husband. 

— warrior. 
113;),  "l*;aKl,b)  adj.  ^iron^r. 

m^a-l  f-  {\0)  strength. 
T     : 

:)i)  (8,  a)  roo/. 

T 

''"Til  (6,  i)  «  kid. 

7*721  ^0  Z»e  or  become  great,  to  grow. 

— to  be  great,  exalted. 
"T7^  to  wall,  fence  up. 

nnH  f'  healing,  cure. 

T   •• 

''iil  go'i,  a  {Gentile)  nation;  the  Gen- 
tiles. 

"^21  (1>  a)  sojourner,  stranger,  fo- 
reigner. 

i^il  (1>  a)  a  whelp. 

'Pli^  (2,  h),  pi.  6th,  lot. 

T 

|t5  ^0  5/ieor,  to  cut  off. 

~T 

^YJ)  to  cut  off  or  f/oww. — to  cut  in 

— T 

two  parts,  divide. 
ITil  (6,  a)  jaiece,  ;?ar^ 

77])  fo  roll. — to  roll,  rush  in  (b^ 

-  T 

upon).     Hiph.  ban  ^o  roW  away. 

Q;1  conj.  also;  ui — nn  both — and; 
\- 
«^ri  02  «'n  she  also  herself. — yea, 

truly  ;  '  Tc?     although.  —  yet, 

nevertheless. 

7Dil   to   retribute,  to  recompense, 

-  T 

good  or  evil,  with  ace,  b^,  ). — 
to  ripen,  to  become  ripe.  —  to 
wean. 


\ 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 
7Qil  c.  (8),  pi.  D^Vna,  camel. 

T  T 

/•li'^il     (1»  a)     recompense. — ^rooc? 

deed,  benefit. 
TvA'D'Si  f-  (10)  retribution,  recom- 


207 

pi    (4, a)    corn,  grain;    meton. 

T  T 

bread. 
^Tr]  wax. 


pensej  benefit. 
22-i  to  steal. 

-T 

a:iil  il,h)  a  thief. 

^ — 

pil  prop,  to  cover;  hence  to  pro- 

-T 

tect. 
]^  {S,d)  garden. 

"li^il  to  rebuke,  with  n. 

Tin  Niph.  /o  6e  cut  off. 

—  r 

Dia,  DID  (6,  a),  bone. 

VV.T 

*^12|    to  cast  out  or  mj9.      Niph. 

—  T 

to  be  cast  out. — to  be  agitated, 
tossed. 

D^5  Hiph.  to  cause  to  rain. 

—   T 

D'ii^n  (6,  a),  pi.  c.  'ptfa,  rain,  heavij 
shower. 


p^l  fo  cleave,  adhere.     Pual,  /o 

'      -    T 

cleave  together.    Hiph.  to  make 
adhere.    Hoph.  partcp.  paiip  (is) 
cleaving. 
1^1  <o  speak;  to  range  in  order. 

~     T 

Piel,    to    speak.      Pual,    to   be 
spoken.    ISiph.  to  speak  together. 
Hiph.  to  subdue.  Hithp.  to  speak 
with. 
1^"^  (4,  a)  word,  speech,  command. 

T      T 

— affair. 
11)21  (6,  b)  honey. 


lil^  11  (Ija)    revolution. — age, 
generation. 

rwl  f.  «  door. 

p)1  to  hang  down. — to  be  weak. 

—    T 

7'7  adj .  low,  weak,  poor. 

D1  (for  m«)  2,  a.  6Zooc?.  —  blood- 

5Aec?,    blood-guiltiness ;     in   pi. 
D^p^TiS  ^^\^  bloody  man,  city. 
DD1  ^0  be  silent. 

~      T 

/IJ^I  f-  (13,  a)  knowledge, 
p*!],  f.  ni?i  adj.  sm«Z/,  ^/im. 
■^p"7  ^0  thrust  through,  to  pierce. 
"TT'ni  /o  tread  (on),  with  the  ace. ; 

~  X 

with  ^ :  metaph.  to  tread  down 
enemies. 
";|")1  c.   (6,  a),   suff.   >3"|i   (Dual, 

D''5"j"i),  a  way. 
t^"11  fo  see^,  ^0  inquire  (especially 

-  X 

ofan  oracle,  the  Lord).— to  ask 
for,  require :   ci  tn^  to  require 
the  blood  (of  any  one). 
]vi^1  to  grow  fat.     Piel,  to  make 

fat. — to  anoint. — to  regard  as 
fat  (an  offering  =  accept  it). 
Pual,  to  be  made  fat,  be  abun- 
dantly  satisfied. 

n. 

tj'rn  to  push,  cast  away. 

~  X 

n^il  f.  (10)  desire,  lust.— wicked- 


ness. 


t2 


208 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


HTT  to  be,  to  exist,  '•rv  imperf.  Kal 

T  T 

3  pers.  m.  s.  (he,  it)  shall  be: 
Avith  Vav  convers.  (he,  it)  was. 
Often  =  Kal  kykviTo,  and  it  was 
so  (that,  &.C.). 

/^^r\  (2,  h)  a  large  splendid  build- 
ing,  a  palace. — the  temple. 

*T^'n  to  go,  walk.  Hithp.  -rrVrinn 
to  go,  walk  about. 

77n  to  shine.     Piel  {to  make   to 

~    T 

shine  =)  to  praise,  and  intrans. 
to  boast.    Hithp.  to  be  praised. 
— to  boast  oneself. 
]n,  ""in  behold!  lol — whether  (in 

indirect  questions). — if. 
n-ir\,  n-in  behold I  lol  with  suff. 

••p;:!,  mr},  ^ivn. 
^S3H  (1  pers.  TfEH^)  to  turn,  turn 

over. — to  overthrow,  ruin. 
^prr  to  go  around,    to  surround. 

Hiph.  of  F]p_'^ 

"in  pi.  nnn  (8)  mountain. 

;)in  to  kill,  slay. 

~  T 

D"in  (related  to  ip-ijiJiog)  to  break, 

—  T 

pull  down,  destroy  (both  in  Kal 
and  Piel). 


T. 


jlJ^T  pron.  demon,  f.  sing.,  see  m. 
nt  f.  nsi,  rarely  ni,  pron.  demon. 

this.  After  the  subst.  it  usually 
has  the  article ;  when  put  be- 
fore it  without  an  article,  it  is 
usually  the  predicate,  "iiin  m 
this  (is)  the  thing;  rn— ht  this — 
that,  the  one — the  other;   Vn  n;| 


rv,  one  to  the  other.     With  em- 
phasis, this  same,  very. 
"jy^t  to  be  clean. 

"?^t  (jm  f.)  adj.  clean,  pure. 

"IDT  to  remember,  recollect,  call  to 

~  T 

mind. 

13t»  "IDT    (6,  c).   memory.  —  me- 
morial. 

77t  prop.nib^T  /opoMroM^,  whence 

~T 

partcp.  b)\\  squanderer,  prodigal. 
ni!2T  f-  (1^)  device. — wickedness. 

T    • 

IQt  to  cut.  Piel  (prop,  to  divide; 

—  T 

hence)  to  sing  hymns,  praises, 
with  b  or  ace.  of  the  person  ; 
a  of  the  instrument. 

]pf  (5,  a)  adj.  old;  C':]^}  elders. 

^1T  to  spread,  to  scatter. — to  sow; 

inT  y-\i  yielding  seed. — to  plant. 
^"It    (6,  a)  seerf.— prop,  and   fig. 

=  issue,  progeny. 

n- 

/Hn  to  twist,  to  bind. 

/^n  (6)  cord,  rope. 

/Un  to  act  corruptly.     Niph.  to 

—  T 

be  destroyed,  to  perish. 
"Ijn  to  bind  about,  to  gird. 

—  T 

in  adj.  (f.  thtt)  sharp. 

7in  (ph  "^VP)  to  cease. 

inn    (6)    cnstr.   -iin,    with   suff. 

i-iin,  pi.  c.  nirT,  chamber. 
^"fn  Piel,  to  make  new,  to  renew; 

-T 

Hithp.  to  be  renewed. 


Hebreiv  and  Efiglish  Index.  209 

^in  (G,  c)  new  moon.— month.      I  y2^  ^^  divide. 
b'T^>    b'^U    to   twist;    to    dance.]  p^ir\  (6)  part,  portion,  lot  of  land. 


Hiph.  to  shake. 

nty\n  f.  (lo)  a  waii. 

T 

b>r\    (6,h),    pi.    n')r}^   strength.— 

wealth. — virtue. 
Js^tOn  to  miss.  —  to  stumble,  fall. 

T     T 

— to  rniss,  opp.  to  «^  to  find, 
—to   sin  (3,  ),  bt).—to  forfeit, 
with  ace. 
J^tOn  with  suff.  i^m,  pi.  c.  \siDn 

failure,  sin. 
i^L^n  (l>b)  sinner. 

T    ~ 

J-)^^n  f-  cnstr.^  ns'^sn  5iw. — siw- 

T   ~ 

offering. 
DDH  ^0  6e  or  become  wise. 

~    T 

DDn  (4,c),  TTODn   f.    (11,  c),    pi. 

TT  '^^'• 

□'pan,  adj.  wise. 
ilDDn  f«  cnstr.  riMn,  wisdom. 

T  ;   T 

Pi^r\  to  be  weak. — to  be  sick. 

T    T 

^^^    to   be  wounded.      Piel,    to 

-    T 

wound. — to  profane.     Hiph. 'jnn 

to  loose. — to  profane. — begin. — 

begin  to  be.    Hoph.  to  be  begun. 

Q^^n  ^0  be  fat,  stout,  strong. — to 

—    T 

dream. 
D*)^n  ph  rii,  «  dream. 

Thfl    to  pass   by,   to   transgress. 

Piel,  to  change  (as  a  garment). 
Hiph.  to  change. 

vSn  to  draw   out.     Niph.    to   be 
'  -  T  I  -j"» 

delivered.     Piel,  <o  rfraw;  ou^. — 
/o  deliver.— to  strip,  spoil. 


Wn  (8,  a)  adj.  warm,  hot. 

T 

IDH  'o  desire,  to  covet. 

—    T 

nnn    f.    (H,  b)    for   rron;   (an;) 

T   •• 

warmth,  rage;  cnstr.  kh^math. 
TOn  f-  (10)  heat,  glow. — the  sun. 

T    ~ 

bf2r\  to  pity  Oi>).—to  spare  (with 
DDH  ^0  ^^  warm. 

—  T 

]n   (8,  b)   ^race,  favour.  —  grace, 

elegance,  beauty. 
^^n  ^0  instruct,  to  train  up. — to 

consecrate  (a  house,  temple,  &c.). 
QJjn  gratis,  freely,  for  nothing. — 

T   • 

in    vain.  — for   nothing,    unde- 
servedly. 

pn  to  be  gracious,  merciful,  com- 
passionate. Niph.  to  be  pitiable. 
Piel,  to  make  gracious.  Hoph. 
to  be  favoured.  Hithp.  to  im- 
plore favour,  mercy. 

Tj^n   to   be  or   become  profaned, 

"  T 

polluted,  or  defiled. — to  be  pro- 
fane, ungodly. 

^in  (5,  c)  profane,  ungodly. 
ion  Kal  not  used ;  in  the  deri- 

—  T 

vatives  it  denotes  kindness  and 
benignity. 

"IDH  with  suiF.  '-on  (6,  a)  kind- 
ness, mercy. 
on  (3,  a)  kind,  benevolent,  gra- 

•     T 

cious,  merciful.— pious,  holy. 


t3 


210 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


TVDT]  to  flee  for  shelter;  hence,  to 

T    T 

trust  in  (^). 
"non  to  want,  lack,  be  without. 

••    T 

IDH  adj.  wanting.  iVion  lacking 

"    T 

understanding.  —  subst.     want, 
lack. 
D^JSn  dual  (8,c)  the  hollow  hands, 

■~  ;  T 

the  fists. 
ysn  (6),  with  sufF.  'uon,  delight^ 

jjleasure. 
■^Sn  ^o  6ksA,  be  ashamed,^  con- 

founded.  Hiph.  ^o^jm?  ^o  shame. 
— intrans.  to  be  ashamed. 
ii^Bn    to  search  out,  explore,  in- 

—  T 

vestigate. 
^3n  Kal  not  used.     Pual,  to  be 

-  T 

set  free,  be  freed. 
"I^n    c.   (5,  c),   pi.    D> . ,   ni,   ew- 

closure,  court. — village. 
T'iirT  enclosure,  court. 

•    T 

;^r^r]  (10)  statute. 

't\ 

^pn  to  search. 

'-T 

Ilin*  Il"in  ^0  &e  rfry. — to  be  de- 

-T  "T 

solate,  waste. 
Q^in  adj.  f.  ni^n  rfry. — desolate. 

3in  f-  (6,  a)  sword. 

^"irr  desolation. 

□"in    Hiph.    D'^nn   ?o    rfeyo^e   fo 

-T 

destruction. — to  devote  to  God, 
to  consecrate. 
y^nn  (3,  a)  ditch,  trench.  — what 

is  decided,  decision,  judgment. — 
gold. 
\T)r\  (1,1>)  diligent.     Prof.  Lee, 
sharpened,  instructed,  prudent. 


ii^^in    (6,  a)    (pi.   c.  >'mn)  sherd, 

potsherd. 
^"in  to  plough,  till. — to  engrave. 

— to  form,  fabricate. — Metaph. 
to  devise,  machinate  evil. 
H^n    to   think,    purpose,    intend 

~    T 

(usually  in  a  bad  sense,  to  in- 
vent, devise).  Niph.  to  be  com- 
jmted,  reckoned,  counted.  Piel, 
to  compute,  reckon. — to  think, 
purpose  J  to  devise.  Hithp.  to 
reckon  oneself. 

^iDtl  to  hold  back. — to  withhold. 

~     T 

iT^rr   to   be  or    become    obscure, 

dark. 
"^li^rr    adj.,    pi.    a'3TrrT,     obscure, 

mean. 
"jJin  (4,  c)   bridegroom.  —  son-in- 

T    T 

law. 
DnTl  to   be  broken. — to   be   dis- 

"-    T 

mayed,  confounded. 


nUtO  to  slaughter,  especially  ani- 

~   T 

mals,  but  also  men  ;  to  slay. 
n^tO     (6,  a),    with    sufF.    Hnip, 

slaughter. — animals  slaughtered, 
meat. 
inZD  to  be  or  become  clean. 

1DD  to  hide,  conceal,  especially  in 

the  earth. — to  hide,  reserve. 
D^D  to  taste. —  met.  to  perceive, 

-    T 

discriminate. 
Pj")J3  to  tear  in  pieces,  to  rend. 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


211 


■)j>^\  ")i^^"'  (l>a)  fiver,  the  Nile; 

pi.  nn«'  streams. 
]^y^  to  be  or  become  dry,  to  dry 

••  T 

up.     Hiph.  to  dry  up. 
\£}y  (5,  a),  adj.  rrcjr  f.  (10),  dry. 

T  c.  (2,  a)  hand.     With  prepo- 

T 

sitions;  yiwith,  by;  T3  accord- 
ing to  the  means  of;  "ilf?  from, 

out  of;     T3,  T  bii,   Tb  T  b-^,  T  fl^ 

on,  by  the  side  of;  t  by,  n;  "?!? 
under  the  care  or  guidance  of 
any  one. 

^^>  inf.  c.  reu,  to  know. — be  ac- 

~T 

quainted  with.     Hiph.  to  make 
known,  show,  inform,  teach. 
^n*'   see  n^n. 

UV  with  suff.  w  (1,  a),  pi.  n^p^, 

a  c/ay. 
n^^,>  f.  (10),  pi.  D'Dv,  c?oye. 

T 

Tn^    (3,  a),    m;n'   f.   (10),   ow/y, 

•   T 

only    begotten.  —  solitary    one; 
only  one  (irv  to  be  [as]  one). 
'^n"'  Kal   not   used,   to  wait. — to 

"•  T 

cause  to  wait,  hope.     Hiph.  to 
wait. 
215'^  (only  in  the  imperf.  aȣ)';)  to 

-  T 

be  good,  well;    p  to  be  better. 
Hiph.  rp'n  to  make  good,  to  do 
well. 
I**^  wine. 

7^''  f.  Tr)y,  1  pers.  "'^yp^,  to  be  able. 
■7V  to  bear,  bring  forth. — to  be- 

—  T 

get. — Pual,  to  be  born.     Hiph. 


to  cause  to  bring  forth. — to  be- 
get.    Hoph.  to  be  born. 

"I^"*  (6,  a)  lad,  youth,  child, 
nib'^  {.  {12, -d)  a  girl. 

T ;  - 

Q>  a  sea. 

T 

D^D^  ^51,  ''5)1  see  dv. 

V^''  (-^j  ^)   ^^^   right;    ira*  t  ^^e 

'     •  T  •  :       - 

Aanc?  of  his  right  side,  i.  e.  his 
right  hand;  also  t  omitted,  the 
right  hand  (f.). 
T)yi  to  suck.     Hiph.  p^yr}  to  give 

suck,  to  suckle. 
ID''  to  found. 

~  T 

t]0'^  '0  ac?c?. — to  add  to  do,  to  do 
again  (c.  inf.  with  or  without  )). 

nS)^  (9,  b),  no;  f.  (11,  a),  adj  /mr, 
beautiful. — ^^rooc?,  excellent. 

>3>,  t3>  (6,  k)  6ea!<^y. 

Ji^iJ''  imperat.  n?,  inf.  c.  nx2  (2,  d), 

TT 

fo  yo  ow/,  go  forth, 
yj^i  Kal    not   used  =  i?2   ^0   set, 

-  T 

j9M^,  ;?Zflce.     Hithp.  ssTin  ^0  5e^ 
or    place    oneself,    br,   '3pV;    /o 
stand,  to  stand  before. 
"1-i''  to  form. 

T^p^  see  rjprr. 

yn^  fo  awake. 

Ip"    (4,  a),   n^r;.  f.   (n,  c),   adj. 

'tt 

precious, 
"^"y  to  fear,  to  be  afraid  (b  to  fear, 

"T 

be  anxious  for).     Niph.  nti:  to 
be  feared, 
'^-y    (5,  a)    constr.    ^^1:;    n«7.^    f- 


213 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


(11,  c)  constr.  nNT, /eciinw^r,  re- 
verencinff. 
*TT»  to  go  or  come  down,  descend. 

Hiph.  T")in  to  cause  to  go  down; 
to  send,  bring,  carry  down. 
n")''  (5,  a)  the  moon. 

—     "T 

1^T»  to  take,  seize  upon.    Niph.  to 

—T 

become  poor. 
2,^''  inf.  c.  n2\D,  imperat.  2^,  niTiJ, 

-  T 

to  sit,  sit  down. — to  dwell,  dwell 
■  in,    inhabit.      Partcp.    :itfv  in- 
habitant. 
n^''  Root  not  used,  to  subsist,  to 

T   T 

be  firm. 
^^>  to  deliver,  save. 

'y^'^  to  be  straight,  even,  right. — 

-   T 

Piel,  to  make  straight. — to  direct. 
— to  esteem  right,  approve. 

"T>^''  (4),  rr^\  f.  adj.  straight. 

T    T  ^^  ' 

")1^''  (7j  c)  uprightness,  rectitude ; 
-\p^'Q  more  than  is  right. 


2,^^  io  be  pained,  be  in  pain. 
'>nj^3  said  to  be  a  partcp.  of  Kal, 

•-;t 

from  -n3  formed  in  the  Chaldee 
manner  (as  mp,  partcp.  nsijj)  = 
piercing,  digging  through  (sc. 
they  are).  Another  reading  is 
ii5«3  (3  pi.  perf.  Kal). 
2Di3  (2,  b),  for  1313,  star. 

T 

■733,   *T2l3  to   be   heavy. — to  be 

-   T  "  T 

weighty,  honoured,  respected, 
mighty.  Niph.  to  be  {become, 
show  oneself)  honoured,  renowned. 


Piel,  to  honour. — to  make  ob- 
durate, to  harden.  Hiph.  to  make 
heavy,  grievous. — to  honour,  make 
honourable.  Hithp.  to  show  one- 
self honourable,  boast  oneself. 
T^liD    (5, a&b)    adj.    heavy. — nu- 

merous. 
"Ti33  (3,  a)  honour,  glory. 

T 

D^D  to  wash;    only  partcp.  nnis 

—  T 

washer,  fuller.     Piel,    to   wash 
(clothes) ;    metaph.  to  cleanse. 
Pual,  to  be  washed. 
1^55  (6,  a)  lamb. 

]n3   Kal  not  used.     Piel,  ^rrs  to 

prepare,  adjust,  adorn. — to  mi- 
nister, act,  or  officiate  as  a  priest. 
]n3  (7,  b),  pi.  D^:n3,  priest. 

]!)3  Kal  not  used.     Pilel,   ]:i3   to 

set  up,  establish. 
3,0  lo  lie,  speak  falsehood.     Piel, 

~T 

to  lie,  deceive.    Hiph.  to  convict 
of  falsehood.  Niph.  to  be  proved 
false. 
J2T3  (4,  a)  lie,  falsehood. 

T  T 

no,  nb  (1,  a)  strength, 

''3  that;  for,  because;  but. — D«  »3 

that  if,  that  since,  for  if,  but  if; 
unless,  except,  if  not;  but;  yet, 
nevertheless ;  that. 

1173  (6,  a),  pi.  c.  >ib3,  dog. 
773  to  complete. 

—  T 

□^3  Hiph.  D'^in,  D'bprr,  to  put  to 

shame,   make   ashamed. — to   in- 
jure, hurt.     Ni})h.  to  be  put  to 
shame;  dX^o  to  feel  ashamed. 
]3  adj.  upright;  adv.  rightly,  also 

thus. 


I 


Hebreio  and  English  Index. 


213 


D^3  to  collect^  gather. 

-  T 

")to  (Ij^O,  pi.  C'-,  ni,  harp  or 
nD3  to  cover,  conceal. 

T    T 

^^P3  (l,a)/oo/. 

5]DD  (6,  a),  with  sufF.  ^EpD,  silver. 

D^D    (6,  d),  with  sufF.  iors,  ioys, 

vexation. — anger. 
v]3  f.  (8,  d)    ^Ae  hollow,  palm  of 

the  hand,  hand;    dual  d'Qs,  pi. 
nisB. — pan,  spoon,  dish;  hollow. 
— handle  of  a  bolt. 
"133  to  cover,  overlay. — to  cover 

~   T 

over,  to  forgive,  pardon. — to  ex- 
piate.— to  appease. 

D*13  perf.  1  &  2  pers.  W3,  nna, 
to  cut,  cut  off,  cut  down.    Niph 


b. 


22b,  n^  (4,  d  &  8,  b),  pi.  nmV, 

ninnS,  ^Ae  heart. 
"TH^  separately,  alone;  ^xb,  ti-ii^, 

ill'?,  &c.  /,  /AoM,  Ae  alone. — hy 
myself,  by  thyself,  ^c. 
]I1/  (4,  a)  adj.  white. 

T  T 

ID/  adj.  w/a7e. 
nj^7  f.  the  moon, 

T  T  ; 

I^il/  to  put  on  a  garment^  to  be 

~  T 

clothed. 
t^O /)  li^n  /  outer  garment,  cloak. 
TVt)  f-  garland,  crown. 

t;  • 

□117  ^0  eo^,  consume. 

~   T 

on?  c.  (6,  a),  with  sufF.  ''r^r\b,food. 


_ .  .  mea#. — bread, 

to  be  cut  off' or  down.— to  be  di-  |  -j^'p    ^0    ^oX^e,    CG^c/^.  —  to    take, 


vided. — to  be  destroyed. 
2'^2  (6,  a)  lamb. 


choose,   by  lot.      Niph.    to   be 
taken,  caught.     Hithp.   to  take 


b^^   to  totter,   stagger,   stumble.  I      or  catch  hold  on  each  other,  to 
-  T  _  !      hang  together. 

Niph   to  stumble,    mi,  to  cause  |  ^^U,  ^^  ^^^^^      ^.-^   ^^  accustom, 
to  fall.    Hiph.  to  cause  to  totter,  :     -  t 
to    make  feeble. — to    cause    to 


stumble  and  fall.     Hoph.  to  be 
made  to  stumble. 
nJ13  to  write,  engrave. 


to  teach.   Pual,  to  be  accustomed, 
trained,  taught. 

HD?  "iohy  ?  adv.  interr.,  from  the 

T  T 

perf.  )  and  no  or  nri  q.  v. 


njn3,  njn3  (13,  c),   pi.  ni:ri3,  \y^^  to  mock,  deride,  scorn.  Niph. 


an  under  garment,  shirt. 
?)jn3  f.  (5,b),  pi.  nicrir,   constr. 

nioro,  suff  vera,  shoulder. 
iinS  '0  6efl^ — ^o  6eaf,  break  in 

-    T 

pieces. — to  beat  down,  rout. 


to   stammer.      Hiph.    to   mock, 
deride. 
^3/    according    to.    h    with    stat. 

cnstr.  pi  of  peh,  mouth  (irreg.). 
np7  to  take. — to  take  away. 

T^'Th  (G),   with    suff.  'np;"'?,  taking 
speech. — instruction. 


214  Hebrew  and  'English  Index. 

IDp7  «  gleaning. 
T^Ty)  to  lick,  lap. 

X)^}/  c.    (3,  a)  tongue  j    niD^enn  'b 

T 

perverse,  deceitful  tongue. 


IND    (1>  a)    strength;    generally 

as  an  adv.  greatly,  very. 
*liND  (6,  a)  pi.  cni^Q,  nii^a  light, 

luminary. 

rh2i^^  f-  pl-  ni'^SJ^'?  «  A:rai/<?,  both 

.    for  eating  and  slaughtering. 
^!)3.D  inundation,  deluge. 

V^'O  Hiph.  partcp.  from  pa  to 
understand. 

"liJUQ  (2,  b),  j)l.  im  and  6th,  for- 
T  :  • 

tificaiion,  stronghold;  batsar,  to 

cut. 

DiDI^D  f-  pl-   (of  TO^jn)   c/iozce, 

precious  things. 
nnto  (10)/eor. 

13,"TD    (2.  b)    a   large   plain. — a 

desert. — speech. 
mD  to  extend. — to  measure. —  to 

~  T 

apportion. 
r\1ui  f.  (10)  extension. — measure. 

T  • 

f\10  strife. 

ZOID  to  totter,  shake;  of  the  foot, 
slip,  slide.  Niph.  to  be  moved, 
shaken.  Hiph.  to  cause  to  fall 
or  come  down. 

"1D1D    (2,  b)     chastisement,    cor- 

T 

rection.  —  admonition,  warning. 
— instruction. 


^\)^D  (7,  b),  pl.  D^-    ni,  snare; 

yakash  (a  y),  to  lay  snares. 
r\^f2  to  die. 
mD  (6,g)  death. 

V  T 

n^t!^    (aa>d)    f.    (10)    counsel- 


wicked  counsel. — prudence,-  dis- 
cretion. 

TwH^  (9,  a)  sickness,  disease. 

nbnO  f-  (of  the  preceding)  id. 
T  — :  - 

liDnrj  (l,b)  want,  poverty, 
1pnf2  (2,  b)  inmost  jmrt. 
ni^PfD  f«  (10)   destruction,  ruin. 

— terrour,  fear. 
r\t^f2  f-  (10)  couch,  bed. 

r    • 

DJ/ZDD    only  pl.  D^nytpp,    nim'pa, 

dainty  meat. 
1ZDD  Hiph.  T'l^pn  to  rain,  cause 

-    T 

or  give  rain;  bi?  upon.   Niph.  to 
be  rained  upon. 
D''Q  ph  (from  obsol.  'q),  cnstr.  'a^ 

and   reduplicated   'p>n,   waters, 
water. 
D^DD  (2,  b),  only  in  pl.  or  dual, 

breeches,  trowsers,  or  drawers, 
for  the  priests. 

i^^Q  ^0  he  full,  filled. 

^^^p  (l,a)/Mke5S. 

nS7D  f-  (lO)  fulness,  plenty. 

^^^^'?D   f-   (11,0,   cnstr.  na^bn^ 

service,  work. 
]T?f2  (3,  a)  lodging-place,  an  inn. 

nDPho  and  nr^nbo  f.  (n ,  a  & 


13,  a)    a  war;    from  [lakham] 
to  consume. 

U?0  to  let  escape  or  slip,  to  de- 
liver. Hiph.  to  deliver,  to  brine/ 
forth.  Niph.  to  be  delivered;  to 
deliver  oneself,  escape.  Hithp, 
to  escape. 

ly^Q    to  reign,  to  be  king;   b-p^  n 

over. 
"^7^  (6,  a)  king. 

HD/D  f.  (12,  a)  queen. 
J1-')D70  f.  (l,b),  pi.  ni'^p^n,  king- 
dom.— royalty,  royal  dignity. 
D^nipte  the  jaws. 

npbt2,  npbo   (2,  b),  only  Dual 

D^np^/  tongs. — snuffers. 
n^D  Root  not  used;  Arab,  to  give. 

—  T 

nma  f.  (12,  b)  gift.^tribute.— 
T :  • 

an  offering  to  God;  especially  a 

bloodless  offering. 

]0,  as  a  prefix  "o  with  dag.  forte, 

sometimes  also  without  it,  when 
the  next  letter  has  Sh'va,  es- 
pecially when  the  letter  is  Yod, 
which  then  becomes  quiescent, 
poet.  ''Z'p,  ''I'q,  of  (a  part  taken 
from  or  out  of  a.  whole).— /rom. 
^DQ  io  mix,  mingle. 

WD  to  flow,  melt;  to  faint.  Hiph. 


Hebreiv  and  English  Index.  215 

y'^VD  ( 1 J  a)   long  and  full  upper 

garment,  robe,  mantle. 
U^VD  (dual)  bowels. 

X'VD  a  fountain. 

?VD  to  act  perversely ,  treacherous - 

~    T 

ly ;  3  of  the  thing  or  person. 
\VD    (for  n^yn)  purpose,  only  in 

|yp7,  with  suff.  ^2?ob,  Tj:???!?,  prep. 
because  of,  for  the  sake  of. — 
conj.  in  order  that. 

n"l^D  f-  (10)  cave,  cavern. 
TT  : 

TWVD  (9,  a)  work  (of  an  artificer). 

—  labour.  —  deed.  —  work  (the 
fruit  of  one's  labour). 

^'':ir2  to  find. 

T   T 

ni2iQ  f-  (10)  a  commandment.     ' 
7^*^12  f-  (10)  unleavened  bread. 
OniJD  Egypt. 
li^'^pD  (2,  b)  any  thing  sacred. — 

holy  place,  sanctuary. 
DipQ  c.  (3,  a),  pi.  ninipo,  place. — 

habitation,  home. — town. 
lipQ  (3,  a)  spring,  fountain. 

'     T 

n^pp  (9)  a)  purchase. — possession, 

wealth  (in  cattle). 
HKIQ    (9,  a)   a  seeing.— sight. — 


appearance,  countenance. 


to   cause  to  faint,  make  faint- \'^'2,'2!rV^  f«   (H^a)    chariot,   war- 
hearted. 


JD^Q  to  be  or  become  little. 


chariot. 
j  nO"IQ  f-  (10)  deceit,  fraud. 

WD,  I^VD,  ph  Q"^5^n  (8),  small- 1  ,»JJ  ',      -u     •  x       ^  •    j 

u-fj/i^,  w>iw,  I         •-:  ^  -"  3^^?3  (each  ••  impure)  a  friend,  a 


ness ;  hence,  a  little,  few. — 
■cvpp  lit.  05  a  little;  nearly,  al- 
most ;  shortly,  soon. 


companion. 
KS"1Q  remedy,  deliverance. 


216 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


^ilii^D    ''8,  a)    liill^    rock,    strong 

place. — refuge. 

'!]'^D  to  draw. — to  draw  out,  pro- 
long. Niph.  to  be  protracted, 
delayed.  Pual,  protracted,  de- 
ferred. 

iTTT^D   (1>  ^>)  destruction,  ruin. 

— snare,  trap. 
33^D  o.  lying  down,  couch. 

T   ;     • 

/li}f2  to  rule,   have  dominion   {rs 

~     T 

over). 
"IQti^rj  (2,  b)  a  watching,  guard- 

i)ig. — a  watch. — observance,  rite. 
mbti^D  f-  (13,  a)  a  watching. — 

place  of  watching,  post,  station. 
— a  keeping. — observance  or  per- 
formance.— a  charge. 
^ti^D    to    touch,  feel.      Piel,    to 

—    T 

grope.     Hij)h.  to  grope. 
"•/ID  adv.  when?  Ti'ch,  ^no  iv'  how 

—    T  -    t:  T  - 

long?  'no"nn«  after  how  long? 

piJIQ    (pl.  D^Rino,   f.  r\'p^^o)  adj. 

sweet;    neut.  sweet,   sweetness; 
pleasantness. 


t^'^ll  (3,  a)  prophet. 
IDZLi   Hiph.  iD^arr  ^  /ooA:. — to  be- 
hold. 
7^1^  (f.  rhii)  ad],  foolish. — wicked, 

XT  ^"^ 

impious,  ungodly. 

PO^H  f-  (lljC)  corpse,  carcase. 
X  ••  : 

1^2  J^al  not  used;  Arab,  to  be  clear 

—  X 

and  manifest,  Hiph.  T2ri  /o  de- 
clare, tell.  Hoph.  lan  to  be 
shown,  told. 


*72li  with  suff.  >^:]  before,  in  the 

presence  or  5i^A^  o/". 
P^i  inf.  c.  s-ip,  TO3,  to  touch  (with 

~x  '    ■ 

1,  ba,  bt). 
112  f-  to  flee. 

—  X 

TTJ  /o  vow. 

112  to  flow. — to  shine,  be  bright, 

—  X 

"ini  (4 ,  a)  stream. — river. 

TX 

T-')^  ^0  depart,  flee. 
1D^2  f-  slumber. 

712  to  obtain,  acquire  a  possession, 

-  X 

to  possess. — to  obtain  by  in- 
heritance, to  inherit. — to  divide 
for  a  possession,  to  apportion, 
Hiph.  VriDn  to  cause  to  possess, 
give  as  a  possession. — to  cause 
to  inherit. 
Il/riJ  f.  (12,  d)  the  act  of  taking 

possession. — inheritance. 
1^12  serpent. 

T  X 

11^2  to  stretch  out,  extend. 

X  X 

yZD^  to  plant. 

—  X 

11^2  to  watch,  guard. 

~  X 

)i)]^2  to  leave,  forsake. 

-  X 

1'22  Piel,  "ip:,  to  estrange,  alienate. 

~  X 

— to  seem  strange;  to  gaze  at, 
admire;  to  mistake;  to  reject. 
Hiph.  ">^?n  to  gaze  at,  regard, 
have  respect  to. — to  be  concerned, 
care  for  any  one.— ^o  recognise; 
to  acknowledge ;  to  be  acquainted 
with.  —  to  know,  discriminate. 
Niph.  133  to  feign  oneself  a 
stranger.  —  to  be  recognised, 
known.  Hithp.  to  feign,  dis- 
semble. — to  be  recognised,  known. 

lb!22  f.  the  ant. 


Dt22  (in  pause,  namas).   Niph.  of 

masas,  q.  v. 
T1D2  to  pluck,  tear  away. 

"  T 

^DJ  to  pour,  pour  out  (a  libation). 

— to  anoint  a  king. 

^DJ.  "^D^  (6,  b)  libation,  drink- 
offering. 

I^J  6,  d)    a   male  infant.  —  hoy, 

lad. — a  youth. — servant, 
U^^y^^  pi.  (of-iw:  l,a)  childhood. 

— youth. 
73  J  to  fall;  ^u:  fallen,  lying. 

~  T 

ti^3J  to  respire,  take  breath. 

~  T 

ti^SJ  c.  (6,3.)  breath. — meton.  any 

thing  that  breathes,  an  animal. 
— person. — soul,  as  the  principle 
of  life. 

TOJ>  niii  (6»  e)  truth,  upright- 
ness, faithfulness. — permanency; 
ns:  ny,  n^ib,  and  n?:  adv.  /or 
eyer. 

^JiJ    Piel,   V2?5   <o  5<n/}   ojf,   take 

—  T 

away. — to  deliver.  Hiph.  !?^2n 
to   take  away.  —  to    deliver  Qa^ 

")^{^  /o  watch,  preserve. — to  keep, 

~  T 

observe  (a  law,  mercy,  &"c.). 
'^^J^  shoot,  branch. 

r\7)2  to  be  pure,  innocent.     Niph. 

'tt 

np  to  be  pure,  innocent,  blame- 
less. —  to   be   clear,  free  from 
punishment. 
Qp^  to  avenge. 

D\)2  (4,  a)  vengeance. 

'tt 

]T)^  a  chatterer. 


Hebrew  and  English  Index.  217 

^Vl  Hiph.  r^zjn  ^o  reacA. — to  over- 

-   T 

pti^J  intrans.  to  be  arranged. — to 

kiss  (with  )  of  the  person). 
Piel,  to  kiss.  Hiph.  to  join, 
touch. 

Ili^^  (6,  a),  pi.  c.  n;c:,  an  eagle. 
n^'^JlJ  f.  (10)  a  trodden  way,  beat  en 

T        'J 

pa^A. — joa/A,  by-way. 
]i)n2  to  tear,  pluck  up. — to  tear 

~  T 

down,  destroy. 


^]2D  to  drink  to  excess;  partcp. 

T  T 

«ib    a    drunkard;      pass.    ni3d 
drunken. 
3^D    to  go   over,  go   round. — to 

—  T 

surround,  encompass. 
"inD   to  go,  travel  about;    Dii.   to 

go  round,  traverse  a  country  for 
the  sake  of  traffic. 
"inD  (with  suff.  nnn?)  profit,  gain. 

Tr3D>  "^Dli^  to  cover;  intrans.  to 

cover,   conceal  oneself.     Hiph. 
TTcn  to  cover,  protect. 
rOD  to  forgive,  pardon,  with  )  of 

—  r 

the   person,     Niph.   to  be  for- 
given. 
77D  to  raise  a  heap  or  mound ; 

—   T 

to  cast  up,  prepare  a  way. 
y?D  (6),  with  suff.  'r'7p,  a  rock. 

C^^D  Piel,  to  subvert,  overthrow. 

'—    T 

"TS3D  to  mourn. 

~  T 

u 


»-,- 


K 


218 

1S)D    to  write; 


Hebrew  and  English  Index, 
only  in   partcp 


"iDD  a  writer,  scribe. — to  number, 
count.  Piel,  to  number,  count. 
—  to  recount,  relate,  tell.  —  to 
speak,  talk.  Pual,  to  be  related, 
told. 
*1J1D    to    hide,    conceal    oneself. 

Niph.  to  he  hid,  lie  hidden.  Piel, 
to  hide,  conceal.  Pual,  to  be 
hid,  secret. 


2V  (1»  3)>  pl-  D'^i%  rii25?,  darkness, 
chiefly  of  clouds. — thick  cloud. 
TIl^  to  work,  labour;   to  till,  cul- 

"  r 

tivate;  to  dress. — to  serve,  work 
for  another. 

"T3^  (6,  a)  a  servant,  slave. 

"mV  to  pass  over. 

^'2V  ^  region  or  country  near  a 

river  or  sea. — aside,    ^ypx^from 
the  other  side;  lira  on  the  other 
side. 
137  (l^a)  a  witness,  Y>?irtcip.  of  TfS' 

mi^  tougo  or  pass  by. 

T  T 

n*TV  (ll>b)  assembly,  congrega- 
tion.— a  private  party,  a  gang, 
faction.  — family,  household. — 
swarm  of  bees. 

2r)^  Hiph.  to  cover  with  darkness. 

^la^y,  n:iy,  2^v  (once  with  suff. 

T  T'.,  T\ 

*125?)    a    musical  instrument,   a 
flute  or  organ. 
11^,  "7P  adv.  again. — again  and 
again. — besides. — yet,  still. 

]"11^,    ]'\^   (3,   a),    pi.    D>:ii>,    ni2i]?, 

T  T 

iniquity,  sin. 


t]?)^  to  cover  with  the  wings;   to 

cover  with  darkness. 
"li^  (l,a),  pi.  ni-iii",  skin  (of  man 

or  beast). 

?^  (8,  d),  m»  f.  (10),  adj.  strong. 

tp,    t'l^    (8,  c)    strength,    might, 
power. 

^]^  to  leave,  forsake,  desert. 
nnT;ir  f.  help. 

t;  V 

"IIOP   to  surround.     Piel,  "YEV   fo 

~   T 

crown. 
niZD^  f.  crown,  diadem. 

T  T  -; 

]'»^  (6,  h),  dual  D^D't',  eye. 

1^^  f.  a  city. 

7P  (prop,  constr.  of  Vi-  2, a)  pi.  c. 

'biS  with  sufF.  '>b'S,  ?i'b2?,  rbr,  &c. 
prep,  upon,  on,  ove^,  above, 
against. — of  the  objects,  means, 
instruments  by  which  any  thing 
is  effected  ;  by. — of  norm,  rule, 
standard  and  cause,  -n  wni  b? 
after  the  manner  of  Melchi- 
zedek ;    riDrbs^  in  this  manner; 

'  TT        - 

nn-b?'  wherefore  F — at,  by,  near; 
with. — with  idea  of  motion,  to 
the  question  whither  f*  upon, 
down  upon,  to,  towards. — fre- 
quently i.  q.  hti,  H  marking  the 
dative,  to,  for. — conj.  though, 
although. — with  other  particles. 
— '7i>3  according  to. 
(17^  to  go  or  come  up,  to  ascend. 

T   T 

—  to   arise  of  the   dawn.  —  to 
spring  or  grow  up. 
rhv  (9,  b),  a  leaf 

V   T 

'hv  see  ■:?. 

nb**/*^  ^-  work,  deed,  doing,  action 
(of  man,  in  a  bad  sense). 


Hebrew  and  English  Index,  219 


^^)J  Kal  not  used ;  i.  q.  ?Va  to  roll; 

~  T 

hence  to  repeat  an  action,  to  do 
habitually  or  effectually. — with 
),  to  affect  painfully. 
D^,  D^c.  (8,  a  or  d),  pi.  cw^  d^ooiv 

-  T 

people,  nation;  most  frequently 
of  Israel  opp  c;iii  gentiles. 
'^^^  to  stand. 

—  T 

^QJ?  to  toil,  labour,  travail. 

~  T 

y'Oy  labour,  toil. —  travail. —  sor- 

T   T 

row. — -fruit  of  labour. — mischief, 
iniquity,  sin. 
"DDy  to  be  deep,  unsearchable. 

2JV  (^-  ^-  ^J^)  prop.  name. 
33^  (4,  b)  cluster  of  grapes. 
>2^  (8,  f.);    rP3!?  f.   adj.   afflicted, 

distressed,  poor,  needy. 
IS^  (4,  c),  pi.  c.  rvr\zv,  dust,  dry 

T   T 

earth. 
Y^  (7 J  a),  with  suff.  ^^.S",  pi.  c^2y» 

c.  "'^,  ^ree. 
2jJJ;  to  travail,  suffer  pain. 

~  r 

2,'^^,  ^^J^  (6,  b)  labour,  travail 

— pain. 
nik^  f.  (ll,b),  for  rfp],  counsel, 

advice. 
UT^V  ^^J-  (^'^^  s^ron^r,  mighty.— 

T 

D::y  f.  (6,  a),   pi.  nra^,  bone.— 

body. 

2py  (5.  c),  pi.  c>2;?.v...  cnstr.  ^ip;?' 

'i;?^,  nii;?r,  heel.— hoof. 


i^pi?  adj.  (7,  b)  perverse,  false. 
^"ly  (Arab,  /o  6e  6ZacA-)  <o  become 

—  T 

c^orA;  or  rfwsA;. 
^1J7  c.  (6,  a)  evening. 

Q")"!^  adj.  (3,  a)  crafty,  cunning. 

T 

— prudent. 
^"1^   <o  arrange;    to  prepare   (a 

table);  ^o  array  (a  battle). — ^o 
place  together,  to  compare. 
n^V  to  be  cunning,  subtle. 

—T 

JliD^y  f-   craftiness,    cunning.  — 

T     \  r 

n'Z^y  ^0  work. — to  make. 

T    T 

y^^  to  smoke. 

■^^^  Piel,  to  make  rich. 

-    T 

Jlj;  c.  (8,  b),  contracted  from  ni|, 
/ime,  season. 

^^"^  Vadv.  now. 


n 


m 


9. 


-)^3  (I,  a),  but  pi.  c.  ns2,  orwa- 

mental  head-dress,  turban. 
niD  ^0  redeem,  ransom.  - 

p!)3  to  move  to  and  fro.  Hiph. 
to  move;  cdiwsat.  to  give  out ;  to 
get,  obtain;  to  further. 

ni'lD  f-  wine-press. 

T3  adj.  purified,  pure,  an  epithet 

of  gold ;  then  for  refined,  pure 
gold. 
"HtD  <o  disperse.    Piel,  fo  disperse, 

scatter. 
n9  (forn^>c,irreg.)  moj^^A;  nQ-';«  hb 

.       ^  i      *moM<^   /o    mouth.— aperture. -- 

]^p};  to  convict  of  per  cerseness.      j      g^g^^^  part,  portion.  — word; 


u2 


220 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


^cr  according  to  the  word  of,  in  D"1S  to  give,  distribute.    Hiph.  to 


proportion ,  according  to;  "iii'M  'DS 
according  as,  even  as  (and  iirw 
omitted),  so  as,  so  that;  'd"?  in 
proportion,  according  to;  ""B  ^v 
according  to  the  word  or  com- 
mand; also  according  to. 
n^D    (6.  a),    pi.    c.    >3bQ,    brook, 

stream. 
73  prop,  a  turning  to,  a  regarding; 

hence  "'je  as  conj.  lest,  for  fear 
that,  lest  haply. 
n^D  f.  (10)  corner. 

T  • 

Q^Ti3    pi.  pearls ;    others,    red 

corals. 

^"-S-']  (^,  a),   with   sufF.   'i"!??,    a 
J/^D  [    wound. 

■^pD  ^0  i?i5iY. — to  examine.    Niph. 

to  be  missed.  —  to  be  visited, 
punished.  Piel,  to  muster.  Pual, 
to  be  mustered,  numbered.  Hiph. 
to  set  over,  appoint.  Hoph.  to 
be  set  over,  have  the  oversight  of. 

DH^pD  pl-  (of  1??,  1,  b)  com- 
mands, precepts. 

"ID  a  young  bull,  bullock. 

n*1D  f-  for  ^"^3   (10)   yoMn^'  cow, 

TT  ^' 

THD  to  separate.     Niph.  to  be  se- 

—  T 

parated;  also  fo  separate  oneself 
Qp,  bi-n  /rom  any  one).  Piel, 
to  go  aside.  Pual,  partcp.  se- 
parated. Hiph.  to  separate. — 
to  scatter,  disperse.  Hithp.  to 
separate  oneself,  to  be  sundered. 
"•"ID  (6,  i),  with  suff.  3  pers.  pi. 

urr"\B,  fruit, produce;  ns  '^f^S/ fruit- 
tree. 


cJeave,  divide  the  hoof. 
nj?"lB  Pharaoh  {king),  the  title  of 

i;  - 

all  monarchs  of  Effypt  down  to 
the  Persian  invasion. 
yiD  to  break,  tear  down,  demolish. 

0*^3  to  break,  crush 

i^lD  i.  q.  cie  to  break  bread,  with 

-T  "^ 

b  to  give  or  distribute  (it)  to. — 
tosnread:  e.g.  a  garment;  to 
spread  abroad  (metaph.). 
tOlt^B  to  strip  or  put  off  a,  garment. 

—    T 

Piel,   to  strip,  pillage,  plunder. 
Hiph.    to   strip   a    person. — to 
strip  off  a  garment.     Hithp.  to 
strip  onesef. 
r\r\^^    f.    with   suff.   m^e,    pi. 

a\7i\rE,  flax. 
^rSD    (6,  i),   pi.    D;n5,   simplicity, 

folly. — simple,  inexperienced,  ig- 
norant. 
nnB  to  spread  out,  &e.    In  Piel, 

T    T 

to  deceive,  seduce  (=  avraraw). 
nn3  to  open. 

~    T 

yjl3    suddenness;   yns  adv.  sud- 
denly. 
JIB  f'  (8,  e)  piece,  crumb,  morsel. 

pliJ  to  be  equitable. 

p^'^l  adj.  (I,  b)  jMj?^ — righteous. 

p*T[iJ  (6,  a),  with  suff.  *pi2,   and 

r\jry^  (11,  c)  justice,   equity. — 
righteousness.  . 
iy^-^  Zion  (h  oj). 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


221 


^T*^  (1,  a)  hinge. 

DTDI  ^'  dish,  bowl. 

"IDii  (6,  a),  with  suff.  >yy$,  wool. 

IV^   (^»  ^)    ^  stepping,  going. — 

step,  pace. 
]S)^  to  hide. — to  lay,  treasure  up. 

-    T 

■)S)jJ  only  imperf.  ie^*';  to  turn. 

—    T 

liDiJ  (pi.  D'"!ev)  6Jrd;  especially  a 

sparrow. 
IliJ  to  tie  ov  bind  up. — to  shut  up. 

*12i  (8)  ^^].  strait,  narrow — subst. 

adversary,  enemy  j  distress,  ad- 
versity. 

TVy^  f-  (10)>  for  ^"i^j  female  ad- 

versary,  a  rival. — distress,  ad- 
versity. 


P- 

'^'^\)  to  collect,  gather. 
n^p  to  bury.     So  also  in  Piel. 
13p  (6>  a),  with  suff.  '-Q|7,  though 
in  pause  "ap,  pi.  cap,  nV,   se- 

ti^^p  /o  separate,  consecrate. —  to 

be  sacred.     Piel,  to  consecrate, 
hallow. 
"^'yiT)  adj.  (3,  a)  Ao/y. — 5ef  apart, 

'  T 

sacred,  holy;  of  men,  saints. 
^"Tp  (6,  c)  holiness. — holy  place. 
mp  /o  wait  for,  hope  in. 

t't 

^ip  (l,a),  pi.  ni,  voice. 
Qlp  (once  perf.  c>»i;;)  <o  ri^e. 
HQip  f.  (10)  Aeis^Af. 


1!lp  to  dig  a  well. 

]JOp  (8,  a)  little,  small  (prop,  and 

fig.)- — young,  younger. 
H/p  Kal  not  used.     Niph.  to  be 

made  light  of,  to  be  despised; 
partcp.  despised,  mean.  Hiph. 
to  make  light  of,  to  despise. 

]wp  (3,  a)  shame,  contempt. 

'  T 

77p  to  be  light.  —  to  be  lessened, 

-  't 

abated. 
J^^lp  Piel,  to  be  jealous.    Hiph.  to 

provoke  to  jealousy. 
niA^p  f>  (12,  h)  jealousy. — envy. 

T^^p  to  form,  create. — to  get,  ob- 

t't 

tain. — to  buy. — to  possess. 
r]2p    (9,  b),   pi.    D'?p,   nijp,  reed, 

cane.  —  sweet  cane.  —  stalk  (of 
wheat). 
ITl^p  f.  a  dish,  charger. 

yp    (8,  b)    end,   limit    (of  space, 

time,    condition,     or    circum- 
stances). 
HiJp  (9,  b)  end,  limit. 

v't 

Hikp  f-  (11>^)  ^^d,  extremity. 

t't 

7t^Jp  (3,  a)  a  judge. — leader,  chief  . 

— prince. 
C^^{p  to  be  angry,  wroth  (■??,  b«  of 

the  person.     Hiph.  to  provoke 
to   anger.      Hithp.    to    become 
angry. 
■^^p  to  cut  down,  reap. 

— 'T 

T^p  (3,  a)  fruits  cut  down,  har- 

•     T 

vest;  hence  time  of  harvest. 
i^lp  to  cry,  call  out. 

t't 

2np  to  draw  or  come  near. 

~'t 

u3 


222 


Hebreiv  and  English  Index. 


nnp  ice. 

'PDIp.  dual  D^tenp.,  ankles. 

ynp  to  tear. 

yip  to  close,  press  together  (the 

lips  or  eyes),  to  wink,  &c.,  de- 
noting fraud,  cunning. 
2,U}p  to  attend  [lit.  to  sharpen.  G.]. 

Hiph.  (with  p«  ear),  to  prick  up 
the  ear  to,  to  attend  to,  hearken. 


1. 

nj^l  to  see. 

T     T 

V!)ik^  head. — head,   chief,  leader; 

chief  of  a  family. 
nil"l    ^0  be  or   become  manyy  to 

T     T 

multiply. 
^T^  f.  (6,  a),  with  suff.  '•)y^_,  foot; 

du.  D^ba"]  Me  ^wo  /ee/.— pi.  d'|;:") 
{steps)  times. 

-  T 

Q"in  Niph.  □I'l:  to  lie  in  a  deep 

-  T 

sleep. — to  sink  down  stupified. 
C]"71  to  follow  after.— to  pursue, 

persecute. — to  put  to  flight. 
3n")  to  ^et  insolently.' — to  urge, 

~      T 

press  upon;  to  be  urgent  (with), 
ni")  c.  (l,a),  pi.  nirai,  nim,  air, 

breeze. — breath;  metaph. vanity, 
folly. — spirit,  soul. —  mind,  spi- 
rit, disposition. — wind. 

Q1"l  to  be  high. 

^ni  to  be  or  become  wide,  large. 

-  T 

Hiph.  ynf}  to  make  wide,  en- 
large. 


3m  (6j  c)  width,  breadth. 

□m   f-    (6,  d)    the  womb.  —  the 

bowels;  love;  compassion. 
2!^"^     (1,  a)     contention,     strife, 

quarrel. 
331  to  ride  either  on  an  animal 

~     T 

or   in   a   chariot;     partcp.   351 
a  rider. 
nt21  to  cast,  throw.     Piel,  n^n  to 

T     T 

deceive  (prop,  to  make  fall). 
0121  to  tread. — to  trample  under 

-  T 

foot. 
pi  to  shout. 

~     T 

pi  (pl.  D7"j),  adj.  (rrin  f,  10)  evil, 

bad,  worthless. — evil,  wicked. — 
I??  S?T  of  an  evil  eye,  i.  e.   en- 
vious, malignant, 
pi  (rarely  •s\-\)  badness. 

pi  (1,  a),  for  nyi,  acquaintance, 

companion,  friend. — one  beloved, 
lover. — neighbour,  fellow. 
3P1  to  be  hungry. — to  suffer  from 

••      T 

famine.       Hiph.    to    cause    to 
hunger. 
3p1  (4,  a)  hunger.— famine. 

T     T 

ipi  to  tremble,  quake.     Hiph.  to 

—  T 

tremble. 

T    T 

riPI  evil  (prop.  fem.  adj.)  from 


X     T 


nSI  io  Aan^  c?oww  the  hands. — 

T     T 

to   decline. —  to  sink  down. — to 
relax,  abate,  to  desist.     Hithp. 
to  relax  oneself,  be  slothful. 
P31,  '^31  to  tread,  trample  upon. 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


223 


especially  of  water,  to  trouble  it. 
Niph.     partcp.    irsn:    troubled, 
made  turbid  by  trampling.  Hithp. 
CE^nn  to  humble,  submit  oneselj'. 
nii"1  to  delight,  take  pleasure  in. 

T    T 

]'lii"1    (3,  a)    delight,  satisfaction, 

acceptance. — object  of  delight, 
acceptance.  —  wdl,    pleasure. — 
good-will,  favour,  grace. 
^pl  (4,  a)  rottenness. 

T   T 

J/t^1  to  be  wicked.     Hiph.  r'\p")n 

~      T 

to  declare  guilty,  to  condemn. — to 

cause  mischief. — to  act  wickedly. 

i^l^T  (4,  a),  nr^n  f.  adj.,  wicked, 

T     T  T    T    : 

ungodly. 

J^ti^n  (6,  a),  with  suff.  iy\2h,  wicked- 
ness. 

n^^n    f.   (cnstr.   r.yir-ji    no   pi.) 

T  ;      • 

wickedness,  ungodliness. 

IVtVJ  (1,20  flesh. 
V^21L},  a  week. 

~  T 

ny^n^  oath. 

T  I 

y2,''D    ^0  be  or  become   satisfied, 

—    T 

filled  Qp,  2  of  the  thing).  Hij)h. 
to  satisfy  (]o,  a  of  the  thing,  ) 
of  the  person). 
^3li^  abundance,  plenty. 

T    T 

Vyii  (cnstr.  rntJ,  f.  nr^uO  seven. 

Dual,  s;n?it:  sevenfold. 
^'y<!)  fo  swear  (oaths  were  usually 


13t^  <o  break,  break  in  pieces. — 

—     T 

to  buy  or  sell  corn.  Hiph.  to 
cause  to  break  through.  — to  sell 
(corn).  Hoph.  to  be  broken, 
afflicted,  distressed. 

"IH^  more  commonly  "qp  (6  b), 

in  pause  "i2uj,  from  "ii^",  a  break- 
ing; sorrow,  vexation,  calamity, 
destruction. — grain,  corn. 

r)2,'^  to  f^st  from  labour.    Niph. 

—    T 

to  cease,  have  an  end.  Hiph.  to 
make  or  let  rest  from  labour. — 
to  make  to  cease. 

r\'2.'^   c.    (cnstr.   m^i),  with  suff. 

T    - 

in3U';    pi.  n'imip),   day  of  rest, 
sabbath. 
^yi)  to  err. 

"TI^   (dual   nn^,    cnstr.   »-to)    the 

breast. 
TVD  to  treat  with  violence,  to  op- 

press.  —  to  attack,  invade.  —  to 
plunder. — to  (lay)  waste,  destroy 
(e.  g.  a  land).  Niph.  to  be  laid 
waste.  Piel,  to  spoil,  waste, 
ruin.  Pual,  pass.  Hoph.  to  be 
spoiled,  laid  waste,  wasted. 

mii/  (9,  b)  plain.— field. 

VT 

i^yi}  evil,    wickedness. — evil,   ca- 

lamity. — worthlessness,  vanity. 

"2!^^  to  turn,  return — to  turn  away 
from. — to  cause  to  return,  bring 
back. — torestore. — Hiph.  tocause 
to  return,  to  bring  back. — to  turn 
away  (anger). — to  return,  give 
back,  restore.  Hoph.  to  be 
brought,  led,  given  back,  returned. 


"confirmed    by   seven   victims).   "^'^J^O,  a),  cni^,  an  ox. -herd  of 
Niph.  rs^r:  to  swear,  with  i  by, 


'':to. 


oxen. 
ZOn^  io  slaughter,  kill  (animals). 


224 


pTVV  to  laugh,  abs. — hii  to  smile 

upon. — b^->  b  to  laugh  at.     Piel, 
to  rejoice. — to  sport,  play. 
"inii^  to  be  black. — (denom.  from 

"ynxD  q.  V.)  prop,  to  do  early; 
hence  to  seek  early,  diligently. 
Piel,  to  seek  early,  also  diligently. 

Snti^  (3,  a),  nnn^  f.  (10)  adj.  black. 
in^  (6,  d)  the  dusk  of  the  morn- 
ing ;  hence  dawn,  morning. 
Jinii^  Niph.  to  be  marred  or  spoiled 

~    T 

by  rotting. —  to  be  corrupted 
(morally).  —  to  be  laid  waste. 
Piel,  nrnp  to  destroy. — to  cor- 
rupt, pervert.  Hoph.  to  be  cor- 
rupted, spoiled. 

I^lt^  officer,  overseer  or  magistrate. 

"yi]^  to  be  grey-headed. 

nH''!^  f.  (10)  grey  hair. 

XV^  (1,  a)  speech,  discourse. — 
complaint. 

^2"^  to  lie  down:   especially  to 

~    T 

lie  down  to  sleep  or  to  rest  one- 
self. 

r\yt}  to  forget. 

—    T 

]"»2)ii^  a  knife.     Etym.  doubtful. 
7Dli^    to    act    wisely,    prudently. 

—   T 

Piel,  to  act  wisely.  Hiph.  to 
look  at. — to  be  or  become  in- 
telligent, wise,  or  prudent;  to 
act  wisely,  prudently ;  and  to 
make  prudent,  to  teach. 

/Jl^»  /^ID  (in  pause  bsto)  regard, 

estimation. — intelligence,  under- 
standing. 
]3^  to  lie  down,  to  rest. — to  rest, 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 

abide. — to  dwell. — to  dwell  (in), 
to  inhabit, 

]DI£^  (5,  a),  f.  nm%  pi.  ni^Dip,  in- 
habitant.— neighbour. 

rh'^,  ^h"^  to  be  quiet. 

T    T  T   T 

rivli^  f.  (cnstr.  m^^,  no  pi.  abs.) 


quiet,  prosperity . — carelessness, 
negligence  of  God. 
H/^  to  send.      In  Piel,  to  send 

~   T 

forth  =  to  excite  {it). 
]'rh'^  (2,  b),  pi.  niDn^p,  a  table. 
TJ;)^   Hiph.  'ryby5r^  to  throw,  cast 

(bx  into,  3,  bv  upon,   ]n  from; 
vjni^  behind  him,  i.  e.  to  despise). 
77^  to  plunder,  spoil. 

—    T 

77]^}  (4,  a)  spoil,  plunder,  booty. 

T    T 

Q7ti^  to  be  entire,  i.  e.  sound,  safe. 

-  T 

— to  be  at  peace.     Piel,  dVcj,  dVio 
^0  preserve,  keep  uninjured. — to 
complete. — to  restore. — to  repay. 
— to  requite,  recompense. 
Uw^  (3>a)  health,  welfare,  pros- 

T 

perity,  peace. 
Dli/  there. 

T 

D^  (7,  a),  pi.  nin^S  a  name. 
IDIl)  Hiph.   to  destroy.  —  to  de- 

~    T 

stroy  (persons,  nations).  Niph. 
pass,  of  Hiph. 
'^f21£)  only  pi.  u^i^xd  (cnstr.  '•ncj,  with 

suff.  "Tj^aip)  heaven,  the  heavens. 
HDl^  io  s/jme  cheerfully.  —  fo  be 

~    T 

TOt^  (5,  a),  rrnnip  f.  ady,  joyful. 
nilDli^    (12,  b)  ;oy,   rejoicing.— 
mirth. 


Hebrew  and  English  Index. 


225 


lOQli^  to  let  go,  remit  (a  debt). — 

~    T 

to   throw   down.     Niph.   to   be 
thrown  down. 
W^72>^  heaven  (cnstr.  "p^iJ,  pi.  m.)- 

rh^'V    f.   (12,  b)   a  garment,   a 

T     \      • 

mantle. 

r\V^Ut,  r\V^^  f-  (10)  news,  ti- 
T      :       T  \  : 

dings. — information,  report. 
J^Dt^  to  hear. — to  listen  (with  ace. 

—    T 

^N,  ),  3  to  any  one). — to  hearken, 
obey.     Piel,  to  cause  to  hear,  to 
summon.    Hiph.  to  cause  to  hear 
or  be  heard. 
ID'^  to  keep,  watch,  guard.  —  to 

~    T 

preserve,  protect   (with   ace.  3, 
bi-i,  h'p  of  the  object,  with  ■pfrom 
or  against). — to  keep. — to  keep, 
observe  (ace.  ^^,  bs). 
]^^  c.  (8,b)  a  fooM  (prop,  and  fig.). 

— ivory. 
J^J''^>  to  hate. 

••  T 

r\yi)  f.   (11,  a),  pi.  D':uj,  ni:^,   a 

T  T 

year, 
yyf)    to  sharpen,   e.  g.    a   sword ; 

partcp.  ]^ya  sharp. 
ly i^  (4,  b)  a  hair;  collect,  hair. 

T  •• 

nS'i/  f.  (11,  a),  dual  c^nDiD,  pi.  c. 

T   T  •-  T  . 

ninE^%   lip.  —  speech,  words.  — 
language. — brim  of  a  vessel. — 
shore  of  the  sea ;  bank  of  a  river. 
nS)'^  Kal  not  used;  to  pour  out. 

—    T 

nnS^  f.   (12,  b)  female  servant, 

T  ;    • 

handmaid;   Lixt.famnla. 
J23li^  to  judge,  administer  justice. 

—    T 

— to   condemn,  punish. — 'coiij   a 
judge,  ruler. 


I^'SJ^S)^  a  serpent,  adder. 

^3^  to  pour  out. — to  shed.  Niph. 

/o  6e  poured  out.     Pual,  /o  6e 
^Aeri.  Hithp.  tjEn^'n  fo  6e  poured 
out. 
pg^  ^0  cree/9. 

7p^  to  weigh. 

^p*^  (6,  a),  pi.  c.  '•bpuS  a  shekel. 

C]p^  Niph.  (prop,  to  bend  for- 
ward in  order  to  see). — to  look 
out.     Hiph.  to  look. 

")pti^]  (6,  a)  lie,  falsehood. 

^pp  I  shakar,  to  lie. 

T^ID  (l,b),  only  pi.  branches  of 

•   T 

a  vine. 
C^")^  /o  ^Mrn,  consume. 

}i)1^  (6,  c),  pi.  D^^-iT^,  root. 
br\^  to  plant. 

—    T 

pJlt^  /o  6e  5^i7Z,  ^0  rest,  to  abate, 

'       -    T 

of  waves,  of  strife. 


n- 

mi^n  f.  (10)  desire,  will. 

-^Wn  (6,  f.)  form. 

r\2D  f.   (10)   a  chest. — ark  (of 

T     " 

Noah,  built  in  the  form  of  a 
chest). — the  ark  in  which  Moses 
was  exposed. 
ni^^3/^  f.  (10)  a  coming  in,  being 

T  I 

stored  up. — income,  profit. — pro- 
duce, fruit ;  trop.  result. 

r^y^^D  f-  (10)  understanding,  pru- 

T 

dence. 


226  Hebrew  and  English  Index, 

T^yST^rS  only  in  pi.  perversity, 

T         ;    ~ 

frowardness. 

rhry\r\  f.  (is,  a),  with  sufr. 

\"^bnin,  expectation,  hope. 
nriD^n  f-  (is,  a),  but  pi.  ninDin 

proof,  rebuke. 
n^yin  f-  (ll»b)  abomination. — 

T  " 

abominable  act. 
DS^y^^D  f.  pl-  (ffom  rroyin  11,  a) 

swiftness. — wealth,  treasure.  — 
brightness,  splendour. 

n"liil  f«  (10),  instruction,  direc- 

T 

h'ow,  precept. — law. — manner. 
n^Ii^^/n  f.  help,  deliverance. — pur- 


pose, enterprise. — counsel,  wis- 
dom. 

DTID  f.  (c.  suff.  ^nnri'  ^j^nnri'  vnnn^ 
rrnnri'  i^^nnni  orrnnri)  prop,  what 

is  below. — adv.  below,  beneath. — 
prep,  under. — instead  of.  —  in 
return  for. — on  account  of. — be- 
cause that,  because. 

i^^b^\D  only  pl.  Dwbnn  diseases. 
l^^nn  (1,  b)  pl.  DV,  ni,  suppli- 
cation. 


__^    L     r  scholar. 

^f2D  to  take  hold  of. — to  hold. 
D?!3il  to  be  completed,  ended. — to 


cease. 
D''Dn   (3,  a)  perfect. — whole.  — 

'      T 

Upright,  sincere. 
nn  f-   ^^ci   (10)  adj.  whole,  per- 

T  ■^ 

feet,  sincere,  honest. — subst.  in- 
tegrity. 

]r\  or  ]p[  only  pl.  can,  nn  huge 

T  — 

serpents,  sea  monster;  others, 
jackals. 

nyFI  Piel  is-n  ^0  ai/ior. — to  render 

—    T 

abominable.  Niph.  to  be  ab- 
horred, detested;  to  be  abomi- 
nable. 

TViDPS  f.  (10)  expectation,  hope. 


(These   words   Avere   omitted   in   their 
alphabetical  place.) 

jn^TJ^  strength. 

*)1?i^  intimate  friend ;  leader. 


ENGLISH    AND    HEBREW 
INDEX. 


A. 

Abominable,       DJ/JIJ        (partcp. 

Niph.). 
Accusation,  n^JO^* 
^^h    7*3    (prop-   a   subst.,    8,  d, 

usually  followed  by  Makkeph). 
Anger,  C]J^. 

Anoint,  ^"Q^  (propr.  to  pour  out). 

T  T    •• 

Assuredly  (the  Hebrew  idiom  is 
by  the  repetition  of  the  verb  in 
inf.  absol.). 

B. 

Basket,  7D. 

Be,  been,  HNI-     See  522,  e. 

Bear  (=  give  birth  to)  '77>. 

-T 

Bear,  to,  11,  ^T]' 

Before,    DHZD    (before,  of  time) ; 

"•^El/  (before  the  face). 
Best.     See  Good. 
Better.     See  Good,  and  193  sqq. 
Bind,  1"):^. 


Black,  '■■)sm,  in^. 

T  T 

Bless,    "^H.      To    bless    oneself 

(Hithp.). 
Blood,  Ql. 

T 

Born.     See  to  bear. 

Boy,  nb\  -1^;. 

Boys,  bn'^V 

•T  ; 

Branch,  "l^i^. 
Bread,  Un?- 
Breadth,  2111. 
Brethren,  DTTi^i- 

Bring,  J^'Q  (to  come;  Hiph. 
cause  to  come).  2^1^  (Hiph. 
to  bring  again,  back,  return, 
restore). 

Broken-hearted,  to  be.  Niph.  of 
1211)  (with  or  without  nb). 

-    T 

Brother,  Hi^- 

T 

Burn,  ^"y^ ;  Ip''  (to  burn  slowly, 

-T  '-T 

steadily). 
Bury,  12p. 

But,  '•S,  "^i^. 


228 


English  and  Hebrew  Index. 


C. 


Camel,  7Q3  (pi.  n^bo-i). 

T  T  ' 

Child,  -r|?\ 

Children,  Q>^1,  DH'^^ 

Choose,  ini,  n")2. 

-    T  TT 

City,  n^p. 

•  T 

C/eaw,  /o  6e  or  become,  inZD' 

*•    T 

Clean,  adj.  "linZD- 

T 

Clothes,  ^y2.. 
Cloud,  thick,  3^  (v). 

T 

Cluster,  2^V.  ^''S^St. 
Collect,  y:ip. 
Cowe  (down),  ■7n'». 

—  T 

Command,  XVi^  (Piel  of  ni2,  obsol.). 
Commandment,  TVil'O- 
Compassion,  have,  7^n  (7^). 

~  T  ~ 

Covenant,  iT'13,« 
Corer,  rTD3- 

T    T 

Covet,  ion- 

-    T 

Cow,  n")3 ;  "i^ii:^  ox. 

TT 

Create,  i^")2. 

TT 

Crown,  1J13  ;  IT  (an  ornamental 

border  round   the  top  of  the 
altar). 

Cry  out,  to,  p^T  (with  )). 

Cry  out  or  aloud,    to,    ^^■lp   (to 

t't 

call). 
Curse,  Tl^^. 

—  T 


Cwrsec?  (partcp.)  ■^^■^^^. 

Cut,  m:^. 

—  T 

D. 

Daughter,  JHS,. 

Dflry,  DV.     Days,  D''D^ 

•    T 

Death,  J-|1D  (6,  e). 

VT 

Deliver,  7^J  (Hiph.  to  cause  to 

~  T 

deliver). 
Desert,  to,  QtJ^. 

~  T 

Desolate,     to    make,     ^T^T]      (to 

"■  T 

destroy). 
Destroy,  '^O^  (utterly) ;  '^2i^  (in 

-    T  -    T 

Hiph.  =  to  cause-to-perish). 
Destruction,  r^DHD- 

T    •    ; 

Devour,  ^^i^. 

-    T 

Diligent,  1MD- 

•     T 

Do,  n'w- 

T    T 

Do  good,  to,  3tO^« 

-  T 

Dog,  nb3. 

Door,  rh^.- 

Dream  (verb  and  subst.),  D^H- 

—   T 

Dry  (land),  H^l^a^ 

T    T  — 

Dry  (dry-up),  \i}y. 

-  T 

Dust,  *13^. 

T   T 

Dwell,  ^^l)*^  (to  sit,  dwell,  abide) ; 

—  T 

"j3^  (to  rest  in,  inhabit,  dwell 
with). 


English  and  Hebrew  Index. 


229 


E. 

Each  other   (often  translated  by 

*  a  man  his  fellow,'  *  a  man  his 
brother,'  &c.    From  each  other: 

*  a  man  from  his  brother,'  &c.) 

TTM^  by)r2  t^i^^ 

•    T  -     •• 

JEarth,  Y-^^^. 
Eat,  ^^^.  ' 
Enemy,  ^^ij^. 

Evil,  j;i,  n;^-). 

Eye,  ]^y. 
Eyes,  U^y^V- 


Face,  D^J3  {pl-)    With  b  in  the 

•    r 

cnst.  form,  ';Eb,  before  (implying 
rest) ;  also  \:ep,  before,  from  be- 
fore (implying  removal). 
Faint,  ^'^y  (faint,  tired). 

••T 

Faint,  to  be,  S]^''  (to  be  fatigued, 

tired). 
Faint,   to  make-,  DDOj  in  Hiph. 

—Vy^  (^<^  *i^^'  weary). 
Fall,  h^^ ;  ^3J  (to  wither,  decay). 

—  T  -   T 

Fat,  ±>n. 

Father  (irreg.)  3J«J. 

Feed,  ny-n. 

Field,  rViV' 

V  T 

Fig,  ^:^fn• 

Fill,  K^Q.     Piel  of  male". 
Fine/,  sp. 


Flee,  niH,  '1"T^ 

—  T  — T 

Flesh,  'S^'2.. 

T    T 

F/ocA:,  ]^^i:. 

Flood,  ^inO. 

Fly  from,  to,  H"!!;  l-TJ  (=flee). 

T  T  •      \  T  T 

Form,  ^0,  1\f'». 

—  T 

Found,   to,   1D'» ;    1^3   (to   make 

-T 

firm,  fix  :  e.  g.  the  earth). 

* 

G. 

Garden,  p. 
Gardens,  D''i3il- 
Garment,  rhr:iV,  "T:I1. 

T   ;     •  V  V 

Gather,    y^p;     D^3   (to   gather 

into  a  house,  or  place  of  se- 
curity). 

Girl,  rrhi. 

Girls,  jn\l^\ 

Give,  7J1J. 

Give -forth,    to,    "|J1J    (e.  g.    the 

voice). 
Gladness,  7"'3' 
Glory,  -TU3. 
Go,  TjSl.  Ki3l. 

-    T 

Gocf^  I^. 

Gooc?,  :2iZ0- 

Grape,  2.2V' 

Grass,  K^l;  "l^^iH  (dry  grass). 

V     V  •    T 

X 


230  English  and  Hebrew  Index. 

Grave,  "lip. 
Great,  ^Hil,  ^72|. 

T  T 

Great,  to  he,  7T5. 
Grow,  bl^- 


I. 


H. 

Hand,  T- 
Hand,  right,  ]''D''- 
Hand,  left,  ^\kt2V' 
Hands,  U*T- 
Hate,  J^J':i;. 

"T 

Head,  '(I)'^'^. 
Hear,  '^'Cr^. 

-    T 

Heart,  ^7. 

Heavens     (singular     not 

Height,  HDIp- 

Herb,     nW;     ^^t?^l.  (a 

tender  grass). 
Hide,  to,  "13^- 
Holiness,  '^'Ip  (0,  m). 
Honour,  ll^^. 

T 

Honour,  to,  1^3. 

~   r 

Honey,  t^l1((),r). 
House,  rS^"^' 

How,  -Tj^st,  nrj. 

How  long,  >jnD  "1^- 
Hypocrite,  tj^n. 


used), 


green. 


In,  prep.  3,  prefixed.    Sts  7 :  e.  g. 
to  trample  in  (:=:  to)  the  dust. 

Increase,  r\'2.1- 

T      T 

Inhabitant,  3ti^"»  (yasMbh,  5, 1). 
Iniquity,  nj^,  "{Ij;. 

VT  V  T 

Joy,  r\nr2^,  ]W':). 

T  :  •  T 

K. 

Keep,  '^J2t. 

-  T 

Kill,  ^20p;  tont*  (to  slay  as  a 
sacrifice) ;  TMllD  (to  slaughter). 

—    T 

Kindle,  Till)   (to  kindle  itself  = 

to  be  kindled). 
King,  TT/Q.     To  be  made  a  king, 

Hoph.  of  "^rbD- 
Kings,  DO^D- 

•  T  ; 

Kingdom,  HD'^Ou). 

r  T  I    ~ 

Kingdoms,  JIO/DD- 
T  :  - 

Kiss,  pll)}. 
Knee,  "Jf-Q. 
iiCwee*,  D''3"IIl. 

Knife,  rhD^r^ ;  ]''|)'^  (a  knife). 
Know,  ^1^. 
Knowledge,  Jipi. 


L. 


Lament,  IDD- 

-T 


Land,  Y"^^^. 

'      V  T 

Large,  ^^Hil,  bl^. 

T  T 

Law,  ^^')^D' 

T 

Leaf,  n^y. 

V    T 

Learn,  ^t2?. 

—  T 

Leave,  to,  3T^. 

TT 

Life,  □^'•n>  pl-  (the  life,  applied 
to  God  and  man  only.) 

Like,  3  (as  prefix ;  before  mono- 
syllables and  barytones  often  3. 
See  rule). 

Lion,  n''"}Nt- 

Little,  ]ro*p- 

La,  ]r\.  ^ 

Look,  to,  ^^^1;   ^22  (Hiph.  to 

T     T  -  T 

look  into,  investigate). 

Lord,  r\^r\''- 

T     ; 

Lord,  my,    ''J*7J^    (pi.  my  Lord, 

T        ~J 

applied  to  God) ;    '^^'li^  (sing. 

my  lord,  applied  to  man). 
Lords,  D'pVi^- 
Love,  to,  3nj^. 

-   T 

M. 

Man,  DT^^,  t'i^,  ^^J^^. 

T  T  v; 

Master,  ^Sli^- 

Men,  U^l^^i^  (tbe  men  of  a  family). 

Mercy,  IDH. 

Mix,  TIpQ- 


English  and  Hebrew  Index.  231 

Moc^,  Y?)'? ;  :i;^^  (to  deride). 

Money,  C]D3- 

MoMer,  n^^. 

Mount,  Mountain,  'y\. 

T 

Mouth,  n3.  cnstr.  '»3  (irreg.). 


Multitude,    "y")    (=  number,  nu- 
merousness). 

N. 
Naked,  UTW- 

T 

Name,  Qti^  (pi.  ri\^^). 
Neighbour,  ^H;  D^^"1- 
Nest,  ]p ;  pi.  kinnim,  cells. 
Night,  rh'^b;  2')}l  (evening). 
No,  >^^r]'»N^,cf.  2*57,  end. 
No  man,  t^^^  ^•'J^. 
Number,  to,  13D- 

-  T 

o. 

Oath,  ^2^-     To  take  an  oath  of 

-    T 

a   person,    say :    *  to    cnuse-to- 
swear  (Hiph.  of  vy^)  any  one.' 
Observe,  "lQt£|. 

Offer,  3np.  " 

-'t 

Offer-sacrifice,   to,    113?- 

-  T 

Old,  pt  (of  a  man).     To  be  so 

many  years  old,  say :  *  was  a  son 
of  so  many  years.' 

Open,  to,  nris- 

Or,  iK. 

Overthrow,  to,  l^'ll}  (to  destroy). 

-    T 

Ox,   ^')]i}',    1p3   (horned,    tame 

'tt 

cattle). 


x2 


232 


English  and  Hebrew  Index. 


P. 


Part,  \hr}. 
People,  Q37. 

Perish,  "Tn^^• 

—    T 

Pervert,  to,  r|7Q. 

Place,  DipD. 

Place  [a  man]  over,  to,  Hiph.  of 

Plant,  to,  ^^^. 

—   T 

Plunder,    to,    bb'i),  ttl. 

-  T  -T 

Prisoner,  "I^DJ^* 
Proverb,  ^]i)t^. 

•r    T 

Prudence,  TVyy}^- 

T    ;  r 

Purge,  "133  (cover,  expiate). 

~    T 


Quern,  nS^D. 

T  ;   ~ 


Q. 


R. 


Rain,  Tipan. 
Recompense,  to,  u)'^- 
Red,  DHJ^. 

T 

Require,  1^1'^. 

~   T 

Restore,  2W. 
Righteous,  T)^"^}^. 
Righteous  man,  p'''^^;. 
River,  inj. 

Room  (=  chamber),  "lin. 
i?M/er,   7ti^irj  (partcp.   from  md- 
shal). 


S. 

Sack,  Jirr.nps^. 

Say,  IDNt,  157. 
Scorn,  Y^?- 
Scorner,  Vj. 
Sea,  D^ 

See,  to,  ^^^'^. 

T     T 

Seed,  ^-1T. 

Seec?,  ^0  bear;    to  seed  seed,  ^^t 

— T 

Seek  (Jor),  ^^-^rj, 

-  T 

Separate,  "713 . 

-T 

Serpent,  iDJl^- 

T  T 

Servant,  "7^^^. 

Shadow,  7;^. 
Sharp,  "111 ;  f.  nirr. 
Shear,  tti). 

—  T 

Silver,  5]D3' 

SHw,  "lip. 

Sm»7e,  nSrr  (Hiph.  of  to:). 

Sow,  "13,  (irreg.) ;  13,  (poetically) 

Song,  l^ti^. 

Sow,  ^0,  ^ir. 

-T 

Stalk,  r\2p' 

v't 

Statute,  T))ri' 
Statutes,  W^p^Tl- 
Steal,  3::i- 


English  and  Hebrew  Index. 


233 


Stone,  ini^. 

Stones,  b^n^i• 

Strip,    lOli^D.      To  strip   oneself, 

—    T 

Hithp. 
Strong  drink,  "IJ^. 

T    " 

Strong-hold,  lJiJ2D- 

T  ;    • 

Sword,  2Dn- 

T. 

Take,    n[)b',   l^b    (to  conquer, 

'-T  ~    T 

take  by  force). 
Take  an  oath.     See  Oath. 
Take  captive,  to,  TIH^- 
Tell,  1:1   -10^^,   lil  (Piel  of 

-T  -   T  ••     • 

dabhar). 
Temple,  byH- 

T      •• 

Thick  cloud,  2V' 

T 

Thick  clouds,  □''H^. 

Threshold,  PjD. 
Together,  ir\^. 

Tongue,  ]')tb. 
Town,  -^^y. 
Trample,  DD*1- 

—     T 

Treacherous,  1^3,. 

Treasure,  ^DtpD,  h'tJO,  Iph- 
Treasure-house,  "lj^''^^. 

T 

Tree,  y;j; 


Verity,  DT^i^- 
Very,  -Ti^^O.' 

Fesse^,  D^'?^  ;  cnstr.  ^bs  (irreg.). 
Vineyard,  D"l3' 

L    ^         • 

Foice,  7p. 

u. 

Understanding,  nJIHn' 
T        ; 

Unpunished,  ''p^. 

Unpunished,  to  be,  HfJiJ^  (in  Niph.). 

Utterly.  See  To  Destroy  (utterly). 

W. 

^Fa5/i,    ^0,^  013,   (Piel)  to  wash 

-  T 

thoroughly. 
fFa*/e,  io,  nin,  lllj^. 

JFeaA;,  to  be,  bbl- 

-     T 

Weary,  yy. 
Weary,  to  be,  rj^V 
Weigh,  bpy}' 
Weight,  b\)m- 

'  T  ;  • 

Who,  ''Q. 

T    T 

Wicked,  y^")  (a  wicked  man). 


Trust,  to,  ntD3;  P^^  (Hiph.)  to    Wickedness,   HVp')'   Vp'l'    T.JJ' 

-    T  -    T  I  _^_ 


cause  to  believe,  put  faith  in. 
Truth,  r)f2i^' 


Wind,  nn. 


x3 


234 


Winds,  Jinn. 

Wine,  ]». 

Wisdom,  (IDDH- 

Withdraw,  P]Dh?  (to  bring  home, 

~    T 

collect).  To  be  withdrawn,  taken 
away  (Niph.). 
Woman,  Hti^K- 


English  and  Hebrew  Index, 
Word,  -)2"7. 


T    T 

Write,  2D3. 


Y. 

Year,  r\W,  D^Q^ 

TT  •  T 

Years,  U^y^- 


Abram,  Q^^^  (the  exalted  father). 

Abraham,  DmHJ^  (the  father  of 
T  T  :  - 

a  great  multitude). 
Adam,  QTJ*^  (earthy). 

T  T 

Amorite,  ''^bJ*^- 
Babel,  ^23,- 

V    T 

Babylon,  7^^. 

V    T 

David,  ll'H. 
EUe^er,  "ll^^^i^. 


PROPER    NAMES. 

Jerusalem,  D/lt^TT'' 
Jew,  n!)n\  "  '  - 
Joab,  2i^V  (God  the  father). 

T 

Joseph,  C]Di''  (increasing). 

Ishmael,  bi^];r2^\ 

..  -p  •  • 
jM&aZ,  b2V- 

T 

judah,  niin^. 

T       ;  * 

Judea,  I^H"*' 


Wa^a^  1:111. 

Halleluiah,    n'''^77n    (praise   ye 

T         ;    ~ 

the  Lord). 
■f^«w»5  Dn  (hot). 

T 

Hebrewess,  rT'lIl^. 
^  . .  . 

Hebrews,  D^"13.y. 

Jacob,  UpV^  (a  detainer). 

Jehovah,  nirC. 

Jeremiah,  ^rT'iDT'  (exalted  of  God). 


Midian,  ]>X2- 

Moa6,  3i^iD  (of  the  Father). 

T 

iVoa^,  nii  (a  comforter). 

Rsbekah,  np!l"l- 
't:   ' 

Solomon,  HD/^' 
Zion,  l^"}:. 


APPENDIX. 


A.    Table  ov  Declensions. 

Gesenius  (who  is  followed  by  Huiwitz,  Stuart,  &c.)  divides 
the  Hebrew  Nouns  into  13  Declensions,  or  rather  arranges 
them  under  13  Paradigms,  which  we  here  add  for  reference, 
though  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  enumerate  all  the  variations 
and  exceptions  in  so  elementary  a  work  as  the  present. 

Observe — 

a)  That  all  feminines  without  a  distinctive  feminine  ending 
are  inflected  like  the  masculine  Paradigms,  except  that 

they  generally  take  their  pi.  in  dth  (Jli);  2DT1,  sword,  pi. 

/li^^n,    constr.    JliUnn  (khe'rebh,  kh-'rabhoth,  khar'- 

bhoth).     With  the  suffixes  the  stronger  abbreviation  then 
remains  :   see  the  Feminine  Paradigms. 

b)  Grave  suffixes  are  those  which  have  always  a  strong  accent 
or  tone.  Such  are  most  suffixes  of  2nd  and  3rd  pers. 
plural,  whether  joined  to  the  singular,  as  D3,  ]3,  QH)  XHy 

but  not  □_,  'iQl,  or  to  the  plural,  as  QD^-,  ]3_,  DH^-* 

in*'— >  but  not  iD^_.     The  other  suffixes  are  called  light, 

c)  In  the  plural  the  light  suffixes  attach  themselves,  without 
exception,  to  the  status  ubsolutus;  the  heavy  or  grave  suf- 
fixes, to  the  status  constructus. 

Arrangement  of  the  Declensions. "l  1.  Monosyllabic  and  dis- 
syllabic with  immutable  vowels.  2.  Monosyllabic  with  mutable 
(t);  and  dissyllabic  with  a  similar  vowel  for  ultimate,  and  im- 
mutable vowel  for  penultimate.  3.  Mutable  (t  )  or  (.. )  for  penul- 
timate :  immutable  vowel  in  ultimate.  4.  Dissyllnbic  with  (tt) 
or  (t"  )•  5,  Dissyllabic  with  mutable  (..)  for  ultimate :  mutable  (t) 
for  penultimate.  6.  Segolates  or  dissyllabic  nouns,  with  accent 
on  penultimate.  They  are  derived  from  an  original  monosyllabic 
form  with  Pathakh.  7.  AH  with  mutable  (•♦ )  for  ultimate:  and 
immutable  vowel  for  penultimate.  Also  some  monosyllabic  nouns 
from  7^^7■  8.  All  that  double  their  final  consonant  by  dagesh 
when  augmented.     9-  H-  final.     10.  H-  final  preceded  by  an 

immutable  vowel.     11.  Jl-  final  preceded  by  mutable  (t)  or  (..)• 

12.  Feminine  nouns  chiefly  derived  from  the  segolate  forms  7^3, 

7i^S'    y^B-     13.  Segolate  nouns  formed  by  the  addition  of  the 

feminine  ending  n_l. — To  the  examples  in  the  Paradigms  add : 

misgg'reth  {enclosure),  igge'reth  (Jetter),  masco'reth  (wages), 
1 


Ti 

^^f  Declensions 

^650Z. 

Constr. 

Lz^rA^  5Wjf, 

Heavy  suffix. 

I.     (horse)      S. 

D^D 

D^D 

••p^D 

DDDID 

P. 

D^D^D 

v^v 

^P^D 

DD-'p-ID 

II.     {eternity)   S. 
P. 

•    T 

uynby 

V      ••  T 

III.    (overseer)  S. 

"7^3 

l^pD 

n^ps) 

°?1'P? 

P. 

°'1'P? 

'TP? 

^Tp? 

Din;pD 

a. 
(word)    S. 

VI 

-in-^ 

''I^'l 

°?1^1 

iv.^ 

P. 
b. 

•  T    ; 

nn^ 

DDna^ 

(wise)     S. 

DDH 

D^rr 

V^^. 

3???^! 

P. 

D^pjn 

'P?n 

nybzri 

^         a. 
(old  man)  S. 

P.l 

]p_! 

••JpT 

DD?p_T 

P. 

b. 

(shoulder)  S. 

D^jpr 

''P.pI 

^:pj 

QfJP! 

^•i 

^0? 

cirii) 

P. 

n^ari? 

D'iBrii) 

c. 

(court)    S. 

"i;in 

"li^rr 

n;in 

D^l^n 

P. 

I 

Dnj^n 

^1^'D 

n^ri 

°$'"?.?(7 

'^        a. 

(A:%)     S. 
P. 
b. 
(book)     S. 

*9 

VI.^ 

"I3D 

"isip 

nH)p 

DD"]3p 

P. 

Dn3D 

•T  ; 

nE)D 

-  T  ; 

o?''7?P 

c. 

(sanctuary) 'S. 

^IP 

mp 

DD^lp 

V   •      "'t 

P. 

•    t't; 

"•ir^ip 

-   t't; 

29'^IR 

of  Nouns. 


Absol. 

Constr. 

Light  suff. 

Heavy  suffix. 

Dual  absol. 

Meanimj. 

sus 
susiia 

sus 
suse 

snsi 
susai 

*u5'chem' 
su«echem' 

joma'yim 

{two 
days) 

i^olam 
i?61amira 

i^olam 

i^olami 
i?61araai 

i^olamchem' 
i>61'mechem' 

wh'pbD 

nielka- 
klia'yim 

{pair  of 
tongs') 

pakid 
p'kidiin 

p'kid 
p'kide 

p'kidi 
p'kidai 

p'kid'chem' 
p'kidechem' 

sh'bhu- 
i^ayim 

(tioo 
weeks) 

dabhar 

d'bhar 

d'bhari 

d'bharchem' 

'  D^I)J3 

{wings) 

d'bharim 

dibhre 

d'bharai 

dibhrechem' 

c'na- 
phayim 

khacham 

khacham 

kh^chami 

kh*chamcliem' 

'o^i^n 

{hips) 

kh*chamim 

khachme 

kh*chamai 

khachmechem' 

kh''-  ' 
latsa'yim 

zaken 

z'kan 

z'keni 

z'kanchem' 

Q'^l) 

{thighs) 

z'kenirn 

zikne 

z'kenai 

ziknechem' 

y're- 
chayim 

catheph 

cetheph 

c'thepoth 

cithphoth 

khatser 

khHsar 

kh*tseri 

kh*tsarchem' 

khnserim 

kh*tsre 

kh*tserai 

kh'tsrechem' 

' 

mS'lSch 

mS'lech 

malci 

raalc'chem 

^w^r^ 

{feet) 

m'lachim 

malche 

m'lachai 

malcechem' 

rajr'- 
layim 

sephSr 

*eph£r 

siphri 

5iphr'chem' 

°;^?? 

(double) 

s'pharim 

siphre 

5'pharai 

siphrechem' 

ciph- 
layim 

kodgsh 

kodgsh 

kodshi 

kodsh'chem' 

{loins) 

k^dashiin 

kodshe 

k°dashai 

kodshechem' 

motli- 
iia'jim 

Dial  Coxstr. 
3 

'  '•r;;3  (cSnp 

hg).      2  >fT(  (1 

.h^ltse).      3    ';;'i(rag 

-  :  1 

5  (mSthne) 

r 

The  Declensions 


VI. 


VII. 


VIII, 


r    ^-   . 

(a  youth)  S. 

I  p- 

{perpetuity)^. 
P. 

f.  (u/OrA:)     S. 

P. 

g.  {death)    S. 

P. 

h.    (o^iVe)    S. 
P. 

i.     {fruit)   S. 

{gazelle)  S. 

P. 

'a.  {enemy)  S. 
P. 

b.    (name)  S. 
P. 

a.  (^5ea)     S. 

P. 

b.  (mother)  S. 

P. 


c.  (statute)  S. 
P. 

IX.  (5eer)    S. 

P. 


1     Absol. 

Constr. 

Light  suff. 

'^^l 

^Vl 

''l^l 

n^j 

'!?^^ 

mj 

TO,^ 

to: 

V4? 

—  T  ; 

b^ 

^^TD 

'^^?r 

••-:iT 

JT)0 

V  T 

niD 

^/liD 

Q'JliO 

^ri'iD 

••jniQ 

r)][ 

nn 

'm 

wm 

'^7. 

^lyi 

nB 

nD 

>nB 

'^^ 

•  T  ; 

2'}^ 

^.'.^ 

u;»j^ 

wy'^ 

^?'^ 

'^!^ 

ni^ 

ut 

W 

nSDi) 

r))Dp 

^iy\r2t 

D! 

^D^ 

Q'?' 

'?2 

'^! 

DJj? 

°^ 

'^^^ 

iii;:2hi 

n^m 

''iy\m 

ph 

'P^ 

^?n 

D^l^n 

^^n 

^^rr 

•^.l^ 

•^.l'^ 

\rri 

D\irT 

nn 

nn 

Heavy  suffix. 


••VT,r 


uy'^h 


4 


of  Nouns, 


Absol. 

Constr. 

Light  svff. 

Heavy  suffix. 

Dual  absol. 

Meaning. 

nai^ar 
Ti'i?arim 

nai^ar 
na^*re 

na)?»ri 
n'i7arai 

nal^archem' 
na  'rechem' 

na- 
i^4ayim 

(pair  of 
sandals) 

ne'tsakh 

netsakh 

nitskhi 

nitskh'chem' 

n'tsakbim 

nitskhe 

n'tsakhai 

nitskhechem' 

pd'i^al 

p5i?al 

po^°li 

po^-'l'chem' 

p'i.*a]im 

p     "le 

p':?alai 

poi^^lechem' 

ma'veth 

moth 

mothi 

moth'chem' 

mothim 

mothe 

mothai 

mothechem' 

zayith 

zeth 

zethi 

zeth'chem' 

'^'}'^ 

(.eyes) 

zethim 

zethe 

zethai 

zethechem' 

l^enayim 

p'ri 

p'ri 

piryi 

pery'chem' 

(cheeks) 

ts'bi 

Ikha- 

ts'bhayim 

ya'yim 

oyebh 
Sy'bhim 

oyebh 
oy'bhe 

oy'bhi 
oy'bhai 

oyibhchem' 
oy'bhechem' 

mo- 

(pair  of 
scales) 

shem 

shem 

sh'mi 

shimchem' 

z'nayim 

shem6th 

sh'moth 

sh'mothai 

sh'mothechem' 

yam 

yam 

yammi 

yamm'chem' 

'D?i^ 

(nostrils) 

yammim 

yamme 

yammai 

yammechem' 

appayim 

em 

em 

immi 

imm'chem' 

*D]W 

(teeth) 

immotb 

immoth 

immothai 

immothechem' 

shin- 

kbok 

khok- 

khukki 

khokk'chem' 

nayim 

khukkim 

khukke 

khukkai 

khiikkechem' 

khozeh 

khozeh 

khozi 

khoz'chgm' 

khozim 

khoze 

khozai 

khozechSm' 

i 

Di'AL  Con.  '  >Vr'3  (nSJ^'le). 
5 


2  »3>3^  (rene).    3  ^j^nq  (moz'nl).    *  >£«  (Spp§).    *  ■•?•£?  (shinnft). 


Feminine 


{mare)    S. 

Absol. 

Constr. 

Light 
suffix. 

Heavy 
suffix. 

X. 

HDID 

nv^D 

.  •    T 

DDJip-ID 

P. 

niDID 

niDiD 

•'O'lC'ID 

DH-'jiiD^D 

a. 

(year)    S. 

mt^ 

n^'^ 

'^W 

0^0^^ 

P. 

b. 

{sleep)  S. 

•  T 

ni:?^ 

'Pi^lp 

Dn^jri'):^ 

XI.j 

n^i:^ 

r)2p 

•^n^t 

^^^^p 

P. 

mt 

mh 

••rii:^ 

ur}'r\):p 

c. 

(righteous-  S. 

np-fi: 

np-Ti: 

••ripiii 

DDJlpl^i 

ness) 

'tt: 

~ :  • 

•  't  :  • 

V  :      :  • 

P. 

f 

nip"Ti: 

Jiipii: 

"jnipi^ 

DH^jn^p"!^ 

^          a. 

(queen)  S. 

n^':?^ 

-^3^^ 

'^?^^ 

DDJl?^!? 

P. 

b. 

(reproach)  S. 

T  : 

noSp 

"jHoSd 

Dn^jno'^D 

XII.. 

•^^ir^ 

JiD"}n 

P. 

ri^sirr 

^jn^sin 

Dn"»ji^3nrr 

c. 

(waste)  S. 

'^?'1'7 

—      •  T 

•      T       •  T 

DDriinn 

P. 

:  T 

~        :  T 

••          ;  r 

a. 

(sprout)  S. 

J^P^")^ 

'Hp^'' 

''ripiv 

D?^!??' 

P. 

Jipji'' 

nipiii'' 

^TiipJi'' 

Dn^>i^p:i^ 

XIII.^ 

b. 

}    • 

• 

• 

• 

(skull)  S. 

-nV^^.i) 

•    V 

•     '  T  •   V 

■  :  :  T  :  \ 

P. 

:  :\ 

: :  \ 

•    ■    •    > 

::  \ 

V    ••      :  :  \ 

Nowis. 


Absol. 

Constr. 

Light 
suffix. , 

Heavy 
svffix. 

Dual  absol. 

Meaning. 

susah 
su^oth 

sUssiih 
siisoih. 

«u«athi 
$u56tbai 

5U5ath- 
cbem' 
t 

shanab 
sbanim 

sb'natb 
sb'notb 

sb'natbi 
sb'notbai 

sb'natb- 

cbem' 

t 

.  -  -p . 

s'pba- 
tba'yim 

(lips) 

sbetiab 
sbenoth 

sb'natb 
sb'notb 

sb'natbi 
sb'notbai 

sb'natb- 

cbem' 

t 

tba  yira 

(corners) 

ts'dakab 
ts'dakotb 

tsidkatb 
tsidkotb 

tsidkatbi 
tsidkotbai 

tsidkatb- 

chem' 

t 

raalcab 
m'lacbotb 

malcatb 
malcbotb 

raalcatbi 
malcbotbai 

malcatb- 

chem' 

t 

yarca- 
tha'yim 

(sides) 

kherpab 
kb^raphoth 

kberpatb 
kber'pbotb 

kberpatbi 

kber'pbo- 
tbai 

kberpatb- 

cbem' 

t 

•  —  T  ';    • 

rikma- 
tba'yim 

{double 
embroi- 
dery) 

kborbah 
kb-'rabbotb 

kborbatb 
kbor'bbotb 

kborbatbi 

kbor'bbo- 
tb ai 

kborbatb- 

cbem' 

t 

- 

yon^'k^tb 
yon'kotb 

yone'ketb 
yon'kotb 

yonakti 
yon'kotbai 

yonakt'- 

cbem' 

t 

m'tsil- 

(cymbal) 

ta'yim 

gulgo'letb 
gulg'lotb 

gulgoletb 
gulg'lotb 

gulgoiti 
gulg'lotbai 

gulgolt'- 
cbem'     1 

t         j 

-  :  \: 

n'khusb- 
ta'yim 

(double 
fetter) 

Dual  Constr.     '  "TlDtD  (siphth6). 


'n^»s  (pStnfi).  »  >ri3T  (ySrc'the). 

-*i-  - 1  t- 


+  The  distinction  between  light  and  heavy  suffixes  ceases  in  the  plural  of  feminine  nouns. 
7  Y 


B.    Table  of  Irregular  Nouns. 


Meaning. 
Father 

Brother 
Sister 

Man      J 

Woman 

Maid 

House 

Son 

Daughter 

Day 

Vessel 

Lion 

Kid 

City 

Water 

Mouth 

Head 


1.  Irreg.  Noun. 


T 

T 
T 

T     • 
T   T 

DV 
')? 

nil 


abh 

akh 

akhoth 

ish 

^nosh 

ishshah 

amah 

bayith 

ben 

bath 
yom 
c'li 

g'di 

mayim 
peh 

roash 


Constr. 


Plur. 


abh,  ''bhi  abhoth 


»khi 


esheth 


beth 


ben- 


Pi 


akhim 

"khayoth 

ishim 

"nashim 

nashim 

'raaholh 

batim 

banim 

banoth 
yamim 
celim 

'rayim 
g'dayim 
i^arim 
mayim 


raashim 


Constr. 
Plural. 


With 
suffixes. 


akhyoth 

an  she 
n'she 
amhoth 

b'ne 
b'noth 


y'mS 


m6 


abhi,  abhiv, 
"bhichem, 
&c. 

akhai,  'khi- 
chem,  &c. 

akhyothai. 
ishi,  &c. 


ishti,  &c. 


batechem, 
&c. 

b'ni,     bin- 
chem. 

batti,  &c. 


celyi,      ce- 
ly'cha. 


pi  ^  (my^), 
picha,  piv, 
&c. 


g 

s 

li: 

* 

*      73 

# 

a. 

nJ 

"3 

led 

??•  Va 

Q^ 

ns 

< 

£1 

9»-;^ 

to 

••J 

* 

"iS 

« 

13 

* 

<S 

* 

9- 

H 

a-- 

O 

r^ 

JcS 

n: 

•-:<2 

& 

9: 

.)e«J 

J^ 

,X 

9= 

s 

9- 

)cd 

s 

•  ft 

~r^ 

B 

»n 

h 
:< 

* 

lit      •— < 

*  •  12! 

* 

."iv 

*  ..>g 

t  1 

t  y 

* 
*-  • 

1—4 

ia> 

H 

n- 

•lo 

nu-ilS 

nJ 

r^r^ 

nj 

•  ■»«l 

m: 

•  )ri 

.  •«>» 

.9 

^ 

f}'.^ 

9= 

leS 
J4 

9« '^ 

9 

9' 

^ 

~r^ 

">^ 

►r^ 

V. 

J^ 

;^ 

J^ 

9: 

4-> 

•«f 

■>. 

H 

■<) 

« 

*      TS 

*  . 

* 

* 

^-^ 

« 

n.- 

*o 

^>»        lOI 

ni 

"ioJ 

Ml 

10) 

n- 

1^ 

H 

.a 

f^>-2 

9: 

•^ 

r^ 

9: 

.)"a 

t-H 

>i-^ 

^ 

9::3 

J-^ 

)«5 

9: 

J4 
4-> 

CO 

JN 

la 

^— V 

"».• 

«0 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

F^ 

^ 

n- 

"io 

m 

To; 

(^"^ 

r< 

zzi 

Ht^ 

)ri 

n. 

iq> 

> ' 

.9 

;»^ 

9- 

■v» 

9>  5S 

n: 

•^ 

n: 

q- 

ni 
9= 

•  jee 

b 
a 

j^ 

^ 

9:  :S 

j^ 

9- 

3rt 

9' 

J4 

^■^ 

~r^ 

la 

(N 

*  . 

* 

-* 

♦    ^ 

* 

» 

* 

IQ^ 

cd 

fZL*' 

^ 

fX' 

Ti3 

^^ 

n:« 

<--< 

ir^ 

3e3 

n- 

>« 

fa 

9« 

9: 

'-2 

9i  5i 

9. 

**«* 
-M 

^ 

9' 

*2 

q; 

9: 

4J 

. 

-T^ 

la 

r^ 

"^ 

^ 

1- 

!»>» 

;2 

1 

p4 

ci 

• 

CO 

•^ 

ui 

«d 

t>l 

y2 


D.     General  Paradigms 

(The  forms  with  asterisks 


KAL  (1). 

NIPHAL(2). 

PIEL  (?,). 

PUAL  (4). 

Sing.   1    c. 

2  (m. 

(/• 

3  m. 

V- 

Plur.   1    c. 

2  cm. 

V 

3  e. 

•  :  -  't 

phhp* 

T  :  -'t 

biQp* 
nb:Dp* 

UPhlDp* 

l^^^P 
^S^P 

r^^j^opy 
phnp: 

^^Pf 
n^zopj* 

▼  :  :  • 

^:^bp^ 

o^^^P? 
l^^^Pi^ 

rhhp* 

T  :  - '• 

'bi^p* 

T^bBp"" 

■f .  1. 

^:ibhip 

^^bBp. 

]phBp 

6bp 

'^rhhp 

rh^p* 
rh^p 

n'^rop* 

^2bBp^  . 
nphBp 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 
Inf.  (absol.) 

bbp* 
^izop* 

't 

^ropn* 

••'t  • 

0^;)  bbprj* 

bBp_* 
bbp* 

bBp^* 
bbp* 

3.  Imp,  Sm^r.  m. 

/. 
P/wr.        m. 

•>^[pp* 
^bbp 

n^b'6p* 

b^^^ri* 
>br?prT* 
6bfn 

b^p* 
'b^pj" 
^bbp_ 

n^bhp* 

T ;  "  '- 

(none) 

4,Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Swi^.   1    c. 

2  rm. 

.     V- 

3  rm. 

P/wr.   I    c. 

2  1  m. 

i 

3  rm. 

bbpi^ 
bbpr\ 
>^zppji* 

%p]* 
bbpr\ 

biDp2 
^b^ph 

n^biipn 
"ft:pp^ 
n:b'6pr)* 

bigpn 
'bDpn* 

bigpn 

bigpji 

^bi^pn 

m'^-^pri* 

t;  "'t« 

bBp_^, 
b^pri 
"hBpf}* 

■  b^prs* 

^b'Bpn 
r^phpn* 

m'^LD'pn* 

T-   .      ..  1-     . 

b^pn 

^r'^P'O* 

bBj)]* 
bi^pp 

^bBp^r\ 

nf?Bpjr\ 

^'^bBp'. 
n^bhipr)* 

5. ?TCP.  act. bl^p* 
10 

't 

bi^pr 
■f>. . 

bBp]2* 

b^po* 

t'\: 

of  the  Regular  Verb. 


serve  as  models  for  the  rest.) 

1.  Perfect. 

KAL(l). 

NIPHAL(2). 

PI  EL  (3). 

PUAL  (4). 

Sing.  1    c. 

ka/al'ti 

nik/al'ti 

ki//al'ti 

ku//al'tt 

2  Cm. 

ka/al'ta 

nik/al'ta 

ki//al'ta 

ku/Zal'ta 

V- 

ka/alt 

nik/alt 

ki//alt 

ku//alt 

3  I'm. 

ka/al 

nik/al 

ki//el 

kuttal 

V- 

ka/'lah 

nikrlah 

ki//'lah 

kii//'lah 

Plur.   1    c. 

ka^al'nd 

nik/al'nu 

kiZ/al'iiu 

ku//al'nu 

2fm. 

k^altgm' 

nik/altem' 

ki//altem' 

kii//altem' 

I/- 

k'/alten' 

nik/alten' 

ki//alten' 

ku//alt6ii' 

3   c. 

ka^'IA 

nik/'ld 

ki//'lu 

ku//'lu 

2,  Inf.  {constr.) 

k'/61 

hikka/el 

ka//el 

ku//al 

Inf.  {ahsol.) 

kafol 

fhikka/oH 
lnik/61     / 

ka//6l 

ku//ol 

3.  Imp.  5i«^.  m. 

kVol 

hikka/el 

ka//el 

/. 

kidt 

hikka/»li 

ka//'li 

P/itr.    m. 

kidu 

hikkaria 

ka//'lu 

(none) 

/. 

k'/5rnah 

hikka/el'nah 

kaZ/el'iiah 

4.  Impekf.  (Fut.) 
5twy.    1    c. 

2rm. 

ek/61 
tik/ol 

gkka/el 
tikka/el 

•ka//el 
t'ka//el 

"ku//al 
t'ku//al 

tik/'li 

tikka/'li 

t'ka//'li 

t'ku//'li 

3  j  m. 

yik/51  . 

yikka/el 

y'ka//el 

y'ku//al 

I/- 

tik/6l 

tikka/el 

/'ka//el 

t'ku//al 

P/ur.   1    e. 

nik^ol 

nikka/el 

n*ka//el 

n'ku//al 

2  rm. 

tik^'ia 

tikka/'m 

t'ka//'lu 

t'ku//'lu 

V 

tik/ol'nah 

tikka/ernah 

t'ka//el'nah 

t'ku//al'nah 

3rm. 

yik/'lu 

yikka/'lu 

y'ka//'lu 

y'ku//'lii 

L-^- 

tik/ol'nah 

tikka/el'iiah 

fka/Zel'ttah 

t'ku//al'nah 

5.PARTCP.       {"' 

t.    ko/el  \ 
ss  ka/ul/ 

nik/al 

m'ka//el 

m'ku^/al 

11 


Y  3 


General  Paradigms 


1      P"i?P  irTrpT 

HIPHIL(5). 

HOPHAL  (6). 

HITHPAEL  (7). 

Sing.  1    c. 

2  (m. 

\f- 

3rm. 

V- 

Plur.  1    c. 

2  Cm. 

(/• 

3  e. 

•'jji^^pn 

pbhpr}* 
rhi^pT} 

'b'^V^pT}* 

•i:^Dpn 
urh^pr} 

^rhhpr\ 
r\bhpr\* 

T  :  -  ':  T 

'*?Dpn* 
n'propn* 

T  :  ':  T 

^:hhp7\ 
Dr^Sropn 
\pb]^pT\ 

•i^ippn 

^j;ib|p_iin 

rbhpm* 
rh}^pm 

'  b^'pPT 
rhii>iphr\* 

j):i^^p_iirT 
\2rb\^pm 

^b\^pm 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 
Inf.  {absol.) 

'^^pn* 

'piDprr 
...I.  T 

bi^pm* 

3.  Imp.  -Siw^'.  w. 

^^^Dpn 
nj^^pn* 

(none) 

"^^p.rin* 

^bmpm 
nphpm* 

4.  Imperf.(Fut.) 
Sing.   1    c. 

2  rw. 

\f- 

3  rm. 

v- 

P/ttr.  1   c. 

2  rm. 

1/. 

3  cm. 

^^rpph* 

y^prl 

^b'hpn 
ri:hhpr\ 

^bj?\>\ 
r\t>hpr\ 

T  :  ••  ':  - 

tepn 

'^^pri 

•i^ippjn 
r}:bhpp\ 

^^^PP> 

m^zopin* 

T :  - ':  T 

b^^pnps 
'hi^pnp* 
%Pjy* 
bv^;pr)r\ 

^bii^pnn 
r\:hiipr\r\ 
^bv^^Pjy* 

5.  Partcp. 
12 

y^pO* 

b^^^pr::^* 

T ':  T 

b^^pm* 

of  the  Regular 

Verb. 

1       PpRFFPT 

HIPHIL  (5). 

HOPHAL  (6). 

HITHPAEL  (7). 

Sing.  1    c. 

hik^al'ti 

hok/al'ti 

hithkaZ/al'ti 

2  Cm. 

hik^al'ta 

hokial'ta 

hithka/^al'ta 

I/- 

hikfalt 

hokfalt 

hithka^/alt 

3  rw. 

hik/il 

hok/al 

bithka^el 

1/ 

hik^i'lah 

hokriah 

hithka^flah 

Plur.     1    c. 

hik/al'nu 

hoktal'nu 

hithkaZ/al'Dii 

2  rm. 

hik/altem' 

hok/altem' 

hithka/^altem' 

I/- 

hik/alten' 

hok/alten' 

hithkaWalten' 

3    c. 

hik/i'm 

hokriu 

hithka^'lu 

2.  Inf.  {constr.) 

hak/il 

hok/al 

hithka//el 

Inf.  (^absol.) 

hak/el 

hok^el 

3.  Imp.  Sin^r.  m. 

hak^el 

hithka^fel 

/• 

hak/i'li 

(none) 

hithka/fli 

P/wr.         w. 

hak/i'Ki 

hithka«'lu 

/. 

hakfel'nah 

hithka/^el'nah 

4.  Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Sing.    1    c. 

2  rw. 

akm 
takfil 

ok^al 
toktal 

ethka//el 
tithka/<el 

!/• 

takfi'li 

tok/'li 

tithka//'li 

arm. 

yak^il 

yok/al 

yithka^^el 

V' 

tak^il 

ibktal 

tithka/^el 

P/wr.     1    c. 

nakfil 

nok/al 

nithka//el 

2  Cm. 

tak^i'lu 

tok^'lu 

tithka^riu 

V 

tak/el'nah 

tok/al'nah 

tithka/^el'nah 

3  Cm. 

yak/i'lu 

yok/'lu 

yitbka/flii 

V- 

tak/el'nah 

tok/al'nah 

tithka^/el'nah 

6.  Partcp. 

mak/il 

mok/al 

mithka/^el 

13 

Verb  with  First  Guttural  (^*). 


E.     Verbal 


1.  Perfect. 
Sing.  1    c. 

2  ^m. 

V- 

3  (m. 

v. 

Plur.   1    c. 

2  fm. 

V- 

3  c. 


KAL. 


2.  Inf.  {constr.) 
Inf.  (absol.) 


3.  Imp.  Sin^.  m. 

/. 
PZur.        m. 

/. 

4.Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Sing.   1    c. 
2  fm. 


3  rm. 

Plur.   1    c. 

2  ri». 

1/ 

3  fm. 


~   T 

T  :  |T 

Mr2V 

"Tby  * 


NIPHAL. 


1/. 


"Tbr! 

:  -  |- 


Vap TCP.  act.  TDJ/ 
14 


•  :--:iv 
-v:iv 


••   T    •• 

:  |T" 
T  ;  ••  T  •• 


Tj  TV:iV 


HIPHIL.       HOPHAL. 


T    ;  -  v;  V 

•  •••:iv 


nj79^n 


•   :-t:it 

;  ;-  r:iT 
-t:it 

T  :  7:|T 

V  :-r:iT 
-t:it 


(none) 


TDVr2' 


-  t:it 

-  t:it 

• :  t:it 

IDT* 
-  t:it 

-  t:it 

:  t:it 
T  :  -  t:it 
:  i:iT 


T  t:it 


Paradigms. 

Verb  with  Second 

Guttural 

{y^ 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

PUAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

••jitDnt^p 

'-^Pl? 

'•T^?*!^ 

''j°nD^::inn 

r\^ht 

p^^hm 

i^D^n 

r^D^ii 

rionnnn 

rs'mt 

riioni:;: 

ron:i 

i^yxi 

r^D"i3nn 

ton::; 

-    T 

dto;i 

"^?.?* 

^1^* 

■^Iinjnn* 

T  -:iT 

nzon-^::* 

T     ; 

nD"i2nn 

T  :|r  :  • 

^T^ht 

^mrm 

^JID^B 

^:P1_3 

•iJDn::inn 

Di^ion'^ 

D.nroni:^: 

Dr)D-i3 

Dr^D"13 

Dr^Dn:inn 

]r\\f)m 

V"::^zpni^: 

l^?l? 

]^??1^ 

iripn^on 

•iiont^* 

~:iT 

•ID-IB 

•iDnii 

T 

'              T 

xyji* 

"^"innn* 

nit* 

zanii^n 

••  T      • 

1  ..T 

"?Ii3nn* 

•  -:  1 T  • 

•ironii'n 

-:iT- 

on:! 

:iT 

(none) 

mtorri'n 

T    :    -    T      • 

T :  -V 

T  ;   —  T    ;    • 

••    T      • 

loni^r)* 

^rOHOT* 

o"inn 

'2^:ir\ 

o-innn 

nr\m 

^mtr\ 

-:iT  • 

^D"iann 

T  :  -  T  • 

T  ;  -  T  ; 

n^iD'^Di;^ 

T  ;    —  T  ;    • 

!)ion^; 

-:iT- 

^Dnii; 

T  ;    -  T    ; 

mDnhil 

"                                         T 

15 

^1??' 

^-y^r 

■ijnajio* 

Verb  with  Third 

Guttural  {g^). 

Verbal 

1.  Perfect. 
Sing.  1    c. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

•    ;  ~  T 

"TTi^tl} 

''rriyp 

2  1  m. 

rsr6t 

T     •    ~    T 

T   ;  -  ;   • 

nHit 

U 

nn9^^* 

rrf>ty 

rsHit* 

3  cm. 

'n^;:^ 

'  rhm 

rht*' 

if- 

T :  |T 

Y- .  •  • 

rrht 

Plur.   1    c. 

•ijjn^t:^ 

^T6t^ 

•ijn'^V 

2  rm. 

Dnn^^ 

unrbt^ 

urrbt 

V- 

]prht 

'[irfrm 

]rTht 

3    c. 

Tht^ 

Tht 

2.  Inf.  {constr.) 

ri^^* 

rhwn* 

rht* 

Inf.  {ahsol.) 

—            T 

ribty 

Tf?^* 

3.  Imp.  Sin^.  m. 

rbt* 

rhmr\* 

rht* 

/. 

'^rht 

'^rh'i'n 

'>rht 

P/ar.        m. 

Tht 

Tht 

/. 

T  :  —  ; 

T :  -  T  • 

T .  -  — 

4.Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Sing.  1   c. 
2  (m. 

rhtr\ 

—   T     V 

rhwr\ 

rhtrs 

{/• 

^rbtn 

^rb^D 

'^rht'r\ 

3  rm. 

rf)t^* 

rhw''* 

rht^* 

rhth 

nWrs 

rhtF\ 

Plur.   I    e. 

r6t:i 

r6m 

rht:i 

2  rm. 
1/ 

T\Tfitr\ 

3rm. 
1/ 

Top] 
r^T6tr\* 

T  :  -  :  • 

:  |T* 
T  :  -  T  • 

T  ;  -  -    ; 

Paetcp.  act.  rt>tl 
16 

*  pass.  TVbt* 

—           T 

• 

Paradigms. 

Verb  with 

Third  Guttural  (g^). 

PUAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAiiL. 

■•nn^V'? 

'   I  ~  :   T 

''r\n%pn 

T  ;  ~  -  ;    ■ 

rri^^* 

r^r6tr\* 

r\r6tn* 

nn^Dtn* 

rbt 

'rvhtr^* 

nbtn 

nbDtn* 

r\n'6tr\ 

T    •  ;    • 

nvhhn 

nn":>r)tii 

^Tii>t 

^T6tT^ 

^^rf7tn 

^:n^r\^r\ 

ursrht 

ursrhtn 

nr\nbi}n 

nr\nbDtn 

\r\rht7} 

]r}ribpn 

]nnbr}tr\ 

:  \ 

•in'pjn^^rT 

n^^ 

vibtn 

n'?ni:^n* 

nbtn* 

nbD^r}* 

•^n'^^tn 

'nbDtn 

(none) 

^n'jbn 

(none) 

^nbnpn 

n:rt^r}tn* 

rht^ 

n'btii 

nbm 

n'^/n^.s 

rt^trs 

n'b^n 

rhi}r\ 

n'pr^i^D 

^rb^r\ 

•^n^Strs 

•'nbii^D 

'•n'pr^^r^ 

rht' 

n^y^tf^* 

nbt'* 

nbn^i}'* 

vb^n 

n'b':)Pi 

nbtin 

nbr\tr\ 

n-JW: 

rt'bt^ 

nbt2 

rtbr)^2 

Tbtrs 

in^'p'^jR 

^nbtn 

:   ;    T  ' 

^nbnpr} 

nTiitn 

n^n'^i^j"^ 

r\:r6tr) 

T^2n^r\^r) 

;  \  : 

m6pi 

^nbt'< 

^nbnp] 

T  :  -  \   : 

rj'bpD" 

T :  -  :  T 

ri2n^r\tr\* 

17 

T  :  T 

nbr^pD* 

Verb  Double 

Ay 

N,  ;t^;;  (d). 

Verbal 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

1.  JrERFECT. 

•> 

> 

Sing. 

1    c. 

•'Jll^p 

« 

"/linp^ 

2  (m. 

T               - 

• 

V- 

ni:ip 

• 

ni:ap: 

3  fwi. 

V. 

np* 

T    ~ 

2DJ*  • 

-  T 

nio:)* 
t  - 1 

Plur. 

1    c. 

^:iip 

• 

j):3')ip^ 

2  Cm. 

Dn^3D 

• 

DjHBP^ 

V- 

IJ;?"!^? 

IJ^^^'^P? 

3    c. 

nip 

-  T 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 

nb* 

npn* 

Inf.  {ahsol.) 

T 

niDH* 

3.  Imp.  Sing.  m. 

::ib* 

* 

3pn* 

/. 

"3D* 

'^^'r^* 

Plur. 

m. 

^ID 

••i2Dn 

/. 

T      V   \ 

T      V    —     • 

4. Imperii. 
,  Sing. 

(FUT.) 

1    c. 

nbi^ 

r 

^ 

abK 

^^'^ 

2  frn. 

2Dr\' 

T 

2Dn 

npji 

U 

••^DJ^* 

UDn* 

''nDn* 

3  rm. 

3D;* 

nbji 

T 

:]bri 

np^» 

2'DP\ 

Plur. 

1    c. 

T 

2D2 

np^ 

2  rm. 

T 

^2Dr\ 

•inp;;) 

L/. 

3  /  m. 

T  V  X  : 

^    —  • 

[/. 

T  V  ••.  : 

r\:2DD 

T  ; 

TV-- 

pARTCP.  act.  ^3' 

D   pass.  y\'2'D 

T 

2vr 

T  T 

18 


Paradigms. 

Verb  Double 

Ayin,  ^^  (d). 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

POEL. 

POAL. 

"jpiiDn 

••jiiBpin 

>jjinniD 

••ji^niD 

;i^iDrT* 

n^io^n* 

r^ni^D 

r^ni'iD 

jii3Dn 

ni^p^i 

i^nniD 

j;ianiD 

••  •• 

npin* 

aniD* 

::aiD* 

T    ••    •• 

T    - 

T  ; 

T    ; 

^iiinn 

^:)i3p^n 

maiD 

^Ja2T 

DriUDH 

Drap-in 

DjnnniD 

nr)2y>v 

irii^pn 

ini^p^n 

1{P^?''C) 

]r)2y\D 

^npn 

•inpin 

•iiin^D 

•uniD 

3Dn* 

••   T 

np^TT* 

aniD 

nnlD 

••    T 

nniD 

•      ••    T 

(none) 

"^nniD 

(none) 

^non 

j)nniD 

j^y-^pn* 

T  ;  •• 

2Vii 

np"l^* 

nn^D^* 

aniDi^ 

••     T 

np^n 

nniDJi 

a:'.iDjp 

••20^* 

••^p^r)* 

unior^ 

•^aa^Di^ 

aD"'MnD^) 

2DV*(2D') 

an'D^ 

2niD^ 

2Dri 

2D')r) 

nniDn 

2:}Tn 

3d: 

••  T 

2m 

^^''cij 

naiD;) 

"     T 

^2p^r) 

Jinn'iDri 

•laniDJi 

TV*  : 

T1T2D^D 

T    ;•  - 

T  ;   •*         ; 

T  ;   -          ; 

n^D^ 

?)npV 

^nn'^D^ 

•inro^ 

TV*     ; 

TV- 

T  ;  —          ; 

2m* 

2V^D* 

nniDo 

19 

z 

Verb  Pe  Nun,  ]3  (n). 


Verbal 


1.  Perfect. 
Sing.  1    c. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

'^^IP 

"'-^^^i'7 

•  :  -\ 

2  Cm. 

riti;3J 

rw!\'n 

r^i^^^rr 

V- 

r\tii: 

r\t^r\ 

rstrxn 

3  (m. 

t:?:i:) 

mr 

t'^^n* 

t^T\* 

Plur.   1    c. 

(regular) 

nm2 
-f . . 

T       •    • 

2  rm. 

ur\t:\^ 

DJni^^iin 

Dri^i^nn 

V- 

\rsm'i 

\^V^'^ 

]^??^|i7 

3    c. 

!)i^ii: 

W}f} 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 

*    -nt^^* 

t:^:i-3n 

ur>iin* 

mn* 

Inf.  (absol.) 

T 

T    • 

mr}* 

3.  Imp.  Sin^.  m. 

^1* 

••T   • 

^^n* 

- 

PZttr.        wi. 

•  :iT' 

(none) 

/. 

T  ;  - 

T  ;  "T  • 

T  ;  ••  - 

4.Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Sing,  1    c. 
2  rm. 

-  \ 

U 

''p^n 

''^'l^n 

•   ;    \ 

3  rw. 
P/Mr.  1    c. 

^ir 

^^r) 
t^2 

••T* 

(regular) 

mi 

2  rm. 

1/ 

T  ;  -  • 

T  ;  ••  - 

:  \ 
T  :  -  \ 

3  rm. 

Wl\'^ 

^li^^l^ 

Wl^"^ 

V- 

T  ;  -  • 

T  • 

T  :  -  \ 

Partcp.  act.  ^3^ 

/JOSS.  t^:\^ 

T 

i:^>iiQ* 

20 


Paradigms.  Verb  Pe  Aleph,  K3  (a^). 


KAL. 


NIPIIAL. 


HIPIIIL. 


HOPHAL. 


b2\^ 


^^^,^- 


'?^:)^^^^ 


•  :iv 


-t:it 


Like  the  Verb  Pe  Guttural^  in  Paradigm,  p.  14. 


^j><* 

'?^^^^ 

boj^n 

b2Vi,T\ 

T 

T    •• 
"    T  •• 

.  _.,- 

t:it 

'?^?:^* 

•''^DJ^ 

^^?^ 

ETC. 

etc. 

(none) 

b2\^* 

b'y^n 

'b^^rs 

^DJ^^* 

b:^^'* 

y^^^^* 

^D^^^* 

bD^^n 

•    :i- 

-t:it 

b2^^ 

ETC. 

etc. 

etc. 

^b2'^r\ 

^'?D^^^ 

flc^  b^^<  pass.  S^^^ 

'^dk:: 

b'2ikr2 

"^Di^D 

21 

r,     O 

Verb  Pe  Yod,  >3,  orig.  13  (y). 

Verbal 

1.  Perfect. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

Sing.  1    c. 

''I^2t)^ 

2fm. 

if- 

3  Cm. 

-  T 

2m* 

if. 

(regular) 

T  : 

Plur.  1    c. 

•1^1:^1:1 

2  Cm. 

nD2t'^:i 

[f 

1^^^'^ 

3    c. 

^la^iij 

2.  Inf.  {constr.) 

Jin^^ 

%  TD^ 

nt:^^n* 

Inf.  {ahsol.) 

T 

y^ 

3.  Imp.  /Siw^'.  w. 

2^* 

^ir 

••  T  • 

/. 

>nti^ 

^^T 

P/wr.       »i. 

up 

^^"1! 

:  IT* 

/• 

T :  ••  T  • 

4.  Imperf.  (FuT.) 
Sin^.   1    c. 

2  rm. 

2^^r\ 

••  T  • 

1/ 

'2tn 

'>::^-T'r) 

u:i^^n 

3  i^m. 

2t^* 

^-i»* 

a^-v* 

\f 

2tD 

^i^n 

*•    T   • 

Plur.  1    e. 

2t: 

^T^ 

nt:^i:i 

2  rm. 

UtD 

:  |T« 

1/. 

nnra 

n^t^'^n 

n:in^^n 

3  rw. 

^2^^ 

wi''> 

T  ;    -     •• 

T  ;    -    • 

Partcp.  act.  2V 

»    pass.  ^W"^ 

T 

22 

Paradigms. 

Verb  properly  Pe  Yod,  ""H)  (y)- 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

KAL. 

HIPHIL. 

••jpniE^in 

''nn^in. 

^p^2hr\ 

r^nti^in 

;int:nn 

r^nio^n 

rsit'-^r^ 

r^n'^in 

nnro^n 

'yt\u* 

:i^in* 

-  T 

i"»^'»n* 

T       • 

T   ; 

(regular) 

X     •     •• 

5iJ3^^n 

^^2v^r\ 

^:)n:D^n 

ur\ymn 

om^in 

Dr^n;?";! 

]ri3t^in 

innii^^rr 

irin^^n 

iTi^in 

^n'^i^^n 

^i>:p>rT 

y^r[* 

im* 

ab^ 

n-^'-n* 

Tii^'^n,  2t\n* 

T 

3D^n* 

2tSr^* 

^^\ 

np>n* 

u^^^iii 

>az3^ 

>a^io^n 

^n^^in 

(none) 

!in!p> 

u^^^n 

n^^i^^ 

2;:^^^^ 

nto^s* 

2^:o^^* 

y^t^rs 

n^^in 

n^^j;i 

n^ip^ji 

••a^i^n 

"•n'^^n 

^nzD^n 

U^ZO"'n 

y^^'^* 

it^'^* 

a^o*"^* 

3>j2i>* 

a^'^in 

^mr\ 

nzD^n 

n-io^r^ 

n^'^ii 

y^^^ 

nro^:: 

Tto^^ 

^a^^f^in 

^ymr\ 

:    1' 

U^D^jR 

nn-^r) 

r^^zh^rs 

njniD-;n 

njaio^n 

ria^'^^v 

r\2VV 

^3ZD^'' 

^3v^2>, 

T  :  •• 

T  ;    - 

T  ;  - 

mntD^ri 

ytSr:^* 

32'1D* 

«.  ar?'*  p-  nvj; 

2'ip'5 

23 

r 

,    Q 

Verb  Ayin  Vav,  •^•;  (v). 

Verbal 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

1.  Perfect. 
Sing.  1    c. 

^^pii 

•'jiiQ-ip^ 

•'jpiDprr 

^r^ippn 

2  fm. 

1/ 

JiiDipy 
JiiD^pi 

r^rppjiH 

3  Cm. 

Dp* 

Dipy 

D^n* 

Dp-in* 

V- 

HDp* 

T  'T 

HDipj* 

HQ-'pn* 

T      '•    " 

n^pin 

Plur.  1    c. 

^:ipp 

^:iD!)pi 

•liiDprr 

^:ipp_')n 

2  rm. 

D^?i^ 

DjniQpj 

DriiD'-pn 

Dnpp^in 

(/. 

1^?P_ 

]jiiopj 

iniDprr 

]j;npp_')n 

3    c. 

Dp* 

^Dip: 

^D'^pn 

•i^iDp^n 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 

Dipn* 

D^n* 

Dpjin* 

Inf.  {absol.) 

Dip* 

Dipn* 

Dpn,  uvn* 

3.  Imp.  Sin^.  m. 

D^* 

Dipn* 

Dpn* 

P/wr.        m. 

^Dipn* 
^D^pn 

••Dpn* 

•      '•  T 
'•    T 

(none) 

/. 

O^pi} 
D^n 

mopn 

T  ;  '    • 

m^pn 

4.  Imperf.  (FuT.) 
Sin^/.   1    c.   * 
2  rm. 

Dipi^ 
Dipiji 

U'pi} 

U'pr) 

''   T 

Dp.\^ 
Dp_iri 

I/. 

3  rm. 

^Dpjn* 

^QipJi* 

Dipr 

D'pJ^I 

D^p>* 

'>Dp^B 

6py* 

Dpj^B 

Plur.  1    c. 
2  rm. 

1/. 

U^2 

'      T 

r^m)pr) 

T  V  '   : 

DjpJ 
JlQipJJI 

°'P^r 

^D^pr\ 
mDpn 

T  :  '"T 

Dp_^: 

3  p?i. 

r^m^pn* 

n^Dpn* 

T  :  '"T 

•'IDp-V 
•^??P3^ 

Partcp.  act.  Dp* 

't 

24 

pass.  D^p* 

uspy 

D''p!p* 

DP^D* 

•T 

Paradigms, 

Verb 

Ayin  Yod, 

'y  (v). 

PILEL. 

PULAL. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

••npQip 

^ripDip 

'^^% 

"•jni^^ 

"'O'l^^i? 

jnpbip 

jRrpQip 

T    •    - 

T 

T              ; 

r^prjtp 

JjlDOp 

r\^3. 

mj^3 

m:i3J 

DDip* 

DDip 

W 

r^* 

r^y 

T    ;     ' 

i:)DQip 

IJ-pDip 

m2* 

T  T 

T      • 

T           T 

Driippp 

Dr^DDip 

^^^^ 

Djni:^:a 

Drii:)'i3J 

irippp 

IJ^ppp 

]jnjn 

l^"!^'^ 

]jni:iaj 

^t:pip 

^DDip 

T 

^T3. 

T 

D9P 

DDp 

\'T 

pan 

13* 

pnrr 

DDip 

r?* 

p2in 

(none) 

as  Dprr 

nj^^ip 

T  :  ••  ' 

09P^^ 

Dppi^ 

r?? 

DQipn 

DDip;;^ 

•     T 

^DOipri 

••pDpn 

^T2r\ 

07  P' 

Dpip^ 

•  T 

pn: 

D.ppjl 

DD'pj^ 

'      •     T 

as      Dp^ 

D.pipj 

DDipi 

^:^^ 

IDQipn 

^apipi^ 

Iran 

•     T 

mpDp;;! 

TV    •    ; 

IDD^P^ 

^DJp'ip^ 

^:U^ 

TV': 

DDipp 
25  " 

ac/.  ]n* 

pass.  p2* 

1^^,^ 

Verb  Lamed 

Aleph,  X7  (a^). 

Verbal 

1.  Perfect. 
Sing.  1    c. 

KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

•          T   T 

'0^??? 

^0^.^? 

2  Cm. 

3  fm. 

T  T 

T  ;  • 

i^'^D 

v. 

T  :  IT 

T  ;    ;  • 

nmr2 

T  ;    • 

Plur.   1    c. 

•'):l^<^o 

^:j^^?dj 

^:^i^D 

2  r»i. 

DJlS^iJO 

Dni^:^^: 

Dr)^i^^Q 

\f- 

l-D^^P 

l-D^^fP^ 

l^^t!? 

3    c. 

:  |T 

M^^r22 

^mD 

2.  Inf.  {constr.) 

i^2D 

K«iDn 

^5?? 

Inf.  (absol.) 

T 

K^ip: 

i^kp 

3.  Imp,  /Sin^.  »i. 

■•  T    • 

K^D 

/. 

^KiSD* 

•  :  |T  • 

'^mn 

P?Mr.        m. 

•IK^D 

•iKi:D 

/. 

T      V   ; 

T        V   T    • 

T        V    - 

4.Imperf,  (Fut.) 
Sing.  1    c. 

2  fm. 

"  T      • 

V. 

^mon 

''N:iDn 

•'j^^iQn 

3  rm. 

N^O^ 

U 

K^JDri 

K^iDn 

N^*0J1 

P^wr.   1    c. 

i^^i^: 

^^:iD: 

^*^Db 

2  cm. 

•1^<^pr^ 

:  |T  • 

•ixiJDri 

If. 

T      V  ;    • 

T        V    T     • 

T      V  -   ; 

3  rm. 

•')^^i:Q'» 

^K^iD** 

^mr2' 

V- 

T      V  ;    • 

T         V   T      • 

r\:i^^Dr\* 

Partcp,  act.  K2i 

D  i?a55.  ^^^:iD 

N^OJ 

NiJQD 

26 

• 

Paradigms. 

Verb  Lamed 

Aleph,  k'?  (a^). 

PUAL. 

HIPHIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

•   ••  \ 

^jHi^^Qn 

•      ••  :  \ 

••riK^QinrT 

T          ••     •.. 

T     ••  :  • 

T      "  :  \ 

T            ..    -      .      . 

Jl^<:iD 

j^^*^^D^T 

"  '  \ 

/^^^iiDn^T 

^^'•iiQ^T 

T  ;  \ 

KifOJin 

T  :  \ 

T   •  :  • 

T  :  :  \ 

*■  ■  \ 

nn^D 

Dr)>ijfprr 

DJiKii^Qn 

Dn.^^iD/in 

V        ••  \ 

^J^^<^Q^ 

...   .. . .. 

iriN-iiD/irT 

:  \ 

••)><>i{Qn 

:  ;  \ 

•1^<irpr)^7 

T   \ 

N^i^prr 

Niirjnrr 

N^^QH 

Kjiorr 

^^'P'O'? 

>x^^on 

^h^siDJirr 

(none) 

5)^^'•^p^ 

(none) 

^^<i:l^r^^T 

T       ■•■  ;    - 

T     •••-;• 

i^^'Oh^ 

N-^iiDh^ 

>^^iD^< 

^^:i;^J^^^ 

K-'^QP) 

^SPO^ 

'mr2n 

>K''^d;^ 

•'i^^^Dj-n 

^i^:iDnr) 

^^?P! 

T  ;  \ 

mDD^ 

T    \      • 

^<^:iD^^ 

ik:ir2r) 

i^'^r^nn 

T    \   • 

^^'':iDJ 

N2:qj 

ii'^DJl^ 

:  \  : 

!)K>*:pr^ 

:  :  \ 

^mr^nn 

T     ■•■  :  ~ 

T      V  ;   \ 

T    V  -  :   • 

W>*D> 

^^i*:iO> 

^^^^iQ^ 

ix^iDn* 

T     v  :   \ 

m^<;^Dr^J;^* 

T  \  : 

S^^pD 

Sjforio 

27 


If, 
Verb  Lamed  He,  X\7  (h). 


Verbal 


KAL. 

NIPHAL. 

PIEL. 

1.  irERFECT. 

Sing.  1    c. 

2  cm. 

I/- 

3  fm. 

1/ 

Plur.   1    c. 

2  rm. 

V- 

3  c. 

•         •  T 

jrb^* 

T      •    T 

n'bi\ 

•  T 
TT 

•  T 

T 

nnb:^^* 

T  :  ;  • 

T      •    • 

n'b^ 
nb^* 

T   • 

T  ;  • 

^TbSi 

2.  Inf.  (constr.) 
Inf.  (^absol.) 

T 

T    • 

n^b^* 
rib^ 

3.  Imp.  iSiw^.  m. 
PZwr.        m. 

n^bi^* 

T  V  : 

•    T  • 
T  • 

T    •••  T    • 

nbsi* 
'bi\* 
^b^ 

nyb-\* 

T    V  — 

4.Imperf.  (Fut.) 
Sing.  1    c. 

2  rm. 

\f- 

3  rm. 

P^wr.   1    c. 

2  rm. 

L/. 

3  rm.. 

mb:iD* 

T   V  ;    • 

nb;\r) 

VT    • 

•  T     • 

V  T     • 

r^b^2 
^b'in 

T    • 

mbiin 

T    V  T    • 
T  • 

mb^Pi* 

X    V  T     • 

V  — : 

^b'^r\ 
nTb:in 

nTb:\r\* 

TV-  : 

Partcp.  flc^  H/il 
28 

T 

nj?p^* 

Hj^^a* 

Paradigms. 

Verb  Lamed  He,  Tw  0^)- 

PUAL. 

HIPIIIL. 

HOPHAL. 

HITHPAEL. 

^ryh^T} 

•    ••  ;  T 

''rh^ryn 

ihr 

rh^^* 

lyhyr}* 

rvb^DT}* 

rshj^ 

ryh^^r^ 

n'bT\ 

lyb^DTi 

rhr 

rhT\* 

rhT\* 

rh^nn* 

T  ;  \ 

T  ;  J  • 

T  : :  T 

r\r\b^m* 

^hni 

•irbjn 

^Tbyr\ 

•ir-Jii/in 

uirb^ 

un'byn 

uryhyn 

Dn^-jjnn 

y\}i\ 

]r\'h.^r\ 

]n'byr[ 

^r)\^.|ji.7 

^b^ 

\ 

^b'yn 

^b^m 

iy\W 

rxb:in* 

rii'pjin* 

r\t>^r\r\* 

rhT\ 

••  ;  T 

rt-'^/in* 

rbyn* 

n>»iinn* 

'hT\* 

'h^nn 

(none) 

^b'T\ 

(none) 

^b^m 

T    ■•■  «    - 

r^yb^nr^* 

TV-;    • 

n^:i?^ 

rh:\'A 

n'?:^^ 

^'?iln^^ 

rhiiFs 

rh^r\ 

rh:^r\ 

r\b:\nr\ 

4^n* 

^h'^^n* 

'h:^r\^ 

••^iinn* 

rhT* 

rf)T* 

rhy* 

rh^n^* 

7X^:\r\ 

rhVrs 

n'piih" 

n'^iinh 

n^jj 

nS::i 

n"?::) 

n^iinj 

\  : 

iVjh 

',     T 

^y^nji 

nr^j;^ 

HT'p^n 

nr'^jri 

nr'^unn 

•i^r 

•  T 

•i-'^jn^ 

T  V  \  ; 

nr'pjn* 

T    V   :    T 

r^Tb^n^\* 

TV-:  • 

rhyo* 

"\  : 

29 

n^^ip* 

V  ;  T 

'^!?^-0?* 

CLASSICAL  WORKS  by  the  Rev.  T.  K.  ARNOLD,  M.A. 

Arranged  under  Numbers  for  progressive  Tuition. 


5.  < 


LATIN.  Edition 

Henry's  First  Latin  Book   9 

("Second  Latin  Book,  and  Practical  Grammar 5 

,  J  First  Verse  Book   4 

(second  Part,  with  additional  Exercises  1 

rHistorias  Antiquse  Epitome  4 

I  A  Second  Verse  Book  (being  Mr.  Rapier's  Introduction,  care- 

^  fully  revised)  2 

j  Eclogae  Ovidianae  7 

[  Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition,  Pt.  1 8 

r  Cornelius  Nepos,  with  Critical  Questions  and  Imitative  Exer- 

I         cises  3 

)  ViRGILII  iENEIS,  lib.  I.— VI 1 

I  Eclogae  Horatianae.     Pars  I.  (Carmina)  2 

I  Eclogas^  Horatianae.     Pars  II.  (Sermones) 1 

Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Verse  Composition 2 

Selections  from  Cicero,  with  English  Notes.     Part  I. 
(Orations  :  the  Fourth  against  Verres ;  the  Orations  against 

Catiline,  and  for  the  PoetArchias)   1 

Part  II. 


(Epistles,  arranged  in  the  order  of  time;  with  accounts  of 

I         the  Consuls,  events  of  each  year,  &c.) 1 

EcLOGjE  Historic^;    or.  Selections  from  the  Roman  Histo- 
rians. Caesar,  Sallust,  Livy,  Curtius,  Tacitus    ,  1 

''Practical  Introduction  to  Latin  Prose  Composition,  Pt.  II 3 

f  Longer  Latin  Exercises,  Parti 2 

I Part  II 1 

(  Grotefend's  Materials  for  Translation  into  Latin 2 

Ellisian  Exercises  (adapted  to  the  Practical  Introduction, 

Part  L) 1 

GBEEK. 

The  First  Greek  Book  2 

Practical  Introduction  to  Greek  Accidence   4 

— — Greek  Prose  Composition  7 

— Pt.  II 1 


Greek  Construing 1 

Greek  Grammar  for  the  higher  forms  2 

Elementary  Greek  Gramm.ar 1 

The  same,  with  an  Account  of  the  Greek  Dialects  1 

The  Dialects  separately  1 

The  Olynthiac  Orations  of  Demosthenes,  with  copious  Notes 

and  Grammatical  References 1 

The  Oration  of  Demosthenes,  on  the  Crown,  on  the  same  plan...  1 

HoMERi  Ili.vs,  lib.  I. — IV..  with  Critical  Introduction  and  Notes  I 

The  Ajax  of  Sophocles,  with  English  Notes  1 

The  Pliiloctetes  of  Sophocles,  with  English  Notes ,.  1 

HISTORY  AND  ANTIQUITIES. 

Handbook  of  Roman  Antiquities...")   ,tj  ^ 

Handbook  of  Grecian  Antiquities     j  v^oJ^senj 
Handbook  of  Ancient  Geography  and  History     ^ 
Handbook  of  Mediaeval  Geography  and  History  [  (PiiTz) 
Handbook  of  Modern  Geography  and  History     j 

Handbook  of  Greek  Synonymes  (Pillon) 

The  Athenian  Stage;  a  Handbook  for  the  Student 


Copious  and  Critical  English-Latin  Lexicon,  founded 
on  the  German  Latin  Dictionary  of  Georges  [by  the  Rev. 

T.  K.  Arnold  and  the  Rev.  J.  E.  Riddle] 2 

Classical  Examination  Papers    1 

English  Grammar  for  Classical  Schools  4 

The  First  German  Book  2 

Key  to  the  Al>ove  ] 

German  Reading  Book 1 

Handbook  of  German  Vocabulary I 

The  First  French  Book    2 

Key  to  the  Above  [by  M.  DelilleJ 1 

Handbook  of  French  Vocabulary  1 

A  First  Classical  Atlas 1 


Price 

3s.  Orf 

4    0 

2     0 

1     0 

4    0 

3    6 

2    6 

6     6  . 

4    0 

12     0 

5     0 

5     0 

5     6 
4    0 

4  0 

8  0 

4  0 

4  0 

7  6 


5 
5 
6 
6 
6 
10 
f) 
6 
1 

3  0 

4  6 
7  6 
3  0 
3  0 

3 
3 
6 
4 
5 
6 
4 


RIVINGTONS,  ST.  PAUL'S  CHURCH  YARD,  &  WATERLOO  PLACE. 


PJ4566 .A75 

The  first  Hebrew  book. 

Princeton  Theological  Seminary-Speer  Library 


1    1012  00076  4649 


mm 

ifln  IMI 

Hi 

^^^^m 

» 

P@ 

^H 

i 

^^^^^ 

Ea 

^H 

11 

"iijil: ,.„ 


t ! 


iliiMnii|(!i!